e 1

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
Series 15 / 150 – Model B
Connection Manual (BMI Interface)
GFZ-62073E-1/04 February 1997

GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
©Copyright 1997 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
B–62073E–1/04 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s–1
CONTENTS
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1
1. OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC–NA OR NB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1 BMI Interface for the Series 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1.1 Address table for 15–T and 15–M(for PMC–NA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1.2 Address list for 15–TT(for PMC–MODEL NA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.1.3 Address table for 15–T and 15–M(for PMC–MODEL NB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.1.4 Address table for 15–TT(for PMC–MODEL NB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2.2 Signal Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
2.3 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
2.3.1 Ready signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
2.3.2 Operation mode selection signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
2.3.3 Reset and emergency stop signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
2.3.4 Alarm signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
2.3.5 Battery alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
2.3.6 Manual continuous feed and incremental feed signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
2.3.7 Manual handle feed signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
2.3.8 Three–dimensional handle feed signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
2.3.9 Manual interruption function for three–dimensional coodinate conversation . . . . . . . . 133
2.3.10 Manual arbitrary angle feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
2.3.11 Simultaneous automatic and manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
2.3.12 Function to compensate for manual intervention during automatic operation . . . . . . . 140
2.3.13 Reference position return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
2.3.14 Dog–less reference position setting function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
2.3.15 Floating reference position return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
2.3.16 Digital adjustment of origin deceleration limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
2.3.17 Start, stop, and restart of automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
2.3.18 Active block cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
2.3.19 Feedrate override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
2.3.20 F1 digit selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2.3.21 Automatic operation test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
2.3.22 Optional block skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
2.3.23 Corner control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
2.3.24 Miscellaneous functions, spindle–speed functions, tool functions, and
secondary auxiliary functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
2.3.25 High–speed M/S/T/B interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
2.3.26 Multiple M commands for one block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
2.3.27 External operation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
2.3.28 Canned cycle spindle–speed function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
2.3.29 Spindle analog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
2.3.30 Spindle positioning function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
2.3.31 Detecting fluctuation of the spindle speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
2.3.32 Function for specifying a desired spindle gear ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
2.3.33 Spindle serial output and Cs contour control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
c–1
2.3.34 Signals for spindle orientation of the serial interface spindle by a position coder . . . . 211
2.3.35 Spindle synchronization signals for the serial interface spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.3.36 Signals for switching the spindle output of serial interface spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
2.3.37 Signals for switching spindle control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
2.3.38 Program status output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
2.3.39 Axis movement status output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
2.3.40 Mirror image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
2.3.41 Overrun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
2.3.42 Tail stock barrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
2.3.43 Externally–requested deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
2.3.44 Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
2.3.45 Servo off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
2.3.46 Detachment of controlled axes (noncontrolled axes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
2.3.47 Axis interchange signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
2.3.48 Memory protection keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
2.3.49 External input/output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
2.3.50 External workpiece number search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
2.3.51 External data input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
2.3.52 Skip function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
2.3.53 Signal for outputting the states of the high–speed skip signal and
the high–speed measuring position reach signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
2.3.54 Torque limit reached signal (TRQLn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
2.3.55 Custom macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
2.3.56 Tool measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
2.3.57 Method B for directly inputting tool compensation
(for the Series 15–T and 15–TT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
2.3.58 Tool life management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
2.3.59 Tool retraction and recovery (15–M/T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
2.3.60 Tool retraction and recovery (for Series 15–TT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
2.3.61 Software operator’s panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
2.3.62 Run hour display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
2.3.63 Parts count indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
2.3.64 Key input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
2.3.65 Indexing signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
2.3.66 Turret axis control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
2.3.67 Switching between synchronous and independent control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
2.3.68 Parallel axis control signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
2.3.69 Twin table control/simplified synchronous control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
2.3.70 Simple synchronization control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
2.3.71 Tool post selection and signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
2.3.72 Signal for checking tool post interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
2.3.73 Override playback signals (Series 15–MFB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
2.3.74 Cutting depth override for the canned turning cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
2.3.75 Rigid tapping signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
2.3.76 Retrace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
2.3.77 Teach–in (recorded) mode and signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
2.3.78 Chopping function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
2.3.79 Override playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
c–2
2.3.80 Axis Control by the PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
2.3.81 Signals for specifying a speed in PMC axis control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
2.3.82 Torque control based on PMC axis control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
2.3.83 Ignore disconnect detector alarm in continuous velocity command of
axis control by PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
2.3.84 Virtual axis control signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
2.3.85 Axis selection signals in actual speed display:
*ACTF1, *ACTF2, *ACTF3, ..., *ACTF15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
2.3.86 NC window signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
2.3.87 Remote buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
2.3.88 Load display signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
2.3.89 Switching the spindle load display of the serial interface spindles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
2.3.90 Position switching function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
2.3.91 Two–axis electronic gear box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
2.3.92 Function for separating UI/UO used in user programs and P–code programs . . . . . . 340
2.3.93 High–precision contour control with 64–bit RISC processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
2.3.94 Interface with a linear scale having reference marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
c–3
B–62073E–1/04 1. OUTLINE
1. OUTLINE
This manual describes the signals of the BMI (Basic Machine Interface) that can be used with the Series
15/150–B.
For connection of other items than the BMI interface, refer to “Series 15/150–MODEL B Connection Manual
(B–62073E).”
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :
Product Name Abbreviations
FANUC Series 15–TB 15–TB

FANUC Series 15–TFB 15–TFB
FANUC Series 15TED–MODEL B–4 (*1) 15TED
1 T
15–T
FANUC Series 15TEE–MODEL B–4 (*1) 15TEE
T series
i
FANUC Series 15TEF–MODEL B–4 (*1) 15TEF
FANUC Series 150–TB 150–TB
FANUC Series 15–TTB 15–TTB
15–TT
FANUC Series 15–TTFB 15–TTFB
FANUC Series 15–MB 15–MB

FANUC Series 15–MFB 15–MFB
FANUC Series 15MEK–MODEL B–4 (*2) 15MEK 1 M
15–M M series
i
FANUC Series 15MEL–MODEL B–4 (*2) 15MEL
FANUC Series 150–MB 150–MB
(*1) The FANUC Series 15TED/TEE/TEF–MODEL B–4 is a software–fixed CNC capable of 4 contouring axes
switchable out of 8 axes for milling machines and machining centers.
Further the following functions can not be used in the 15TED, 15–TEE or 15TEF.
D Increment system D/E (Increment system C is an option function)
D Helical interpolation B
D OSI/ETHERNET function
D High–precision contour control using RISC
D Macro compiler (self compile function)
D MMC–III, MMC–IV
D Connecting for personal computer by high–speed serial–bus
(*2) The FANUC Series 15MEK/MEL–MODEL B–4 is a software–fixed CNC capable of 4 contouring axes
switchable out of 8 axes for milling machines and machining centers.
Further the following functions can not be used in the 15MEK or 15MEL.
D Increment system D/E (Increment system C is an option function)
D Helical interpolation B
D Plane switching
D Designation direction tool length compensation
D 2 axes electric gear box
D Manual interruption of 3–dimensional coordinate system conversion
D 3–dimensional cutter compensation
D Trouble diagnosis guidance
D OSI/ETHERNET function
D High–precision contour control using RISC
D Macro compiler (self compile function)
D MMC–III, MMC–IV
D Smooth interpolation
D Connecting for personal computer by high–speed serial–bus
–1–
1. OUTLINE B–62073E–1/04
Manuals related to FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B are as follows.

This manual is marked with an asterisk (*).
List of Manuals Related to Series 15/150–MODEL B

Specification
Manual Name
Number
FANUC Series 15–TB/TFB/TTB/TTFB DESCRIPTIONS B–62072E

FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B For Machining Center DESCRIPTIONS B–62082E
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL B–62073E
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (BMI Interface) B–62073E–1 *
FANUC Series 15–MODEL B For Lathe OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Programming) B–62554E
FANUC Series 15–MODEL B For Lathe OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Operation) B–62554E–1
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Programming) B–62564E
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Operation) B–62564E–1
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL B–62560E
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–62075E
FANUC Series 15–MODEL B DESCRIPTIONS (Supplement for Remote Buffer) B–62072E–1
FANUC Series 15–MODEL B PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Macro Compiler / Macro Executer) B–62073E–2
PMC
FANUC PMC–MODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language) B–61013E
FANUC PMC–MODEL NB/NB2 PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language) B–61863E
FANUC PMC–MODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language) B–61013E–2
FANUC PMC–MODEL NB PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language) B–61863E–1
FANUC PMC–MODEL N/NA
B–61013E–4
PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language – Tool Management Library)
Conversational Automatic Programming Function
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER
B–61263E
(Series 15–MF/MFB) PROGRAMMING MANUAL
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER
B–61264E
(Series 15–MF/MFB) OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE
B–61234E
(Series 15–TF/TTF/TFB/TTFB) OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION II FOR LATHE
B–61804E–2
(Series 15–TFB/TTFB) OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Tracing / Digitizing
FANUC Series 15–MB DESCRIPTIONS (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing) B–62472E
FANUC Series 15–MB CONNECTION MANUAL (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing) B–62473E
FANUC Series 15–MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing) B–62474E
Gas, Laser Plasma Cutting Machine
FANUC Series 15–MB DESCRIPTIONS (FOR GAS, LASER PLASMA CUTTING MACHINE) B–62082EN–1
Multi–Teaching Function
FANUC Series 15–MB CONNECTION MANUAL (Multi–Teaching Function) B–62083E–1
Multiple–axis and Multiple–path Control Function
FANUC Series 15–TTB OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–62074E–1
(Supplement Explanations for Multiple–axis and Multiple–path Control Function)
–2–
B–62073E–1/04 2. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC–NA OR NB
2. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC–NA OR NB
2.1 BMI Interface for the Series 15
2.1.1 Address table for 15–T and 15–M(for PMC–NA)

BMI address tables are shown below. The tables indicate the correspondence between the addresses used
in transferring signals between the CNC and PMC.
–3–
2. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC–NA OR NB B–62073E–1/04
Address list for 15–T/15–M(PMC–NA)

BMI-DI1
(G000–G015)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G000 ERS RRW SP * ESP SKIP1 UINT CSL IT
G001 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 AE3 AE2 AE1 BSL AIT
G002 ZRN BRN SRN MOVL TCHIN TEST
G003 AGJ EDT MEM T D J H S
G004 MLK DLK ABS OVC SBK BDT1 DRN AFL
G005 KEY4 KEY3 KEY1 KEY1 F1D FFIN FIN ST
G006 RT ROV2 ROV1 MP4 MP2 MP1
G007 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2
G008 TMRON CRT2 PRC HBTRN LCL CSMZ CHF
G009 TLSKP TL64 TL32 TL16 TL08 TL04 TL02 TL01
G010 TLRST OMEP OME HS3D HS3C HS3B HS3A
G011 HS2D HS2C HS2B HS2A HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A
G012 FV7 FV6 FV5 FV4 FV3 FV2 FV1 FV0
G013 AFV7 AFV6 AFV5 AFV4 AFV3 AFV2 AFV1 AFV0
G014 JV15 JV14 JV13 JV12 JV11 JV10 JV9 JV8
–4–

BMI-DI2
(G016–G031)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G016 AJSTB –AJ +AJ AJA12 AJA11 AJA10 AJA9 AJA8
G017 AJA7 AJA6 AJA5 AJA4 AJA3 AJA2 AJA1 AJA0
G018 AJP2D AJP2C AJP2B AJP2A AJP1D AJP1C AJP1B AJP1A
G019 BECLP BEUCL WN16 WN8 WN4 WN2 WN1
G020 DIST26 DIST25 DIST24
G021 DIST23 DIST22 DIST21 DIST20 DIST19 DIST18 DIST17 DIST16
G024 RISGN RI12 RI11 RI10 RI9 RI8
G025 RI7 RI6 RI5 RI4 RI3 RI2 RI1 RI0
G026 WOSET GS4 GS2 GS1 SECLP SEUCL DVAL SPSTP
G027 CDV7 CDV6 CDV5 CDV4 CDV3 CDV2 CDV1 CDV0
G028 GOQSM WOQSM OFN5 OFN4 OFN3 OFN2 OFN1 OFN0
G029 SLCTB BECST TSE RVS DSKP SPC SPB SPA
G030 TSB TECLP TEUCL TDIR2 TDIR1
G031 TCHOVR STFOVR STSOVR HMMD TRRTN TRESC
–5–

BMI-DI3
(G032–G047)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G032 EISTB ERDRQ EOREND EXSTP EXRD EXPUN
G033 EIA7 EIA6 EIA5 EIA4 EIA3 EIA2 EIA1 EIA0
G034 EID47 EID46 EID45 EID44 EID43 EID42 EID41 EID40
G040 1 RV6B RV5B RV4B RV3B RV2B RV1B RV0B
G041 ESPE TRNSV ZROFS TLAXH AXC4 AXC2 AXC1
G042 T1PT SPHIV REPOS RTRCT MSPC HOB TL256
G043 TL128 TL512
G044 CHLD CHPST CHPDWN CHPUP CHP8 CHP4 CHP2 CHP0
G045 DSLC PCSPN0
G046 MIGET FIN3X FIN2X FIN1X BFIN TFIN SFIN MFIN
G047 SPPHS SPSYC SPLDS MFIN5 MFIN4 MFIN3 MFIN2
–6–

BMI-DI4
(G048–G063)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G048 UI031 UI030 UI029 UI028 UI027 UI026 UI025 UI024
–7–

BMI-DI5–DI8
(G064–G127)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G064 DTCH1 SVF1 DEC1 IT1 –ED1 +ED1 –L1 +L1
G065 CL1 PK1 MLK1 MI 1 –J 1 +J 1
G066 PMCA1 RST1 STP1 SBK1 PCAX1 SYNC1 –MIT1 +MIT1
G067 SCNTR1 VCSKP1 NDCAL1 ACTF1 DVAL1 RAST1
G069 CL2 PK2 MLK2 MI 2 –J 2 +J 2
G073 CL3 PK3 MLK3 MI 3 –J 3 +J 3
Continues similarly
(164 – 167: 11st Axis )
(168 – 171: 12nd Axis )
(172 – 175: 13rd Axis )
(176 – 179: 14th Axis
(180 – 183: 15th Axis
(184 – 187: 16th Axis
(188 – 191: 17th Axis
(192 – 195: 18th Axis
(196 – 199: 19th Axis
(100 – 103: 10th Axis
(104 – 107: 11th Axis
(108 – 111: 12th Axis
(112 – 115: 13th Axis
(116 – 119: 14th Axis
(120 – 123: 15th Axis
–8–

BMI-DI9
(G128–G143)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G128 ( MDI KEY IMAGE SIGNAL : See the contents for details )
G140
G141
G142
G143
–9–

BMI-DI10
(G144–G159)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G144 EUI15 EUI14 EUI13 EUI12 EUI11 EUI10 EUI09 EUI08
G148 RSPR
G149 STIO STWD STRD
G150 TCH15 TCH14 TCH13 TCH12 TCH11 TCH10 TCH09 TCH08
G152 RMTI7 RMTI6 RMTI5 RMTI4 RMTI3 RMTI2 RMTI1 RMTI0
G153 EDMMD EDMILK EDMST
G154 TLV9 TLV8
G155 TLV7 TLV6 TLV5 TLV4 TLV3 TLV2 TLV1 TLV0
G156 TLHD2B TLHD2A TLHD1B TLHD1A CNGTL RNDH RGHTH ALNGH
G157 NOT3DM BCAN EXTP SPCNT IMGY FM10 SVNM JRETR
G158 TRT TCN RTR SRTR SRST
G159 SHOL STNX STHD MXHL AUTC STAC SGLC
– 10 –

BMI-DI15
(G224–G239)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G224
G225
G226 RCHA RSLA INTGA SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA ESPA ARSTA
G227 MRDYA ORCMA SFRA SRVA CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA TLMLA
G228 MPOFA MORCMA
G229 RCHHGA MFNHGA INCMDA OVRIDE NRROA ROTAA INDXA
G230 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08
G231 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00
G232 RISGNB RIB12 RIB11 RIB10 RIB9 RIB8
G233 RIB7 RIB6 RIB5 RIB4 RIB3 RIB2 RIB1 RIB0
G234 RCHB RSLB INTGB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB ESPB ARSTB
G235 MRDYB ORCMB SFRB SRVB CTH1B CTH2B TLMHB TLMLB
G236 MPOFB MORCMB
G237 RCHHGB MFNHGB INCMDB OVRIDEB NRROB ROTAB INDXB
G238 SHB11 SHB10 SHB09 SHB08
G239 SHB07 SHB06 SHB05 SHB04 SHB03 SHBS02 SHB01 SHB00
– 11 –

BMI-DI6–DI7
(G240–G271)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G241 CL17 PK17 MLK17 MI 17 –J 17 +J 17
G243 SCNTR17 VCSKP17 ACTF17 DVAL17 RAST17
G245 CL18 PK18 MLK18 MI 18 –J 18 +J 18
G249 CL19 PK19 MLK19 MI 19 –J 19 +J 19
Continues similarly
( 240 – 243: 17th Axis )
( 244 – 247: 18th Axis )
( 248 – 251: 19th Axis )
252 – 255: 20th Axis
256 – 259: 21st Axis
260 – 263: 22nd Axis
264 – 267: 23rd Axis
268 – 271: 24th Axis
– 12 –

BMI-DI24
(G368–G383)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G368 OV1X7 OV1X6 OV1X5 OV1X4 OV1X3 OV1X2 OV1X1 OV1X0 1st
axis
G369 OV2X7 OV2X6 OV2X5 OV2X4 OV2X3 OV2X2 OV2X1 OV2X0 2nd
axis
G370 OV3X7 OV3X6 OV3X5 OV3X4 OV3X3 OV3X2 OV3X1 OV3X0 3rd
axis
Continues similarly
G371: 14th axis G375 18th axis
G372: 15th axis G376 19th axis
G373 16th axis G377 10th axis
G374 17th axis
G378
G379
G380
G381
G382
G383 OVA7 OVA6 OVA5 OVA4 OVA3 OVA2 OVA1 OVA0
– 13 –

PMC axis control BMI-DI25–DI29
(G384–G463)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G384 MSKB1
G385 CD1X7 CD1X6 CD1X5 CD1X4 CD1X3 CD1X2 CD1X1 CD1X0
G386 FD1X15 FD1X14 FD1X13 FD1X12 FD1X11 FD1X10 FD1X9 FD1X8
1st axis
G388 DT1X31 DT1X30 DT1X29 DT1X28 DT1X27 DT1X26 DT1X25 DT1X24
G392 MSKB2
2nd axis
G400 MSKB3
Continues similarly
( G384 – G391: 11st axis )
( G392 – G399: 12nd axis )
G400 – G407: 13rd axis
G408 – G415: 14th axis
G416 – G423: 15th axis
G424 – G431: 16th axis
G432 – G439: 17th axis
G440 – G447: 18th axis
G448 – G455: 19th axis
G456 – G463: 10th axis
– 14 –

BMI-DO1
(F000–F015)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 MA SA OP STL SPL RST AL RWD
F001 CSS THRD RPD TAP INCH IPEN DEN
F002 MZRN MBRN MSRN MMOVL MTCHIN MTEST
F003 MAGJ MEDT MMEM MT MD MJ MH MS
F004 MMLK MDLK MABS MSBK MBDT1 MDRN MAFL
F005 MBDT9 MBDT8 MBDT7 MBDT6 MBDT5 MBDT4 MBDT3 MBDT2
F006 MSALM BGALM DIALM SYALM OTALM OHALM SVALM PSALM
F007 TLCHB TLCHA ESEND RPBSY ACC DEC BCLP BUCLP
F008 SSP SRV FMF EF BF TF SF MF
F009 DM30 DM02 DM01 DM00
F010 RO15 RO14 RO13 RO12 RO11 RO10 RO9 RO8
F012 AR15 AR14 AR13 AR12 AR11 AR10 AR9 AR8
F014 MR15 MR14 MR13 MR12 MR11 MR10 MR9 MR8
– 15 –

BMI-DO2
(F016–F031)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F016 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24
F017 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16
F018 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8
F019 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
F020 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24
F021 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16
F022 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S9 S8
F023 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0
F024 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24
F025 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16
F026 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T9 T8
F027 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 T0
F028 B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24
F029 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16
F030 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8
F031 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
– 16 –

BMI-DO3
(F032–F047)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F032 EOSTB E1REND WTPALM DVRWTP
F033 EOA7 EOA6 EOA5 EOA4 EOA3 EOA2 EOA1 EOA0
F034 EOD47 EOD46 EOD45 EOD44 EOD43 EOD42 EOD41 EOD40
F040 BTAL PBATL PBATZ RTAP SPAL8 SPAL4 SPAL2 SPAL1
F041 DCL CSPL MSPCF RTRCTF STPER EXMO6 CUT DSCN
F042 HOBSYM SPCO SPBO SPAO REEL SPAL SCLP SUCLP
F043 ASRDY PRTSF TLEGS TLUGE BGEDT MTCH TCLP TUCLP
F044 MSLCTB TDUP TRSPS TRMTN TRACT RVSL ACDEC DWL
F045 CMAX MF5 MF4 MF3 MF2
F046 MSPPHS MSPSYC SPSYAL MIFIN MF3X MF2X MF1X
F047 HDO6 HDO5 HDO4 HDO3 HDO2 HDO1 HDO0
– 17 –

BMI-DO4
(F048–F063)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F048 UO031 UO030 UO029 UO028 UO027 UO026 UO025 UO024
– 18 –

BMI-DO5–DO8
(F064–F127)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F064 MDTCH1 INP1 ZP41 ZP31 MD1 MV1 ZP21 ZP1
F065 FRP1 ZRF1 MMLK1 MMI1
F066 CNCA1 DEN1 BUF1 VCMD1 EGBM1 TRQL1
F067 MSCNTR1 SZRN1
F071 MSCNTR2 SZRN2
F075 MSCNTR3 SZRN3
Continues similarly
( 164 – 167: 11st Axis )
( 168 – 171: 12nd Axis )
( 172 – 175: 13rd Axis )
176 – 179: 14th Axis
180 – 183: 15th Axis
184 – 187: 16th Axis
188 – 191: 17th Axis
192 – 195: 18th Axis
196 – 199: 19th Axis
100 – 103: 10th Axis
104 – 107: 11th Axis
108 – 111: 12th Axis
112 – 115: 13th Axis
116 – 119: 14th Axis
120 – 123: 15th Axis
– 19 –

BMI-DO9
(F128–F143)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
operater’s
F128 ZRNO SPO panel
F129 EDTO MEMO TO MDIO JO HO SO
F130 MLKO SBKO BDT1O DRNO
F131 EXHPCC MHPCC KEYO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO
F132 RTO ROV2O ROV1O MP4O MP2O MP1O
F133 FV7O FV6O FV5O FV4O FV3O FV2O FV1O FV0O
F134 JV15O JV14O JV13O JV12O JV11O JV10O JV9O JV8O
F136 –J4O +J4O –J3O +J3O –J2O +J2O –J1O +J1O
F137 OPU7 OPU6 OPU5 OPU4 OPU3 OPU2 OPU1 OPU0
F138 –J6O +J6O –J5O +J5O
F139
F140
F141 AF1X7 AF1X6 AF1X5 AF1X4 AF1X3 AF1X2 AF1X1 AF1X0
– 20 –

BMI-DO10
(F144–F159)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F144 M215 M214 M213 M212 M211 M210 M209 M208
F145 M207 M206 M205 M204 M203 M202 M201 M200
F146 M315 M314 M313 M312 M311 M310 M309 M308
F147 M307 M306 M305 M304 M303 M302 M301 M300
F148 M415 M414 M413 M412 M411 M410 M409 M408
F149 M407 M406 M405 M404 M403 M402 M401 M400
F150 M515 M514 M513 M512 M511 M510 M509 M508
F151 M507 M506 M505 M504 M503 M502 M501 M500
F152 RMTO7 RMTO6 RMTO5 RMTO4 RMTO3 RMTO2 RMTO1 RMTO0
F153 UNDRTR REQRTR RESYN CHKERR SYNERR SYNER EDMFIN
F154 HEMG
F155 SPN1 SPN0 RSPC RSPM RSPP
F156
F157 CRWP CRWM 3DMI MBCAN CHPSYL CHPMD ESVNM MJRET
F158 SPO7O SPO6O SPO5O SPO4O SPO3O SPO2O SPO1O SPO0O
F159 DSP ROTP HLSP HMMDM SPLM HSPD
– 21 –

BMI-DO11
(F160–F175)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F160
F161
F162
F163
F164 PSW10 PSW09
F165 PSW08 PSW07 PSW06 PSW05 PSW04 PSW03 PSW02 PSW01
F166 EUO15 EUO14 EUO13 EUO12 EUO11 EUO10 EUO09 EUO08
F168 TRALM MWRN WKP SHTONL SHTOFL TRCL TROVR TRERS
F169 BEAM LSTR RFHV CLON WAIT PURGE LRDY LARM
F170 LNSR CW PULSE AG3 AG2 AG1
F171
F172 TBO07 TBO06 TBO05 TBO04 TBO03 TBO02 TBO01 TBO00
– 22 –
Address list for 15–T/15–M

BMI-DO15
(F224–F239)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F224
F225
F226
F227
F228 MORAR2A MORAR1A PORAR2A RCFNA RCHPA CFINA CHPA
F229 ORARA TLMA LDT2A LDT1A SARA SDTA SSTA ALMA
F230
F231 INCSTA PC1DETA
F232 SLDMA15 SLDMA14 SLDMA13 SLDMA12 SLDMA11 SLDMA10 SLDMA9 SLDMA8
F234 SSPDA15 SSPDA14 SSPDA13 SSPDA12 SSPDA11 SSPDA10 SSPDA9 SSPDA8
F236 SSPAA7 SSPAA6 SSPAA5 SSPAA4 SSPAA3 SSPAA2 SSPAA1 SSPAA0
F237
F238
F239
– 23 –

BMI-DO16
(F240–F255)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F240
F241
F242
F243
F244 MORAR2B MORAR1B PORAR2B RCFNB RCHPB CFINB CHPB
F245 ORARB TLMB LDT2B LDT1B SARB SDTB SSTB ALMB
F246
F247 INCSTB PC1DETB
F248 SLDMB15 SLDMB14 SLDMB13 SLDMB12 SLDMB11 SLDMB10 SLDMB9 SLDMB8
F250 SSPDB15 SSPDB14 SSPDB13 SSPDB12 SSPDB11 SSPDB10 SSPDB9 SSPDB8
F252 SSPAB7 SSPAB6 SSPAB5 SSPAB4 SSPAB3 SSPAB2 SSPAB1 SSPAB0
F253
F254
F255
– 24 –

BMI-DO19–DO20
(F288–F319)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F289 FRP17 MMLK17 MMI17
F290 CNCA17 DEN17 BUF17 VCMD17 EGBM17
F291 MSCNTR17 SZRN17
Continues similarly
( 288 – 291: 17th Axis )
( 292 – 295: 18th Axis )
( 296 – 299: 19th Axis )
300 – 303: 20th Axis
304 – 307: 21st Axis
308 – 311: 22nd Axis
312 – 315: 23rd Axis
316 – 319: 24th Axis
– 25 –
2.1.2 Address list for 15–TT(for PMC–MODEL NA)
Address list for 15–TT(PMC–NA)

BMI-DI1
(G000–G015)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G000 SKIP1 UINT CSL

#1 #1 #1
G001 AE3 AE2 AE1 BSL AIT

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1
G002 BRN
#1
G003
G004 OVC BDT1

#1 #1
G005 FFIN FIN

#1 #1
G006 BFIN TFIN SFIN MFIN

#1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
G008 TMRON MIGET CSMZ CHF

#1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
G010 TLRST
#1
G011

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
G014
G015
NOTE There are some signals which are provided for the first and second tool posts respectively
and they provide just the same function.
There signals are identified by symbol #1 or #2 which is affixed to their names. Symbol #1
shows a signal exclusively provided for the first tool post, while symbol #2 shows a signal
exclusively provided for the second tool post.
– 26 –

BMI-DI2
(G016–G031)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G016
G017
G018
G019 WN16 WN8 WN4 WN2 WN1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1
G020
G021
G022
G023

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
G026 WOSET GS4 GS2 GS1 SECLP SEUCL RSPR#1 SPSTP

#1 #1 #1 #1
G027

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
G029
G030 TSB
G031
– 27 –

BMI-DI3
(G032–G047)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
– 28 –

BMI-DI4
(G048–G063)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G048 SKIP1 UINT CSL

#2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2
BRN
G050
#2
G051
G052 OVC BDT1

#2 #2
G053 FFIN FIN

#2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
G056 MIGET CSMZ CHF

#2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
G058 TLRST
#2
G059

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
G062
G063
– 29 –

BMI-DI5
(G064–G079)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G064
G065
G066

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2
G068
G069
G070
G071

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
G074 WOSET GS4 GS2 GS1 RSPR SPSTP

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
G075

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
G077
G078 TSB
#2
G079
– 30 –

BMI-DI6
(G080–G095)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
– 31 –

BMI-DI7
(G096–G111)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G096 ERS RRW SP ESP IT
G097 AGJ EDT MEM D J H S
G098 ZRN MOVL
G099 MLK DLK ABS SBK DRN AFL
G100 KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 ST
G101 RT ROV2 ROV1 MP4 MP2 MP1 PRC
G102 HS3D HS3C HS3B HS3A
G110 DVAL FIN3X FIN2X FIN1X IFN IHEAD2 IHEAD1
G111 SPPHS SPSYC WHEAD
– 32 –

BMI-DI8
(G112–G127)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G112 EISTB ERDRQ EOREND EIHEAD EXSTP EXRD EXPUN
G125
G126 CNGTL RNDH RGHTH ALNGH
G127 TRHD2 TRHD1 TRRTN TRESC
– 33 –

BMI-DI9–DI22
(G128–G191)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G129 MLK1 MI1 –J1 +J1
G130 PMCA1 RST1 STP1 SBK1 PCAX1 –MIT1 +MIT1
G131 SCNTR1 VCSKP1 ACTF1 RAST1
G133 MLK2 MI2 –J2 +J2
G137 MLK3 MI3 –J3 +J3
Continues similarly
( G128 – G131: 11st axis )
( G132 – G135: 12nd axis )
( G136 – G139: 13rd axis )
G140 – G143: 14th axis
G144 – G147: 15th axis
G148 – G151: 16th axis
G152 – G155: 17th axis
G156 – G159: 18th axis
G160 – G163: 19th axis
G164 – G167: 10th axis
– 34 –

BMI-DI15
(G224–G239)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G224
G225
G226 RCHA RSLA INTGA SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA *ESPA ARSTA
G228 MPOFA MORCMA
G229 RCHHGA MFNHGA INCMDA OVRIDEA NRROA ROTAA INDXA
G232
G233
G234 RCHB RSLB INTGB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB
G236 MPOFB MORCMB
G239 SHB07 SHB06 SHB05 SHB04 SHB03 SHB02 SHB01 SHB00
– 35 –

BMI-DI24
(G368–G383)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G368 OV1X7 OV1X6 OV1X5 OV1X4 OV1X3 OV1X2 OV1X1 OV1X0
Continues similarly
G371: 14th axis
G372: 15th axis
G373: 16th axis
G374: 17th axis
G375: 18th axis
G376: 19th axis
G377: 10th axis
G378
G379
G380
G381
G382
– 36 –

(G384–G463)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G384 MSBK1
1st axis
G392 MSBK2
2nd axis
G400 MSBK3
Continues similarly
( G384 – G391: 11st axis )
( G392 – G399: 12nd axis )
G400 – G407: 13rd axis
G408 – G415: 14th axis
G416 – G423: 15th axis
G424 – G431: 16th axis
G432 – G439: 17th axis
G440 – G447: 18th axis
G448 – G455: 19th axis
G456 – G463: 10th axis
– 37 –

BMI-DO1
(F000–F015)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 CSS THRD RPD TAP IPEN DEN

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F001 MBRN MBDT1

#1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F003 TLCHB TLCHA ESEND

#1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F005 DM30 DM02 DM01 DM00

#1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F012 PRTSF MIFIN RTAP SPAL8 SPAL4 SPAL2 SPAL1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F013 SPAL SPN1 SPN0

#1 #1 #1
F014 RSPC RSPM RSPP CSN1 CSN0

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F015
– 38 –

BMI-DO2
(F016–F031)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F016 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F017 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F018 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F019 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F020 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F021 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F022 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S9 S8

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F023 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0
#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F024 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F025 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F026 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T9 T8

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F027 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 T0
#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F028 B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F029 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F030 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F031 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
– 39 –

BMI-DO3
(F032–F047)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
– 40 –

BMI-DO4
(F048–F063)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F049 MBRN MBDT1

#2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F053 DM30 DM02 DM01 DM00

#2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F061 SPAL SPN1 SPN0

#2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F063
– 41 –

BMI-DO5
(F064–F079)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F064 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F065 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F066 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F067 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F068 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F069 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F070 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S9 S8

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F071 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0
#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F072 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F073 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F074 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T9 T8

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F075 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 T0
#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F076 B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F077 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F078 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F079 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
– 42 –

BMI-DO6
(F080–F095)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
– 43 –

BMI-DO7
(F096–F111)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F097 INCH DST
F098 MZRN MMOVL
F099 MAGJ MEDT MMEM MD MJ MH MS
F100 MMLK MDLK MABS MSBK MDRN MAFL
F101 TIALM SYALM OTALM OHALM SVALM PSALM
F102 RPBSY
F106 MF3X MF2X MF1X
F107 HDO6 HDO5 HDO4 HDO2 HDO1 HDO0
F108
F109
F110 TRSPS TRMTN TRACT
F111 MSPPHS MSPSYC SPSYAL
– 44 –

BMI-DO8
(F112–F127)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F112 EOSTB EIREND EOHEAD WTPALM DURWTP
F120 BATL BGEDT REEL PBATZ PBATL TICHK
F121 RMT07 RMT06 RMT05 RMT04 RMT03 RMT02 RMT01 RMT00
F122
F123
F124 SCLP SUCLP
F125
F126 HEMG
F127
– 45 –

BMI-DO9–DO12
(F128–F191)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F130 CNCA1 DEN1 BUF1 TRQL1
F131 MSCNTR1
F135 MSCNTR2
F139 MSCNTR3
Continues similarly
( F128 – F131: 11st Axis )
( F131 – F135: 12nd Axis )
( F136 – F139: 13rd Axis )
F140 – F143: 14th Axis
F144 – F147: 15th Axis
F148 – F151: 16th Axis
F152 – F155: 17th Axis
F156 – F159: 18th Axis
F160 – F163: 19th Axis
F164 – F167: 10th Axis
– 46 –

BMI-D13
(F192–F207)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F192 PSW10 PSW09

#3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3

#3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3
F196
F197
F198
F199
F200
F201
F202
F203
F204
F205
F206
F207
– 47 –

BMI-DO15
(F224–F239)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F224
F225
F226
F227
F230
F231 INCSTA PC1DETA
F237
F238
F239
– 48 –

BMI-DO16
(F240–F255)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F240
F241
F242
F243
F246
F247 INCSTB PC1DETB
F253
F254
F255
– 49 –
2.1.3 Address table for 15–T and 15–M(for PMC–MODEL NB)
Address list for 15–T/15–M(PMC–NB)

BMI-DI1
(G000–G015)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G000 ERS RRW SP ESP SKIP1 UINT CSL IT
G001 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 AE3 AE2 AE1 BSL AIT
G002 ZRN BRN SRN MOVL TCHIN TEST
G003 AGJ EDT MEM T D J H S
G004 MLK DLK ABS OVC SBK BDT1 DRN AFL
G005 KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 F1D FFIN FIN ST
G006 RT ROV2 ROV1 MP4 MP2 MP1
G008 TMRON CRT2 PRC HBTRN LCL CSMZ CHF
G010 TLRST OMEP OME ASPL HS3D HS3C HS3B HS3A
– 50 –
Address list for 15–T/15–M(PMC–RB)

BMI-DI2
(G016–G031)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G019 BECLP BEUCL WN16 WN8 WN4 WN2 WN1
G026 WOSET GS4 GS2 GS1 SECLP SEUCL DVAL SPSTP
G027 CDV7 CDV6 CDV5 CDV4 CDV3 CDV2 CDV1 CDV0
G029 SLCTB BECST TSE RVS DSKP SPC SPB SPA
G030 TSB TECLP TEUCL TDIR2 TDIR1
G031 TCHOVR STFOVR STSOVR HMMD TRRTN TRESC
– 51 –

BMI-DI3
(G032–G047)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G032 EISTB ERDRQ EOREND EXSTP EXRD EXPUN
G041 ESPE TRNSV ZROFS TLAXH AXC4 AXC2 AXC1
G042 T1PT SPHIV REPOS RTRCT MSPC MOB TL256
G043 TL128 TL512
G044 CHLD CHPST CHPDWN CHPUP CHP3 CHP2 CHP1 CHP0
G045 DSLC PLSPN0 HS3E HS2E HS1E
G046 MIGET FIN3X FIN2X FIN1X BFIN TFIN SFIN MFIN
G047 SPPHS SPSYC SPLDS MFIN5 MFIN4 MFIN3 MFIN2
– 52 –

BMI-DI4
(G048–G063)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
– 53 –

BMI-DI5–DI8
(G064–G127)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G065 CL1 PK1 MLK1 MI1 –J1 +J1
Continues similarly
( G64 – G67: 11st Axis )
( G68 – G71: 12nd Axis )
( G72 – G75: 13rd Axis )
G76 – G79: 14th Axis
G100 – G103: 10th Axis
G104 – G107: 11th Axis
G108 – G111: 12th Axis
G112 – G115: 13th Axis
G116 – G119: 14th Axis
G120 – G123: 15th Axis
– 54 –

BMI-DI9
(G128–G143)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G140
G141
G142
G143
– 55 –

BMI-DI10
(G144–G159)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G148 RSPR
G149 STIO STWD STRD
G153 EDMMD EDMILK EDMST
G154 TLV7 TLV6 TLV5 TLV4 TLV3 TLV2 TLV1 TLV0
G155 TLV9 TLV8
G156 TLHD2B TLHD2A TLHD1B TLHD1A CNGTL RNDH RGHTH ALNGH
G157 NOT3DM BCAN EXTP SPCNT IMGY FM10 SVNM JRETR
G158 TRT TCN RTR SRTR SRST
G159 SHOL STNX STHD MXHL AUTC STAC SGLC
– 56 –

BMI-DI11
(G160–G175)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G160 DU16 DU8 DU4 DU2 DU1
G161 NRSR ZAPR ZTRM
G162 AGRDY CLRDY HNDCD ALAX PTE PTS TCST TRCKM
G163 HVON RUN AGST BEMON SHTON BEMLC SHTLC
G164 POV7 POV6 POV5 POV4 POV3 POV2 POV1 POV0
G165
G166
G167
G168 TBI07 TBI06 TBI05 TBI04 TBI03 TBI02 TBI01 TBI00
G172
G173
G174
G175
– 57 –

BMI-DI15
(G224–G239)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G224
G225
G226 RCHA RSLA SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA ESPA ARSTA
G228 MPOFA MORCMA
G232 RIB7 RIB6 RIB5 RIB4 RIB3 RIB2 RIB1 RIB0
G233 RISGNB RIB12 RIB11 RIB10 RIB9 RIB8
G234 RCHB RSLB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB ESPB ARSTB
G236 MPOFB MORCMB
– 58 –

BMI-DI24
(G368–G383)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G378
G379
G380
G381
G382
– 59 –

PMC axis control BMI-DI25
(G384–G399)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G384 MSKB1
1st axis
G392 MSKB2
2nd axis
– 60 –

(G400–G463)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G400 MSKB3
3rd axis
G408 MSKB4
Continues similarly
( G384 – G391: 11st Axis )
( G392 – G399: 12nd Axis )
( G400 – G407: 13rd Axis )
G408 – G415: 14th Axis
G416 – G423: 15th Axis
G424 – G431: 16th Axis
G432 – G439: 17th Axis
G440 – G447: 18th Axis
G448 – G455: 19th Axis
G456 – G463: 10th Axis
– 61 –

BMI-DO1
(F000–F015)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F001 CSS THRD RPD TAP INCH DST IPEN DEN
F002 MZRN MBRN MSRN MMOVL MTCHIN MTEST
F003 MAGJ MEDT MMEM MT MD MJ MH MS
F004 MMLK MDLK MABS MSBK MBDT1 MDRN MAFL
F006 MSALM BGALM DIALM SYALM OTALM OHALM SVALM PSALM
F007 TLCHB TLCHA ESEND RPBSY ACC DEC BCLP BUCL
F009 DM30 DM02 DM01 DM00
– 62 –

BMI-DO2
(F016–F031)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F016 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
F017 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8
F018 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16
F019 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24
F020 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0
F021 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S9 S8
F022 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16
F023 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24
F024 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 T0
F025 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T9 T8
F026 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16
F027 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24
F028 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
F029 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8
F030 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16
F031 B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24
– 63 –

BMI-DO3
(F032–F047)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F032 EOSTB EIREND WTPALM DURWTP
F040 BATL PBATL PBATZ RTAP SPAL8 SPAL4 SPAL2 SPAL1
F041 DCL CSPL MSPCF RTRCTF STPER EXM06 CUT DSCN
F042 HOBSYN SPC0 SPB0 SPA0 REEL SPAL SCLP SUCL
F043 ASRDY PRTSF TLEGS TLUGE BGEDT MTCH TCLP TUCL
F044 MSLCTB TDUP TRSPS TRMTN TRACT RVSL ACDEC DWL
F045 CMAX MF5 MF4 MF3 MF2
F046 MSPPHS MSPSYC SPSYAL MIFIN MF3X MF2X MF1X
F047 HD06 HD05 HD04 HD03 HD02 HD01 HD00
– 64 –

BMI-DO4
(F048–F063)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
– 65 –

BMI-DO8
(F064–F127)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F065 FRP1 MMLK1 MMIR1
F067 MSCNTR1 SZRN1
F071 MSCNTR2 SZRN2
F075 MSCNTR3 SZRN3
Continues similarly
( F64 – F67: 11st Axis )
( F68 – F71: 12nd Axis )
( F72 – F75: 13rd Axis )
F76 – F79: 14th Axis
F100 – F103: 10th Axis
F104 – F107: 11th Axis
F108 – F111: 12th Axis
F112 – F115: 13th Axis
F116 – F119: 14th Axis
F120 – F123: 15th Axis
– 66 –

BMI-DO9
(F128–F143)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F128 ZRNO SPO
F129 EDTO MEMO TO MDIO JO HO SO
F130 MLKO SBKO BDT1O DRNO
F131 EXHPCC MHPCC KEYO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO
F132 RTO ROV2O ROV1O MP4O MP2O MP1O
F133 FV7O FV6O FV5O FV4O FV3O FV2O FV1O FV0O
F136 –J4O +J4O –J3O +J3O –J2O +J2O –J1O +J1O
F137 OPU7 OPU6 OPU5 OPU4 OPU3 OPU2 OPU1 OPU0
F138 –J6O +J6O –J5O +J5O
F139
F140
– 67 –

BMI-DO10
(F144–F159)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F144 M207 M206 M205 M204 M203 M202 M201 M200
F145 M215 M214 M213 M212 M211 M210 M209 M208
F146 M307 M306 M305 M304 M303 M302 M301 M300
F147 M315 M314 M313 M312 M311 M310 M309 M308
F148 M407 M406 M405 M404 M403 M402 M401 M400
F149 M415 M414 M413 M412 M411 M410 M409 M408
F150 M507 M506 M505 M504 M503 M502 M501 M500
F151 M515 M514 M513 M512 M511 M510 M509 M508
F152 RMTO7 RMTO6 RMTO5 RMTO4 RMTO3 RMTO2 RMTO1 RMTO0
F153 UNDRTR REQRTR RESYN CHKERR SYNERR SYNER EDMFIN
F154 HEMG
F155 SPN1 SPN0 RSPC RSPM RSPP
F156
F157 CRWP CRWM 3DMI MBCAN CHPSYL CHPMD ESVNM MJRET
F158 SPO7O SPO6O SPO5O SPO4O SPO3O SPO2O SPO1O SPO0O
F159 DSP ROTP HLSP HMMDM SPLM HSPD
– 68 –

BMI-DO11
(F160–F175)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F160
F161
F162
F163
F165 PSW10 PSW09
F168 TRALM MWRN WKP SHTONL SHTOFL TRCL TROVR TRERS
F169 BEAM LSTR RFHV CLON WAIT PURGE LRDY LARM
F170 LNSR CW PULSE AG3 AG2 AG1
F171
– 69 –

BMI-DO15
(F224–F239)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F224
F225
F226
F227
F230
F231 INCSTA PC1DETA
F237
F238
F239
– 70 –

BMI-DO16
(F240–F255)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F240
F241
F242
F243
F246
F247 INCSTB PC1DETB
F253
F254
F255
– 71 –
2.1.4 Address table for 15–TT(for PMC–MODEL NB)
Address list for 15–TT(PMC–NB)

BMI-DI1
(G000–G015)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G000 SKIP1 UINT CSL

#1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1
G002 BRN
#1
G003
G004 OVC BDT1

#1 #1
G005 FFIN FIN

#1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
G008 TMRON HBT MIGET CSMZ CHF

#1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
G010 TLRST
#1
G011

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
G014
G015
– 72 –

BMI-DI2
(G016–G031)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G016
G017
G018

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1
G020
G021
G022
G023

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
G026 WOSET GS4 GS2 GS1 SECLP SEUCL RSPR SPSTP

#1 #1 #1
G027

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
G029
G030 TSB
#1
G031
– 73 –

BMI-DI3
(G032–G047)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
– 74 –

BMI-DI4
(G048–G063)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G048 SKIP1 UINT CSL

#2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2
BRN
G050
#2
G051
G052 OVC BDT1

#2 #2
G053 FFIN FIN

#2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
G056 HBT MIGET CSMZ CHF

#2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
G058 TLRST
#2
G059

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
G062
G063
– 75 –

BMI-DI5
(G064–G079)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G064
G065
G066

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2
G068
G069
G070
G071

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
G074 WOSET GS4 GS2 GS1 RSPR SPSTP

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
G075

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
G077
G078 TSB
#2
G079
– 76 –

BMI-DI6
(G080–G095)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
– 77 –

BMI-DI7
(G096–G111)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G096 ERS RRW SP ESP IT
G097 AGJ EDT MEM D J H S
G098 ZRN MOVL
G099 MLK DLK ABS SBK DRN AFL
G100 KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 ST
G101 RT ROV2 ROV1 MP4 MP2 MP1 PRC
G102 HS3D HS3C HS3B HS3A
G110 DVAL FIN3X FIN2X FIN1X IFN IHEAD2 IHEAD1
G111 SPPHS SPSYC WHEAD
– 78 –

BMI-DI8
(G112–G127)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G112 EISTB ERDRQ EOREND EIHEAD EXSTP EXRD EXPUN
G125
G126 CNGTL RNDH RGHTH ALNGH
G127 TRHD2 TRHD1 TRRTN TRESC
– 79 –

BMI-DI9–DI12
(G128–G191)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G129 MLK1 MI1 –J1 +J1
G133 MLK2 MI2 –J2 +J2
G137 MLK3 MI3 –J3 +J3
Continues similarly
( G128 – G131: 11st axis )
( G132 – G135: 12nd axis )
( G136 – G139: 13rd axis )
G140 – G143: 14th axis
G144 – G147: 15th axis
G148 – G151: 16th axis
G152 – G155: 17th axis
G156 – G159: 18th axis
G160 – G163: 19th axis
G164 – G167: 10th axis
– 80 –

BMI-DI13
(G191–G207)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G192 WMCN7 WMCN6 WMCN5 WMCN4 WMCN3 WMCN2 WMCN1 WMCN0
G194 WMCN23 WMCN22 WMCN21 WMCN20 WMCN19 WMCN18 WMC17 WMC16
G196 WREL7 WREL6 WREL5 WREL4 WREL3 WREL2 WREL1 WREL0
G200 WTOG7 WTOG6 WTOG5 WTOG4 WTOG3 WTOG2 WTOG1 WTOG0
G204
G205
G206
G207
– 81 –

BMI-DI14
(G208–G223)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G208 ARI7 ARI6 ARI5 ARI4 ARI3 ARI2 ARI1 ARI0
#3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3
G209 ARI15 ARI14 ARI13 ARI12 ARI11 ARI10 ARI9 ARI8

#3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3
G210
G211
G212
G213
G214
G215
G216
G217
G218
G219
G220
G221
G222
G223
– 82 –

BMI-DI15
(G224–G239)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G224
G225
G226 RCHA RSLA INTGA SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA ESPA ARSTA
G228 MPOFA MORCMA
G232
G233
G234 RCHB RSLB INTGB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB ESPB ARSTB
G236 MPOFB MORCMB
– 83 –

BMI-DI24
(G368–G383)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G378
G379
G380
G381
G382
– 84 –

PMC axis control BMI-DI25
(G384–G399)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G384 MSKB1
1st axis
G392 MSKB2
2nd axis
– 85 –

(G400–G463)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G400 MSKB3
3rd axis
G408 MSKB4
Continues similarly
( G384 – G391: 11st Axis )
( G392 – G399: 12nd Axis )
( G400 – G407: 13rd Axis )
G408 – G415: 14th Axis
G416 – G423: 15th Axis
G424 – G431: 16th Axis
G432 – G439: 17th Axis
G440 – G447: 18th Axis
G448 – G455: 19th Axis
G456 – G463: 10th Axis
– 86 –

BMI-DO1
(F000–F015)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F001 MBRN MBDT1

#1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1
F004 SSP SRVK FMF EF BF TF SF MF

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F005 DM30 DM02 DM01 DM00

#1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F013 SPAL SPN1 SPN0

#1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F015
– 87 –

BMI-DO2
(F016–F031)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F016 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F017 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F018 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F019 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F020 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0
#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F021 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S9 S8

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F022 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F023 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F024 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 T0
#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F025 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T9 T8

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F026 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F027 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F028 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F029 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F030 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
F031 B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
– 88 –

BMI-DO3
(F032–F047)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1

#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
– 89 –

BMI-DO4
(F048–F063)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F049 MBRN MBDT1

#2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2
F052 SSP SRVK FMF EF BF TF SF MF

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F053 DM30 DM02 DM01 DM00

#2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F061 SPAL SPN1 SPN0

#2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F063
– 90 –

BMI-DO5
(F064–F079)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #2 #0
F064 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F065 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F066 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F067 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F068 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0
#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F069 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S9 S8

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F070 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F071 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F072 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 T0
#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F073 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T9 T8

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F074 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F075 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F076 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F077 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F078 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
F079 B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
– 91 –

BMI-DO6
(F080–F095)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #2 #0
#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2

#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
– 92 –

BMI-DO7
(F096–F111)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F097 INCH DST
F098 MZRN MMOVL
F099 MAGJ MEDT MMEM MD MJ MH MS
F100 MMLK MDLK MABS MSBK MDRN MAFL
F101 TIALM SYALM OTALM OHALM SVALM PSALM
F102 RPBSY
F106 MF3X MF2X MF1X
F107 HDO6 HDO5 HDO4 HDO2 HDO1 HDO0
F108
F109
F110 TRSPS TRMTN TRACT
F111 MSPPHS MSPSYC SPSYAL
– 93 –

BMI-DO8
(F112–F127)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F112 EOSTB EIREND EOHEAD WTPALM DURWTP
F120 BATL BGEDT REEL PBATZ PBATL TICHK
F121 RMT07 RMT06 RMT05 RMT04 RMT03 RMT02 RMT01 RMT00
F122
F123
F124 SCLP SUCLP
F125
F126 HEMG
F127
– 94 –

BMI-DO9–DO12
(F128–F191)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F131 MSCNTR1
F135 MSCNTR2
F139 MSCNTR3
Continues similarly
( F128 – F131: 11st Axis )
( F131 – F135: 12nd Axis )
( F136 – F139: 13rd Axis )
F140 – F143: 14th Axis
F144 – F147: 15th Axis
F148 – F151: 16th Axis
F152 – F155: 17th Axis
F156 – F159: 18th Axis
F160 – F163: 19th Axis
F164 – F167: 10th Axis
– 95 –

BMI-DO13
(F192–F207)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F193 PSW10 PSW09

#3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3

#3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3
F196
F197
F198
F199
F200
F201
F202
F203
F204
F205
F206
F207
– 96 –

BMI-DO15
(F224–F239)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F224
F225
F226
F227
F230
F231 INCSTA PC1DETA
F237
F238
F239
– 97 –

BMI-DO16
(F240–F255)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F240
F241
F242
F243
F246
F247 INCSTB PC1DETB
F253
F254
F255
– 98 –
NOTE Tool posts and BMI

The Series 15–TT controls a lathe which can turn two workpieces simultaneously two tool
posts by operating independently.
The Series 15–TT can be used for either of the following:
– A lathe that has two spindles and allows simultaneous turning of two workpieces with two
tool posts (Two spindles, two tool posts)
– A lathe that has one spindle and allows simultaneous turning of one workpiece with two
tool posts (One spindle, two tool posts)
The DI/DO signals of the BMI can be classified by relationships with the tool post, as described
below:
(a) DI/DO signals shared by two tool posts
A single set of signals is shared by the first and second tool posts to implement particular
functions. The signals to be shared include: the signal that selects the basic operation
mode of the control unit, reset signal, and emergency stop signal. For example, when the
memory operation mode is selected, both tool posts enter the memory operation mode.
Or, when the rest or emergency stop signal is issued, a reset or emergency stop occurs
in both tool posts.
(b) Individual tool post DI/DO signals
Two individual signals having the same function are provided for the first and second tool
posts. The names of these signals end with #1 or #2. #1 indicates that the signal is
provided for the first tool post. #2 indicates that the signal is provided for the second tool
post.
These signals can be divided into the following two groups:
– Spindle control DI/DO signals
These signals include the following:
i. Spindle speed signals: RO0 to RO15
ii. Maximum spindle speed signals: MR0 to MR15
iii. Actual spindle speed signals: AR0 to AR15
iv. Spindle motor command voltage signals: RISGN, RI0 to RI12
When the lathe has two spindles and two tool posts, the DI/DO the individual tool post
signals are used to control the spindle of the corresponding tool post.
When the lathe has one spindle and two tool posts, the DI/DO signals provided for the
first tool post are used to control the spindle shared by the tool posts.
– DI/DO signals other than those for spindle control
The signals in this group include: the feedrate override signal, miscellaneous function
code signals, and the strobe signal. The cutting feedrates of the tool posts can be
overridden independently. Different miscellaneous function code signals or strobe
signals can be sent to the two tool posts.
The DI/DO signals provided for individual control axes control only one of the tool
posts. In that sense, signals of this type can be said to be provided for individual tool
posts. However, the names of these signals do not end with #1 or #2. This is because
the control axes are not classified by tool posts, but are identified by unique control
axis numbers in the entire system.
In the basic configuration of the Series 15–TT, each tool post has two axes, that is,
there are a total of four control axes. An axis can be added to each tool post to
increase the total to six axes.
– 99 –
Fig. 2.1.2(a)
1st tool post
BMI
Position X1
Spindle DI/DO exclusively provided
coder
motor for 1st tool post
Z1
Spindle control
1st spindle
Control other
than spindle control
– 100 –
Machine ConĆ DI/DO common to
operator's tact both tool posts
panel I/O
Position
Spindle coder
motor Control other
than spindle control
2nd spindle
Spindle control
Z2
Spindle DI/DO exclusively provided
Position motor
coder for 2nd tool post
X2
PMC CNC
2nd tool post
Concept diagram of tool posts and BMI in case of two–spindle/two–tool post turning
B–62073E–1/04
B–62073E–1/04
Fig. 2.1.2(b)
1st tool post
X1 BMI
DI/DO exclusively provided
for 1st tool post
Z1
Spindle control
Position Control other than

Spindle spindle control
coder motor
– 101 –
Machine ConĆ DI/DO common to
operator's tact both tool posts
Spindle I/O
panel
Control other than

spindle control
Spindle control
Z2
DI/DO exclusively provided
for 2nd tool post
X2
PMC CNC
2nd tool post
Concept diagram of tool posts and BMI in case of one–spindle/two–tool post turning
2.2 Signal Tables

The following tables list the signals used by the system.
NOTE The addresses listed in the tables are those for the PMC–MODEL NA. Some differ from those
used for the PMC–MODEL NB. For details, see the address lists for the PMC–MODEL NB in
2.1.3 and 2.1.4.
Related input signal Related output signal

Reference
No.
N Function
F i Signal
g Address Address for TT Signal
g Address Address for TT item
name for M/T HEAD #1 HEAD #2 name for M/T HEAD #1 HEAD #2
1 Ready MA F000.7 F096.7 2.3.1

SA F000.6 F096.6
2 Mode selection TEST G002.2 G097.0 MTEST F002.2 F099.0 2.3.2
S G003.0 G097.1 MS F003.0 F099.1
H G003.1 G097.2 MH F003.1 F009.2
J G003.2 G097.3 MJ F003.2 F099.3
D G003.3 MD F003.3
T G003.4 G097.5 MT F003.4 F099.5
MEM G003.5 G097.6 MMEM F003.5 F099.6
EDT G003.6 G097.7 MEDT F003.6 F099.7
AGJ G003.7 G098.4 MAGJ F003.7 F098.4
MOVL G002.4 MMOVL F002.4
3 Reset, ERS G000.7 G096.7 RST F000.2 F096.2 2.3.3
emergency stop RRW G000.6 G096.6 RWD F000.0 F096.0
ESP G000.4 G096.4
4 Alarm DVAL G026.1 G110.7 AL F000.1 F096.1 2.3.4
PSALM F006.0 F101.0
SVALM F006.1 F101.1
OHALM F006.2 F101.2
OTALM F006.3 F101.3
SYALM F006.4 F101.4
TIALM F101.6
5 Battery alarm BATL F040.7 F120.7 2.3.5
PBATL F040.6 F120.1
PBATZ F040.5 F120.2
6 Manual continus +J1 G065.0 G129.0 2.3.6
feed, +J2 G069.0 G133.0
Manual step feed +J3 G073.0 G137.0
+J4 G077.0 G141.0
+J5 G081.0 G145.0
+J6 G085.0 G149.0
+J7 G089.0 G153.0
+J8 G093.0 G157.0
+J9 G097.0 G161.0
+J10 G101.0 G165.0
–J1 G065.1 G129.1

–J2 G069.1 G133.1
–J3 G073.1 G137.1
–J4 G077.1 G141.1
–J5 G081.1 G145.1
–J6 G085.1 G149.1
–J7 G089.1 G153.1
–J8 G093.1 G157.1
–J9 G097.1 G161.1
–J10 G101.1 G165.1
JV0 ~ G014 ~ G104 ~ G105

JV15 G015
RT G006.7 G101.7
DIST0 ~ G020 ~ G106 ~ G109
DIST26 G023
– 102 –

Reference
N
No. F
Function
i Signal
7 Manual handle HS1A G011.0 G103.0 2.3.7

feed HS1B G011.1 G103.1
HS1C G011.2 G103.2
HS1D G011.3 G103.3
HS2A G011.4 G103.4
HS2B G011.5 G103.5
HS2C G011.6 G103.6
HS2D G011.7 G103.7
HS3A G010.0 G102.0
HS3B G010.1 G102.1
HS3C G010.2 G102.2
HS3D G010.3 G102.3
MP1 G006.2 G101.2
MP2 G006.3 G101.3
MP4 G006.4 G101.4
8 Three– ALNGH G156.0 2.3.8
dimensional RGHTH G156.1
handle feed RNDH G156.2
CNGTL G156.3
9 Manual NOT3DM G157#7 3DM F157#5 2.3.9
interruption
function for
three–
dimensional
coordinate
conversion
10 Manual arbitrary AJSTB G016.7 G122.7 2.3.10
angle feed AJA0 ~ G016 ~ G122 ~ G123
AJA12 G017
AJP1A G018.0 G124.0
AJP1B G018.1 G124.1
AJP1C G018.2 G124.2
AJP1D G018.3 G124.3
AJP2A G018.4 G124.4
AJP2B G018.5 G124.5
AJP2C G018.6 G124.6
AJP2D G018.7 G124.7
+AJ G016.5 G122.5
–AJ G016.6 G122.6
11 Automatic manual MOVL G002.4 G098.4 2.3.11
simultaneous PK1 G065.4
operation PK2 G069.4
PK3 G073.4
PK4 G077.4
PK5 G081.4
PK6 G085.4
PK7 G089.4
PK8 G093.4
PK9 G097.4
PK10 G101.4
12 Function to MIGET G046#7 G008#3 G056#3 MIFIN F046#3 F012#5 F060#5 2.3.12
compensate for
manual interven-
tion during auto-
matic operation
13 Reference ZRN G002.7 G098.7 MZRN F002.7 F098.7 2.3.13
position return DEC1 G064.5 G128.5 ZP1 F064.0 F128.0
DEC2 G068.5 G132.5 ZP2 F068.0 F132.0
DEC3 G072.5 G136.5 ZP3 F072.0 F136.0
DEC4 G076.5 G140.5 ZP4 F076.0 F140.0
DEC5 G080.5 G144.5 ZP5 F080.0 F144.0
DEC6 G084.5 G148.5 ZP6 F084.0 F148.0
DEC7 G088.5 G152.5 ZP7 F088.0 F152.0
DEC8 Go92.5 G156.5 ZP8 F092.0 F156.0
DEC9 G096.5 G160.5 ZP9 F096.0 F160.0
DEC10 G100.5 G164.5 ZP10 F100.0 F164.0
– 103 –

Reference
N
No. F
Function
i Signal
13 Reference ZD1 ZP21 F064.1 F128.1 2.3.13

position return ZD2 ZP22 F068.1 F132.1
ZD3 ZP23 F072.1 F136.1
ZD4 These signals ZP24 F076.1 F140.1
ZD5 are directly sig- ZP25 F080.1 F144.1
ZD6 nals input to ZP26 F084.1 F148.1
ZD7 the controller ZP27 F088.1 F152.1
ZD8 ZP28 F092.1 F156.1
ZD9 ZP29 F096.1 F160.1
ZD10 ZP210 F100.1 F164.1
ZP31 F064.4 F128.4

ZP32 F068.4 F132.4
ZP33 F072.4 F136.4
ZP34 F076.4 F140.4
ZP35 F080.4 F144.4
ZP36 F084.4 F148.4
ZP37 F088.4 F152.4
ZP38 F092.4 F156.4
ZP39 F096.4 F160.4
ZP310 F100.4 F164.4
ZP41 F064.5 F128.5

ZP42 F068.5 F132.5
ZP43 F072.5 F136.5
ZP44 F076.5 F140.5
ZP45 F080.5 F144.5
ZP46 F084.5 F148.5
ZP47 F088.5 F152.5
ZP48 F092.5 F156.5
ZP49 F096.5 F160.5
ZP410 F100.5 F164.5
14 Floating FRP1 F065.5 F129.5 2.3.15
reference FRP2 F069.5 F133.5
position return FRP3 F073.5 F137.5
FRP4 F077.5 F141.5
FRP5 F081.5 F145.5
FRP6 F085.5 F149.5
FRP7 F089.5 F153.5
FRP8 F093.5 F157.5
FRP9 F097.5 F161.5
FRP10 F101.5 F165.5
15 Automatic RAST1 G067.2 G131.2 2.3.16
reference RAST2 G071.2 G135.2
position setting RAST3 G075.2 G139.2
function
16 Automatic ST G005.0 G100.0 OP F000.5 F096.5 2.3.17
operation start, SP G000.5 G096.5 STL F000.4 F096.4
stop, restart SBK G004.3 G099.3 SPL F000.3 F096.3
SRN G002.5 MSBK F004.3 F100.3
BRN G002.6 MABS F004.5 F100.5
ABS G004.5 G099.5
17 Active block BCAN G157.6 MBCAN G157.4 2.3.18
cancel
18 Feedrate override FV0 ~ G012 G012 G060 2.3.19
FV7
ROV1 G006.5 G101.5
ROV2 G006 6
G006.6 G101 6
G101.6
AFV0 ~ G013 G013 G061
AFV7
OVC G004.4 G004.4 G052.4
RV0B ~ G40.0 ~ G120.0 ~
RV6B G40.6 G120.6
APF00 ~ G146 ~
APF15 G147
– 104 –

Reference
N
No. F
Function
i Signal
19 F1–digit feed F1D G005.3 2.3.20

20 Automatic DRN G004.1 G099.1 MDRN F004.1 F100.1 2.3.21
operation test MLK G004.7 G099.7 MMLK F004.7 F100.7
DLK G004.6 G099.6 MDLK F004.6 F100.6
AFL G004.0 G099.0 MAFL F004.0 F100.0
MLK1 G065.3 G129.3 MMLK1 F065.1 F129.1
MLK2 G069.3 G133.3 MMLK2 F069.1 F133.1
MLK3 G073.3 G137.3 MMLK3 F073.1 F137.1
MLK4 G077.3 G141.3 MMLK4 F077.1 F141.1
MLK5 G081.3 G145.3 MMLK5 F081.1 F145.1
MLK6 G085.3 G149.3 MMLK6 F085.1 F149.1
MLK7 G089.3 G153.3 MMLK7 F089.1 F153.1
MLK8 G093.3 G157.3 MMLK8 F093.1 F157.1
MLK9 G097.3 G161.3 MMLK9 F097.1 F161.1
MLK10 G101.3 G165.3 MMLK10 F101.1 F165.1
21 Optional block BDT1 G004.2 G004.2 G052.2 MBDT1 F004.2 F001.2 F049.2 2.3.22
skip BDT2 G007.0 G007.0 G055.0 MBDT2 F005.0 F002.0 F050.0
BDT3 G007.1 G007.1 G055.1 MBDT3 F005.1 F002.1 F050.1
BDT4 G007.2 G007.2 G055.2 MBDT4 F005.2 F002.2 F050.2
BDT5 G007.3 G007.3 G055.3 MBDT5 F005.3 F002.3 F050.3
BDT6 G007.4 G007.4 G055.4 MBDT6 F005.4 F002.4 F050.4
BDT7 G007.5 G007.5 G055.5 MBDT7 F005.5 F002.5 F050.5
BDT8 G007.6 G007.6 G055.6 MBDT8 F005.6 F002.6 F050.6
BDT9 G007.7 G007.7 G055.7 MBDT9 F005.7 F002.7 F050.7
22 Corner control CSMZ G008.1 G008.1 G056.1 2.3.23
CHF G008.0 G008.0 G056.0
23 Anxiliary function, FIN G005.1 G005.1 G053.1 MF F008.0 F004.0 F052.0 2.3.24
tool function, M0 ~ M31 F016 ~ F016 ~ F064 ~
spindle function, F019 F019 F067
2nd auxiliary DEN F001.0 F000.0 F048.0
function IPEN F001.1 F000.1 F048.1
DM00 F009.4 F005.4 F053.4
DM01 F009.5 F005.5 F053.5
DM02 F009.6 F005.6 F053.6
DM30 F009.7 F005.7 F053.7
TF F008.2 F004.2 F052.2

T0 ~ T31 F024 ~ F024 ~ F072 ~
F027 F027 F075
SF F008.1 F004.1 F052.1
S0 ~ S31 F020 ~ F020 ~ F068 ~
F023 F023 F071
BF F008.3 F008.3 F052.3
B0 ~ B31 F028 ~ F028 ~ F076 ~
F031 F031 F079
24 High–speed MFIN G046.0 G006.0 G054.0 (MF) F008.0 F004.0 F052.0 2.3.25
M,S,T,B interface SFIN G046.1 G006.1 G054.1 (SF) F008.1 F004.1 F052.1
TFIN G046.2 G006.2 G054.2 (TF) F008.2 F004.2 F052.2
BFIN G046.3 G006.3 G054.3 (BF) F008.3 F004.3 F052.3
25 1 block plural (FIN) G005.1 (MF) F008.0 2.3.26
M command (MFIN) G046.0 MF2 F045.1
MFIN2 G047.1 MF3 F045.2
MFIN3 G047.2 MF4 F045.3
MFIN4 G047.3 MF5 F045.4
MFIN5 G047.4 (M0 ~ M31) F016 ~
F019
M200 ~ F144 ~
M215 F145
M300 ~ F146 ~
M315 F147
M400 ~ F148 ~
M415 F149
M500 ~ F150 ~
M515 F151
– 105 –

Reference
N
No. F
Function
i Signal
26 External (FIN) G005.1 G005.1 G053.1

EF F008.4 F004.4 F052.4 2.3.27
operation (DEN) F001.0 F000.0 F048.0
(IPEN) F001.1 F000.1 F048.1
27 Canned cycle FFIN G005.2 G005.2 G053.2 FMF F008.5 F004.5 F052.5 2.3.28
spindle function SSP F008.7 F004.7 F052.7
SRV F008.6 F004.6 F052.6
(DEN) F001.0 F000.0 F048.0
(IPEN) F001.1 F000.1 F048.1
28 Spindle analog RISGN G024.7 G24.7 G072.7 RO0 ~ F010 ~ F006 ~ F054 ~ 2.3.29
output control RI0 ~ G024 ~ G024 ~ G072 ~ RO15 F011 F007 F055
RI12 G025 G025 G023 AR0 ~ F012 ~ F008 ~ F056 ~
AR15 F013 F009 F057
MR0 ~ F014 ~ F010 ~ F058 ~
MR15 F015 F011 F059
SPAL1 F040.0 F012.0 F060.0
SPAL2 F040.1 F012.1 F060.1
SPAL4 F040.2 F012.2 F060.2
SPAL8 F040.3 F012.3 F060.3
29 Spindle SECLP G026.3 G026.3 SCLP F042.1 F124.1 2.3.30
positionning SEUCL G026.2 G026.2 SUCLP F042.0 F124.0
SPSTP G026.0 G026.0
GS1 G026.4 G026.4
GS2 G026.5 G026.5
GS4 G026.6 G026.6
30 Spindle
p speed
p ((RI0 ~ G024 ~ G024 ~ G072 ~ SPAL F042.2 2.3.31
fluctuation RI12) G025 G025 G073
d t ti
detection (GS1) G026.4 G026.4
(GS2) G026.5 G026.5
(GS4) G026.6 G026.6
31 Arbitrary spindle FIN G005.1 MF F008.0 2.3.32
gear ratio
32 Spindle serial TLMLA G227.0 G227.0 SLDMA0 ~ F232 ~ F232 ~ F233 2.3.33
output TLMHA G227.1 G227.1 SLDMA15 F233
Cs contour CTH2A G227.2 G227.2 SSPDA0 ~ F234 ~ F234 ~ F235
control CTH1A G227.3 G227.3 SSPDA15 F235
SRVA G227.4 G227.4 SSPAA0 ~ F236 F236
SFRA G227.5 G227.5 SSPAA7
For 1st ORCMA G227.6 G227.6 ALMA F229.0 F229.0
axis MRDYA G227.7 G227.7 SSTA F229.1 F229.1
ARSTA G226.0 G226.0 SDTA F229.2 F229.2
ESPA G226.1 G226.1 SARA F229.3 F229.3
INDXA G229.0 G229.0 LDT1A F229.4 F229.4
ROTAA G229.1 G229.1 LDT2A F229.5 F229.5
NRROA G229.2 G229.2 TLMA F229.6 F229.6
ORARA F229.7 F229.7
TLMLB G235.0 G235.0 SLDMB0 ~ F248 ~ F248 ~ F249

TLMHB G235.1 G235.1 SLDMB15 F249
CTH2B G235.2 G235.2 SSPDB0 ~ F250 ~ F250 ~ F251
CTH1B G235.3 G235.3 SSPDB15 F251
SRVB G235.4 G235.4 SSPAB0 ~ F252 F252
SFRB G235.5 G235.5 SSPAB7
For 2nd ORCMB G235.6 G235.6 ALMB F245.0 F245.0
axis MRDYB G235.7 G235.7 SSTB F245.1 F245.1
ARSTB G234.0 G234.0 SDTB F245.2 F245.2
ESPB G234.1 G234.1 SARB F245.3 F254.3
INDXB G237.0 G237.0 LDT1B F245.4 F245.4
ROTAB G237.1 G237.1 LDT2B F245.5 F245.5
NRROB G237.2 G237.2 TLMB F245.6 F245.6
ORARB F245.7 F245.7
– 106 –

Reference
N
No. F
Function
i Signal
32 Spindle serial SCNTR1 G067.7 G131.7 MSCNTR1 F067.7 F131.7 2.3.33

output SCNTR2 G071.7 G135.7 MSCNTR2 F071.7 F135.7
Cs contour SCNTR3 G075.7 G139.7 MSCNTR3 F075.7 F139.7
control SCNTR4 G079.7 G143.7 MSCNTR4 F079.7 F143.7
SCNTR5 G083.7 G147.7 MSCNTR5 F083.7 F147.7
33 Serial interface (ORCMA) G227.6 G227.6 (ORARA) F229.7 F229.7 2.3.34
spindle position (INDXA) G229.0 G229.0
coder method (ROTAA) G229.1 G229.1
spindle SHA00 ~ G230 ~ G230 ~ G231
orientation SHA11 G231
(ORCMB) G235.6 G235.6 (ORARB) F245.7 F245.7

(INDXB) G237.0 G237.0
(ROTAB) G237.1 G237.1
SHB00 ~ G238 ~ G238 ~ G239
SHB11 G239
NRROA G229.2
NRROB G237.2
34 Serial interface SPSYC G047.6 G111.6 MSPSYC F046.6 F111.6 2.3.35
spindle SPPHS G047.7 G111.7 MSPPHS F046.7 F111.7
synchronous (RISGN #1) G024.7 G024.7 SPSYAL F046.5 F111.5
control (RI0 ~ G024 ~ G024 ~ G025
RI12 #1) G025
INTGA G226.5 G226.5
INTGB G234.5 G234.5
35 Serial interface RCHA G226.7 G226.7 RCFNA F228.3 F228.3 2.3.36
spindle RSLA G226.6 G226.6 RCHPA F228.2 F228.2
speedrange
switching RCHB G234.7 G234.7 RCFNB F244.3 F244.3
RSLB G234.6 G234.6 RCHPB F244.2 F244.2
36 Spindle PCSPN0 G045.4 SPN0 F155.4 F013.0 F061.0 2.3.37
speedrange SPN1 F.155.5 F013.1 F061.1
switching
37 Program status INCH F001.3 F097.3 2.3.38
output TAP F001.4 F000.4 F048.4
RPD F001.5 F000.5 F048.5
THRD F001 6
F001.6 F000 6
F000.6 F048 6
F048.6
CSS F001.7
F001 7 F000.7
F000 7 F048.7
F048 7
38 Axis move status INP1 F064.6 F128.6 2.3.39
output INP2 F068.6 F132.6
INP3 F072.6 F136.6
INP4 F076.6 F140.6
INP5 F080.6 F144.6
INP6 F084.6 F148.6
INP7 F088.6 F152.6
INP8 F092.6 F156.6
INP9 F096.6 F160.6
INP10 F100.6 F164.6
MV1 F064.2 F128.2

MV2 F068.2 F132.2
MV3 F072.2 F136.2
MV4 F076.2 F140.2
MV5 F080.2 F144.2
MV6 F084.2 F148.2
MV7 F088.2 F152.2
MV8 F092.2 F156.2
MV9 F096.2 F160.2
MV10 F100.2 F164.2
– 107 –

Reference
N
No. F
Function
i Signal
38 Axis move status MD1 F064.3 F128.3 2.3.39

output MD2 F068.3 F132.3
MD3 F072.3 F136.3
MD4 F076.3 F140.3
MD5 F080.3 F144.3
MD6 F084.3 F148.3
MD7 F088.3 F152.3
MD8 F092.3 F156.3
MD9 F096.3 F160.3
MD10 F100.3 F164.3
39 Mirror image MI1 G065.2 G129.2 MMI1 F065.0 G129.0 2.3.40
MI2 G069.2 G133.2 MMI2 F069.0 G133.0
MI3 G073.2 G137.2 MMI3 F073.0 G137.0
MI4 G077.2 G141.2 MMI4 F077.0 G141.0
MI5 G081.2 G145.2 MMI5 F081.0 G145.0
MI6 G085.2 G149.2 MMI6 F085.0 G149.0
MI7 G089.2 G153.2 MMI7 F089.0 G153.0
MI8 G093.2 G157.2 MMI8 F093.0 G157.0
MI9 G097.2 G161.2 MMI9 F097.0 G161.0
MI10 G101.2 G165.2 MMI10 F101.0 G165.0
40 Over travel +L1 G064.0 G128.0 2.3.41
+L2 G068.0 G132.0
+L3 G072.0 G136.0
+L4 G076.0 G140.0
+L5 G080.0 G144.0
+L6 G084.0 G148.0
+L7 G088.0 G152.0
+L8 G092.0 G156.0
+L9 G096.0 G160.0
+L10 G100.0 G164.0
–L1 G064.1 G128.1

–L2 G068.1 G132.1
–L3 G072.1 G136.1
–L4 G076.1 G140.1
–L5 G080.1 G144.1
–L6 G084.1 G148.1
–L7 G088.1 G152.1
–L8 G092.1 G156.1
–L9 G096.1 G160.1
–L10 G100.1 G164.1
41 Chuck tail stock TSB G030.7 2.3.42
barrier
42 External +ED1 G064.2 G128.2 2.3.43
deceleration +ED2 G068.2 G132.2
+ED3 G072.2 G136.2
+ED4 G076.2 G140.2
+ED5 G080.2 G144.2
+ED6 G084.2 G148.2
+ED7 G088.2 G152.2
+ED8 G092.2 G156.2
+ED9 G096.2 G160.2
+ED10 G100.2 G164.2
–ED1 G064.3 G128.3

–ED2 G068.3 G132.3
–ED3 G072.3 G136.3
–ED4 G076.3 G140.3
–ED5 G080.3 G144.3
–ED6 G084.3 G148.3
–ED7 G088.3 G152.3
–ED8 G092.3 G156.3
–ED9 G096.3 G160.3
–ED10 G100.3 G164.3
– 108 –

Reference
N
No. F
Function
i Signal
43 Interlock IT G000.0 G096.0 2.3.44

AIT G001.0 G001.0 G049.0
CSL G000.1 G000.1 G048.1
BSL G001.1 G001.1 G049.1
IT1
IT1 G064.4 G128.4
IT2 G068.4 G132.4
IT3 G072 4
G072.4 G136 4
G136.4
IT4 G076 4
G076.4 G140 4
G140.4
IT5 G080 4
G080.4 G144 4
G144.4
IT6 G084.4
G084 4 G148.4
G148 4
IT7 G088 4
G088.4 G152 4
G152.4
IT8 G092.4
G092 4 G156.4
G156 4
IT9 G096.4 G160.4
IT10 G100.4 G164.4
44 Servo off SVF1 G064.6 G128.6 2.3.45

SVF2 G068.6 G132.6
SVF3 G072.6 G136.6
SVF4 G076.6 G140.6
SVF5 G080.6 G144.6
SVF6 G084.6 G148.6
SVF7 G088.6 G152.6
SVF8 G092.6 G156.6
SVF9 G096.6 G160.6
SVF10 G100.6 G164.6
45 Control axis DTCH1 G064.7 G128.7 MDTCH1 F064.7 F128.7 2.3.46
removal DTCH2 G068.7 G132.7 MDTCH2 F068.7 F132.7
DTCH3 G072.7 G136.7 MDTCH3 F072.7 F136.7
DTCH4 G076.7 G140.7 MDTCH4 F076.7 F140.7
DTCH5 G080.7 G144.7 MDTCH5 F080.7 F144.7
DTCH6 G084.7 G148.7 MDTCH6 F084.7 F148.7
DTCH7 G088.7 G152.7 MDTCH7 F088.7 F152.7
DTCH8 G092.7 G156.7 MDTCH8 F092.7 F156.7
DTCH9 G096.7 G160.7 MDTCH9 F096.7 F160.7
DTCH10 G100.7 G164.7 MDTCH10 F100.7 F164.7
46 Axis switching AXC1 C041.0 2.3.47
AXC2 G041.1
AXC4 G041.2
47 Memory KEY1 G005.4 G100.4 2.3.48
protection key KEY2 G005.5 G100.5
KEY3 G005.6 G100.6
KEY4 G005.7 G100.7
48 External input / EXPUN G032.0 G112.0 RPBSY F007.4 F102.4 2.3.49
output command EXRD G032.1 G112.1
EXSTP G032.2 G112.2
49 External work WN1 G019.0 G019.0 G067.0 2.3.50
number search WN2 G019.1 G019.1 G067.1
WN4 G019.2 G019.2 G067.2
WN8 G019.3 G019.3 G067.3
WN16 G019.4 G019.4 G067.4
50 External data EOREND G032.5 G112.5 EOSTB F032.7 F112.7 2.3.51
input
p / output
p ERDRQ G032.6 G112.6 EIREND F032.5 F112.5
EISTB G032.7 G112.7 ESEND F007.5 F003.5 F051.5
EIA0 ~ G033 G113 EOA0 ~ F033 F113
EIA7 EOA7
EID0 ~ G034 ~ G114 ~ G119 EOD0 ~ F034 ~ F114 ~ F119
EID47 G039 EOD47 F039
EIHEAD G112 4
G112.4 EOHEAD F112 4
F112.4
51 Skip function SKIP1 G000.3 G000.3 G048.3 2.3.52
SKIP2 G001.5
SKIP3 G001.6
SKIP4 G001.7
– 109 –

Reference
N
No. F
Function
i Signal
52 High–speed skip, HDO0 F047.0 F107.0 2.3.53

high–speed HDO1 F047.1 F107.1
measuring HDO2 F047.2 F107.2
position reach HDO3 F047.3
signal output HDO4 F047.4 F107.4
HDO5 F047.5 F107.5
HDO6 F047.6 F107.6
53 Custom macro UNIT G000.2 G000.2 G048.2 UO000 ~ F048 ~ F032 ~ F080 ~ 2.3.54
UI000 ~ G048 ~ G032 ~ G080 ~ UO031 F051 F035 F083
UI031 G051 G035 G083 UO100 ~ F052 ~ F036 ~ F084 ~
UI100 ~ G052 ~ G036 ~ G084 ~ UO131 F055 F039 F087
UI131 G055 G039 G087 UO200 ~ F056 ~ F040 ~ F088 ~
UI200 ~ G056 ~ G040 ~ G088 ~ UO231 F059 F043 F091
UI231 G059 G043 G091 UO300 ~ F060 ~ F044 ~ F092 ~
UI300 ~ G060 ~ G044 ~ G092 ~ UO331 F063 F047 F095
UI331 G063 G047 G095
54 Tool AE1 G001.2 G001.2 G049.2 2.3.55
measurementt AE2 G001 3
G001.3 G001 3
G001.3 G049 3
G049.3
AE3 G001 4
G001.4 G001 4
G001.4 G049 4
G049.4
PRC G008.5 G101.0
55 Direct input
p of GOQSM G028.7 G028.7 G076.7 2.3.56
offset value
al e WOQSM G028.6 G028.6 G076.6
measured B
WOSET G026.7 G026.7 G074.7
+MIT1 G066.0 G130.0
–MIT1 G066.1 G130.1
+MIT2 G070.0 G134.0
–MIT2 G070.1 G134.1
+MIT3 G074.0 G138.0
–MIT3 G074.1 G138.1
+MIT4 G142.0
–MIT4 G142.1
+MIT5 G146.0
–MIT5 G146.1
+MIT6 G150.0
–MIT6 G150.1
+MIT7 G154.0
–MIT7 G154.1
+MIT8 G158.0
–MIT8 G158.1
+MIT9 G162.0
–MIT9 G162.1
+MIT10 G166.0
–MIT10 G166.1
OFN0 ~ G028 G028 G076
OFN5
– 110 –

Reference
N
No. F
Function
i Signal
56 Tool life TLRST G010.7 G010.7 G058.7 TLCHA F007.6 F003.6 F051.6 2.3.57
management TLSKP G009.7 G009.7 G057.7 TLCHB F007.7 F003.7 F051.7
TL01 G009.0 G009.0 G057.0
TL02 G009.1 G009.1 G057.1
TL04 G009.2 G009.2 G057.2
TL08 G009.3 G009.3 G057.3
TL16 G009.4 G009.4 G057.4
TL32 G009.5 G009.5 G057.5
TL64 G009.6 G009.6 G057.6
TL128 G043.7
TL256 G042.0
TL512 G043.6
TLV0 G155.0
TLV1 G155.1
TLV2 G155.2
TLV3 G155.3
TLV4 G155.4
TLV5 G155.5
TLV6 G155.6
TLV7 G155.7
TLV8 G154.0
TLV9 G154.1
57 Tool retract & TRRTN G031.1 TRSPS F044.5 2.3.58
recover TRESC G031.0 TRMTN F044.4
(15–T/15–M) TRACT F044.3
58 Tool retract & TRESC G127#0 TRACT F110#3 2.3.59
recover (15–TT) TRRTN G127#1 TRMTN F110#4
TRHD1 G127#2 TRSPS F110#5
TRHD2 G127#3
59 Software (S) G003.0 SO F129.0 2.3.60
operator’s panel (H) G003.1 HO F129.1
(J) G003.2 JO F129.2
(D) G003.3 MDIO F129.3
(T) G003.4 TO F129.4
(MEM) G003.5 MEMO F129.5
(EDT) G003.6 EDTO F129.6
(ZRN) G002.7 ZRNO F128.7
(+J1) G065.0 +J1O F136.0
(+J2) G069.0 +J2O F136.2
(+J3) G073.0 +J3O F136.4
(+J4) G077.0 +J4O F136.6
(+J5) G081.0 +J5O F138.0
(+J6) G085.0 +J6O F138.2
(–J1) G065.1 –J1O F136.1
(–J2) G069.1 –J2O F136.3
(–J3) G073.1 –J3O F136.5
(–J4) G077.1 –J4O F136.7
(–J5) G081.1 –J5O F138.1
(–J6) G085.1 –J6O F138.3
RT G006.7 RTO F132.7
HS1A G011.0 HS1AO F131.0
HS1B G011.1 HS1BO F131.1
HS1C G011.2 HS1CO F131.2
HS1D G011.3 HS1DO F131.3
MP1 G006.2 MP1O F132.2
MP2 G006.3 MP2O F132.3
MP4 G006.4 MP4O F132.4
ROV1 G006.5 ROV1O F132.5
ROV2 G006.6 ROV2O F132.6
JV0 ~ G014 ~ JV0O ~ F134 ~
JV15 G015 JV15O F135
FV0 ~ G012 FV0O ~ F133
FV7 FV7O
BDT1 G004.2
SBK G004.3 BDT1O F130.2
MLK G004.7 SBKO F130.3
DRN G004.1 MLKO F130.7
KEY1 G005.4 DRNO F130.1
KEY2 G005.5 KEYO F131.4
KEY3 G005.6 SPO F128.5
KEY4 G005.7 OPU0 ~ F137
SP G000.5 OPU7
– 111 –

Reference
N
No. F
Function
i Signal
60 Run hour display TMRON G008.7 G008.7 2.3.61

61 Parts count PRTSF F043.6 F012.6 F060.6 2.3.62
display
62 Key input G128 ~ 2.3.63
G139
63 Index table BECLP G019.7 BCLP F007.1 2.3.64
indexing BEUCL G019.6 BUCLP F007.0
64 Turret axis TECLP G030.3 TCLP F043.1 2.3.65
control TEUCL G030.2 TUCLP F043.0
TDIR1 G030.0
TDIR2 G030.1
65 Synchronous / SYNC1 G066.2 2.3.66
independent SYNC2 G070.2
switching SYNC3 G074.2
SYNC4 G078.2
SYNC5 G082.2
SYNC6 G086.2
SYNC7 G090.2
SYNC8 G094.2
SYNC9 G098.2
SYNC10 G102.2
66 Parallel axis PK1 G065.4 2.3.67
control PK2 G069.4
PK3 G073.4
PK4 G077.4
PK5 G081.4
PK6 G085.4
PK7 G089.4
PK8 G093.4
PK9 G097.4
PK10 G101.4
67 Twin table control (SYNC1) G066.2 2.3.68
/ simple (SYNC2) G070.2
synchronous (SYNC3) G074.2
control (SYNC4) G078.2
(SYNC5) G082.2
(SYNC6) G086.2
(SYNC7) G090.2
(SYNC8) G094.2
(SYNC9) G098.2
(SYNC10) G102.2
68 Simple SYNER F153.1 2.3.69
synchronization
control
69 Tool post IHEAD1 G110.0 2.3.70
selection IHEAD2 G110.1
70 Tool post TICHK F120.0 2.3.71
interference check
71 Override OMEP G010.6 SPAO F042.4 2.3.72
play back OME G010.5 SPBO F042.5
SPA G029.0 SPCO F042.6
SPB G029.1
SPC G029.2
72 Depth–of–cut CDV0 ~ G027 2.3.73
override of CDV7
canned cycle
for lathe
73 Rigid
g tap p RI0 ~ G024 ~ G024 ~ G072 ~ RTAP F040.4 2.3.74
RI12 G025 G025 G073 RSPP F155.0
SPSTP G026.0 G026.0 RSPM F155 1
F155.1
GS1 G026.4 G026.4 RSPC F155.2
GS2 G026.5 G026.5
GS4 G026.6 G026.6
RSPR G148.3 G026.1 G074.1
– 112 –

Reference
N
No. F
Function
i Signal
74 Retrace RVS G029.4 RVSL F044.2 2.3.75

75 Play back TCHIN G002.3 MTCHIN F002.3 2.3.76
76 Chopping CHLD G044.7 2.3.77
function CHP0 G044.0
CHP2 G044.1
CHP4 G044.2
CHP8 G044.3
77 Override TCHOVR G031.7 (SPAO) F042.4 2.3.78
play back STFOVR G031.6 (SPBO) F042.5
STSOVR G031.5 (APCO) F042.6
(SPA) G029.0
(SPB) G029.1
(SPC) G029.2
78 Axis control MSBK1 G384.7 G384.7 CNCA1 F066.7 F130.7 2.3.79
by PMC CD1X0 ~ G385 G385.7 DEN1 F066.6 F130.6
CD1X7 BUF1 F066.5 F130.5
FD1X0 ~ G386 ~ G386 ~ G387
FD1X15 G387
DT1X0 ~ G388 ~ G388 ~ G391
DT1X31 G391
PMCA1 G066.7 G130.7
1st axis RST1 G066.6 G130.6
STP1 G066.5 G130.5
SBK1 G066.4 G130.4
PCAX1 G066.3 G130.3
VCSKP1 G067.6 G131.6
OV1X0 ~ G368 G368.7
OV1X7
MSBK2 G392.7 G392.7 CNCA2 F070.7 F134.7

CD2X0 ~ G393 G393.7 DEN2 F070.6 F134.6
CD2X7 BUF2 F070.5 F134.5
FD2X0 ~ G394 ~ G394 ~ G395
FD2X15 G395
DT2X0 ~ G396 ~ G396 ~ G399
DT2X31 G399
2nd axis PMCA2 G070.7 G134.7
RST2 G070.6 G134.6
STP2 G070.5 G134.5
SBK2 G070.4 G134.4
PCAX2 G070.3 G134.3
VCSKP2 G071.6 G135.6
OV2X0 ~ G369 G369.7
OV2X7
MSBK3 G400.7 G400.7 CNCA3 F074.7 F138.7

CD3X0 ~ G401 G401.7 DEN3 F074.6 F138.6
CD3X7 BUF3 F074.5 F138.5
FD3X0 ~ G402 ~ G402 ~ G403
FD3X15 G403
DT3X0 ~ G404 ~ G404 ~ G407
DT3X31 G407
PMCA3 G074.7 G138.7
3rd axis G074.6 G138.6
RST3
STP3 G074.5 G138.5
SBK3 G074.4 G138.4
PCAX3 G074.3 G138.3
VCSKP3 G075.6 G139.6
OV3X0 ~ G370 G370.7
OV3X7
– 113 –

Reference
N
No. F
Function
i Signal

CD4X7 BUF4 F078.5 F142.5
FD4X0 ~ G410 ~ G410 ~ G411
FD4X15 G411
DT4X0 ~ G412 ~ G412 ~ G415
DT4X31 G415
4th axis PMCA4 G078.7 G142.7
RST4 G078.6 G142.6
STP4 G078.5 G142.5
SBK4 G078.4 G142.4
PCAX4 G078.3 G142.3
VCSKP4 G079.6 G143.6
OV4X0 ~ G371 G371.7
OV4X7
Axis control MSBK5 G416.7 G416.7 CNCA5 F082.7 F146.7
CD5X7 BUF5 F082.5 F146.5
FD5X0 ~ G418 ~ G418 ~ G419
FD5X15 G419
DT5X0 ~ G420 ~ G420 ~ G423
DT5X31 G423
RST5 G082.6 G146.6
STP5 G082.5 G146.5
SBK5 G082.4 G146.4
PCAX5 G082.3 G146.3
VCSKP5 G083.6 G147.6
OV5X0 ~ G372 G372.7
OV5X7
MSBK6 G424.7 G424.7 CNCA6 F086.7 F150.7

CD6X0 ~ G425 G425.7 DEN6 F086.6 F150.6
CD6X7 BUF6 F086.5 F150.5
FD6X0 ~ G426 ~ G426 ~ G427
FD6X15 G427
DT6X0 ~ G428 ~ G428 ~ G431
DT6X31 G431
RST6 G086.6 G150.6
STP6 G086.5 G150.5
SBK6 G086.4 G150.4
PCAX6 G086.3 G150.3
VCSKP6 G087.6 G151.6
OV6X0 ~ G373 G373.7
OV6X7
MSBK7 G432.7 G434.7 CNCA7 F090.7 F154.7

CD7X0 ~ G433 G433.7 DEN7 F090.6 F154.6
CD7X7 BUF7 F090.5 F154.5
FD7X0 ~ G434 ~ G434 ~ G435
FD7X15 G435
DT7X0 ~ G436 ~ G436 ~ G439
DT7X31 G439
RST7 G090.6 G154.6
STP7 G090.5 G154.5
SBK7 G090.4 G154.4
PCAX7 G090.3 G154.3
VCSKP7 G091.6 G155.6
OV7X0 ~ G374 G374.7
OV7X7
– 114 –

Reference
N
No. F
Function
i Signal

CD8X7 BUF8 F094.5 F158.5
FD8X0 ~ G442 ~ G442 ~ G443
FD8X15 G443
DT8X0 ~ G444 ~ G444 ~ G447
DT8X31 G447
RST8 G094.6 G158.6
STP8 G094.5 G158.5
SBK8 G094.4 G158.4
PCAX8 G094.3 G158.3
VCSKP8 G095.6 G159.6
OV8X0 ~ G375 G375.7
OV8X7
MSBK9 G448.7 G48.7 CNCA9 F098.7 F162.7
CD9X0 ~ G449 G449.7 DEN9 F098.6 F162.6
CD9X7 BUF9 F098.5 F162.5
FD9X0 ~ G450 ~ G450 ~ G451
FD9X15 G451
DT9X0 ~ G452 ~ G452 ~ G455
DT9X31 G455
RST9 G098.6 G162.6
STP9 G098.5 G162.5
SBK9 G098.4 G162.4
PCAX9 G098.3 G162.3
VCSKP9 G099.6 G163.6
OV9X0 ~ G376 G376.7
OV9X7
MSBK10 G456.7 G456.7 CNCA10 F102.7 F166.7

CD10X0 ~ G457 G457.7 DEN10 F102.6 F166.6
CD10X7 BUF10 F102.5 F166.5
FD10X0 ~ G458 ~ G458 ~ G459
FD10X15 G459
DT10X0 ~ G460 ~ G460 ~ G463
DT10X31 G463
RST10 G102.6 G166.6
STP10 G102.5 G166.5
SBK10 G102.4 G166.4
PCAX10 G102.3 G166.3
VCSKP10 G103.6 G167.6
OV10X0 ~ G377 G383.7
OV10X7
FIN1X G046.4 G110.4 MF1X F046.0 F106.0

FIN2X G046.5 G110.5 MF2X F046.1 F106.1
FIN3X G046.6 G110.6 MF3X F046.2 F106.2
OVA0 ~ G383 G383.7 AF1X0 ~ F141 F103
OVA7 AF1X7
AF2X0 ~ F142 F104
AF2X7
AF3X0 ~ F143 F105
AF3X7
79 PMC axis control Refer to No.78,Axis control by PMC 2.3.80
speed command
80 Hypothetical IMGY G157.3 2.3.81
axis control
– 115 –

Reference
N
No. F
Function
i Signal
81 Axis selection at ACTF1 G067.4 G131.4 2.3.82

the actual seed ACTF2 G071.4 G135.4
display ACTF3 G075.4 G139.4
ACTF4 G079.4 G143.4
ACTF5 G083.4 G147.4
ACTF6 G087.4 G151.4
ACTF7 G091.4 G155.4
ACTF8 G095.4 G159.4
ACTF9 G099.4 G163.4
ACTF10 G103.4 G167.4
82 NC window WHEAD G111.0 BGEDT F043.3 F120.4 2.3.83
83 Remote buffer RMTI0 G152.0 RMTO0 F152.0 2.3.84
RMTI1 G152.1 RMTO1 F152.1
84 Load meter SPA G029.0 2.3.85
display SPB G029.1
SPC G029.2
85 Serial interface SPLDS G047.5 2.3.86
spindle load
meter display
switching
function
86 Position switch PSW01 F165.0 2.3.87
function PSW02 F165.1
PSW03 F165.2
PSW04 F165.3
PSW05 F165.4
PSW06 F165.5
PSW07 F165.6
PSW08 F165.7
PSW09 F164.0
PSW10 F164.1
87 Electric gear box RTRCT G042.4 RTRCTF F041.4 2.3.88
EGBM1 F066.3
EGBM2 F070.3
EGBM3 F074.3
EGBM4 F078.3
EGBM5 F082.3
EGBM6 F086.3
EGBM7 F090.3
EGBM8 F094.3
EGBM9 F098.3
EGBM10 F102.3
88 Function for EUI00 ~ G144.0 ~ EUO00 ~ F166.0 ~ 2.3.89
separating UI/UO EUI15 G145.7 EUO15 F167.7
used in user pro-
grams and P–
code programs
89 High–precision MHPCC F131.6 2.3.90
contour control EXHPCC F131.7
by 64–bit RISC
processor
– 116 –
2.3 Signals
This section describes the signals used by the Series 15–T, 15–M, and 15–TT. Functions that can be used
depend on machine types. Read the corresponding specifications and check the functions that can be used.
The name of the signal provided for the Series 15–TT is enclosed between brackets ([]).
2.3.1 Ready signals

(a) Control unit ready signal: MA
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that the control unit is ready for normal operation.
[Output Condition]
The signal goes high when:
i. Self diagnosis of the control unit normally terminates after the power of the control unit
is turned on.
The signal goes low when:
i. The power of the control unit is turned off.
ii. A CPU error, memory error, or any other error of the control unit is detected.
(b) Servo ready signal: SA
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that the servo system is ready for normal operation. This signal is not output while
the servo system [position control) is not working.
[Output Condition]
i. Diagnosis of the servo system normally terminates after the power of the control unit is
turned on.
ii. A servo alarm is released by the reset function.
iii. The emergency stop state is released.
i. The power of the control unit is turned off.
ii. A servo alarm is detected.
iii. The system is placed in the emergency stop state.
iv. A CPU error, memory error, or any other error of the control unit is detected.
[Use] The signal determines whether the machine applies brakes to required axes. When this sig-
nal is high, the machine releases the brake. When this signal is low, the machine puts on the
brake.
NOTE The servo–off state is one of states in which the servo system, or position control does not
function. In the servo–off state, the SA signal remains high unless an event causes the signal
to go low.
(c) Servo ready signal: HEMG

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Same as the SA signal
[Output Condition]
Same as the SA signal. This signal, however, changes its state up to 16 ms faster than the
SA signal.
– 117 –
2.3.2 Operation mode selection signals

These signals select the basic operation mode of the control unit. The operation mode selection signals include
the following:
– Input signals: Externally input to inform the control unit of a desired operation mode
– Output signals: Output from the control unit to show the current operation mode
Operation mode selection Input signal Output signal Remark

Common to
Manual date input D MD
all system
Automatic
A i Tape command Except
T MT
operation 15–TT
Automatic Memory command MEM MMEM
operation
ti Part program storage
EDT MEDT
& edit
Test mode TEST MTEST
Manual handle feed H MH Common to
C
all system
Incremental feed S MS
Manuall
M Manual continuous
operation J MJ
feed
Manual arbitrary angle
AGJ MAGJ
feed
Automatic/manual simultaneous Except
MOVL MMOVL
operation 15–TT
Selecting the operation mode
When an input signal is set high, the corresponding operation mode is selected. While an operation mode is
selected, the corresponding output signal is high.
The Series 15 allows two or more operation modes to be selected at a time as listed in the table below.
Mode selection input signal

T D MEM EDT MVOL H S J AGJ
Automatic
One of these signals is 1. 0 0 0 0 0
operation
One of these signals is 1, or
Manual
0 0 0 0 0 J and H are 1, or S and H
operation
are1.
Automatic/
One of these signals
manual
One of these signals is 1. 1 is 1, or J and H are 1, 0
simultaneous
or S and H are 1.
operation
(0: Signal low 1: Signal high)
NOTE Signals marked with an asterisk () cannot be used in the Series 15–TT.
When the MOVL signal is set high, manual operation can be executed during automatic operation. When both
the J or S signal and the H signal are set high, the manual continuous feed or incremental feed and the manual
handle feed can be selected without switching the mode.
Operations from the MDI panel enable background editing at any time, irrespective of the operation modes de-
scribed above.
If the selection signals are entered in a different manner from those listed in the table above, the previous opera-
tion mode is kept for a certain time (T1). Then, neither automatic operation mode nor manual operation mode
is selected.
If the selection signals are entered in one of manners listed in the table within T1, the corresponding operation
mode is selected.
– 118 –
When all the selections signals are low, either of the following can be selected by a parameter:
a. The operation mode selected last is kept.
b. The operation mode selected last is kept for a specified time (T0), then neither automatic operation mode
nor manual operation mode is selected. If the selection signals are entered in a specified manner within
T0, the corresponding operation mode is selected.
Time periods T0 and T1 are specified by parameters within the range of 0 to 2 seconds.
Switching the operation mode
When an operation mode is switched to another, the control unit usually operates in one of the following man-
ners:
a. Immediate switching: The control unit immediately stops and resumes the operation in the new mode.
b. Switching at the end of a block: The control unit continues the operation in the current mode until the cur-
rent block terminates. Then, it stops once and resumes the operation in the new mode.
c. Non–stop switching: The control unit enters the new mode without stopping the current operation.
Before stopping, all axis movements are decelerated.
The operation of the control unit depends on the newly selected mode and the previous mode as shown in the
table below.
Newly selected operation mode

Auto/manual
Manual simultaneous
Automatic operation
operation operation
(See Note1)
Automatic Selected when a block Immediate Continuance of
operation ends selection operation
Manual Immediate Immediate
Previous
P i Immediate selection
operation selection selection
operation
mode Continuance of operation
Auto/manual
in automatic mode and Immediate
simultaneous (See Note 2)
immediate selection in selection
operation
manual mode.
NOTE 1 The operation marked with an asterisk () is not executed in the Series 15–TT.
NOTE 2 When an operation mode concerning automatic operation is switched, the automatic operation
is switched at the end of the current block and the manual operation is continued. When an
operation mode concerning manual operation is switched, the automatic operation is
continued and the manual operation is switched immediately.
While the specified movement is decelerated for immediate switching or while the previous operation is contin-
ued for switching at the end of the current block, the system does not assume that the new mode is selected.
During this period, the output signal indicates that the previous operation mode is selected.
(a) Manual data input selection signal: D
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects the manual data input operation mode. Executes data input from the MDI panel or
tape and automatic operation according to the command program entered from the MDI pan-
el.
[Operation] See the descriptions of “Selecting the Operation Mode” and “Switching the Operation Mode.”
(b) Tape mode selection signal: T (15–T/M)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects the tape mode. Executes automatic operation according to the command program
entered from the tape.
– 119 –
(c) Memory mode selection signal: MEM

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects the memory mode. Executes automatic operation according to the command pro-
gram in memory.
(d) Tape storage and edit selection signal: EDT
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects the tape storage and edit mode. Executes loading of a command program from tape
into memory, editing of a command program in memory, and output of a command program
from memory to tape.
(e) Test mode selection signal: TEST
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects the test mode.
[Operation] If the test mode selection signal is set to high in the memory mode, test is selected.
(f) Manual continuous feed selection signal: J
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects the manual continuous feed mode. Executes manual operations such as manual
continuous feed, manual reference position return, and manual numeric command.
(g) Incremental feed selection signal: S
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects the incremental feed operation mode. Executes incremental feed.
(h) Manual handle feed selection signal: H
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects the manual handle feed mode. Executes manual handle feed.
(i) Manual Arbitrary Angle Feed Selection Signal: AGJ
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects the manual arbitrary angle feed mode. Executes manual feed in the specified direc-
tion.
(j) Simultaneous auto/manual operation selection signal: MOVL (15–T/M)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects the simultaneous auto/manual operation. The mode selection signals determine the
operation modes in automatic operation and manual operation.
(k) Manual data input selection check signal: MD
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that the manual data input mode is selected.
[Output Condition]
See the descriptions of “Selecting the Operation Mode” and “Switching the Operation Mode.”
– 120 –
(l) Tape mode selection check signal: MT (15–T/M)

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that the tape mode is selected.
[Output Condition]
(m) Memory mode selection check signal: MMEM
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that the memory mode is selected.
[Output Condition]
(n) Tape storage and edit selection check signal: MEDT
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that the tape storage and edit mode is selected.
[Output Condition]
(o) Signal indicating that the test mode is selected (MTEST)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Indicates that the test mode is selected.
[Operation] Output when the test mode is selected.
(p) Manual continuous feed selection check signal: MJ
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that the manual continuous feed mode is selected.
[Output Condition]
(q) Incremental feed selection check signal: MS
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that the incremental feed mode is selected.
[Output Condition]
(r) Manual handle feed selection check signal: MH
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that the manual handle feed mode is selected.
[Output Condition]
(s) Manual arbitrary angle feed selection check signal: MAGJ
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that the manual arbitrary angle feed mode is selected.
[Output Condition]
(t) Simultaneous auto/manual operation selection check signal: MMOVL
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that the simultaneous auto/manual operation mode is selected.
[Output Condition]
– 121 –
2.3.3 Reset and emergency stop signals

(a) External reset signal: ERS
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Resets the control unit. The signal has the same function as the reset key on the MDI panel.
[Operation] When the signal goes high, the control unit operates as follows:
i. Moving control axes are decelerated, then stopped.
ii. After the control axes are stopped, the control unit is reset. The reset signal goes high.
iii. While the ERS signal is high, neither automatic operation nor manual operation can be
executed.
[Use] As the control unit is normally reset by the miscellaneous function M02 (end of program), the
M02 decode signal is used to set the ERS signal high. When provided, the NC reset button
on the machine operator’s panel connects to the ERS signal.
(b) Reset and rewind signal: RRW
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Resets the control unit. At the same time, it rewinds the tape in the input device selected for
automatic operation.
[Operation] When the signal goes high, the control unit operates as follows:
i. Moving control axes are decelerated, then stopped.
iii. When the control unit is reset, the tape in the input equipment is rewound. The rewind
signal goes high.
– In the memory operation mode, the tape of the selected main program is rewound.
– In a mode other than memory operation mode, the tape in the tape reader is re-
wound. However, it is not rewound in the following cases:
a. The input device used in foreground processing is not a tape reader.
b. The tape reader is used in background editing (loading, check, etc. is in prog-
ress).
c. A reeless tape reader is used.
iv. While the RRW signal is high, neither automatic operation nor manual operation can be
executed.
[Use] As M30 (end of tape) resets the control unit and rewinds the tape of the program simulta-
neously, the M30 decode signal is used to set the RRW signal high.
(c) Emergency stop signal: ESP
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Immediately stops the control unit.
[Operation] When the signal goes low, the control unit operates as follows:
i. Moving control axes are immediately stopped after being decelerated by dynamic brak-
ing.
(See note 1 below.)
iii. While the ESP signal is low, the servo system (position control) does not work. During
this time, the signal indicating that the servo system is ready, or the SA signal is low. If
the tool moves during this period, the feed distance is reflected in the current position
data in the control unit. So the control unit can keep track of the current position of the
tool (follow–up function). After the emergency stop state is released, the operation can
be resumed without reexecuting reference position return.
iv. While the ESP signal is low, neither automatic operation nor manual operation can be
executed.
[Use] The emergency stop button on the machine operator’s panel connects to this signal. One
more switch connects to the ESP. It is the second stroke limit switch, which is used to handle
servo system failure.
– 122 –
NOTE 1 A parameter can be specified so that the emergency stop signal does not reset the control unit
but issues an alarm. If a parameter is specified, the control unit is not reset as described in step
ii of (Operation). In this case, the emergency stop state is released only when the reset key
on the MDI panel is pressed or another reset signal (ERS, RRW) is set high after the emergency
stop signal goes high. Even if the emergency stop signal goes high, the system assumes that
the signal is low until the emergency stop state is reset by other means.
(Resetting by emergency stop)
*ESP
Emergency stop
Reset
SA
(For setting emergency stop as an alarm)
*ESP
ERS, RRW, reset key
Emergency stop
Reset
SA
NOTE 2 The control unit monitors the *ESP signal when it is input from the PMC to the NC unit and when
it is sent to the input interface between the machine and the PMC. The interface (connector
pins) between the machine and PMC must not be changed.
(d) Reset signal: RST

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that the control unit is reset.
[Output Condition]
The signal goes high when one of the following conditions is satisfied (see Note 1 below):
i. The reset key is pressed on the MDI panel.
ii. External reset signal ERS goes high.
iii. Reset and rewind signal RRW goes high.
iv. Emergency stop signal *ESP goes low (when a parameter is specified so that the control
unit is reset by the emergency stop signal).
i. Conditions that force the signal to go high are all reset and one second or more has
passed after the signal is set from low to high.
In other words, the signal is output while the conditions resetting the control unit are satisfied.
If the conditions are satisfied for one second or less, the signal is output for one second only.
[Use] The signal is used to reset machine tool sequences or input/output devices that must be reset
when the control unit is reset.
NOTE A parameter can be set to specify that the reset signal is output only when the reset key on the
MDI panel is pressed (condition i). Even if this parameter is specified, the reset signal is
returned from high to low only when all conditions concerning ERS, RRW, and *ESP are
satisfied.
– 123 –
(e) Rewind signal: RWD

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs the control unit that the tape is being rewound.
[Output Condition]
The signal goes high when either of the following conditions is satisfied:
i. Rewinding of the tape in the reeled tape reader is started (by the reset and rewind signal
or by manual operation of the tape reader).
ii. The reset and rewind signal is high, but the tape in the reeled tape reader is not rewound.
A parameter can be specified so that the signal is not set high when condition ii is satisfied.
The signal goes low when either of the following conditions is satisfied:
i. The tape in the reeled tape reader has been rewound.
ii. A hundred milliseconds or longer have passed after the signal is set high by the reset and
rewind signal [condition ii above)
NOTE 1 While the tape in the reeled tape reader is being rewound, the rewind signal is output. The
output period of the rewind signal depends on the length of the tape being rewound. The
minimum period the signal is high cannot be predetermined.
NOTE 2 The rewinding time required for a main program in memory is nearly zero. Before the rewind
signal goes low, the tape of the main program is rewound.
2.3.4 Alarm signals

(a) Alarm signal: AL
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that the control unit is in the alarm state.
[Output Condition]
i. The control unit enters the alarm state.
i. The control unit is reset or the alarm cancel function is executed to release the alarm
state.
Some alarm states can be canceled only after their causes are eliminated. They cannot be
canceled by resetting the control unit or executing the alarm cancel function. If either action
is attempted, the AL signal may go low momentarily. The control unit then returns to the alarm
state, and the AL signal goes high again.
(b) Alarm classification signals: OTALM, OHALM, SVALM, PSALM, SYALM, [TIALM]
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Informs of the current alarm. One the following signals is output according to what the current
alarm is.
Kind of alarm Corresponding output signal Remark

Overtravel alarm OTALM
Overheat alarm OHALM
C
Common to allll
Servo alarm SVALM
system
Program/error operation alarm PSALM
Control unit fault alarm SYALM
Tool post interference alarm TIALM Only for 15–TT
[Output Condition]
i. The control unit enters the corresponding alarm state.
– 124 –
Two or more signals may go high simultaneously.

i. The control unit is reset or the alarm cancel function is executed to cancel the corre-
sponding alarm state.
(c) Velocity control servo alarm ignore signal: DVAL
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Directs the control unit to ignore the velocity control servo alarm. This signal prevents the
control unit from entering the alarm state due to the velocity control servo alarm.
[Operation] While the signal is high, the control unit ignores the velocity control servo alarm [alarm SV013:
IMPROPER VRDY OFF). The control unit does not enter the alarm state due to the velocity
control servo alarm.
If a servo alarm other than the velocity control servo alarm occurs, the control unit enters the
alarm state.
If the velocity control servo alarm has already occurred, the alarm state cannot be released
by switching the DVAL signal from low to high. The control unit ignores the velocity control
servo alarm if it occurs after the signal is set high.
[Use] The signal is used with a safety provision which operates as follows: A limit switch is mounted
on the opening/closing section of a splash guard. When the splash guard is opened, the limit
switch operates, turning off the AC power for the servo unit with the electro magnetic contactor
(MCC). When the AC power is turned off, the velocity control servo alarm occurs. To ignore
this alarm, set the DVAL signal to high. Set the DVAL signal to high and automatic operation
halt signal *SP to low to disable automatic operation.
DVAL
*SP
AC power line
of servo unit MMC
t t
t : 50ms or more
NOTE When the power is turned on, if the level of this signal is high, the servo motor is not excited.
The servo ready signal SA does not go high either. Set the level of this signal to low before
turning on the power. Set the level high, if necessary, after the servo motor has been excited.
– 125 –
2.3.5 Battery alarm

(a) Low battery voltage alarm signal (BATL)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal notifies that the voltage of the battery which backs up the memory has dropped.
[Output Condition]
This signal is turned on when:
i. The voltage of the battery which backs up the memory has dropped below the rated volt-
age. The battery must soon be replaced with a new one. When this signal is turned on,
the CRT displays that the voltage of the battery has dropped.
This signal is turned off when:
ii. The voltage of the battery which backs up the memory has not dropped below the rated
voltage.
(b) Low voltage alarm signal for the absolute position detector battery (PBATL)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal notifies that the voltage of the battery for the absolute position detector, which
maintains the position of the machine when the power to the control unit is off has dropped.
[Output Condition]
i. The voltage of the battery for the absolute position detector has dropped below the rated
voltage. The battery must soon be replaced with a new one.
i. The voltage of the battery for the absolute position detector has not dropped below the
rated voltage.
(c) Zero voltage alarm signal for the absolute position detector battery (PBATZ)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal notifies that the voltage of the battery for the absolute position detector, which
maintains the position of the machine when the power to the control unit is off, is zero.
[Output Condition]
i. The voltage of the battery for the absolute position detector is zero. The battery must be
replaced with a new one before the power to the control unit is turned off.
i. The voltage of the battery for the absolute position detector is more than zero.
– 126 –
2.3.6 Manual continuous feed and incremental feed signals

The following input and output signals determine the way in which manual continuous feed or incremental feed
is executed.
Selection Manual continuous feed Incremental feed

Mode selection J, MJ S, MS
Selection of the axis to move
Selection of the direction to move +J1,
J1 –J1,
J1 +J2,
J2 –J2,
J2 +J3,
J3 –J3,…
J3
the axis
+J1, –J1, +J2, –J2,
Selection of the move amount DIST0 – DIST26
+J3, –J3,…
Selection of feedrate *JV0 – *JV15, RT, ROV1, ROV2
The only difference between manual continuous feed and incremental feed is the method of selecting the feed
distance. In manual continuous feed, the tool continues to be fed while the following signals selecting the feed
axis and direction are high: +J1, –J1, +J2, –J2, +J3, –J3, etc. In incremental feed, the tool is fed the distance
selected by the DIST0 to DIST26 signals.
For the signals selecting the mode, see Section 2.3.2, “Mode Selection Signals.” For rapid traverse feedrate
override signals ROV1 and ROV2, see Section 2.3.14, “Feedrate Override Signals.”
Other signals are described below.
(a) Feed axis and direction selection signals: +J1, –J1, +J2, –J2, +J3, –J3, etc.
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Selects a desired feed axis and direction in manual continuous feed or incremental feed. The
sign (+ or –) in the signal name indicates the feed direction. The number following J indicates
the number of the control axis.
+J 1
1 ……First axis is fed
2 ……Second axis is fed
3 ……Third axis is fed

: :
: :
+ ……Feed in positive direction
– ……Feed in negative direction
[Operation] When the signal is high, the control unit operates as described below.
i. When manual continuous feed or incremental feed is allowed, the control unit moves the
specified axis in the specified direction.
ii. In manual continuous feed, the control unit continues to feed the axis while the signal is
high.
J
+J1
1st axis move
– 127 –
iii. In incremental feed, the control unit feeds the specified axis the distance selected by in-
cremental feed distance selecting signals DIST0 to DIST26. Then the control unit stops
it. Even if the J signal is set low while the axis is being fed, the control unit does not stop
feeding it.
To feed the axis again, set the J signal low, then set it high again.
S
+J1
1st axis move
NOTE 1 If both the positive direction and negative direction signals of the same axis are simultaneously
set high, neither the positive direction nor the negative direction is selected. The control unit
assumes that both these J signals are set low.
NOTE 2 Up to two axes can be controlled in manual operation. If three or more signals selecting the
feed axis and direction are set high, the first two signals are validated. If the optical extension
function for simultaneous axis control is added, all control axes can be simultaneously
controlled even in manual operation.
NOTE 3 If the feed axis and direction selection signals are set high before the manual continuous feed
mode or incremental feed mode is selected, these signals are invalidated. After the manual
continuous feed more or incremental feed mode is selected, set these signals low, then set
them high again.
J
+J1
1st axis move
Axis is fed again after signals

+J1 is have turned to low once.
ineffective
during this
period.
NOTE 4 If the control unit is reset while the feed axis and direction selection signals are set high or if
a feed axis and direction signal goes high while the control unit is in the reset state, the signal
cannot be validated by releasing the reset state. After the reset state is released, set these
signals low, then set them high again.
J
Reset
+J1
1st axis move
Axis is fed again

Move is stopped +J1 is after signals
by resetting ineffective have turned to low
during this once.
period.
+J1 is ineffective
during this period.
(b) Manual feedrate override signals: *JV0 to *JV15
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Selects a feedrate in manual continuous feed or incremental feed. These signals are sixteen
binary code signals, which correspond to the override values as follows:
– 128 –
(2
15
Override value (%) = 0.01% × i
Vi)
i0
where
Vi = 0 when the *JVi signal is high
Vi = 1 when the *JVi signal is low
The override value is assumed to be zero when all of the signals, (*JV0 to *JV15) are set high
or low. When this occurs, the feed is stopped. The override value can be specified in the
range of 0% to 655.34% in units of 0.01%. Some examples are listed below.
*JV0 – *JV15
Override value (%)
15 12 8 4 0
1111 1111 1111 1111 0
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01
1111 1111 1111 0101 0.10
1111 1111 1001 1011 1.00
1111 1100 0001 0111 10.00
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00
0110 0011 1011 1111 400.00
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34
0000 0000 0000 0000 0
[Operation] If rapid traverse selection signal RT is low during manual continuous feed or incremental feed,
the manual feedrate specified by the parameter is overridden by the value specified by the
JVi signal.
NOTE The JVi signals also serve as the override signals during dry run in automatic operation mode.
(c) Manual rapid traverse selection signal: RT

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects a rapid traverse feedrate for manual continuous feed or incremental feed.
[Operation] When the signal goes high, the control unit operates as described below:
i. The control unit executes the manual continuous feed or incremental feed at a rapid tra-
verse feedrate. The rapid traverse override is validated.
ii. When the signal is switched from high to low or vice versa during manual continuous feed
or incremental feed, the feedrate is decelerated until it reaches zero, then increased to
the specified value. During acceleration and deceleration, the feed axis and direction
selection signal can be kept high.
J
+J1
RT
1st axis move
Rapid traverse
speed
Feedrate selected by manual

feedrate override
CAUTION After the power is turned on, the stored stroke limit function does not work until the reference
position return is completed. During this period, the control unit ignores the RT signal, if it
is set high, and keeps moving the tool at a feedrate selected by the manual feedrate override
signal. A parameter can be specified so that the rapid traverse is validated before the
reference position return is completed.
– 129 –
(d) Incremental Feed Distance Selection Signals: DIST0 to DIS26

[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Selects the feed distance per step of incremental feed. Twenty seven binary code signals
correspond to feed distances as follows:
(2
26
Feed distance = Least increment unit × i
Vi)
i0
where
Vi = 0 when the DISTi signal is low
Vi = 1 when the DISTi signal is high
The feed distance can be specified in the range of 0 to 99,999,999. When a value outside
this range is specified, zero is assumed.
[Operation] Each time a step of incremental feed is executed (the feed axis and direction selection signal
is set low, then high), the tool is fed the distance specified by the signal.
CAUTION Since a value is entered in a specified increment unit, the actual feed distance depends on
the increment unit and the input system, metric or inch. An identical value may result in
different feed distances if the axes have different increment units.
NOTE A parameter can be specified so that the feed distance of incremental feed can be determined
by manual handle feed distance signals, MP1, MP2, MP4 instead of the DIST signals. See
Section 2.3.7, “Manual Handle Feed Signals.”
2.3.7 Manual handle feed signals

(a) Manual handle feed axis selection signals: HS1A, HS1B, HS1C, HS1D; HS2A, HS2B, HS2C, HS2D;
HS3A, HS3B, HS3C, HS3D
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Selects the axis of manual handle feed. A set of four code signals, A, B, C, and D is provided
for each manual pulse generator. (Up to three generators can be used.) The number in the
signal name indicates the number of the manual pulse generator to be used.
HS1A 1 ……First manual pulse generator
2 ……Second manual pulse generator
3 ……Third manual pulse generator
Code signals A, B, C, and D correspond to the feed axes as listed in the following table:
Manual handle feed axis selection
Feed axis
HSnD HSnC HSnB HSnA
0 0 0 0 No selection
(None of axis is fed)
0 0 0 1 1st axis
0 0 1 0 2nd axis
0 0 1 1 3rd axis
0 1 0 0 4th axis
0 1 0 1 5th axis
0 1 1 0 6th axis
– 130 –
(b) Manual handle feed distance selection signals: MP1, MP2, MP4
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Selects the feed distance per pulse of the manual pulse generator in manual handle feed.
Each time a pulse is output by the manual pulse generator in manual handle feed, the tool
is feed the distance selected by the signal.
Move amount
selection signals Move amount ((manual handle feed))
MP4 MP2 MP1
0 0 0 Least input increment × 1
0 0 1 Least input increment × 10
0 1 0 Least input increment × n1
or least input increment × 100
0 1 1 Least input increment × n
(0: Signal low 1: Signal high) 1: n is set by parameter. (Range 1 to 200)
CAUTION Since the value is entered in a specified increment unit, the actual feed distance depends
on the increment unit and the input system, metric or inch. An identical value may result in
different feed distances if the axes have different increment units.
NOTE A parameter can be specified so that the feed distance in manual step feed can be selected
by the MP signals. When this parameter is specified, the feed distance is determined as shown
below:
Move amount
selection signals Move amount ((incremental feed))
MP4 MP2 MP1
0 0 0
Least input increment × 1
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
Least input increment × 1,000
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
2.3.8 Three–dimensional handle feed signals

(1) Signal for executing handle feed in the direction of the tool axis: ALNGH
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Validates the function of handle feed in the direction of the tool axis.
[Operation] If the signal goes high when the following conditions are satisfied, the system enters the mode
of handle feed in the direction of the tool axis:
⋅ The system is in the handle mode.
⋅ The axis selection signal of the first manual pulse generator is in the mode of handle feed
in the direction of the tool axis specified in the parameter.
If the signal goes high when the following conditions are satisfied, the system enters the mode
of handle interrupt in the direction of the tool axis:
⋅ The system is in the manual handle interrupt mode.
⋅ The system is in a cutting feed mode, such as G01, G02 or G03.
– 131 –
in the direction of the tool axis specified in the parameter.
(2) Signal for executing handle feed perpendicular to the tool axis: RGHTH
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Validates the function of handle feed perpendicular to the tool axis.
of perpendicular handle feed to the tool axis:
perpendicular to the tool axis as specified in the parameter.
of handle interrupt perpendicular to the tool axis:
perpendicular to the tool axis as specified in the parameter.
(3) Signal for rotating the tool around the center of the tool tip with the handle: RNDH
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Validates the function of handle rotation around the center of the tool tip.
of handle rotation around the center of the tool tip:
⋅ The axis selection signal of the first manual pulse generator is in the mode of handle rota-
tion around the center of the tool tip as specified in the parameter.
of handle interrupt around the center of the tool tip:
⋅ The axis selection signal of the first manual pulse generator is in the mode of handle rota-
tion around the center of the tool tip as specified in the parameter.
(4) Signal for changing the tool length compensation in the direction of the tool axis with the handle: CNGTL
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Validates the function for changing the tool length compensation in the direction of the tool
axis.
for changing the tool length compensation in the direction of the tool axis:
⋅ The system is in the mode of tool length compensation in the direction of the tool axis.
(G43.1)
⋅ The axis selection signal of the first manual pulse generator is in the mode for changing the
tool length compensation in the direction of the tool axis.
– 132 –
2.3.9 Manual interruption function for three–dimensional coodinate conversation

(1) SIgnal indicating that three–dimensional coordinate conversion is in the manual interruption mode :
3DMI
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Posts that three–dimensional cordinate conversion is in the manual interruption mode.
[Output Condition]
This signal is made high only when all of the follwing conditions are met :
1 During simultaneous manual and automatic operation mode (including manual interrup-
tion)
2 During three–dimensional coordinate conversion (i.e. while blocks G68 to G69 are being
executed.)
3 During cuting mode (i.e. while blocks from a G code for cuting, such as G01, G02, or G03,
to G00 are being executed.)
4 When feed in the tool axis direction or the direction perpendicular to the tool axis or rota-
tion around the tool tip center is not selected for manual interruption (i.e. when the AL-
INGH, RGHTH, and RNDH input signals are all low.)
5 While the playback function is not being executed
6 When the NOT3DM signal is low (this signal specifies whether the manual interruption
function for three–dimensional coordinate conversion is enabled.
(2) Signal that specifies whether the manual interruption function for three–dimensinal coordinate conversion
is enabled : NOT3DM
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Specifies whether the manual interruption function for three–dimensional coordinate conver-
sion is enabled or disabled.
[Operation] When this signal is made low, the manual interruption function for three–dimensional cordi-
nate conversion is enabled. When this signal is made high, the manual interruption function
for three–dimensional coordinate conversion is disabled.
2.3.10 Manual arbitrary angle feed

The input signals for manual arbitrary angle feed are listed below.
Manual arbitrary angle feed

Mode selection AGJ, MAGJ
AJP1A, AJP1B, AJP1C, AJP1D
Selection of an axis to be moved
AJP2A, AJP2B, AJP2C, AJP2D
Selection of a moving direction
AJSTB, AJA0 – AJA12
(An angle)
(+ or –) +AJ,, –AJ
Selection of a move amount
Selection of a feedraete JV0 – JV15
For details about the mode selection, see Section 2.3.2

A feedrate is selected in the same way as for continuous manual feed/manual step feed. See (b) of Section
2.3.6. If the override is set to 100%, the feedrate set in parameter No. 1411 is used.
(a) Manual arbitrary angle feed axis selection signals (AJP1A, AJP1B, AJP1C, AJP1D;)
(AJP2A, AJP2B, AJP2C, AJP2D;)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals select axes (plane) in which manual arbitrary angle feed is to be performed.
Manual arbitrary angle feed can be performed on a plane made up of two given axes, so these
signals select the two axes composing the plane.
– 133 –
Two sets of signals are provided. One set is for selecting the first axis, and the other set is
for selecting the second axis. Each set consists of four code signals: A, B, C, and D. A num-
ber following AJP in a signal name indicates whether the signal selects the first or second axis
of a plane.
AJP1A
1 ……Selection of the first axis of the plane in which manual arbitrary angle
feed is performed
2 ……Selection of the second axis of the plane in which manual arbitrary angle
feed is performed
An axis is selected by a combination of code signals A, B, C, and D as follows:
Manual arbitrary angle feed axes

selection Axis
AJPnD AJPnC AJPnB AJPnA
0 0 0 0 (Not used)
0 0 0 1 1st axis
0 0 1 0 2nd axis
0 0 1 1 3rd axis
0 1 0 0 4th axis
0 1 0 1 5th axis
0 1 1 0 6th axis
(0: Signal low, 1:Signal high)

To perform manual arbitrary angle feed in the XY plane (let the X–axis be the first controlled axis and the Y–axis
be the second controlled axis), for example, set the signals as follows:
AJP2D AJP2C AJP2B AJP2A AJP1D AJP1C AJP1B AJP1A
00100001
Second axis of the plane First axis of the plane
= second controlled axis (Y) = first controlled axis (X)
(b) Manual arbitrary angle feed direction selection signals(AJSTB, AJA0 to AJA12)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals select a direction in which manual arbitrary angle feed is to be performed. A
direction in the plane is specified as an absolute (not incremental) angleθ, where, the positive
direction of the first axis of the plane is assumed to be 0deg, the negative direction of the first
axis to be 180deg, and the negative direction of the second axis to be 270deg.
+2nd axis
-1st axis +1st axis
-2nd axis
These input signals are divided into two groups. One group consists of code signals AJA0
to AJA12, which specify an angle. The other group consists of strobe signal AJSTB, which
reports that the code signals are valid. The relation between the code signals and a selected
angle is expressed as follows:
– 134 –
(2i + Vi)
12
Angle = 1/16 deg +
i0
where, Vi = 0 if AJAi is low

Vi = 1 if AJAi is high
The signals therefore have the following weights:
AJA0 : 1/16 deg AJA7 : 8deg
AJA4 : 1 deg AJA11 : 128deg
AJA5 : 2 deg AJA12 : 256deg
AJA6 : 4 deg
[Operation] The control unit reads the angle when strobe signal AJSTB goes high. The read angle is
maintained until AJSTB goes high again. The direction can be changed while manual arbi-
trary angle feed is in progress. If a new angle is specified, the direction is changed immediate-
ly according to the new angle.
NOTE If the specified angle is 360.0deg or larger, the angle obtained by subtracting 360.0 from the
specified value is assumed.
(c) Manual arbitrary angle feed signals (+AJ, –AJ)

[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Manual arbitrary angle feed is performed in a plane defined by axes.
There are two manual arbitrary angle feed signals: +AJ and –AJ. +AJ causes a feed in the
direction selected by the direction selection signals, and –AJ causes a feed in the direction
opposite the selected direction (direction is 180deg different).
[Operation] When a manual arbitrary angle feed signal goes high, the control unit functions as described
below.
i. If manual arbitrary angle feed is enabled, the tool is fed in the direction selected by the
direction selection signals (+AJ) (or in the opposite direction (–AJ)) in a plane defined by
the two axes selected by the axis selection signals.
ii. The tool is fed while the feed signal is high. When the feed signal goes low, the tool stops.
iii. The tool is fed at a feedrate selected by manual feedrate override. If rapid traverse selec-
tion RT goes high, the maximum feedrate for manual feed results. Rapid traverse cannot
be performed.
NOTE 1 If +AJ and –AJ go high at the same time, both signals are ignored.
NOTE 2 If a feed signal is already high before the manual arbitrary angle feed mode is selected, the feed
signal is invalid. In this case, after the manual arbitrary angle feed mode is selected, the feed
signal needs to go low, then go high again.
NOTE 3 If the system is reset when a feed signal is left high, or if a feed signal goes high when a reset
is in progress, that feed signal is invalid even when the reset is released. In this case, after the
reset is released, the feed signal needs to go low, then go high again.
NOTE 4 Manual arbitray angle feed is not correctly performed if the increment systems for the two axes
are different.
2.3.11 Simultaneous automatic and manual operation

Automatic operation and manual operation can be performed simultaneously using this function.
Manual operation in the simultaneous automatic and manual operation is an interrupt by manual feed during
automatic operation. There are the following two types of interrupt:
(i) Cutting axis interrupt
An interrupt is made by manual operation for an axis along which cutting feed is in progress.
– 135 –
Continuous manual feed, incremental feed, and manual handle feed can be used for interrupt.
For example, cutting along an axis can be interrupted to change the depth of cut on that axis during auto-
matic operation.
(ii) Setup interrupt
An interrupt is made by manual operation for an axis along which a tool is not moved during automatic op-
eration.
Continuous manual feed, incremental feed, and manual handle feed can be used for interrupt.
The interrupt type can be selected for each axis by parking signals (PK1, PK2, PK3, ...) input from the PMC.
Selecting the simultaneous automatic and manual mode
The table below lists the states of mode selection input signals to select the simultaneous automatic and manu-
al operation mode.

T D MEM EDT MOVL H S J AGJ
Automatic/manual Either one is equal to 1,
simultaneous Either one is equal to 1. 1 the J and H are equal to 1, o
operation or the S and H are equal to 1.
The following example shows the case where automatic operation is switched to simultaneous automatic and
manual operation starting with a certain block.
1 Program command Mxx; switches automatic operation to simultaneous automatic and manual operation.
Program command M∆∆ ; returns simultaneous automatic and manual operation to automatic operation.
Set parameters so that Mxx; and M∆∆ ; do not direct buffering the next block.
Automatic operation
N10Mxx ;
Automatic/manual simultaneous operation
N20M∆∆ ;
Automatic operation
2 The following time chart shows the operation for block Mxx;:
Next block
M command Mxx ;
Code signal M0-M31
Strobe signal MF
Automatic/manual simultaneous
operation selection signal MOVL
Signal for selecting manual mode H/J/S
End signal
Set a signal (H, J, or S) high for selecting a manual mode after turning on signal MOVL for selecting simulta-
neous automatic and manual operation, or set them high at the same time.
The simultaneous automatic and manual mode is selected by the procedure described above.
For each axis, either a cutting axis interrupt or setup interrupt is selected by the state of the parking signal
for the axis when the simultaneous automatic and manual operation mode is selected. Specify the desired
interrupt type in the parking signal for each axis before turning on signal MOVL and a signal for selecting
a manual mode.
– 136 –
3 The following time chart shows the operation for block M∆∆ ; which switches simultaneous automatic and
manual operation to automatic operation:
Next block
M command M∆∆ ;
Code signal M0-M31
Strobe signal MF
Signal for selecting manual mode H/J/S
End signal
Set signal MOVL low for selecting simultaneous automatic and manual operation after setting a signal low
for selecting a manual mode, or turn them low at the same time.
Assume that a switch named “Manual handle interrupt” is prepared on the machine operator’s panel to
enable the operator to interrupt the cutting axis by manual handle feed to change the cutting depth. If the
sequence is set as shown in the following time chart, operation immediately changes from automatic op-
eration to simultaneous automatic and manual operation and it is possible to interrupt the cutting axis by
manual operation.
MDI
Tape operation Incremental feed
Manual reference
Memory operation
point return
Tape ending Manual handle feed
ON
OFF
Z axis manual handle interrupt
Memory command selection

signal MEM
Z-axis manual handle interrupt switch
Z-axis parking signal PK3
Manual handle feed selection signal H
Selecting the interrupt type

The interrupt type is switched between cutting axis interrupt and setup interrupt according to the states of park-
ing signals (PK1, PK2, PK3, ...) when the simultaneous automatic and manual mode is selected. The following
– 137 –
describes the precautions when the interrupt type is switched during simultaneous automatic and manual op-
eration.
The timing for switching the interrupt type is different for single block operation and continuous operation.
1 For single block operation
Excution block :
: Block currently being executed Next block
Kth axis (HIGH) :

PARKING signal (LOW) :
Kth axis interrupt type
Setting interrupt type :
Cutting axis interrupt type :
(1) (2)
The interrupt type changes at timing (2), which starts the next block. The interrupt type remains as cutting
axis interrupt even if the parking signal goes high between (1) and (2). The interrupt type does not change
until the next block is started even if the parking signal is switched while execution of the current block is
in progress.
2 For continuous operation
Execution block
: Block currently Next block Next but one
being executed block
Kth axis (HIGH) :

PARKING signal (LOW) :

Cutting axis interrupt type:
(3) (4) (5)
The interrupt from type changes at timing (5), which starts the block two blocks from the current block. The
interrupt type remains as cutting axis interrupt even if the parking signal goes high between (3) and (5).
The interrupt type does not change until the block two blanks from the current block is started even if the
parking signal is switched, while execution of the current block is in progress.
3 When reset
RESET signal (HIGH) :

(LOW) :
Kth axis (HIGH) :

(LOW) :

Cutting interrupt type :
(6) (7)
The interrupt type changes at timing (7).

Manual operation in the simultaneous automatic and manual mode
Automatic operation in the simultaneous automatic and manual mode is the same as normal automatic opera-
tion. Only manual operation is explained here.
1 Conditions for interrupt (in relation to automatic operation)
The table below lists the conditions where an interrupt can be made by manual operation.
– 138 –
Cutting axis interrupt type Setting interrupt type

During positioning mode
Disable Enable
(G00 mode)
During cutting mode
Enable Enable
(G01, G02, and G03)
During thread cutting mode Enable Enable
As indicated in the above table, setup interrupt is not affected by the state of automatic operation. For cut-
ting axis interrupt, interrupts are possible in modes other than the positioning mode.
2 Values for feed
The table below lists the distance fed along the axis, feedrate, and time constant for each interrupt type.

Same as normal manual Same as normal
Move distance
operation manual operation
Same as normal
Move rate (Note)
manual operation
Time constant selected at the Same as normal
Time constant
automatic operation side manual operation
NOTE The feedrate along the axis subject to the cutting axis interrupt is the result of superimposition
of the feedrate by the manual interrupt on the feedrate in automatic operation. If the resultant
feedrate exceeds the maximum cutting feedrate for that axis, it is clamped at the maximum
cutting feedrate.
3 Signals
The table below lists the states of signals for each interrupt type.

Absolute ON/OFF Not affected (always off) Affected
Interlock It is affected and does not move when the signal is on.
Machine lock It is affected and does not move when the signal is on.
It is not affected and the machine moves in the + direction
Mirror image
by the plus command even if the signal is on.
4 Indications
The table below lists the states of indications for each interrupt type.

Absolute coordinate value Not updated Updated
Relative coordinate value Updated Updated
Machine coordinate value Updated Updated
NOTE 1 Movement by manual operation automatically stops when the interrupt type is changed.
NOTE 2 Movement by manual operation automatically stops when automatic operation changes from
cutting to rapid traverse or from rapid traverse to cutting.
NOTE 3 If acceleration/deceleration is performed before interpolation, movement by manual operation
automatically stops when automatic operation changes from threading to cutting or from
cutting to threading.
NOTE 4 During single block operation, movement by automatic operation stops after each block; but
movement by manual operation does not stop. Stop manual operation to start the next block.
The above are precautions on cutting axis interrupt and does not apply to setup interrupt.
NOTE 5 To perform simultaneous automatic and manual operation for manual handle feed, the manual
handle interrupt option is required.
– 139 –
2.3.12 Function to compensate for manual intervention during automatic operation

The function to compensate for manual intervention during automatic operation can be used when specifying
an M code without buffering. The procedure is described below, using an example in which an M code without
buffering is specified with a move command.
(1) G00 G91 Z–50. Mxxx ; is specified (Mxxx being an M code without buffering).
(2) Code signals M0 to M31 are output, while at the same time, strobe signal MF goes high. Z–axis distribution
then begins.
(3) Upon detecting that signal MF has gone high, read the code signals at the PMC and perform the requested
operations, including manual intervention. To perform these operations after a move command, specified
in the same block, has been executed, wait until distribution end signal DEN or IPEN goes high. (The timing
chart shows a case where the operator waits for the distribution process to end.)
(4) Once the requested operations have been completed, select absolute switch signal ABS and set manual
intervention compensation request signal MIGET high.
When the codes for the spindle–speed function, tool function, second miscellaneous function, etc. are spe-
cified, wait for all these functions to be completed before attempting to set finish signal FIN high.
(5) After signal FIN has maintained its high state for a specified time, the control unit sets signal MF low to notify
the PMC that it has received signal FIN.
(6) Upon detecting that signal MF has gone low, set signal FIN low at the PMC. Do not change the state of
signals ABS or MIGET.
(7) Setting signal FIN low completes the sequence of the miscellaneous function. The control unit then pro-
ceeds with the compensation for manual intervention and, when completed, sets manual intervention com-
pensation finish signal MIFIN high.
(8) Upon detecting that signal MIFIN has gone high, set signal MIGET low to notify the control unit of the receipt
of signal MIFIN.
(9) Upon detecting that signal MIFIN has gone low, the control unit sets signal MIFIN low. This completes the
processing of the manual intervention compensation function.
(10)The control unit starts to read the next NC code.
The timing chart for the above procedure is shown below.
Example Timing chart for function to compensate for manual intervention during automatic operation
(1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)(9)(10)

M code Mxxx
Move command
Code signals M0-M31
Strobe signal MF
Distribution end signal DEN, IPEN
PMC operations
ABS switch ABS
Manual intervention
compensation request
signal MIGET
Finish signal FIN
Manual intervention T-FIN
compensation finish
signal MIFIN
Reading the next block
– 140 –
(a) Manual intervention compensation request signal (MIGET: #1/#2)

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal indicates a request for manual intervention compensation during automatic op-
eration.
[Operation] When this signal goes high during automatic operation, the control unit compensates for
manual intervention after the current distribution process has been completed and finish sig-
nal FIN (#1/#2), for an M code without buffering, is received.
Upon completion of the compensation process, the control unit outputs manual intervention
compensation finish signal MIFIN (#1/#2). Upon detecting that this signal has gone high, set
signal MIGET low. The control unit sets signal MIFIN low in response to low–state signal MI-
GET. Once this procedure has been completed, the control unit starts reading the next block.
NOTE 1 Select absolute switch signal ABS and set signal MIGET high before returning signal FIN for
an M code without buffering.
NOTE 2 Keep signal MIGET low while the control unit is in the reset state or has just started automatic
operation.
NOTE 3 Alarm PS059 occurs if signal MIGET goes high when there is no M code without buffering (the
block has already been read).
(b) Manual intervention compensation finish signal (MIFIN: #1/#2)

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal indicates that manual intervention compensation has been completed during au-
tomatic operation.
[Output Condition]
This signal goes high when the manual intervention compensation process, activated by sig-
nal MIGET, has been completed. Upon detecting that signal MIGET has gone low, the control
unit sets signal MIFIN low.
2.3.13 Reference position return

Manual reference position return is performed using one of the following methods:
– Grid method: The reference position is determined based on an electric grid which is formed using the
one–rotation signal from a position detector.
– Using a magnetic switch: The reference position is determined as the point at which a proximity
switch mounted on the machine is turned on.
The signals related to manual reference position return inthese methods are listed below:
Grid system Magne switch system

Mode selection J
Reference point return selection ZRN, MZRN
Selection of an axis to move +J1, –J1, +J2, –J2, +J3, –J3,…
Selection of a feedrate ROV1, ROV2
Deceleration signal DEC1, DEC2, DEC3,…
Reference point proximity signal ZD1, ZD2, ZD3,… (None)
Reference point arrival signal (Grid of each axis) ZD1, ZD2, ZD3,…
Reference point return end signal ZP1, ZP2, ZP3,…
Manual reference position return is performed using the signals listed above in the following procedure:
(1) Select the continuous manual feed mode (J), and set the manual reference position return selection signal
(ZRN) high.
(2) Feed a target axis toward the reference position by making an appropriate feed axis direction selection
signal (+J1, –J1, +J2, –J2, ...) high.
– 141 –
(3) While the feed axis direction selection signal is high, rapid traverse takes place along that axis. Although
the rapid traverse override signals (ROV1, ROV2) are valid, the override is generally set to 100%.
(4) When the reference position is approached, a limit switch installed on the machine is turned on, making
the deceleration signal (*DEC1, *DEC2, *DEC3, ...) low. Consequently, the feedrate is decelerated to 0,
then the tool is fed at a constant, low speed (reference position return FL feedrate specified by parameter
setting).
(5) When the deceleration signal goes high again after the limit switch for deceleration is passed, the operation
varies depending on the method used for manual reference position return. If the grid method is used with-
out reference position proximity signals, the tool is fed with the feedrate unchanged, then the tool stops
at the first grid point (electric grid point).
Multi–axes system only.
If the method of using a magnetic switch is used, the tool is further decelerated to a constant, low speed
(reference position return FL feedrate specified by parameter setting), then the tool stops at the point when
the reference position arrival signal (ZP1, ZP2, ZP3, ...) goes high.
(6) Upon confirmation that the current position is in the effective area, the reference position return end signal
(ZP1, ZP2, ZP3, ...) goes high.
Step (2) and subsequent steps are performed independently for each axis. The standard specifications permit
simultaneous operation for up to two axes. If the simultaneous controllable axes expansion option is provided,
simultaneous movement for all controlled axes is possible.
If the feed axis direction selection signal (+J1, –J1, +J2, –J2, ...) goes low between steps (2) and (5), the tool
is stopped at once, and reference position return is assumed to be canceled. If the signal goes high again,
operation resumes from step (3) (rapid traverse).
The timing charts for the basic procedures are given below.
1) Grid method (when no reference position proximity signal is used)
J
ZRN
+J1
DEC1
*
Grid
ZP1
Feedrate
– 142 –
2) Grid method (when a reference position proximity signal is used)
J
ZRN
+J1
* DEC1
ZD1
Grid
ZP1
Feedrate
3) Method of using a magnetic switch
J
ZRN
+J1
*DEC1
ZD1
ZP1
Feedrate
– 143 –
(a) Manual reference position return selection signal (ZRN)

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal selects manual reference position return. Manual reference position return is a
kind of continuous manual feed. Therefore, to select manual reference position return, it is
required that the continuous manual feed mode be selected and that the manual reference
position return selection signal be set high.
When automatic operation and manual operation are done simultaneously, manual refer-
ence position return cannot be performed.
[Operation] When the manual reference position return selection signal goes high, the control unit func-
tions as described below.
i. If continuous manual feed selection J is low, the control unit ignores the manual reference
position return selection signal.
ii. If simultaneous automatic/manual operation is in progress, manual reference position re-
turn is not permitted. As a result, manual operation is assumed not to be selected. Auto-
matic operation continues.
iii. If manual operation is in progress, manual reference position return is enabled. In this
case, manual reference position return selection check signal MZRN goes high.
NOTE If the ZRN status changes from low to high or high to low during continuous manual feed, the
feedrate is decelerated to 0, then it is accelerated to a specified feedrate for manual reference
position return or continuous manual feed. The operation continues at that feedrate. During
that time, the feed axis direction selection signal may remain high.
(b) Manual reference position return selection check signal (MZRN)

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal reports that manual reference position return has been selected.
[Output Condition]
This signal goes high when:
– Manual reference position return has been selected.
– The selection of manual reference position return has terminated
– 144 –
(c) Feed Axis Direction Selection Signal

For details about this signal, see (a) of (Subsec. 2.3.6), “Feed Axis Direction Selection Signal.” Here,
only notes on use of reference position return are given.
NOTE 1 The direction of reference position return is predetermined for each axis. If the tool is fed in the
opposite direction to the predetermined direction in manual reference position return, the
deceleration signal goes low, and the tool is returned to the point at which the deceleration
signal goes high again (that is, the point where the deceleration limit switch would be
encountered if the tool were fed in the predetermined direction). Then reference position return
is performed automatically in the predetermined direction.
J
ZRN
-J1
*DEC1
Grid
ZR1
Feedrate
NOTE 2 When reference position return is selected, an axis whose reference position return end signal
is already high or an axis whose reference position return end signal was set high upon
completion of reference position return is locked, and movement along that axis is disabled
while the reference position return selection signal (ZRN) is high. To perform movement along
such an axis, ZRN must be set low, and the feed axis direction selection signal must be set low
then set high again.
– 145 –
(d) Reference position return deceleration signals (DEC1, DEC2, DEC3,...)

[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals decelerate the feedrate for manual reference position return so that the refer-
ence position is approached at a low feedrate. In the grid method, these signals are also used
for selecting one grid point among multiple grid points.
The deceleration signals are provided for axes in a one–to–one correspondence. A number
appended to a deceleration signal represents a controlled axis number.
DEC1
1 ……Reference position return deceleration signal for the first axis
2 ……Reference position return deceleration signal for the second axis
3 ……Reference position return deceleration signal for the third axis

: :
: :
[Operation] For the operation of the control unit in response to the deceleration signal, see the description
of the basic procedure for reference position return.
(e) Reference position proximity signals/reference position arrival signals (ZD1, ZD2, ZD3,...) (Multi–
axes system only)
NOTE These signals are not interface signals between the PMC and control unit.
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] The function of these signals varies depending on the method used for reference position re-
turn.
If the grid method is used, these signals indicate that the reference position is approached.
The next grid point is the reference position. These signals need not necessarily be used.
If they are not used, the reference position proximity signal is assumed to be always high.
So, the first grid point encountered after the deceleration signal goes high again becomes the
reference position.
If the method of using a magnetic switch is used, these signals indicate that the reference
position has been reached. They are provided for axes in a one–to–one correspondence.
A number appended to a signal represents a controlled axis number.
ZD1
1 ……Reference position proximity/arrival signal for the first axis
2 ……Reference position proximity/arrival signal for the second axis
3 ……Reference position proximity/arrival signal for the third axis

: :
: :
These signals must be connected to the control unit directly, not via the PMC.
[Operation] For the operation of the control unit in response to these reference position proximity/arrival
signals, see the description of the basic procedure for reference position return.
– 146 –
(f) Reference position return end signals (ZP1, ZP2, ZP3,...)

[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] These signals report that the tool is at the reference position on a controlled axis.
These signals are provided for axes in a one–to–one correspondence. A number appended
to a signal represents a controlled axis number.
ZP1
1 ……Reference position return end signal for the first axis
2 ……Reference position return end signal for the second axis
3 ……Reference position return end signal for the third axis

: :
: :
[Output Condition]
These signals go high when:
i. Manual reference position return is completed, and the current position is in the effective
area.
ii. Automatic reference position return (G28) is completed, and the current position is in the
effective area.
iii. Reference position return check (G27) is completed normally, and the current position
is in the effective area.
These signals go low when:
i. The tool has moved from the reference position.
ii. An emergency stop is applied.
iii. A servo alarm is raised.
(g) Second reference position return end signals (ZP21, ZP22, ZP23,...)
Third reference position return end signals (ZP31, ZP32, ZP33,...)
Fourth reference position return end signals (ZP41, ZP42, ZP43,...)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] The second, third, and fourth reference position end signals report the tool is at the second,
third, and fourth reference positions on a controlled axis, respectively. These signals are pro-
vided for axes in a one–to–one correspondence. A numeric character appended to the end
of a signal represents a controlled axis number, and a numeric character immediately follow-
ing ZP represents a reference position number.
ZP21
1 ……Return end signal for the first axis
2 ……Return end signal for the second axis
3 ……Return end signal for the third axis

: :
: :
2 ……End of second reference position return
3 ……End of third reference position return
4 ……End of fourth reference position return
[Output Condition]
i. The second, third, or fourth reference position return (G30) is completed, and the current
position is in the effective area.
i. The tool has moved from the reference position.
ii. An emergency stop is applied.
iii. A servo alarm is raised.
– 147 –
2.3.14 Dog–less reference position setting function

This function performs the following for machine tools with an absolute position detector : Moves the
tool by manual continuous feed near the reference position specified for each axis and sets the refer-
ence position for the reference position return mode without a deceleration signal for reference posi-
tion return. The reference position for the machine can be set to an arbitrary position without a dece-
leeation signal.
(1) Setting the reference position
(a) Position the tool immediately before the zero point by moving the tool in the direction specified in ZMIx
of parameter No. 1006 by manual continuous feed.
(b) Enter the + or – feed axis direction selection signal for the axis in the zero point return mode.
(c) The tool is positioned at the grid closest to the current position and the absolute position detector
stores the position as the reference position. The set reference position is maintained after the power
is turned off. It is not necessary to set the reference position again the next time the power is turned
on.
Example When setting the reference position for the X–axis
ZRN mode
+X or -X
(PMC → NC)
X-axis V
X-axis grid
Reference position
Stop position
(2) Reference position return

(a) After the reference position is established, when the + or – feed axis selection aignal for the axis is input
in the reference position return mode, the tol is returned to the reference position by rapid traverse,
regardless of the sign (+ or –) of the feed axis direction selection signal.
(3) Resetting the reference position
The reference position for the control axes specified by GRDx of parameter No. 1007 can be reset as many
times as necessary in the zero position return mode without turning the power off and on again.
(a) Position the tool immediately before the zero point by moving the tool in the direction specified in ZMIx
of parameter No. 1006 by manual continuous feed.
(b) Enter the + or – feed axis direction selection signal for the axis in the zero point return mode.
(c) The tol is positioned at the grid closest to the current position and absolute position detector stores
the position as the reference position. If you sre not satisfied with the position, however, you may reen-
ter the + or – feed axis direction selection signal to position the tool at the next grid. When the reference
position is finally determined, set the parameter for the absolute position detector (bit APZx of No.
1815) to 1 in the MDI mode to store the reference position in the absolute position detector.
(d) After this, the tool is returned to the reference position by rapid traverse with the + or – feed axis direc-
tion selection signal for the axis in the reference position return mode.
Example When resetting the reference position for the X–axis
ZRN mode
+X or -X
(PMC → NC)
X-axis V New reference position
X-axis grid
Stop position
– 148 –
(4) Maintaining the reference position

(a) The absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder) maintains the set reference position after the
power is turned off.
2.3.15 Floating reference position return

A floating reference position is a position of the machine used as some reference for machine operation. This
position need not be a fixed position, but can change in some cases.
An example of using a floating reference position is introduced here. In general, a lathe allows its tool to be
exchanged at any position that does not interfere with a workpiece, tail stock, and so forth. For reduced cycle
time, however, tool exchange work should be done at a position as near as possible to a workpiece. For this
purpose, the tool exchange position needs to be changed, depending on the shape of each workpiece. Before
a workpiece is machined, the tool exchange position most suitable for the workpiece can be stored as a floating
reference position in the control unit; thus, it becomes much easier to return to the floating reference position
by using G30.1.
(a) Floating reference position return end signals (FRP1, FRP2, FRP3, ...)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Report the completion of controlled axis return to a floating reference position.
[Output Condition]
A floating reference position return end signal goes high when:
i. Floating reference position return (G30.1) is completed, and the current position is in the
effective area
A floating reference position return end signal goes low when:
i. The tool is moved from the floating reference position
ii. Emergency stop occurs
iii. A servo alarm is issued
– 149 –
2.3.16 Digital adjustment of origin deceleration limit

When adjusting a deceleration dog, the user should be able to adequately match an electrical grid point with
the machine zero point. When the automatic reference position setting function is used, the grid shift and soft-
ware deceleration dog amount can be set automatically by moving from a grid point where a stop is to take
place, to the machine zero point. This movement is made by turning on and off the automatic reference position
setting signals (RAST1, RAST2, RAST3, ...) and by using manual pulse generator).
In reference position return, the grid shift and software deceleration dog function as follos :
When reference position return is performed, the tool stops at the position where the first grid signal was de-
tected after the limit switch of the deceleration dog was passed.
This position is the electrical stop position. It must match the machine zero point.
[With no grid shift]
Direction of reference position return

Limit switch
Deceleration dog Stopped Machine zero point

↓
Grid point →
Shifted by grid shift
To match the electrical stop position with the machine zero point, a grid shift is set automatically. From the elec-
trical stop position, the grid point can be shifted by +1/2 of a grid point interval.
[After a grid shift is set]

Limit switch
Deceleration dog Stopped Machine zero point

↓
Grid point →
Furthermore, a software deceleration dog is automatically set (software extension of the deceleration dog).
The software deceleration dog can be used to match the electrical stop position with the machine zero point
by turning off the deceleration dog 1/2 of grid point interval from the machine zero point.
[After a grid shift and software deceleration dog are set]

Limit switch
Stopped
↓
Deceleration dog Software deceleration dog
Machine zero point
Grid point →
1/2 of the grid
point interval
– 150 –
When using the automatic reference position setting function, follow the procedure below. An example is shown
for the following figure:
1 Perform manual reference position return. Upon completion of manual reference position return, a stop
occurs at grid point (1) shown in the figure, and the reference position return completion signals (ZP1, ZP2,
ZP3, etc .) are output.
2 Set the automatic reference position setting signals (RAST1, RAST2, RAST3, etc.) to high. Note that auto-
matic reference position setting signals are enabled only when the RASx bit of parameter 1008 is on.
3 Perform manual operation (continuous manual feed or manual feed using the manuals pulse generator)
to reach point (2) (the machine zero point). This operation determines distance LMANMV between machine
zero point and the grid point at which the tool stops after manual reference position return.
4 Set the automatic reference position setting signals to low. Grid shift LGRID and software deceleration dog
amount LSFTDEF are obtained from the expression shown below. The obtained grid shift is set in parameter
1850 and the software deceleration dog amount is set in parameter 1885, automatically.
(1) (2)
LMANMV
(Distance of manual movement)
Limit switch
Deceleration dog Machine zero point
Grid point →
LGRID
LDEC
LGHALF
LSFTDEC
Grid shift LGRID: Remainder of the distance of manual movement LMANMV divided by the grid point interval
Software deceleration dog amount LSFTDEC: LGHALF (half of the grid point interval) is subtracted from the dis-
tance of manual movement (LMANMV) in 3. The result of the subtraction is then added to distance LDEC from
the p oint immediately after the deceleration dog to the point at which the first stop occurred in 1.
LSFTDEC = LDEC + (LMANMV – LGHALF)
NOTE 1 This function is valid only for axes along which reference position return is performed using the
grid method.
NOTE 2 When a software deceleration dog value and grid shift have been set using this function, the
power must be turned off and on again before operation can be started.
NOTE 3 When an absolute pulse coder is used as the position detector for this function, the APZx bit
of parameter 1815 (the parameter for zero–point adjustment during absolute position
detection) must be set to OFF.
NOTE 4 When a grid point is matched with the machine zero point using this function, the software
deceleration dog value is added in the same direction as for reference position return.
This means that the software deceleration dog can extend the effective range of the
deceleration dog as shown below, but cannot shorten the range.
– 151 –
[Using this function when reference position return is performed in the positive direction]
The direction in which a software

deceleration dog is added
Deceleration dog Machine zero point
Positive
direction
Grid point →
[Using this function when reference position return is performed in the negative direction]
The direction in which a software

deceleration dog is added
Machine zero point Deceleration dog

Negative
direction
Grid point →
NOTE 5 The distance ((1) in the following figure) from the position where the deceleration dog is
released to the reference position where a stop takes place is indicated in item No. 3008 on
the diagnosis screen. When a sof tware deceleration dog is set, the distance ((2) in the figure)
from the position where the software deceleration dog is released to the reference position
where a stop takes place is indicated.
(1)
(2)
Deceleration dog Software deceleration dog

Machine zero point
Grid point →
(1) Automatic reference position setting signals RAST1, RAST2, RAST3, etc.
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] When reference position return is performed, these signals automatically set the software de-
celeration dog value and grid shift to match the grid position where reference position return
stops with the machine ze ro point.
A number appended to a signal name represents a controlled axis number.
RAST1
1 ……Automatic reference position setting signal for the first axis
2 ……Automatic reference position setting signal for the second axis
3 ……Automatic reference position setting signal for the third axis

: :
: :
[Operation] When an automatic reference position setting signal is high, manual operation (continuous
manual feed or manual handle feed operation using the manual pulse generator) from the grid
point where a stop occurred t o the machine zero point can be performed to determine the
distance between these points automatically. When the signal goes low from high, the soft-
ware deceleration dog value and grid shift are set automatically.
– 152 –
NOTE 1 Before setting an automatic reference position setting signal to high, perform reference
position return to set the reference position return completion signals (ZP1, ZP2, ZP3, etc.) to
high.
NOTE 2 The distance from the grid point where reference position return stopped to the machine zero
point can be measured only by performing manual operation (continuous manual feed or
manual operation using the manual pul se generator).
NOTE 3 When an automatic reference position setting signal is used to set the software deceleration
dog value and grid shift, alarm message PW000 POWER MUST BE OFF is displayed.
2.3.17 Start, stop, and restart of automatic operation

(a) Automatic operation start signal (ST)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal provides several functions according to the mode being selected.
⋅ If the mode is the tape mode, memory mode, or manual data input mode, this signal starts
⋅ If the mode is the part program storage and edit mode, this signal starts program regis
tration from a tape to memory.
⋅ If the mode is the continuous manual feed mode, this signal starts execution of manual
numerical commands.
[Output Condition]
Generally, a corresponding operation is started on the falling edge of a high–to–low transition
of the ST signal. The operation varies depending on the function used.
(i) ST signal that starts automatic operation
[Operation] When the ST signal goes high in the tape mode, memory mode, or manual data input mode,
automatic operation is started, and execution of a selected command program is started or
resumed. At the same time, the following signal transitions occur:
⋅ The automatic operation start in–progress signal goes high.
⋅ TThe automatic operation in–progress signal goes high.
⋅ The automatic operation suspend–in–progress signal goes low.
In any of the above modes, the ST signal is ignored when:
⋅ Automatic operation is already in progress.
⋅ The automatic operation stop signal SP is low.
⋅ The system is being reset. That is, ERS and RRW are high, ESP is low, or the reset key
on the MDI panel is held down.
⋅ An alarm has been raised.
⋅ In the manual data input mode, a program specified by MDI is not present, or execution
of the specified programs has been completed.
⋅ The tape program mode or memory mode is entered before execution of the programs
specified in the manual data input mode is completed. (In this case, ST can be accepted
by returning the mode to the manual data input mode.)
⋅ A search for a sequence number is in progress.
⋅ A condition which locks automatic operation is present.
⋅ Started automatic operation is stopped or suspended when:
⋅ Automatic operation stop signal SP goes low.
⋅ The system is reset. That is, ERS and RRW go high, ESP goes low, or the reset key
on the MDI panel is pressed.
⋅ An alarm that stops automatic operation is raised.
⋅ The automatic operation mode is canceled.
⋅ The block being executed terminates after the mode is switched to another automatic
operation mode.
⋅ The block being executed terminates after single block signal SBK goes high.
⋅ The execution of the programs specified in the manual data input mode is completed.
– 153 –
(ii) ST signal that starts program registration from a tape to memory

[Operation] When the ST signal goes high in the tape storage mode, programs are transferred from the
input device selected by parameter setting to memory. This function is enabled only when
its use is specified by parameter setting. If the function is disabled by parameter setting, the
ST signal is meaningless in the tape storage and edit mode.
This function is always treated as foreground editing. Therefore the following items should
be noted:
1 Execution of automatic operation must be reset in advance. This means that the auto-
matic operation in–progress signal OP must be low. If it is not, the ST signal is ignored.
2 When registration has terminated, the program registered last is selected as a program
to be executed in the memory mode. (Information on which program was selected before
has been lost.) Therefore, a program number must be searched for, if necessary, to se-
lect a desired program again.
3 If the selected input device is being used for background editing, the ST signal is ignored.
As registration starts, the following is also performed:
1 Automatic operation start in–progress signal STL goes high if so specified by parameter
setting. Upon completion of the registration, the STL signal goes low.
2 All programs that are not protected are deleted before registration, if so specified by pa-
rameter setting.
NOTE When registering programs from tape to memory in background editing, use external
registration start signal EXRD instead of the ST signal. In this case, if the mode is other than
the part program storage and edit mode, the registration can be performed without affecting
a program executed in the memory mode. See Section 2.3.47 for details.
(iii) ST signal to start execution of manual numerical commands

[Operation] When a high–to–low ST signal transition is made in the continuous manual feed mode,
execution of the manual numerical commands specified at that time starts. At the same time,
the following occurs:
1 Automatic operation start in–progress signal STL goes high, if so specified by parameter
setting. The STL signal goes low upon completion of the manual numerical command
execution.
Even in the continuous manual feed mode, the ST signal is ignored when:
⋅ Manual numerical commands are already being executed.
⋅ No manual numerical command has been entered, or the execution of the manual nu-
merical commands has been completed.
⋅ The M, S, T, or B function is already being executed, and such a function is also included
in the entered manual numerical commands.
⋅ The M, S, T, or B function is already being executed, and that function has been specified
alone. Or, another function specified in the same block (move command, dwell, etc.) has
already been completed. (That is, the IPEN and DEN signals are already high.)
⋅ Automatic operation stop command SP is low.
⋅ The system is being reset. That is, ERS and RRW are high, ESP is low, or the reset key
on the MDI panel is being held down.
⋅ An alarm has been raised.
⋅ A condition which locks manual numerical command execution is present.
Execution of the manual numerical commands that has started is stopped in the following cases.
Since all the remaining commands entered are canceled when command execution is stopped,
the command execution cannot be continued unless the commands are reentered.
⋅ All the entered commands have been executed.
⋅ Automatic operation stop signal SP goes low.
⋅ The system is reset. That is, ERS and RRW go high, ESP goes low, or the reset key
on the MDI panel is pressed.
⋅ An alarm is raised.
⋅ The continuous manual feed mode is canceled.
– 154 –
(b) Automatic operation stop signal (SP)

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal stops automatic operation, or locks the start of automatic operation. It stops
execution of manual numerical commands, or locks the start of manual numerical command
execution.
[Operation] When the signal goes low, the control unit functions as described below.
1 If the control unit is performing automatic operation, it stops it. Once automatic operation
is stopped, it is not resumed even if SP goes high again. To resume automatic opera-
tion, automatic operation start signal ST must go low from the high status.
2 If the control unit is executing manual numerical commands, it stops the execution. Once
the command execution is stopped, it cannot be continued.
3 In other than the above cases, the control unit does not perform any special operation.
While SP is low, automatic operation start signal ST is locked.
NOTE If SP goes low during automatic operation, it is stopped immediately. In the following cases,
however, automatic operation continues until it reaches a point at which it can be stopped. At
that point operation is stopped. (Operation is stopped at this point even if SP goes high again
before this point is reached.)
1 Cutting feed is in progress in the tapping canned cycle. In this case, operation is stopped
when return to the reference position or initial position has been performed after the ter-
mination of tapping.
2 Threading is in progress. In this case, operation is stopped when a non–threading block
subsequent to the blocks of the current threading operation has been executed. If SP
is still low, however, operation is stopped immediately after that non–threading block
starts (at the start point of the block).
3 A control variable that disables feed hold is set in a custom macro. In this case, operation
is stopped when a subsequent block that clears the control variable for the first time has
been executed. If SP is still low, however, operation is stopped immediately after that
block starts (at the start point of the block).
(c) Single block signal (SBK)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal selects single–block operation.
[Operation] If the signal goes high, the control unit functions as described below.
1 If the control unit is performing automatic operation, it stops operation after the executing
block terminates. To execute the next block, automatic operation must be started again.
2 Unless the control unit is performing automatic operation, the control unit does not per-
form any particular operation. When automatic operation is started while SBK is left high,
operation stops after one block is executed. This function is useful for executing a pro-
gram block by block.
NOTE 1 The high or low state of SBK is determined at the end point of a block being executed. When
SBK is low at the end of a block, single–block operation cannot result even if SBK goes high
at the start of a block or during block execution.
NOTE 2 If SBK is high at the end of a block, operation is stopped immediately. In the following cases,
however, operation continues until it reaches a point at which it can be stopped. At that point
operation is stopped. (If SBK goes low before this point is reached, operation does not stop.)
1 A cycle operation, such as a canned cycle, is in progress. In this case, which block, among
the blocks performing cycle operation, accepts single block operation depends on the
cycle. Refer to the description of cycles in the programming description.
2 A control variable that disables single block operation is set in a custom macro. In this
case, when a block that clears that control variable appears, single block operation is
accepted and operation is stopped if SBK is still high.
NOTE 3 SBK is invalid for manual numerical commands. Manual numerical commands can be
specified for one block only, so single block operation is unnecessary.
– 155 –
(d) Single block check signal (MSBK)

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal reports the status of the single block signal. When the control unit is provided with
a single block switch (option) and it can be turned on and off from the MDI panel, this signal
is used to report the state of the switch to the machine.
[Output Condition]
⋅ Single block signal SBK is high.
⋅ The single block switch on the control unit is on.
⋅ The SBK signal is low, and the single block switch on the control unit is off.
(e) Automatic operation status output signals (OP, STL, SPL)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] These signals report the status of automatic operation performed by the control unit. Three
signals are provided.
Automatic operation in–progress signal: OP
Automatic operation start in–progress signal: STL
Automatic operation suspend–in–progress signal: SPL
[Output Condition]
These signals indicate the status of automatic operation as listed below).
Cycle operating signal Cycle start lamp signal Feed hold lamp signal
OP SPL STL
Reset
0 0 0
condition
Automatic operation
1 0 0
stop condition
Automatic operation
1 1 0
pause condition
Automatic operation
1 0 1
start condition
The basic meanings of these statuses are as follows:
(1) Reset status: A program has been executed, and automatic operation is stopped.
(2) Automatic operation stop status: A block has been executed, and automatic
operation is stopped.
(3) Automatic operation pause status: A block was partially executed, and automatic
operation is stopped.
(4) Automatic operation start status: Automatic operation is being performed.
For details about how statuses are changed, see the automatic operation status transition
table.
(f) Program restart selection signal (SRN)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal selects the restart of a program. For details, refer to the operator’s manual.
(g) Block restart selection signal (BRN)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal selects the restart of a program. For details, refer to the operator’s manual.
– 156 –
(h) Absolute selection signal (ABS)

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal specifies how the distance moved by manual operation is reflected into absolute
coordinates.
For details, refer to the operator’s manual.
NOTE These three signals, SRN, BRN, and ABS, are turned on and off by using switches on the
machine operator’s panel.
(i) Absolute selection check signal (MABS)

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal reports the status of the absolute selection signal. When the control unit is pro-
vided with an absolute switch and it can be turned on and off from the MDI panel (option), this
signal reports the switch setting status to the machine.
[Output Condition]
⋅ Absolute selection signal ABS is high.
⋅ The absolute selection switch on the control unit is on.
⋅ The ABS signal is low, and the absolute selection switch on the control unit is off.
2.3.18 Active block cancel

Automatic operation can be stopped by inputting signal BCAN to the control unit. After the automatic operation
enters the STOP state, output signals STL and OP go low. All continuous–state data is maintained.
(i) When the machine is moving a tool, the tool is decelerated and stopped. The remaining traveling distance
of the tool is canceled.
(ii) When the machine is dwelling, the dwelling is canceled.
(iii) When the machine is performing a miscellaneous function, spindle function, tool function, or secondary
miscellaneous function, the strobe signal (MF, SF, TF, or BF) goes low and the block is terminated.
Cycle start restarts automatic operation from the next block.
(i) The movement after restart
G90/G91
The movement of the tool according to an absolute or incremental command is as follows:
Comand program
Next block
Position where the tool was

stopped by signal input
When G91 is specified When G90 is specified
in the next block in the next block
Cutter compensation
During cutter compensation, the tool moves as follows when the program is restarted:
– 157 –

Comand program When G90 is specified

in the next block
Canned cycle
If a block is canceled during a canned cycle, the canned cycle is canceled. The program is restarted from
the next block.
Example N010 G84 G91 X x1 Y y1 Z z1 R r L 3 ;
N020 G00 G90 X x2 Y y2 Z z2 ;
N010 G84 G91 X x1 Y y1 Z z1 R r L 3 ;
N020 G00 G90 X x2 Y y2 Z z2 ;

(a) Block cancel signal : BCAN

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Cancels a block being executed.
[Operation] If this signal goes high during automatic operation, the block being executed is canceled and
automatic operation is stopped.
[Signal location]
BCAN: G157.6 (BMI)
(b) Block cancel confirmation signal : MBCAN
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Notifies the reception of the block cancel signal (BCAN).
[Output Condition]
The block cancel signal (BCAN) goes high during automatic operation to cancel a block
This signal goes low when:
The block has been canceled, automatic operation stops, and the block cancel signal (BCAN)
goes low
[Signal location]
MBCAN: F157.4 (BMI)
Time chart for canceling a block
Automatic operation signal OP

Automatic operation starting signal STL
Block cancel signal BCAN
Block cancel confirmation signal MBCAN
– 158 –
2.3.19 Feedrate override

(a) Rapid traverse override signals (ROV1, ROV2)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals override a rapid traverse feedrate.
These two code signals indicate an override value as follows:
Rapid traverse override

Override value
ROV2 ROV1
0 0 100%
0 1 50%
1 0 Fm%1
1 1 Fm 2

1 Fm represents a percentage ranging from 0% to 100% which is specified by parameter
setting (common to all axes).
2 For represents the absolute value of a feedrate ranging from 0 to the rapid traverse fee-
drate which is specified by parameter setting (for each axis).
[Operation] The actual feedrate of rapid traverse in automatic or manual operation (including manual ref-
erence position return) is obtained by multiplying the rapid traverse feedrate specified by pa-
rameter setting by the override determined by these signals.
(b) Signals for overriding the rapid traverse feedrate in 1% units: RV0B to RV6B
This function overrides the rapid traverse feedrate with a value (1% units) entered from the machine opera-
tor’s panel in the range from 0% to 100%.
By specifying the ROV8 bit of parameter 1402, the override selected by this function can be switched to
and from the standard override for the rapid traverse feedrate (F0, Fn, 50%, 100%).
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Overrides the rapid traverse feedrate.
The seven binary–code signals correspond to override values of 0% to 100% as shown be-
low:
(2 Vi) %
6
i
Override value =
i0
where Vi = 0 when the RViB signal is high. Vi = 1 when the RViB signal is low.
Each signal indicates the following override:
RV0B: 1%, RV1B: 2%, RV2B: 4%, RV3B: 8%, RV4B: 16%, RV5B: 32%, RV6B: 64%
When all signals are low or high, the system assumes that the override is 0%. If an override
exceeding 100% is specified, the system assumes that the override is 100%.
For the Series 15–M or 15–T, specify 1 for G40.7. For the Series 15–TT, specify 1 for G120.7.
[Operation] During automatic and manual operation (including manual reference position return), the rap-
id traverse feedrate specified by parameter is overridden with the value specified by these
signals. The tool is moved at the overridden rapid traverse feedrate. .pa (p.65)
(c) Feedrate override signals (FV0 to FV7 [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals override a cutting feedrate.
Eight binary code signals are provided. The relation between these signals and an override
is expressed as follows:
(2 Vi) %
7
i
Override =
i0
where, Vi = 0 when FVi is high
Vi = 0 when FVi is low
– 159 –
These signals have the following weights:

FV0 : 1% FV4 : 16%
FV1 : 2% FV5 : 32%
FV2 : 4% FV6 : 64%
FV3 : 8% FV7 : 128%
If all signals are low, the override is assumed to be 0% in the same way as when all signals
are high.
By using these signals, an override ranging from 0% to 254% can be selected in 1% steps.
[Operation] In cutting feed in automatic operation, the actual feedrate is obtained by multiplying the speci-
fied feedrate by the override selected with these signals.
In the following cases, however, the override is assumed to be 100% regardless of the states
of these signals:
⋅ Override cancel signal OVC is high.
⋅ Cutting is being performed in the tapping canned cycle.
⋅ The tapping mode is in progress (G63).
⋅ Threading is being performed.
Only when the override is 0% (when all signals are high or low), does it become valid not only
for cutting feed but also rapid traverse in automatic operation. This means that when the over-
ride is set to 0%, rapid traverse stops as well as cutting feed. (Even when the override is 0%,
continued rapid traverse can be specified by parameter setting.)
(d) Second feedrate override signals (AFV0 to AFV7 [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals override a cutting feedrate. A feedrate resulting from the application of the first
override set by FV0 to FV7 is further overridden. Whether to use the second feedrate over-
ride signals is selected by parameter setting.
Eight binary code signals are provided. The relation between these signals and an override
is expressed as follows:
(2 Vi) %
7
i
Override =
i0
where, Vi = 0 when AFVi is high
Vi = 0 when AFVi is low
The signals have the following weights:
AFV0 : 1% AFV4 : 16%
AFV1 : 2% AFV5 : 32%
AFV2 : 4% AFV6 : 64%
AFV3 : 8% AFV7 : 128%
If all signals are low, the override is assumed to be 0% in the same way as when all signals
are high.
By using these signals, an override ranging from 0% to 254% can be selected in 1% steps.
[Operation] In cutting feed in automatic operation, the feedrate resulting from the application of the first
feedrate override to the specified feedrate is again overridden. The actual feedrate is ob-
tained by multiplying the specified feedrate by the override selected by these signals.
The conditions for ignoring the first feedrate override and assuming 100% also apply to the
second feedrate override.
Only when the override is 0% (when all signals are high or low), does it become valid not only
for cutting feed but also rapid traverse in automatic operation. This means that when the over-
ride is set to 0%, rapid traverse stops as well as cutting feed. (Even when the override is 0%,
continued rapid traverse can be specified by parameter setting.)
– 160 –
(e) Second feedrate override B

This function selects the second feedrate override in the range from 0 to 655.34 with 0.01% increments.
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Overrides the cutting feedrate. The feedrate overridden with the first override (FV0 to FV7)
is further overridden. Whether to use these signals can be selected by a parameter. These
signals form a 16–bit bi nary code and correspond to the override value as follows:
(2 Vi) ×0.01%
7
i
Override value =
i0
where Vi = 0 when APFi is high and
Vi = 1 when APFi is low
That is, each signal has the following weight:
APF00 : 0.01% APF04 : 0.16% APF08 : 2.56% APF12 : 40.96%
APF01 : 0.02% APF05 : 0.32% APF09 : 5.12% APF13 : 81.92%
APF02 : 0.04% APF06 : 0.64% APF10 :10.24%APF14 :163.984%
APF03 : 0.08% APF07 : 1.28% APF11 :20.48% APF15 :327.68%
When all these signals are low, an override of 0% is assumed, just like when all these signals
are high.
The override can be selected in the range from 0 to 655.34% with 0.01% increments.
[Operation] Same as the specifications for the conventional second feedrate override.
Example To set the second feedrate override to 55.55%, set the signals as follows:
G146 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0
G147 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
(f) Override cancel signal (OVC [#1, #2])

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal forces the feedrate override to 100%.
[Operation] When this signal goes high, the feedrate override set with FV0 to FV7 and the second fee-
drate override AFV0 to AFV7 are ignored, and they are assumed to be 100%. This means
that operation is performed at the specified feedrate.
This signal is ineffective for both rapid traverse override and manual feedrate override, and
does not affect them.
2.3.20 F1 digit selection

(a) F1 digit selection signal (F1D)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal specifies that the manual pulse generator is to be used to increase or decrease
an F1 digit feedrate set in the control unit.
When a numeric value following address F for feedrate consists of only one digit, the numeric
value is assumed to specify one of nine feedrates (F1 to F9) set in the control unit (option).
The feedrates set in the control unit can be changed using the MDI. In addition, a feedrate
set in the control unit can also be increased or decreased by turning the manual pulse genera-
tor while the feedrate is being used; however, the manual pulse generator is also used in its
original mode for axis feed by a manual handle interrupt. So this signal selects which mode
to set.
[Operation] When this signal goes high, the control unit functions as described below.
1 When movement in automatic operation mode is in progress according to an F1 digit
command, the selected feedrate can be increased or decreased by the rate indicated
below by turning the manual pulse generator.
– 161 –
Increase/decrease ( ∆F ) = Fmax / scale division ( pulse )

100 n
where, n is a numeric value, specified by parameter setting, within a range of 1 to 127.
Fmax represents a maximum F1 digit feedrate, and is set in a parameter separately for
F1 to F4 and F5 to F9. If an increased feedrate exceeds Fmax, the feedrate is clamped
to Fmax. Conversely, if a decreased feedrate becomes lower than 0, the feedrate is
clamped to 0.
An increased or decreased feedrate is preserved even if the power is turned off.
2 When movement in automatic operation mode is not in progress according to an F1 digit
command, no F1 digit feedrate adjustment can be made. In this case, the manual pulse
generator is reserved for F1 digit feedrate adjustment; the manual pulse generator can-
not be used for axis feed.
3 In manual operation mode, this signal has no effect. Even when this signal is high, manu-
al handle feed is allowed.
NOTE The F1 digit command F0 specifies rapid traverse. There is no corresponding F1 digit setting.
2.3.21 Automatic operation test

(a) Dry run signal (DRN)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal selects dry run to set the feedrate in automatic operation to a dry run feedrate set
by a parameter rather than to a programmed value.
[Operation] When this signal goes high, the control unit operates as described below.
1 For the cutting feedrate in automatic operation, the control unit uses a dry run feedrate
set by a parameter with a manual feedrate override applied, rather than a programmed
feedrate.
The acceleration/deceleration time constant continues to be the same as for the cutting
feed time constant.
When the rapid–traverse selection signal (RT) is also high, the tool is fed at the dry–run
feedrate to which the maximum manual feedrate override (parameter No. 2016) is ap-
plied. The dry–run feedrate, however, cannot exceed the absolute maximum cutting fee-
drate (it is clamped at the maximum cutting feedrate).
2 A parameter can also specify that a dry run feedrate be used for rapid traverse in auto-
matic operation. If the rapid traverse selection signal (RT) is also high at this time, the
original rapid traverse feedrate is used. For the acceleration/deceleration time constant,
the time constant for continuous manual feed is used during movement at a dry run fee-
drate (when RT is low); the time constant for rapid traverse is used during movement at
a rapid traverse (when RT is high).
3 If this signal is driven low from high or driven high from low during movement, the feedrate
is decelerated to 0, then is accelerated to a certain speed.
(b) Dry run check signal (MDRN)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal reports the state of the dry run signal. The purpose of this signal is to notify the
machine of the status of the dry run switch, which can be optionally provided in the control
unit so that it can be turned on and off on the MDI panel.
[Output Condition]
⋅ The dry run signal DRN is high
⋅ The dry run switch in the control unit is on
⋅ DRN is low, and the dry run switch in the control unit is off
– 162 –
(c) Machine lock signals (MLK, MLK1, MLK2, MLK3, ...)

[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals select the machine lock state. That is, the results of move commands
executed by the control unit are only displayed; the machine is not operated. Other com-
mands (such as miscellaneous functions, coordinate presetting, and offset value setting) are
executed in the ordinary manner.
These signals are divided into two groups. One group consists of the all–axis machine lock
signal MLK, which locks all controlled axes. The other group consists of signals that lock con-
trolled axes, axis by axis. A number appended to an axis–by–axis signal represents a con-
trolled axis number.
MLK 1
1 ……Machine lock signal for the first axis
2 ……Machine lock signal for the second axis
3 ……Machine lock signal for the third axis

: :
: :
[Operation] When a machine lock signal goes high, the control unit functions as described below.
1 In either automatic operation or manual operation, the control unit stops sending the re-
sults of all move commands for the corresponding axis to the servo system. As a result,
when the move commands are executed, only a display change occurs; the machine
does not move.
2 In the case of all–axis machine lock in simultaneous automatic/manual operation, the
control unit stops sending the results of all move commands.
3 In the case of axis–by–axis machine lock in simultaneous automatic/manual operation,
in automatic operation, the control unit stops sending the results of the move commands
for the corresponding axis to the servo system. In manual operation, however, the control
unit sends the results of the move commands to the servo system in the ordinary manner.
This means that no program can move the machine; the machine can be moved only
by manual intervention by the operator.
4 When the signal is driven low from high or driven high from low during movement, the
signal becomes effective immediately.
Note, however, that if a signal state transition occurs during cutting feed with pre–inter-
polation acceleration/deceleration applied, the feedrate is decelerated to 0. Then the
state switches to a selected state and the feedrate is accelerated to a certain speed.
NOTE 1 The machine lock signal for the Z–axis is equivalent to the signal that has been referred to as
the Z–axis ignore signal ZNG.
NOTE 2 To stop machine operation for a program check, axis movement must be stopped using these
machine lock signals, and the execution of auxiliary functions must also be stopped using the
auxiliary function lock signal AFL.
(d) Machine lock check signal (MMLK)

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal reports the state of the all–axis machine lock signal. The purpose of this signal
is to notify the machine of the status of the all–axis machine lock switch, which can be option-
ally provided in the control unit so that it can be turned on and off on the MDI panel.
[Output Condition]
⋅ The all–axis machine lock signal MLK is high
⋅ The all–axis machine lock switch in the control unit is on
⋅ MLK is low, and the all–axis machine lock switch in the control unit is off
– 163 –
NOTE The control unit does not have a function for setting the axis–by–axis machine lock signals on
the MDI panel.
(e) Axis–by–axis machine lock check signals (MMLK1, MMLK2, MMLK3, ...)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] These signals report the machine lock states of the axes, axis by axis.
A number appended to an axis–by–axis signal represents a controlled axis number.
MMLK 1
1 ……Machine lock check signal for the first axis
2 ……Machine lock check signal for the second axis
3 ……Machine lock check signal for the third axis
: :
: :
[Output Condition]
⋅ The machine lock signal for each axis is high
⋅ The machine lock signal for each axis is low
NOTE However, note that these signals are always low when machine lock on each axis is disabled
by setting the parameter (data number 1005, ZNGn = 0).
(f) Display lock signal (DLK)

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal selects display lock. That is, this signal does not display the results of move com-
mands executed by the control unit in the relative position display (RELATIVE ) field on the
CRT screen.
1 The control unit does not send the results of move commands executed by the control
unit to the relative position display field on the CRT screen. As a result, the display in the
field remains unchanged.
2 This signal, when turned on or off, becomes immediately valid and is accepted.
NOTE This signal has no effect on the absolute position display (ABSOLUTE) field and machine
position display (MACHINE) field among the CRT position display fields.
(g) Display lock check signal (MDLK)

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal reports the state of the display lock signal. The purpose of this signal is to notify
the machine of the status of the display lock switch, which can be optionally provided in the
control unit so that it can be turned on and off on the MDI panel.
[Output Condition]
⋅ The display lock signal DLK is high
⋅ The display lock switch in the control unit is on
⋅ DLK is low, and the display lock switch in the control unit is off
– 164 –
(h) Auxiliary function lock signal (AFL)

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal selects auxiliary function lock. That is, this signal disables the execution of speci-
fied M, S, T, and B functions and canned cycle spindle–speed functions.
1 The control unit does not execute M, S, T, and B functions and canned cycle spindle–sig-
nal functions specified for automatic operation or specified by manually entered numeric
commands. That is, the control unit stops the output of code signals and strobe signals
(MF, SF, TF, BF) and the output of the canned cycle spindle control signals SSP, SRV,
and FMF.
2 If this signal goes high after code signal output, the output operation is executed in the
ordinary manner until its completion (that is, until the FIN signal is received, and the
strobe signal goes low.)
3 Among the miscellaneous functions, M00, M01, M02, and M30 are executed even when
this signal is high; all code signals, strobe signals, decode signals are output in the ordi-
nary manner.
4 Among the miscellaneous functions, even when this signal is high, those functions (M98
and M99) that are executed in the control unit without outputting their execution results
are executed in the ordinary manner.
CAUTION Even when this signal is high, spindle control (output of data, including a spindle–speed
command to the PMC, output of a spindle motor voltage command to the D/A converter, and
so forth) is exercised.
(i) Auxiliary function lock check signal (MAFL)

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal reports the state of the auxiliary function lock signal. The purpose of this signal
is to notify the machine of the status of the auxiliary function lock switch, which can be option-
ally provided in the control unit so that it can be turned on and off on the MDI panel.
[Output Condition]
⋅ The auxiliary function lock signal AFL is high
⋅ The auxiliary function lock switch in the control unit is on
⋅ AFL is low, and the auxiliary function lock switch in the control unit is off
2.3.22 Optional block skip

(a) Optional block skip signals (BDT1 to BDT9 [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals specify whether to execute or skip blocks written in a command program ac-
cording to the format allowing optional block skip.
In a command program, a block subject to optional block skip includes “ / ” or “ /n ” (n: 1 to 9).
The optional block skip signals correspond to command programs as indicated in165 the
table below.
Command programs Optional block skip signals

/ or /1 BDT1
/2 BDT2
/3 BDT3
/4 BDT4
/5 BDT5
/6 BDT6
/7 BDT7
/8 BDT8
/9 BDT9
– 165 –
[Operation] When “ / ” or “ /n ” appears in a command program during automatic operation, the corre-
sponding optional block skip signal is checked. When the signal is high, the block is skipped.
When the signal is low, the block is executed in the ordinary manner.
For detailed information, refer to the Operator’s Manual.
(b) Optional block skip check signals (MBDT1 to MBDT9 [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] These signals report the states of the optional block skip signals. The purpose of these sig-
nals is to notify the machine of the statuses of the optional block skip switches, which can be
optionally provided in the control unit so that they can be turned on and off on the MDI panel.
Nine optional block skip check signals are available; these signals correspond to nine option-
al block skip signals. Each optional block skip signal corresponds to the optional block skip
check signal that has the same number appended.
[Output Condition]
An optional block skip check signal goes high when:
⋅ The corresponding optional block skip signal BDTi is high
⋅ The corresponding optional block skip switch in the control unit is on
An optional optional block skip check signal goes low when:
⋅ The corresponding optional block skip signal BDTi is low, and the corresponding
optional block skip switch in the control unit is off
2.3.23 Corner control

(a) Position check signal (CSMZ [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal determines whether to make a position check at joints of cutting feed blocks in
Generally, at block joints in cutting feed, a workpiece is somewhat rounded due to accelera-
tion/deceleration and servo delay (lag). This roundness can be removed by making a posi-
tion check, that is, by waiting for an acceleration/deceleration delay and servo delay to be
eliminated before proceeding to the next block.
[Operation] When this signal is low at a joint of cutting feed blocks in automatic operation, machining pro-
ceeds to the next block after a position check is made. When this signal is high at such a joint,
machining proceeds to the next block without making a position check.
NOTE 1 A position check is made before and after a positioning block regardless of the state of this signal.
NOTE 2 A parameter can specify whether to only check that an acceleration/deceleration delay has
been eliminated, or to also check that a servo delay (error) has been reduced to within a certain
range.
NOTE 3 In general, whether to make a position check is to be determined in a command program by
turning on or off this signal with an appropriate miscellaneous function. However, as this signal
is low, it is equivalent to the specification of G09 or G61 in a command program. It is
recommended to use these G codes instead of this signal unless otherwise required.
(b) Chamfering signal (CHF [#1, #2])

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal determines whether to perform chamfering at the end of threading in a threading
cycle, which is one of the turning canned cycles.
[Operation] When this signal is low after threading in a threading cycle, chamfering is performed accord-
ing to the values set in a parameter beforehand. When this signal is high after threading in
a threading cycle, chamfering is not performed.
NOTE In general, whether to perform chamfering can be determined in a command program by

turning on or off this signal with an appropriate miscellaneous function.
– 166 –
2.3.24 Miscellaneous functions, spindle–speed functions, tool functions, and secondary auxil-
iary functions
These functions have the following associated signals:
Input
Output signals
Program
g signal
Function
address
dd Distribution End
Code signal Strobe signal
end signal signal
Miscellaneous
M M0 – M31 MF
function
Spindle speed
S S0 – S31 SF
function DEN, IPEN
DEN, FIN
Tool function T T0 – T31 TF
Second auxiliary
B 1 B0 – B31 BF
function
1 The address A, C, U, V, or W can also be used instead of B by parameter setting. However,
such an address must not duplicate a controlled axis address. In the text below, the address
B is used for explanation.
Basic send procedure
The addresses and signals used in programs vary from one program to another. However, the same send pro-
cedure applies to all functions as described below. The description below uses a miscellaneous function. How-
ever, the code M used in the described procedure can be replaced with S, T, and B to explain the spindle–speed
functions, tool functions, and second auxiliary functions, respectively.
(1) Suppose that Mxxx is specified in a command program.
A numeric value from –99,999,999 to +99,999,999 can be specified as xxx. A parameter can specify the
maximum number of digits (0 to 8) for each function, and can raise an alarm for a command exceeding
the specified maximum number of digits. A parameter can also specify whether to allow the minus sign
to be used.
(2) A code signal from M0 to M3 is sent, and the strobe signal MF goes high at the same time. A code signal
represents the program command value xxx in binary. That is,

xxx (specified value)

where Vi = 0 when Mi is low, and
Vi = 1 when Mi is high.
A time delay from code signal setting until the strobe signal goes high can be set using a parameter. The
strobe signal never goes high before code signal setting.
When a miscellaneous function is specified with other functions (such as a move command, dwell, and
spindle–speed function), the code signal is output at the same time as the start of the execution of the other
functions.
(3) The PMC must read the code signal to execute the corresponding operation when the strobe signal goes
high.
(4) When the corresponding operation is to be executed upon completion of a move command, dwell, or other
function specified in the same block, wait for the distribution end signal DEN or IPEN to go high.
(5) The PMC must drive the end signal FIN high upon completion of the corresponding operation. Note, how-
ever, that the end signal is commonly used with the miscellaneous functions, spindle–speed functions, tool
functions, second auxiliary function functions, and external operation functions described in the next sec-
tion. If these other functions are concurrently operating, the end signal must go high when all functions
have been executed.
(6) When the FIN signal is high for a certain time (the FIN signal check time, T–FIN, which is set by a parame-
ter) or longer, the control unit drives the strobe signal MF low to report the reception of the FIN signal.
(7) The PMC must drive the end signal FIN low when the strobe signal MF goes low.
(8) The miscellaneous function sequence is completed when the FIN signal goes low.
– 167 –
Upon completion of other commands in the same block, the control unit proceeds to the next block. The timing
charts below show the procedure above.
Example 1 Single miscellaneous function specified in a block
(1)(2) (3) (5) (6) (7) (8)

M command
Mxxx
(independent)
code signals M0AM31
Strobe signals MF
PMC side action
End signal FIN
Distribution
DEN, IPEN
end signals
T-FIN
Example 2 Move command and miscellaneous function in the same block

a. Execution of a miscellaneous function without waiting for move command completion
(1)(2)(3) (5) (6) (7) (8)

M command Mxxx
Move command
Code signals M0AM31
Strobe signal MF
PMC side action
End signal FIN
Distribution
DEN, IPEN
end signals
T-FIN
b. Execution of a miscellaneous function after move command completion
(1)(2) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

M command Mxxx
Move command
Code signals M0AM31
Strobe signal MF
PMC side action
End signal FIN
Distribution
DEN, IPEN
end signals
(a) Miscellaneous function code signals (M0 to M31 [#1, #2])

Miscellaneous function strobe signal (MF [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] These signals report the specification of miscellaneous functions.
– 168 –
For the output conditions and procedure, see the description of “Basic send procedure”
above.
NOTE 1 The following miscellaneous functions are only processed internally by the control unit; they
are not subject to output even when specified:
M98: Subprogram call
M99: Return to a main program
NOTE 2 Decode signals as well as the code signals and strobe signal are output for the miscellaneous
functions listed below. For further information, see the next item.
M00, M01, M02, M30
(b) Decode M signals (DM00 [#1, #2], DM01 [#1, #2], DM02 [#1, #2], DM30 [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] These signals report particular miscellaneous functions are specified.
The miscellaneous functions in a command program correspond to output signals as indi-
cated below.
Command program Output signal

M0 DM00
M1 DM01
M2 DM02
M30 DM30
[Output Condition]
A decode M signal goes low when:
⋅ The corresponding miscellaneous function is specified, and any move commands and
dwell commands specified in the same block are completed. These signals are not
output when the end signal of the miscellaneous function is returned before completion
of such move commands and dwell commands.
A decode M signal goes low when:
⋅ The FIN signal goes high
⋅ Reset occurs
(c) Spindle–speed code signals (S0 to S31 [#1, #2])
Spindle–speed strobe signal (SF [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] These signals report that spindle–speed functions have been specified.
above.
(d) Tool function code signals (T0 to T31 [#1, #2])
Tool function strobe signal (TF [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] These signals report that tool functions have been specified.
above.
(e) Second auxiliary function code signals (B0 to B31 [#1, #2])
Second auxiliary function strobe signal (BF [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] These signals report that second auxiliary functions have been specified.
For the output conditions and procedure, see the description of “Basic send procedure” above.
– 169 –
NOTE Use a parameter to select one of the addresses A, B, C, U, V, and W to specify a second
auxiliary function. However, such an address must not duplicate a controlled axis address.
(f) End signal (FIN [#1, #2])

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal reports the completion of a miscellaneous function, spindle–speed function, tool
function, second auxiliary function, or external operation function.
[Operation] For the control unit operation and procedure when this signal goes high, see the description
of “Basic send procedure” above.
The FIN signal must remain on for a certain time (the FIN signal check time, T–FIN, which is
set by a parameter) or longer. The FIN signal driven high is ignored if the FIN signal goes low
before T–FIN elapses.
NOTE 1 Only one end signal is used for all functions above. The end signal must go high after all
functions are completed.
NOTE 2 A parameter may also specify use of the FIN signal as the end signal for a canned cycle
spindle–speed function. (See Section 2.3.26.)
(g) Distribution end signals (DEN [#1, #2], IPEN [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] These signals report that all commands (such as move commands and dwell) are completed
except those miscellaneous functions, spindle–speed functions, tool functions, and so forth
that are contained in the same block and have been sent to the PMC. They also report that
the end signal from the PMC is being awaited.
Two types of signals are used, depending on the status of move command execution comple-
tion:
IPEN: This signal is sent when although move commands have been completed an
acceleration/deceleration delay and servo delay may still exist.
DEN: This signal is sent when move commands have been completed, an
acceleration/deceleration delay is eliminated, and a servo delay is reduced
to within a certain range (when the current position is in the effective area).
In general, IPEN first goes high, then DEN goes high after some delay. If no move command
is specified, IPEN and DEN go high at almost the same time.
[Output Condition]
The IPEN and DEN signals go high when:
– IPEN: The completion of miscellaneous functions, spindle–speed functions, tool
functions, and so forth is being awaited, and all other commands in the same
block are completed
– DEN: The completion of miscellaneous functions, spindle–speed functions, tool
functions, and so forth is being awaited, all other commands in the same block
are completed, and the current position is in the effective area.

The IPEN and DEN signals go low when:
– The execution of one block is completed
NOTE 1 A parameter can specify, whether to only check if an acceleration/deceleration delay is

eliminated, or to also check if a servo delay (error) has been reduced to within a certain range.
NOTE 2 These signals are also output when the completion of a canned cycle spindle–speed function
is being awaited.
– 170 –
2.3.25 High–speed M/S/T/B interface

To accelerate M/S/T/B function execution, the high–speed M/S/T/B interface has simplified the transfer of the
strobe and completion signals of the M/S/T/B functions.
Faster M/S/T/B function execution can reduce the time required for machining.
The description below uses the miscellaneous functions (M code commands) as an example. The same de-
scription applies to the T functions, S functions, and B functions (2nd auxiliary functions).
Signal transfer procedure
1 Assume that the following program is given:
Mxx ;
Myy ;
2 In response to an M command, the NC system sends out the code signals M0 to M31. After a time set by
a parameter elapses, the NC system inverts the logical level of the strobe signal MF, that is, from low to
high, or from high to low.
3 The NC system then assumes the PMC has completed the operation when the logical level of the auxiliary
function completion signal MFIN becomes the same as the inverted MF signal.
With the conventional system, the operation is assumed to be completed when a falling edge (high to low) of
the M/S/T/B completion signal FIN is received after a rising edge (low to high) of the FIN signal is detected.
This new system, on the other hand, assumes the operation has been completed upon detection of only one
transition of the FIN signal.
In addition, the conventional system uses only one completion signal (FIN) common to the M/S/T/B functions.
This new system uses a different completion signal for each of the M, S, T, and B functions; the completion
signals for the M, S, T, and B functions are MFIN, SFIN, TFIN, and BFIN, respectively.
Fig. 2.3.25 (a) shows the timing chart of these signals with the new system. For comparison, Fig. 2.3.25 (b)
shows the timing chart of the conventional system.
Next block
Code signal
Mxx Myy
Strobe signal MF
PMC side operation
Auxiliary function
completion signal MFIN
Fig. 2.3.25 (a) Timing Chart of the High–Speed System

Next block
Mxx Myy
Code signal
Strobe signal MF
PMC side operation

Completion signal
FIN
Fig. 2.3.25 (b) Timing Chart of the Conventional System
– 171 –
NOTE 1 Whether to use the conventional system or high–speed system for strobe signal and
completion signal handling can be specified by parameter setting.
NOTE 2 The strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF go low when the machine is turned on.
NOTE 3 When the control unit is reset, MF, SF, TF, and BF go low.
NOTE 4 This function cannot be used for the completion signals FFIN and FIN for the canned cycle
spindle stop command signal (SSP) and spindle reverse rotation command signal (SSV); the
conventional signal transfer system is used.
This function cannot be used for the completion signal FIN for the external operation signal (EF)
output by G81 to specify external operation; the conventional signal transfer system is used.
(a) Auxiliary function completion signal (MFIN [#1, #2])

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Reports that the execution of a miscellaneous function using the high–speed M/S/T/B inter-
face is completed.
[Operation] For the operation and procedure of the control unit when this signal goes high and low, see
the description of “Signal transfer procedure” above.
(b) Spindle function completion signal (SFIN [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Reports that the execution of a spindle function using the high–speed M/S/T/B interface is
completed.
(c) Tool function completion signal (TFIN [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Reports that the execution of a tool function using the high–speed M/S/T/B interface is com-
pleted.
(d) 2nd auxiliary function completion signal (BFIN [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Reports that the execution of a second auxiliary function using the high–speed M/S/T/B inter-
face is completed.
– 172 –
2.3.26 Multiple M commands for one block

Normally, only one M code can be issued for a block. However, the function for multiple M commands for one
block (multiple M commands per block function) enables up to five M codes to be issued for one block simulta-
neously.
If two to five M codes are issued to the same block, they are sent to the machine tool simultaneously. This can
reduce the machine cycle time as compared with conventional operation, which uses the single M command
per block function.
Example
(i) Single M command per block
M40;
M50;
M60;
G28G91X0Y0Z0;
:
:
(ii) Multiple M commands per block
M40M50M60;
G28G91X0Y0Z0;
:
:
Signal Transfer Sequence for multiple M commands per block
1 Suppose that a program has issued MaaMbbMccMddMee;. Both the conventional single M command per
block function, and the multiple M commands per block function can handle a value ranging from 0 to
+_99,999,999 for aa in Maa, which is the first command within the block. For other M codes, a value rang-
ing from 0 to 9999 can be used.
2 For the first M command, as with the single M command per block function, code signals M0 to M31 are
sent. After the time specified by the parameter has elapsed, strobe signal MF goes high. For the second
M command code signals M200 to M215 are sent, and strobe signal MF2 is set to high. For the other M
codes, code signals M300 to M315, M400 to M415, and M500 to M515 are sent, and strobe signals MF3,
MF4, and MF5 are set to high.
The first to fifth command signals are sent simultaneously. Strobe signals MF, MF2, MF3, MF4, and MF5
are set to high at the same time. Code signals M200 to M215, M300 to M315, M400 to M415, and M500
to M515 are a binary representation of values bb, cc, and ee specified in the commands.
Namely, codes M200 to M215 can be represented as follows:
(2 Vi) bb
15
i
i0
where vi = 0 when M(200 + i) is low, and
vi = 1 when M(200 + i) is high.
3 When a strobe signal goes high, the PMC reads the code signal corresponding to the strobe signal and
performs the appropriate operation.
4 When all M command operations are completed, the PMC sets FIN (completion signal) to high.
5 When FIN remains high for the time (T–FIN) specified by the parameter, the control unit resets all strobe
signals (MF, MF2, MF3, MF4, and MF5) to low simultaneously, thereby indicating that it has received FIN.
6 When all the strobe signals go low, the PMC resets FIN to low.
– 173 –
M command MaaMbbMccMddMee
Code signal M00 - M31
Strobe signal MF
PMC operation
Strobe signal MF2
PMC operation
Strobe signal MF3
PMC operation
Strobe signal MF4
PMC operation
Strobe signal MF5
PMC operation
MF-DLY
End signal FIN

T-FIN
A high–speed interface can also be used to simplify the transfer of the strobe signal and the completion signal
for multiple M commands issued for one block. This interface provides separate completion signals for each
M code. They are called MFIN (the same name as for the single M command per block function), MFIN2,
MFIN3, MFIN4, and MFIN5, respectively. The signal transfer sequence for multiple M codes per block is the
same as that for a single M code per block.
NOTE 1 The control unit is basically designed to issue up to five M codes. However, some types of M
codes cannot be issued simultaneously with others because of mechanical constraints. For
example, M42 can be issued only after the mechanical operation specified by M41 has
finished. Refer to the manual published by the machine builder for details about whether
mechanical operations inhibit particular commands from being issued for a block
simultaneously.
NOTE 2 Do not issue M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, or M99 simultaneously with other M codes.
NOTE 3 Besides M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99, there are M codes that cannot be used
simultaneously with others and must be issued one at a time.
For example, M codes that direct the control unit to perform internal operations in addition to
sending out M code signals should not be used more than once in a single block. Such M
codes include an M code for calling programs 9001 to 9009, an M code for spindle positioning,
and an M code for inhibiting preread of the next block (M code without buffering). In other
words, M codes that can be issued more than once or with other M codes in a single block are
those that only direct the control unit to send M code signals to the machine tool.
– 174 –
(a) Auxiliary function code signals (M200 to M215, M300 to M315, M400 to M415, M500 to M515)
Auxiliary strobe signals (MF2, MF3, MF4, MF5)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Indicate that the second to fifth auxiliary functions have been issued. The output conditions
and procedures are the same as those described in the “Signal transfer sequence” above.
(b) Auxiliary function completion signals (MFIN2, MFIN3, MFIN4, MFIN5)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Indicate that when the high–speed interface is used for multiple M commands per block, the
second to fifth auxiliary functions have been completed.
[Operation] See above description for how the control unit operates and what it performs when the signal
goes high or low.
2.3.27 External operation function
The external operation function is generally used when the drilling axis is not an NC–controlled axis. The exter-
nal operation function performs special operations, such as drilling, punching, and clamping, on the machine
by using the external operation signal EF output each time G81 command positioning is completed.
(a) External operation signal (EF [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal reports that G81 positioning must be completed with a device having the external
operation function, and that a particular external operation must be performed externally.
[Output Condition]
⋅ G81 positioning is completed, and the current position is in the effective area
⋅ The end signal FIN is returned
⋅ Reset occurs
The PMC must handle the EF and FIN signals in the same procedure as for the miscellaneous
function strobe signal, as shown in the timing chart below.
G81 command
Positioning
EF
Machine tool
operation
FIN
DEN, IPEN
T-FIN
DEN and IPEN are also sent. However, the same conditions applied to DEN are also applied
to the EF signal. Consequently, the DEN and IPEN signals generally need not be used.
– 175 –
2.3.28 Canned cycle spindle–speed function

Two types of canned cycles are available. The type used depends on what signal is used for canned cycle
spindle control.
Canned cycle I : Dedicated signals such as SSP and SRV are used.
Canned cycle II : Normal miscellaneous functions such as M03 and M05 are used.
For information about canned cycle operations, refer to the Operator’s Manual. This section describes the
cycles that require spindle control. Canned cycles I and II are described separately.
(1) Canned cycle I
Canned cycle I requires spindle control in four cycles:
Reverse tapping cycle G74 (G84.1 for a lathe)
Tapping cycle G84
Boring cycle G86
Boring cycle G88
G76 (fine boring cycle), which requires spindle orientation, cannot be used because no dedicated signal
is available. G87 is used for a normal boring cycle, but is not used for back boring that requires spindle
orientation.
The following dedicated signals are used:
Functions Input signal Output signal

Spindle stop SSP
Counterclockwise rotation of spindle SRV
Readout of canned cycle auxiliary signal FMF
Canned cycle auxiliary signal end FFIN
Basic send procedure

These signals are sent according to the following procedure:
(1) The control unit drives SSP or SRV high at a necessary point in the canned cycle.
(2) When SSP or SRV goes high, the PMC must perform the corresponding operation as follows:
– Rotate the spindle in the opposite direction when SRV goes high.
– Stop the spindle when SSP goes high.
(3) The control unit drives the canned cycle auxiliary signal FMF high simultaneously with operation (1).
(4) The PMC must drive the canned cycle auxiliary signal end signal FFIN high upon completion of the
corresponding operation.
(5) When the FFIN signal goes high, the control unit drives the auxiliary function read signal FMF low to
report the reception of the FFIN signal.
(6) The PMC must drive the end signal FFIN low when the FMF signal goes low.
(7) When the FFIN signal is low, the control unit proceeds to the next operation.
The procedure above drives the SSP and SRC signals high. When the SSP and SRV signals go low, steps
(3) through (7) are generally not performed; these signals go low.
However, if drilling is performed frequently at short intervals, it is possible the spindle speed may not reach
a specified speed before starting the next drilling operation. In this case, a parameter can specify that
steps (3) through (7) be repeated at the end of a canned cycle using the SSP and SRV signals. At this
time, however, the SSP and SRV signals are low. Consequently, the completion of the corresponding op-
erations must be checked before driving the FFIN signal high.
Instead of the FFIN signal, a parameter can specify use of the end signal FIN for normal miscellaneous
functions. In this case, the end signal is also used for miscellaneous functions, tool functions, and so forth,
so the PMC must establish required conditions.
– 176 –
The procedure above is shown by the timing charts in the canned cycle as follows:
(G74 in canned cycle I)
X, Y
-Z +Z
-R +R
SSP
FMF
FFIN
Spindle rotation CCW rotation CW rotation CCW rotation
SRV goes high at the end of cutting feed distribution in –Z without waiting for acceleration/deceleration
delay and servo delay to be eliminated. (No position check is made.)
(G84 in canned cycle I) Same as G74 except that the spindle rotation direction is opposite
(G86 in canned cycle I)
X, Y
-Z +Z
-R +R
SSP
FMF
FFIN
Stop
Spindle rotation CW rotation CW rotation
SRV goes high at the end of cutting feed distribution in –Z after waiting for acceleration/deceleration delay
and servo delay to be eliminated. (A position check is made.)
(G88 in canned cycle I) Same as G86 except that a dwell operation performed after cutting in –Z
– 177 –
(2) Canned cycle II

Canned cycle II requires spindle control in six cycles:
Reverse tapping cycle G74 (G84.1 for a lathe)
Fine boring cycle G76 (G86.1 for a lathe)
Tapping cycle G84
Boring cycle G86
Back boring cycle G87
Boring cycle G88
For spindle control, the following normal miscellaneous functions are used:
M03: CW spindle rotation
M04: CCW spindle rotation
M05: Spindle stop
M19: Spindle orientation
See the description of the miscellaneous functions.
These functions cannot be replaced with other miscellaneous functions.
When the rotation direction of the spindle is to be switched from one direction to the other (for example,
when M04 is output during M03 operation), a parameter can specify whether to send M05 at the time of
switching.
(G84 in canned cycle II)
X,Y
-R +R
-Z +Z
DEN DEN
M05 M04 M05 M03

MF MF MF MF
M03 ; Spindle forward
M04 ; Spindle reverse
FIN FIN FIN FIN M05 ; Spindle stop
FMF
(G74 in canned cycle II) Same as the above except that the output timing of M03 and M04 is reversed
(G86 to G88 in canned cycle II)
X,Y
-R +Z,+R
-Z
DEN DEN
M05 M03
MF MF
FIN FIN
(G76 in canned cycle II)
X,Y
-R +Z,+R
-Z
DEN DEN
M05 M19 M03

MF MF MF M19; Oriented spindle stop
Spindle stops at oriented
FIN FIN FIN rotary position
– 178 –
(a) Canned cycle spindle reverse rotation signal (SRV [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal specifies that the current rotation direction of the spindle is to be switched to the
opposite direction. Control is required so that the spindle continues to rotate in the opposite
direction while this signal is high, and so that the direction of the spindle rotation returns to
the previous state when this signal goes low.
[Output Condition]
See the description of “Basic send procedure” for canned cycle I.
(b) Canned cycle spindle stop signal (SSP [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal specifies that the spindle is to be stopped. Control is required so that the spindle
continues to stop while this signal is high, and so that the spindle returns to the previous state
when this signal goes low.
[Output Condition]
(c) Canned cycle auxiliary signal read signal (FMF [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal prompts the spindle reverse rotation signal and spindle stop signal to be read.
This signal, when handshaked with the FFIN signal, reports that the spindle rotation direction
has been switched, or the spindle has stopped.
[Output Condition]
(d) Canned cycle auxiliary signal end signal (FFIN [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal reports the completion of execution by the spindle reverse rotation signal or
spindle stop signal.
[Operation] See the description of “Basic send procedure” for canned cycle I.
– 179 –
2.3.29 Spindle analog output

(i) The 15–T/M exercises spindle analog output control as shown below.
Position Spindle motor, Orientation, gear selection,

coder amplifer and other attacted circuits
Gear selector, orientation Operator's

Feedback pulse Spindle motor command, spindle override, panel
one-rotation sigĆ command voltage etc.
nal
D/A converter Contact I/O
Spindle voltage Spindle motor

output
command voltage
Command voltage
calculation
Spindle actual speed Actual spindle speed
monitoring
Spindle override
M command M03, M04, M05, M19, 0 M code
Gear selection
S code
Orientation
S command Command spindle speed
Constant surface
Spindle speed check
G92S speed
command Maximum spindle speed
CNC PMC
– 180 –
(ii) The 15–TT exercises spindle analog output control as shown below.
(a) When two spindles and two tool posts are used
A spindle analog output control interface provided for each tool post is used to control the spindle of
each tool post.
Position 1st spindle Orientation, gear selector

coder motor, amplifier and other attached circuits
Feedback pulse spindle motor Gear selector,

one-rotation command voltage orientation command,
signal spindle override,
and others
Spindle voltage
output Spindle motor
command voltage Command voltage
calculation
Actual spindle speed Actual spindle speed

monitoring
Spindle override
M command M03, M04 M05, M19, 0 M code
Gear selection
S code
Orientation
Constant surface Spindle speed check

speed
G92S
1st tool post 1st tool post

CNC PMC
2nd tool post 2nd tool post
G92S
Constant surface
speed
Spindle speed check
S code
Orientation
M command M03, M04 M05, M19, 0 M code
Gear selection
Actual spindle speed Actual spindle speed Spindle override

monitoring
Spindle motor
command voltage Command voltage
calculation
Spindle voltage
output
Feedback pulse Gear selector,

spindle motor
one-rotation orientation command,
command voltage
signal spindle override,
and others
Position 2nd spindle Orientation, gear selector
coder motor, amplifier and other attached circuits
– 181 –
(b) When one spindle and two tool posts are used
A spindle analog output control interface provided for the first tool post is used to control a spindle com-
monly used for the two tool posts.
Position Spindle motor, Orientation, gear selector

coder amplifer and other attacted circuits
Gear selector, orientation

Feedback pulse Spindle motor command, spindle override
one-rotation signal command voltage and others
Spindle voltage Spindle motor

output
command voltage
Command voltage
calculation
Actual spindle speed Actual spindle speed

monitoring
Spindle override
Gear selection
S code
Orientation
Constant surface
speed
Spindle speed check
G92S
1st tool post 1st tool post

CNC PMC
2nd tool post 2nd tool post
G92S
command
S command
The G92S command, S command, and constant surface speed control commands (G96, G97) for
each tool post are related to maximum spindle speed, command spindle speed, and S code as follows:
⋅ The latest G92S command value specified for the two tool posts serves as the maximum spindle
speed to be reported to the PMC.
⋅ Whether to exercise constant surface speed control is determined by the latest G96 com-
mand(constant surface speed control on) or G97 (constant surface speed control cancel) speci-
fied for the two tool posts. When constant surface speed control is cancelled, the latest S com-
mand value specified for the two tool posts is used as a command spindle speed and as an S code
to be reported to the PMC. Constant surface speed control is applied to the tool post for which
the latest G96 command is specified. After constant surface speed control is exercised, the
spindle speed is reflected in a command spindle speed sent to the PMC.
M codes are reported for each tool post to the PMC. So, M codes related to spindle control, such as
M03, M04, M05, and M19, are to be handled by the PMC according to the M codes reported from each
tool post.
– 182 –
(a) Command spindle speed signals (RO0 to RO15 [#1, #2])

[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] These signals report a specified spindle speed. If constant surface speed control is exer-
cised, the spindle speed reported by the signal is one specified after such control is exercised.
These signals consist of 16 binary signals. A spindle speed is related to these signals as fol-
lows:
ȍ (2
15
Spindle speed + i
Vi) ń 10 N RPM
i+0
where Vi = 0 when ROi is low
Vi = 1 when ROi is high
N represents a number (0 to 3) set by a parameter.
The parameter N is commonly applied to the other output signals (actual spindle speed, maxi-
mum spindle speed) as well as this signal.
[Output Condition]
These signals are output at all times. These signals change only during constant surface sig-
nal control, or when S is specified in a command program. During constant surface signal
control, these values usually change every 16 msec.
(b) Maximum spindle speed signals (MR0 to MR15 [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] These signals report a maximum spindle speed specified by G92Sxxx. Whether to clamp the
spindle signal to this maximum spindle speed only during constant surface speed control or
at all times depends on the PMC specifications. These signals consist of 16 binary signals.
A spindle speed is related to these signals as follows:
ȍ (2
15
Spindle speed + i
Vi) ń 10 N RPM
i+0
where Vi = 0 when MRi is low
Vi = 1 when MRi is high
The parameter N is commonly applied to the other output signals (command spindle speed,
actual spindle speed) as well as this signal.
[Output Condition]
These signals are output at all times. These signals change only when G92Sxxx is specified
in a command program.
(c) Actual spindle speed signals (AR0 to AR15 [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] These signals report the actual spindle speed calculated using a feedback pulse signal from
a position coder mounted on the spindle.
These signals consist of 16 binary signals. A spindle speed is related to these signals as fol-
lows:
ȍ (2
15
Spindle speed + i
Vi) ń 10 N RPM
i+0
where Vi = 0 when ARi is low
Vi = 1 when ARi is high
The parameter N is commonly applied to the other output signals (command spindle speed,
maximum spindle speed) as well as this signal.
[Output Condition]
These signals are output at all times. These signals usually change every 64 msec.
NOTE An absolute error of about 0.5 rpm may be observed as a measuring error.
– 183 –
(d) Spindle motor command voltage signals (RISGN [#1, #2], RI0 to RI12 [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals specify an output voltage for the spindle motor. The control unit controls a spe-
cified voltage to be output to the spindle motor by using these input signals only, regardless
of an output command spindle signal. The PMC may output, as these signals, a value calcu-
lated according to a selected gear from a received command spindle speed. The PMC may
also output a different speed (for example, a speed for spindle orientation).
These signals consist of the sign signal RISGN for determining the voltage polarity, and 13
binary signals, RI0 to RI12, for determining an absolute voltage value.
A positive (+) voltage is output when RISGN is low.
A negative (–) voltage is output when RISGN is high.
The 13 binary signals are related to an output voltage as follows:
(2 Vi) 8191
12
Command voltage i E volt
i0
where Vi = 0 when RIi is low
Vi = 1 when RIi is high
E represents a maximum voltage dependent on hardware.
[Operation] The control unit outputs the value of these input signals to the D/A converter every 16 msec.
(e) Spindle alarm code signals (SPAL1, SPAL2, SPAL4, and SPAL8 [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] These signals report the details of an alarm raised in the spindle speed control unit. The
spindle alarm signal available on the FANUC spindle speed control unit must be connected
to the control unit.
The table below explains the meanings of spindle alarm code signals SPAL to SPAL8 and
alarms.
SPAL SPAL SPAL SPAL

Meaning
8 4 2 1
1 0 0 0 1 Spindle motor overheat
2 0 0 1 0 Spindle speed deviation excessive
3 0 0 1 1 Blown fuse at DC power unit
4 0 1 0 0 Blown fuse at AC input
5 0 1 0 1 Blown fuse at control power input
Spindle motor overspeed (analog
6 0 1 1 0
detection)
Spindle motor overspeed (digital
7 0 1 1 1
detection)
8 1 0 0 0 Overvoltage
9 1 0 0 1 Overheat at main circuit
10 1 0 1 0 Overvoltage at DC power unit
11 1 0 1 1 Control voltage drop
12 1 1 0 0 Excessive circuit current
13 1 1 0 1 Abnormal computing circuit
14 1 1 1 0 Abnormal control ROM
15 1 1 1 1 –––
(0: Signal LOW 1: Signal HIGH)
– 184 –
2.3.30 Spindle positioning function

The turning operation rotates a spindle connected to a spindle motor at a specified speed, allowing a workpiece
mounted to the spindle to be rotated and machined.
The spindle positioning function, on the other hand turns a spindle connected to a spindle motor to a specified
angle, allowing a workpiece mounted to the spindle to be positioned at a specified angle.
Use this function to drill a hole at an arbitrary position on a workpiece.
The spindle control system is illustrated below.
When the spindle is rotated for the turning operation (hereinafter called spindle turning mode), the value corre-
sponding to the spindle speed is input from the spindle control unit to the D/A converter. When the spindle is
positioned (hereinafter called spindle positioning mode), the specified angle by which to turn the spindle is input
to the error counter to generate a speed command to the spindle motor via the D/A converter. The position of
the spindle is detected by a position coder mounted on the spindle.
NOTE Since the spindle positioning axis

Spindle control operates as a control axis, set the
signals related to a control axis
(such as the OT rigid signal) for the
spindle control axis.
CMR
+
xM x1 Error counter D-A converter Spindle AMP Spindle motor
-
Gear ratio
n:m
DMR 1024pul/rev
x4 Gear ratio Spindle

Position coder
l:p
Gear ratio of spindle Minimum movement unit

to position coder ( l : p ) (detection unit) deg
1:1 0.088 (1×360 / 4096)
1:2 0.176 (2×360 / 4096)
1:4 0.352 (4×360 / 4096)
1:8 0.703 (8×360 / 4096)
The spindle positioning function consists of the following three operations:

1. Exiting the spindle turning mode and entering the spindle positioning mode
2. Positioning the spindle in the spindle positioning mode
3. Exiting the spindle positioning mode and entering the spindle turning mode
Basic procedures for each operation are explained below.
1) Exiting the spindle turning mode and entering the spindle positioning mode
Use an Mxx command to exit the spindle turning mode and enter the spindle positioning mode. Number
xx can be set in a parameter.
(1) Mxx is specified in a program.
(2) Miscellaneous function code signals M0 to M31 are output and miscellaneous function strobe signal
MF is turned on. These operations are the same as those of the ordinary miscellaneous function.
– 185 –
(3) When strobe signal MF is turned on, the PMC reads the code signals and takes action according to
value xx indicated by the code signals. For example, if Mxx is specified when the spindle is rotating,
the PMC may take one of the following actions: (1) Stops the rotation of the spindle by the Mxx com-
mand. (2) Sounds an alarm using the external data input/output function to inhibit an Mxx command
when the spindle is rotating. In general, the second way is recommended because the spindle is
stopped by the M05 command. In any case, when the spindle is stopped the PMC turns on spindle
stop check signal SPSTP.
(4) The control unit checks if spindle stop check signal SPSTP is on, immediately after turning on strobe
signal MF. If the SPSTP signal is on, the control unit changes the mode of the spindle control unit from
spindle control to position control and turns on spindle unclamp signal SUCLP.
(5) When the SUCLP signal is turned on, the PMC unclamps the spindle. After the spindle is unclamped,
the PMC turns off spindle unclamp completion signal *SEUCL.
(6) When the *SEUCL signal is turned off, the control unit turns off spindle unclamp signal SUCLP and
notifies that the *SEUCL signal has been received.
(7) When the SUCLP signal is turned off, the PMC turns on spindle unclamp completion signal *SEUCL.
After turning off the SUCLP signal, the control unit places the position control of the spindle in the ser-
vo–on state, rotates the spindle, and stops the spindle at a specified position (spindle orientation).
(8) The control unit then turns on reference position return completion signal ZPj (j: Control axis number
for the spindle), places the position control of the spindle in the servo–off state, and turns on spindle
clamp signal SCLP.
(9) When the SCLP signal is turned on, the PMC mechanically clamps the spindle with a clutch or shot
pin. After the spindle is clamped, the PMC turns off spindle clamp completion signal *SECLP.
(10)When the *SECLP signal is turned off, the control unit turns off spindle clamp signal SCLP and notifies
that the *SECLP signal has been received.
(11)When the SCLP signal is turned off, the PMC turns on spindle clamp completion signal *SECLP.
(12)Finally, the PMC turns on completion signal FIN for miscellaneous function strobe signal MF. Next,
the control unit turns off strobe signal MF, then the PMC turns off the FIN signal.
This completes the sequence for exiting the spindle turning mode and entering the spindle positioning
mode.
The following time chart shows the above sequence:
Time chart for exiting the spindle turning mode and entering the spindle positioning mode
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
M command ( independent ) Mxx
Strobe signal MF
Spindle stop check signal SPSTP
Spindle position control
Spindle position control Servo-ON
Spindle unclamp signal SUCLP
Spindle unclamp completion signal *SEUCL
Spindle rotation
Reference point return end signal ZPj
Spindle clamp signal SCLP
Spindle clamp completion signal *SECLP
Auxilary function end signal FIN
– 186 –
2) Positioning the spindle in the spindle positioning mode

There are two ways to position the spindle in the spindle positioning mode. Both are described below.
(i) Positioning by a fixed angle with an M command
Specify the angle with two digits following M in a single block. M codes Myy to Myy+5 can be specified.
Number yy can be selected in a parameter. The positioning angle corresponding to the Myy command
can also be selected in a parameter. The positioning angles corresponding to M codes form an
arithmetical progression: The positioning angle specified by the Myy+1 command is two times that
specified by the Myy command, and the positioning angle specified by the Myy+2 command is three
times that specified by the Myy command. In short, these M commands are incremental commands.
Example When parameters specify that yy is 50 and Myy corresponds to 30
M code Positioning angle

M50 30deg
M51 60deg
M52 90deg
M53 120deg
M54 150deg
M55 180deg
(ii) Positioning by an arbitrary angle with a C command

Specify the positioning angle with a value following C in a single block. Both absolute and incremental
commands are available.
The commands must be specified in the G00 mode.
Example G00G90C10000: Absolute command (Positioning angle: 10 deg)
G00G91C20.0: Incremental command
For G code system A in a lathe system:
G00C10000: Absolute command
G00H20.0: Incremental command
Following is the procedure for positioning the spindle in the spindle positioning mode. This procedure
explains positioning by a fixed angle with an M command. The same procedure applies for positioning
by an arbitrary angle with a C command except that input/output signals for the miscellaneous function
are not transferred.
(1) Myy is specified in a program. The control unit sounds an alarm if Myy is specified in the spindle
turning mode.
(2) Miscellaneous function code signals M0 to M31 are output and miscellaneous function strobe sig-
nal MF is turned on. These operations are the same as those of the ordinary miscellaneous func-
tion.
(3) When strobe signal MF is turned on, the PMC reads the code signals and checks value yy indi-
cated by the code signals. The PMC does not turn on completion signal FIN for miscellaneous
function strobe signal MF until the procedure is completed. When the spindle is stopped, the PMC
turns on spindle stop check signal SPSTP.
(4) The control unit checks if spindle stop check signal SPSTP is on, immediately after turning on
strobe signal MF. If the SPSTP signal is on, the control unit turns on spindle unclamp signal
SUCLP.
(5) When the SUCLP signal is turned on, the PMC unclamps the spindle. After the spindle is un-
clamped, the PMC turns off spindle unclamp completion signal SEUCL.
(6) When the SEUCL signal is turned off, the control unit turns off spindle unclamp signal SUCLP
and notifies that the SEUCL signal has been received.
(7) When the SUCLP signal is turned off, the PMC turns on spindle unclamp completion signal
SEUCL.
After turning off the SUCLP signal, the control unit places the position control of the spindle in the
servo–on state, rotates the spindle, and stops the spindle at the specified angle.
(8) The control unit then places the position control of the spindle in the servo–off state, and turns on
spindle clamp signal SCLP.
(9) When the SCLP signal is turned on, the PMC mechanically clamps the spindle with a clutch or
shot pin. After the spindle is clamped, the PMC turns off spindle clamp completion signal SECLP.
– 187 –
(10)When the *SECLP signal is turned off, the control unit turns off spindle clamp signal SCLP and
notifies that the *SECLP signal has been received.
(11)When the SCLP signal is turned off, the PMC turns on spindle clamp completion signal *SECLP.
(12)Finally, the PMC turns on completion signal FIN for miscellaneous function strobe signal MF.
Next, the control unit turns off strobe signal MF, then the PMC turns off the FIN signal.
This completes the sequence for positioning the spindle in the spindle positioning mode.
Time chart for positioning the spindle in the spindle positioning mode
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
M command ( independent ) Myy
Strobe signal MF
Spindle position control Servo-ON
Spindle rotation
Spindle clamp signal SCLP
Spindle clamp completion signal *SECLP
Auxilary function completion signal FIN

3) Exiting the spindle positioning mode and entering the spindle turning mode
Use an Mzz command to exit from the spindle positioning mode and enter the spindle turning mode. Num-
ber zz can be set in a parameter.
(1) Mzz is specified in a program.
(2) Miscellaneous function code signals M0 to M31 are output and miscellaneous function strobe signal
MF is turned on. These operations are the same as those of the ordinary miscellaneous function.
(3) When strobe signal MF is turned on, the PMC reads the code signals and checks value zz indicated
by the code signals. The PMC does not turn on completion signal FIN for miscellaneous function
strobe signal MF until the procedure is completed. When the spindle is stopped, the PMC turns on
spindle stop check signal SPSTP.
(4) The control unit checks if spindle stop check signal SPSTP is on, immediately after turning on strobe
signal MF. If the SPSTP signal is on, the control unit turns on spindle unclamp signal SUCLP.
(5) When the SUCLP signal is turned on, the PMC unclamps the spindle. After the spindle is unclamped,
the PMC turns off spindle unclamp completion signal *SEUCL.
(6) When the *SEUCL signal is turned off, the control unit turns off spindle unclamp signal SUCLP and
notifies that the *SEUCL signal has been received.
(7) When the SUCLP signal is turned off, the PMC turns on spindle unclamp completion signal *SEUCL.
After turning off the SUCLP signal, the control unit changes the mode of the spindle control unit from
position control to spindle control.
(8) 8 Finaly, the PMC turns on completion signal FIN for miscellaneous function strobe signal MF. Next,
the control unit turns off strobe signal MF, then the PMC turns off the FIN signal.
This completes the sequence for exiting the spindle positioning mode and entering the spindle turning
mode.
– 188 –

Time chart for exiting the spindle positioning mode and entering the spindle turning mode
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

M command ( independent ) Mzz
Strobe signal MF
Spindle position control servo-ON
Auxiliary function completion signal FIN
NOTE 1 Automatic operation stop signal *SP is disabled when operations are executed for exiting the
spindle turning mode and entering the spindle positioning mode (Mxx command), positioning
the spindle in the spindle positioning mode (Myy to Myy+5 commands and C command), or
exiting the spindle positioning mode and entering the spindle turning mode (Mzz command).
Automatic operation is not stopped until each of the above operations is completed even if the
*SP signal is turned off.
NOTE 2 Dry run signal DRN and machine lock signal MLK are invalid for spindle positioning.
NOTE 3 Miscellaneous function lock signal AFL is invalid for spindle positioning with an M command
(Mxx command, Myy to Myy+5 commands, and Mzz command).
(a) Spindle gear selection signals (GS1, GS2, GS4)

[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals notify the control unit of the state of the gear between the spindle motor and
spindle. The gear ratio itself is not input; the currently selected gear among the several steps
of gear provided on the machine is input in binary.
GS4 GS2 GS1 Gear selection

0 0 0 1st step
0 0 1 2nd step
0 1 0 3rd step
0 1 1 4th step
1 0 0 5th step
1 0 1 6th step
1 1 0 7th step
1 1 1 8th step
The mode of the spindle control unit is changed from spindle control to position control in order
to exit the spindle turning mode and enter the spindle positioning mode. In position control,
the specified angle by which to turn the spindle is input to the error counter and converted to
a speed command to the motor. The factor for the conversion (loop gain multiplier) differs
depending on the gear ratio between the spindle motor and spindle. The loop gain multiplier
for the gear currently selected is set in the position control circuit based on the gear selection
signals. Set the loop gain multiplier for each gear in a parameter beforehand.
When the serial interface spindle is used, up to four steps of gear can be used. (See the sub-
sections on spindle serial output and Cs contour control function for details.)
– 189 –
(b) Spindle stop check signal (SPSTP)

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal notifies the control unit that the spindle is stopped.
The control unit checks that this signal is on before exiting the spindle turning mode and enter-
ing the spindle positioning mode, positioning the spindle in the spindle positioning mode, or
exiting the spindle positioning mode and entering the spindle turning mode.
(c) Spindle clamp signal (SCLP)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal instructs the PMC to mechanically clamp the spindle with a clutch or shot pin.
The output conditions and procedure are described in the three procedures for spindle posi-
tioning.
(d) Spindle clamp completion signal (SECLP)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal notifies the control unit that the PMC has completed mechanically clamping the
spindle with a clutch or shot pin.
tioning.
(e) Spindle unclamp signal (SUCLP)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal instructs the PMC to release the spindle from mechanical clamp with a clutch or
shot pin.
tioning.
(f) Spindle unclamp completion signal (SEUCL)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal notifies the control unit that the PMC has completed releasing the spindle from
mechanical clamp with a clutch or shot pin.
tioning.
2.3.31 Detecting fluctuation of the spindle speed

The spindle speed fluctuation function monitors the speed of the spindle. If the spindle speed fluctuation ex-
ceeds the limit specified by a command, the fact is signaled to the machine. This prevents poor machining
accuracy arising from spindle speed errors and spindle seizure due to fluctuation of the spindle speed.
Method of detecting the fluctuation of the spindle speed
The following method is used to judge whether the spindle speed fluctuation exceeds the limit specified by a
command. The allowable speed fluctuation, Sm, is the faster of the two speeds, Sd and Sq, described below.
The maximum allowable speed Sm max and minimum allowable speed Sm min are obtained by adding Sm
to specified speed Sc or subtracting Sm from specified speed Sc.
Sm max = Sc + Sm
Sm min = Sc – Sm (Sm is the faster of Sd and Sq.)
Sd: Allowable fluctuation independent of the specified speed. Sd is specified in rpm by a parameter
or program command.
Sq: Allowable fluctuation obtained by multiplying specified speed Sc by constant ratio r. This value
varies depending on the specified speed. The faster the specified speed, the greater the
fluctuation. Ratio r is set in % by a parameter or program command.
The figure below shows the relationship between maximum and minimum allowable speeds Sm max and Sm
min and the specified speed. If the actual spindle speed is within the shaded area, that is, if it exceeds the maxi-
mum allowable speed or is less than the minimum allowable speed, it is assumed that the fluctuation exceeds
the limit and an alarm is issued.
– 190 –
Allowable maximum speed Sm max. ,allowable minimum speed Sm min.

Sm max
Sq
Sm min
Sd
Command speed Sc
When specified speed Sc is less than allowable speed fluctuation Sm (except Sc = 0), the minimum allowable
speed Sm min is 0. When the actual spindle speed is less than minimum allowable speed Sm min for one se-
cond or more, in other words, when the actual spindle speed is 0 rpm for one second or more, an alarm is issued.
No judgment is made in the following cases:
(1) The machine is in a mode where detection of the spindle speed fluctuation is canceled (G25)
To allow the spindle speed fluctuation to be detected, G26 (spindle speed fluctuation detecting mode) must
be specified.
(2) The specified spindle speed is 0.
The control unit assumes specified spindle speed Sc to be 0 when all spindle motor command voltage sig-
nals (RI0 to RI12) input from the PMC are off. This means that all signals RI0 to RI12 must be turned off
when voltage to the spindle amplifier and spindle motor is reduced to 0 to stop the spindle without using
the voltage output to the spindle amplifier from the control unit.
(3) Search is in progress when a program is restarted.
(4) When specified spindle speed Sc is changed, the spindle speed fluctuation is not detected until either of
the following two conditions is satisfied:
(i) Until time Tp set by a parameter elapses after specified speed Sc changes. Tp is a constant indepen-
dent of Sc.
(ii) Until the actual speed is in a given error range with respect to specified speed Sc. The error range
is between Sc + Sq and Sc – Sq, where Sq is obtained by multiplying specified speed Sc by constant
ratio r.
Specify ratio r in % in a parameter or program command. In the constant surface speed control mode
(G96), specified speed Sc changes while the tool is moving along the X–axis. The spindle speed fluc-
tuation is therefore not detected in this case.
The control unit calculates specified speed Sc as follows: First, it sets the maximum spindle speed
(S max 1 to S max 8) for each gear ratio between the spindle motor and spindle in a parameter. Each
maximum spindle speed (S max 1 to S max 8) is the theoretical maximum for the gear ratio when all
spindle motor command voltage signals (RI0 to RI12) input from the PMC are on (8191 in decimal).
Spindle motor command voltage signals ( RI0 - RI12 )
8191
0
Gear 1 Smax 1 Gear 2 Smax 2 Gear 3 Smax 3
– 191 –
The PMC notifies the control unit of the currently selected gear with spindle gear selection signals
GS1, GS2, and GS4. See Section 2.3.30, “Spindle positioning function” for the details of spindle gear
selection signals GS1, GS2, and GS4. The control unit calculates specified speed Sc based on
spindle gear selection signals GS1, GS2, and GS4 and spindle motor command voltage signals RI0
to RI12.
Actual spindle speed Sa is obtained from feedback pulses from the position coder mounted on the
spindle. The pulses are detected at 64–ms cycle and converted to rpm. Specified speed Sc is then
compared with actual spindle speed Sa. If the difference between them exceeds allowable speed fluc-
tuation Sm, an alarm is issued.
Example 1 When an alarm is issued after the specified speed is reached
Actual spindle sped
Alowable
Sm max
maximum speed
Sm
Sc Command speed
Sq
Speed which has
reached the
command speed
Sm
Allowable
Sm min minimum speed
No
Judgement Judgement Judgement
Time
Another speed Judgement start Alarm
is instructed
Example 2 When an alarm is issued before the specified speed is reached
Actual spindle sped
Allowable
Sm max
maximum speed
Sc Command speed
Sq
Speed which has
reached the
command speed
Allowable
Sm min minimum speed
Time Tp
No
Judgement Judgement Judgement
Time
Another speed Judgement start Alarm
is instructed
– 192 –
(a) Spindle speed fluctuation alarm signal (SPAL)

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal informs that the actual spindle speed fluctuation exceeds the allowable fluctuation
range for the specified speed.
[Output Condition]
i. The actual spindle speed is higher than the maximum or lower than the minimum allow-
able speed for the specified speed. When automatic operation is being started, this sig-
nal (SPAL) performs automatic operation for a single block and stops the operation. The
control unit does not reduce the output voltage to the spindle amplifier to zero when SPAL
is turned on. The control unit outputs voltage in accordance with spindle motor command
voltage signals RI0 to RI12. Therefore, when SPAL is turned on, the PMC turns off all
spindle motor command voltage signals RI0 to RI12.
i. The alarm for spindle speed fluctuation is not detected
ii. The control unit is reset with this signal on and the alarm is terminated
– 193 –
2.3.32 Function for specifying a desired spindle gear ratio

When threading is executed, a position coder must be mounted on the spindle. In the conventional system,
the gear ratio of the spindle to the position coder is restricted to 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, and 1:8.
This function enables threading and other machining to be executed with a desired spindle to position coder
gear ratio. As the gear ratio is not restricted to those four described above, the machining can be executed
as in a machine having the position coder contained in the motor instead of having one mounted on the spindle.
When the gear ratio of the spindle to the position coder is expressed as N:M, this function allows both M and
N to be specified with an integer within the range of 1 to 9999.
The following functions can be executed with the desired gear ratio:
⋅ Threading
⋅ Circular threading (15–TB only)
⋅ Threading with a variable pitch (15–TB only)
⋅ Feed per rotation
⋅ Actual spindle speed display
⋅ Constant surface speed control
The following function cannot be executed with the desired gear ratio:
⋅ Spindle positioning
(1) Use
(a) Specifying a desired gear ratio in parameters
Data No. Data
5709 Number of spindle gear teeth (N)
Data No. Data
5710 Number of position coder gear teeth (M)
Parameter input
Data type : Word
Unit of data : 1
Valid range : 1 to 9999
When non–zero values are specified in both parameters above, the function for specifying a desired
gear ratio is validated. If the value of either parameter is set to zero, conventional parameter 5610 is
validated.
– 194 –
(b) Specifying a desired gear ratio with system variables of a custom macro
The parameters of (1) above can be read and written as the following system variables of a custom
macro:
#3013: Parameter 5709
#3014: Parameter 5710
When these system variables are used, the gear ratio can be sent from the PMC to the CNC unit via
the PMC window.
The gear ratio can be changed by the PMC by one of the following procedures:
(i) Automatic operation
M code to change
the spindle gear
MF
FIN
Operation of changing the

spindle gear
Writing the gear ratio through

the window (ACT)
Transfer end information

(W1)
(ii) Manual operation
Instruct to change the gear
Operation of changing
the spindle gear
Writing the gear ratio through

the window (ACT)
Transfer end information

(W1)
– 195 –
(c) Threading with a desired gear ratio

In threading, the single rotation signal of the spindle is required to synchronize the spindle and the Z–
axis. When a motor with built–in position coder is used to execute threading with a desired gear ratio,
the single rotation signal of the spindle must be sent to the CNC unit as illustrated below. (The figure
below shows a sample system containing a FANUC spindle motor and spindle amplifier.)
CNC
Position coder signal
Signal converter Spindle AMP
Feedback (P)
Position detecter 1 revolution signal
1 revolution signal detecter

Spindle motor
Spindle
M : N
Z
M : Number of position coder gear teeth (pcs.)

N : Number of spindle gear teeth (pcs.) Tool L
L : Thread pitch (mm/rev)
P : Number of pulses received by position coder (pulse)
Z : Byte move distance (mm)
Work
∆Z can be calculated as follows:

Z + L P M
4096 N
CAUTION The gear ratio parameters must not be changed during threading or other machining.
NOTE 1 Under the following conditions, the threading error per pitch does not exceed the value
obtained by the expression shown below:
⋅ There is no deviation due to servo delay or acceleration/deceleration delay.
⋅ The spindle rotates at constant speed.
⋅ The mechanical system is free from deviation.
L M (mmńrev) L : Screw pitch (mm/rev)
4096 N
(This expression is obtained by setting P to 1 in the expression described above.)
The threading error can be reduced by smoothing (setting the number of times sampling is
executed in parameter 5611). (If parameter 5611 is set to 4, the error can be reduced to 1/16
of its value.)
The threading error will not accumulate because it is the maximum value per pitch.
NOTE 2 When the gear ratio is specified as shown in the figure of (c) above, the position of the single
rotation signal of the spindle deviates by the amount calculated by the following expression:
360/4096/780×S (degrees) S: Spindle speed (rpm)
– 196 –
2.3.33 Spindle serial output and Cs contour control functions

A spindle is called a serial interface spindle when it is controlled by the spindle serial output function.
The serial interface spindle can perform positioning and interpolation with other axes. That is, linear and circu-
lar interpolation are possible between the spindle and a servo axis.
(1) Control mode
For the serial interface spindle:
⋅ Controlling the spindle speed is referred to as spindle rotation control. (A speed command is used
to control the rotation of the spindle.)
⋅ Controlling the position of the spindle is referred to as spindle contour control or Cs contour con-
trol. (A move command is used to control the position of the spindle.)
The DI signal from the PMC switches the modes.
(2) Precautions
(a) Switching between spindle rotation control and spindle contour control
(i) Switching from spindle contour control to spindle rotation control
Before switching, make sure that a move command in either automatic or manual operation mode
has been completed.
If an attempt is made to switch the modes while the spindle is moving, an alarm is issued to indicate
an interlocked state or excessive positional deviation.
(ii) Switching from spindle rotation control to spindle contour control
Mode switching can be made while the spindle is rotating. Note that the spindle stops immediate-
ly.
(b) Reference position return during spindle contour control
(i) Manual reference position return
The manual reference position return speed varies with the distance from the current position of
the tool to the reference position and cannot be specified.
The direction for a reference position return should be specified by a parameter from 3000 to 3999.
(ii) Automatic reference position return
The speed for the first reference position return made after switching from spindle rotation control
to spindle contour control varies with the distance from the current position of the tool to the refer-
ence position return, and cannot be specified.
The direction for a reference position return should be specified by a parameter from 3000 to 3999.
The speed for the second or later reference position return in the spindle contour control mode
remains as specified by a parameter.
(iii) Operation after switching to spindle contour control
The current position is lost after switching from spindle rotation control to spindle contour control,
so a reference position return should be made.
However, the tool can be moved without causing a reference position return, if the parameter set-
ting does not include a reference position return function and an established coordinate system
is not required.
(c) Assignment of spindle contour control axes
(i) Assignment as a controlled axis
The axis used for spindle contour control should be assigned as one of the controlled axes.
(ii) Assignment as a servo axis
The servo axis number for spindle contour control should be the same as the control axis number.
If they are different, a servo alarm (SV026) is issued for all axes.
– 197 –
(iii) Example of Assignment

X, Y, Z: Servo axes
C: Spindle contour control axis
Assign the same number for the servo and controlled axes.
Control axis No. Axis name Servo axis No.

1 X 1
2 Y 2 Assign the same number for the
3 Z 3 servo and controlled axes.
4 C 4
(iv) Assignment of axes for the Series 15–TT
The Series 15–TT permits 2–spindle control. When the two spindles are used in spindle contour
control, assign one spindle contour control axis to each head. Two spindle contour control axes
cannot be assigned to one head.
(d) Automatic servo loop gain setting at switching between spindle rotation control and spindle contour
control
(i) Switching from spindle rotation control to spindle contour control
After switching from spindle rotation control to spindle contour control, if the servo loop gains of
the spindle contour control axis and other axes differ, linear or circular interpolation cannot be per-
formed with the spindle contour control axis normally.
Therefore, the servo loop gain (parameter Nos. 3069, 3070, 3071, and 3072) selected by the
clutch/gear signals (CTH1A and CTH2A) is automatically set for the servo axes other than those
subjected to spindle contour control.
(ii) Switching from spindle contour control to spindle rotation control
The original servo loop gain (parameter 1825) should automatically be set for the servo axes.
(iii) Switching between spindle rotation control and spindle contour control during automatic opera-
tion
After switching between spindle rotation control and spindle contour control during automatic op-
eration, an immediate switching of the servo loop gain hampers normal operation. The servo loop
gain should be switched after the block has been completed.
(iv) The servo loop gain is also automatically set when the switching between spindle rotation control
and spindle contour control is reset in operation other than automatic operation or when the mode
is switched.
No switching
(v) When no interpolation is made between the spindle contour control axis and another axis, or the
same servo loop gain is used for both the spindle contour control axis and the servo axis, the gain
need not be changed. In this case, it is necessary to specify so with a parameter (NGC of parame-
ter 5609 = 1).
(vi) Series 15–TT
In the Series 15–TT, only the gain of the servo motor for the head belonging to the spindle contour
control axis is changed.
(e) Relationships with other functions
(i) Operating monitor
No conventional parameter is used for the motor load ratings of the spindle and the spindle con-
tour control axis. Parameter 3127 is used instead. (Normally, this parameter is set automatically
and need not be changed.)
(ii) Remote buffer operation
⋅ Operating by binary format
⋅ In NC format operation, if DNC operation using a remote buffer is set such that high–speed
distribution is performed when possible (DNC of parameter 0000 = 0), leave the spindle
contour control mode before entering the remote buffer operation mode.
Spindle contour control cannot be performed during the remote buffer operation mode. Remote
buffering is possible only in the spindle rotation control mode. Do not switch between spindle con-
tour control and spindle rotation control during the remote buffer operation.
– 198 –
Rewriting programmable parameters cannot change the spindle parameter.

(iii) Spindle positioning
Four gear stages can be used: the first, second, third, and fourth gears.
Set the same value in gear select signals CTH1A and CTH2A as in the conventional gear select
signals (GS1, GS2, GS4).
The servo loop gain for each gear stage should be specified in a parameter from 3000 to 3999.
The speed at which the tool moves cannot be specified for a reference position return (orienta-
tion). The speed varies with the distance from the current position of the tool to the reference posi-
tion.
The direction for a reference position return should be specified in a parameter from 3000 to 3999.
Tool drift is not compensated for.
Grid shift should be specified using a parameter from 3000 to 3999.
Spindle positioning cannot be performed during the remote buffer operation (binary format opera-
tion).
Neither pitch error nor backlash can be corrected.
(iv) Rigid tapping
The servo loop gain for each gear stage should be specified in a parameter from 3000 to 3999.
The servo loop gain specified for each gear stage should also be set for the spindle and the drilling
axis.
The conventional parameter (5753) is invalid.
(v) Detecting the spindle fluctuation
(vi) Stored pitch error compensation, straightness compensation, and inclination compensation
These functions are invalid for the spindle contour control axis.
(vii) Index table indexing
The index table axis is not subject to spindle contour control.
(f) Others
(i) Position coder
A parameter (PDC of parameter 5603) to specify whether to check a broken position coder wire
is not available. When it is not necessary to check for this failure, the NAL bit of parameter 5602
should be set; this parameter is primarily intended to specify not to check for an alarm condition
in the spindle speed control unit. If this parameter bit is set, an alarm condition in the spindle ampli-
fier is not checked either.
(ii) Spindle contour control
Spindle contour control requires the BMI interface.
(iii) Canceling spindle contour control
When a spindle contour control axis is canceled, the spindle enters the spindle rotation control
mode. Therefore, it should not be canceled.
– 199 –
(iv) Gear select signal

Four gear stages can be used: the first, second, third, and fourth gears. The other stages cannot
be used.
Set the corresponding value in gear select signals CTH1A and CTH2A as in the conventional gear
select signals (GS1, GS2, GS4).
The relationships between the gear select signals and the clutch/gear signals are listed below.
Gear
GS4 GS2 GS1 CTH1A CTH2A
slelct
0 0 0 0 0 1st step
0 0 1 0 1 2nd step
0 1 0 1 0 3rd step
0 1 1 1 1 4th step
1 0 0
1 0 1
U
Unusable
bl
1 1 0
1 1 1
(v) Series 15–TT with two spindles

The analog spindle and the serial interface spindle cannot be used simultaneously.
(3) DI/DO signals
(a) Serial interface spindle motor torque signals (first spindle) (SLDMA0 to SLDMA15)
(second spindle) (SLDMB0 to SLDMB15)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Indicate the motor torque for the serial interface spindle.
The torque and the signal correspond to each other as shown below:

15
%data = ( 2 i Ti ) N
32767
i0
where Ti = 0 when SLDMA is low and
1 when SLDMA is high,
and N is a value set in parameter 3127 (for the second spindle , in parameter
3267).
[Output Condition]
Output at all times
(b) Serial interface spindle motor rotation signals (first spindle) (SSPDA0 to SSPDA15)
Serial interface spindle motor rotation (second spindle) (SSPDB0 to SSPDB15)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Indicate the motor speed for the serial interface spindle.
The speed and the signal correspond to each other as shown below:

15
%speed (rpm) = ( i 2 i Si ) N
16383
i0
where Si = 0 when SSPDA is low and
1 when SSPDA is high,
and N is a value set in parameter 3020 (for the second spindle , in parameter
3160).
[Output Condition]
Output at all times
– 200 –
(c) Serial interface spindle motor alarm signals (first signal) (SSPAA0 to SSPAA7)
Serial interface spindle motor alarm signal (second spindle) (SSPAB0 to SSPAB7)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Indicate the type of alarm in the serial interface spindle amplifier.
Serial interface spindle alarm code signals SSPAA0 to SSPAA7 and their meanings are listed
below:
The torque and the signal correspond to each other as shown below:
NOTE The conventional spindle alarm code signals SPAL1 to SPAL8 cannot be used.
SSPA SSPA SSPA SSPA SSPA SSPA SSPA SSPA

Meaning
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Motor overheat
2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Velocity error excess
7 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Overspeed
9 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overload of main circuit
Low input power supply
10 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
voltage
11 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 Overvoltage of DC link
Excessive current of DC
12 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
link
CPU internal data memory
13 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
error
Programo ROM sum
18 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
check error
Excessive offset of
19 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
U–phase current detector
Excessive offset of
20 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
V–phase current detector
24 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 Serial transfer data error
25 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 Serial data tranfer halt
Cs axis control speed
26 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 detect signal
disconnection
Position coder signal
27 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
disconnection
Cs axis control position
28 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 detect signal
disconnection
29 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 Short time overload
Excessive current of input
30 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
circuit
Motor restricted alarm,
31 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 Speed detector
disconnection
Serial data tranfer LSI
32 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
internal RAM error
Insufficient charge of DC
33 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
link
Parameter setting
34 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
exceeding allowable value
Excessive gear ratio set
35 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
data
36 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 Error counter overflow
(0: Signal LOW, 1: Signal HIGH)
– 201 –
(d) Serial interface spindle state signals

These signals indicate the states of the serial interface spindle.
(i) Alarm signals (ALMA, ALMB)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Indicate a spindle alarm.
[Output Condition]
The signal goes high when a spindle alarm occurs.
(ii) Zero–speed detected signals (SSTA, SSTB)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Indicate that the speed of the spindle motor is at or below the zero–speed detection level.
[Output Condition]
The signal goes high when the actual spindle motor speed is at or below the zero–speed
detection level.
(iii) Normal speed detected signals (SDTA, SDTB)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Indicate that the speed of the spindle motor is at or below the specified speed.
[Output Condition]
The signal goes high when the actual spindle motor speed is at or below the specified speed.
(iv) Specified speed reached signals (SARA, SARB)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Indicate that the the spindle motor speed is within the speed range specified by a speed com-
mand.
[Output Condition]
The signal goes high when the spindle has reached and remains in the specified speed
range.
(v) Load detected signal 1 (LDT1A, LDT1B)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Indicate that the load is at or above the specified load detection level. The detection level can
be specified separately for LDT1A and LDT1B.
[Output Condition]
The signal goes high when a load at or above the specified load detection level is detected.
(vi) Load detected signal 2 (LDT2A, LDT2B)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Indicate that the load is at or above the specified load detection level.
[Output Condition]
The signal goes high when a load at or above the specified load detection level is detected.
(vii) Torque limited signals (TLMA, TLMB)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Indicate that the torque is limited.
[Output Condition]
The signal is high when the torque is limited.
(viii)Orientation completed signals (ORARA, ORARB)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Indicate that an orientation command has been issued and the spindle has stopped at or
close to the specified position.
[Output Condition]
The signal goes high when the orientation is completed.
– 202 –
(e) Serial interface spindle control signals

These signals control the serial interface spindle.
(i) Torque limit command low signals (TLMLA, TLMLB)
(ii) Torque limit command high signals (TLMHA, TLMHB)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Limit the spindle motor torque. The limit is specified by a spindle parameter.
[Operation]
TLMLA (B) TLMHA (B) Description

0 0 No torque rimit
0 1 Limited to the value set by a paremeter
1 0 Limited to about half of TLMHA (B)
1 1 Limited to about half of TLMHA (B)
(iii) Clutch/gear signals (CTH1A, CTH1B, CTH2A, CTH2B)

[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Set up the following conditions according to the states of the clutch and gear. The conditions
are used to select a spindle control parameter.
[Operation]
CTH1A (B) CTH2A (B) Description

0 0 HIGH GEAR
0 1 MEDIUM HIGH GEAR
1 0 MEDIUM LOW GEAR
1 1 LOW GEAR
(iv) Reverse rotation command signals (SRVA, SRVB)

(v) Forward rotation command signals (SFRA, SFRB)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Specify the direction of the spindle motor rotation as viewed from the shaft.
[Operation]
SRVA (B) SFRA (B) Description

0 0 Stop
0 1 Forward rotation (CCW: Counter–clockwise
direction)
1 0 Reverse rotation (CW: Clockwise direction)
1 1 Stop
(vi) Spindle orientation command signals (ORCMA, ORCMB)

[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Used for spindle orientation control.
[Operation] When the signal is high, spindle orientation control is performed.
(vii) Machine ready signals (MRDYA, MRDYB)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Turn on and off the electromagnetic contactor in the spindle servo unit.
[Operation] Low: The contactor is turned off.
High: The contactor is turned on.
– 203 –
(viii)Alarm reset signals (ARSTA, ARSTB)

[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Reset a spindle alarm.
[Operation]
32msec min
1" An alarm is reset at

the timing of changing
from 1" to 0".
0"
(ix) Emergency stop signals (*ESPA, *ESPB)
[Classification]
The signals are emergency stop signals for the spindle motor.
[Operation] Low: Emergency stop
High: Normal operation
(x) Signals to change the spindle orientation stop position (INDXA, INDXB)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Change the spindle orientation stop position to a desired position in one spindle rotation.
[Operation] When the signal changes from high to low, the new stop position data is accessed, and the
spindle moves to the new position and stops there.
(xi) Signals to specify the direction of rotation when the spindle orientation stop position is changed
(ROTAA, ROTAB)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Specify the rotation direction when the spindle orientation stop position is changed to a de-
sired position in one spindle rotation.
[Operation] While the signal is high, the spindle rotates clockwise and stops. While the signal is low, the
spindle rotates counterclockwise and stops. The signal is valid only if the short cut signal is
low when the spindle orientation position (NRROA, NRROB) is changed.
(xii) Short cut signals command when the spindle orientation stop position is changed (NRROA,
NRROB)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Specify the rotation direction or short cut control when the spindle orientation stop position
is changed to a desired position in one spindle rotation.
[Operation] While the signal is high, the spindle performs short cut control (+_180o max), rotates and
stops. While the signal is low, the spindle rotates and stops as directed by ROTAA or ROTAB.
(f) Signals indicating spindle contour control mode switching (MSNCTR1, MSCNTR2, MSCNTR3, ...)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Indicate that switching between spindle rotation control and spindle contour control has been
completed. One signal is provided for each controlled axis. The last digit in the signal name
indicates the number of a controlled axis. It is necessary to use the signal with the controlled
axis number corresponding to the spindle contour control axis.
MSCNTR1
1 ……1st axis
2 ……2nd axis
3 ……3rd axis
: :
: :
[Output Condition]
The signal is high in the spindle contour control mode and low in the spindle rotation control
mode.
– 204 –
NOTE These signals are not provided in the FS3/6 interface.
(g) Spindle contour control mode switch signals (SCNTR1, SCNTR2, SCNTR3, ...)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] [Function] Used in switching between the spindle rotation control mode and the spindle con-
tour control mode. One signal is available for each controlled axis. The last digit in the signal
name indicates the number of a controlled axis. It is necessary to use the signal with the con-
trolled axis number corresponding to the spindle contour control axis.
SCNTR1
1 ……1st axis
2 ……2nd axis
3 ……3rd axis
: :
: :
[Operation] When the signal is low, the machine tool enters the spindle contour control mode. When the
signal is high it enters the spindle rotation control mode. Before switching from spindle con-
tour control to spindle rotation control, it is necessary to ensure that the spindle move com-
mand is complete. Switching from spindle rotation control to spindle contour control is pos-
sible while the spindle is rotating.
NOTE These signals are not provided in the FS3/6 interface.
Spindle speed control Spindol contour control Spindle speed control
High
SCNTRi Low
High
MSCNTRi
Internal control switching Internal control switching
Fig. 2.3.33 Control mode switch signals
(h) Signals for specifying the voltage output to the spindle motor (RISGN, RISGNB, RI0 to RI12, RIB0 to
RIB12)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Specify the output voltage for the spindle motor. The control unit controls the voltage output
to the spindle motor using these signals, only regardless of the spindle rotation speed speci-
fied in the output command. The PM C uses these signals for specifying the voltage after cal-
culating it from the received spindle rotation speed according to the selected gear, or for spec-
ifying the voltage for other purposes (for example, for spindle orienta tion).
The signals include the polarity signal, RISGN, which specifies the polarity of the voltage, and
13–bit binary code signals, RI0 to RI12, which specify the absolute value of the voltage.
A positive voltage is output when RISGN is low and a negative voltage is output when RISGN
is high.
The output voltage is calculated from the 13–bit binary code signals –– using the following
formula:
– 205 –
{2 Vi}
12
Output voltage i E volt
8191
i0
where Vi = 0 when RIi is low,

Vi = 1 when RIi is high,
and E is the maximum voltage (constant) determined by the hardware.
[Operation] The control unit outputs the values of these input signals to the D/A converter every 16 ms.
(4) Diagnosis
(a) Serial interface spindle diagnosis numbers
Number Diagnosis
1500 SIC LSI internal data
1501 SIC LSI data/PCB data/other data
1502 NC internal processing sequence data/spindle status data –1
1503 NC internal processing sequence data/spindle status data –2
1504 Torque data for No.1 spindle motor
1505 Rotational speed data for No.1 spindle motor
1506 Torque data for No.2 spindle motor
1507 Rotational speed data for No.2 spindle motor
1508 Spindle synchronization control processing sequence/other data
Number of error pulses for No.1 spindle motor during spindle
1509
synchronization control
Number of error pulses for No.2 spindle motor during spindle
1510
Difference of the number of error pulses between the two spindles
1511
during spindles synchronization control
(b) Detailed contents
Data No. Data
1500 SALMI CALM CMER CER SNER FRER CRER
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Information in the LSI chip for the Serial Interface Controller (SIC)
CPER 1: CRC error (warning)
FRER 1: Framing error (warning)
SNER 1: Wrong transmission/reception station
CER 1: Receive error
CMER 1: No reply during automatic scanning
CALM 1: Communication alarm in the spindle amplifier
SALMI 1: System alarm in the spindle amplifier
Data No. Data
1501 SICPOS SICTYP SICPCB
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SIC LSI chip, PCB, and other information

SICPCB 0: No spindle module equipped with an SIC LSI chip
1: spindle module equipped with an SLC LSI chip
SICTYP 0: SIC1 LSI
1: SIC2 LSI
SICPOS 0: Spindle module mounted on axis CPU board
1: Spindle module mounted on CNC main CPU board
– 206 –
Data No. Data
1502 SYNC1 SREQ1 SSTB1 SNOKD1 SCOMA1 SNOTC1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NC internal processing sequence information and spindle status 1
SNOTC1 1: No SIC1–LSI connected to the serial line
SCOMA1 1: Serial communication alarm (failure in the SIC1–LSI)
SNOKD1 1: Something other than the spindle amplifier (SIC1) connected at one end of the
serial line.
SSTB1 1: NC ready to communicate but the first spindle is not
SREQ1 1: NC operable but the first spindle is requesting a parameter
SYNC1 1: Spindle SIC1–LSI out of synchronization
Data No. Data
1503 SLES2 SREQ2 SSTB2 SSPRM2 SNCRRM2 SNOTC2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NC internal processing sequence information and spindle status 2
SNOTC2 1: No SIC2–LSI connected to the serial line
SNCRM2 1: NC SIC2–LSI error (parameter check error)
SSPRM2 1: NC SIC2–LSI communication busy high, or spindle SIC2–LSI error
(parameter check error)
SSTB2 1: NC ready to communicate but the second spindle is not
SREQ2 1: NC operable but the second spindle is requesting a parameter
SLES2 1: More spindle amplifiers connected than the number of spindles specified by
parameter
Data No. Data
1504 1st spindle motor torque data
Torque of the motor for spindle 1

Unit: %
Data No. Data
1505 1st spindle motor rotation speed data
Motor speed for spindle 1

Unit: rpm
Data No. Data
1506 2nd spindle motor torque data
Torque of the motor for spindle 2

Unit: %
Data No. Data
1507 2nd spindle motor rotation speed data
Motor speed for spindle 2

Unit: rpm
– 207 –
Data No. Data
1508 SPSYC3 SPSYC2 SPSYC1 SPSYC0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Spindle synchronization control processing sequence/other data
SP SP SP SP
Status of internal processing
SYC3 SYC2 SYC1 SYC0
Mode is not spindle synchronization control mode
0 0 0 0
(waiting for SPSYC = 1)
Waiting for clearing synchronization arrival speed
0 0 0 1
(during spindle speed synchronization control)
0 0 1 0 Waiting for setting synchronization arrival speed signal
Waiting for completion of spindle speed synchronization
0 0 1 1 and spindle phase synchronization command
(waiting for SPPHS = 1)
0 1 0 0 Phasing ON / OFF
Waiting for clearing synchronization arrival speed signal
0 1 0 1
(during spindle phase synchronization control)
0 1 1 0 Waiting for setting synchronization arrival speed signal
0 1 1 1 Spindle phase synchronization completed
Data No. Data
1509 1st spindle motor error pulse amount at spindle synchronization control
Number of error pulses for the motor for spindle 1 during spindle sequence control
Unit: Pulses
Data No. Data
1510 2nd spindle motor error pulse amount at spindle synchronization control
Number of error pulses for the motor for spindle 2 during spindle sequence control
Unit: Pulses
Data No. Data
1511 Error pulse difference between spindles at spindle synchronization control
Difference in the number of error pulses between the two spindles during spindle sequence con-
trol
Unit: Pulses
(5) FANUC Series 15 (multiaxis)
The multiaxis FS15 shares all parameters, their setting methods, alarms, DI/DO signals, and their address-
es with the standard FS15 except for the following:
i) Serial interface spindle connection method
ii) Axis allocation method for the Cs contour control function
iii) Restrictions in relation to other functions
– 208 –
(a) Connecting the multiaxis FS15 to the serial interface spindle

Connect axis CPU board 1 (for control of axes 1 to 4) to the serial interface spindle amplifier. For
details, refer to the FANUC Series 15 MODEL–B Connection Manual (B–62073E).
(b) Assigning axes for the Cs contour control function
Assign the axis to which spindle contour control (Cs contour control) is to be applied as controlled
axis 1. Since the multiaxis FS15 supports functions, such as synchronous control, not supported
by the standard FS15, servo axis allocation in the multiaxis FS15 is modified. Consequently, the
control axis allocation does not necessarily coincide with the servo axis allocation. The multiaxis
FS15 does not require such coincidence provided that:
There are as many axis control PCBs as the number of servo axes.
– When axes 1 to 3 are servo axes, spindle contour control (Cs contour control) applies to the
last servo axis.
– When axes 4 to 15 are servo axes, spindle contour control (Cs contour control) applies only
to axis 4. A servo motor cannot be connected to axis 4 because the fourth controlled axis is
a spindle contour control axis (Cs contour control axis). If five servo axes or more are used,
parameter 1023 is used to modify servo axis assignment.
A servo alarm (SV26) is issued to indicate an erroneous setting.
(Axis assignment example 1)
X, Y, Z : Controlled axes
C : Spindle contour control (Cs contour control)
Servo axis number Spindle contour control

Controlled axis number Axis name
(parameter 1023) (bit 7 of parameter 1804)
1 X 1 0
2 Y 2 0
3 Z 3 0
4 C 4 1
X, Y, Z : Controlled axes (The X–axis is subject to synchronous control.)
C : Spindle contour control (Cs contour control)

1 XML 1 0
2 Y 3 0
3 Z 5 0
4 C 4 1
– XSy 2 0
L: Master axis in synchronous control

l: Slave axis in synchronous control
In this case, controlled axis 5 does not exist because it would be a slave axis in synchronous
control.
X, Y, Z1, Z2, X3, U, V, W, A, B: Controlled axes
C: Spindle contour control (Cs contour control)
– 209 –

1 X 1 0
2 Y 2 0
3 Z1 3 0
4 Z2 5 0
5 Z3 6 0
6 U 7 0
7 V 8 0
8 W 9 0
9 A 10 0
10 B 11 0
11 C 4 1
– The eleventh controlled axis is subject to spindle contour control (Cs contour control). Its ser-
vo axis setting (parameter 1023) is 4.
X, Y, Z1, Z2, X3, U, V, W, A, B: Controlled axes
C: Spindle contour control (Cs contour control)

1 XML 1 0
2 Y 3 0
3 Z1 5 0
4 Z2 6 0
5 Z3 7 0
6 U 8 0
7 V 9 0
8 W 10 0
9 A 11 0
10 B 12 0
11 C 4 1
– XSy 2 0
L: Master axis in synchronous control

l: Slave axis in synchronous control
In this case, controlled axis 5 does not exist because it would be a slave axis in synchronous
control.
– The eleventh controlled axis is subject to spindle contour control (Cs contour control).
Its servo axis setting (parameter 1023) is 4.
(c) Restrictions in relation to other functions
The multiaxis FS15 does not support the following functions for the serial interface spindle:
– Rigid tapping (A02B–0162–J885)
– Polygon turning (A02B–0162–J658)
– Spindle positioning (A02B–0162–J836)
The multiaxis FS15 does not support the following either:
– DNC operation by binary inputs in 2–ms units (A02B–0162–J987)
– Gear hobbing (A02B–0162–J618)
The standard FS15 does not support the following functions for axes under spindle contour con-
trol (Cs contour control):
– Index table indexing (A02B–0162–J970)
– Axis switching (A02B–0162–J601)
– Axis control by PMC (A02B–0162–J694)
– Polar coordinate command (A02B–0162–J829)
In addition to the above functions, the multiaxis FS15 does not support the following functions for
axes under spindle contour control (Cs contour control):
– Synchronous control (A02B–0162–J894)
– 210 –
– Hybrid control (A02B–0162–J895)

– Malfunction check (A02B–0162–J896)
– Tandem control (A02B–0162–J746)
2.3.34 Signals for spindle orientation of the serial interface spindle by a position coder
This section describes the function of spindle orientation by a position coder for the serial interface spindle.
For the function of spindle orientation by a magnetic sensor, refer to the specifications of the function.
A 12–bit signal must be entered from the PMC to execute either of the following functions: function to stop the
rotation of the spindle at a stop position in orientation specified in a normal parameter, or the function of spindle
orientation by a position coder with the stop position set externally. The function stops the spindle at a predeter-
mined position in orientation. The stop position can be specified in units of 0.088 degrees (= 360 de-
grees/4096).
NOTE 1 This function cannot be used when the system is in any of the following states in the remote
buffer operation mode:
⋅ The operation by binary–format statements is in progress.
⋅ The operation by NC data statements is in progress, DNC, a bit of parameter 0000, is set
to 0 so that high–speed distribution can be executed if the requirements are satisfied in the
DNC operation by a remote buffer, and the following conditions are not satisfied:
⋅ All axes are stopped.
⋅ Orientation is completed while all axes are stopped.
⋅ The DI signal concerning the orientation must not be changed while an axis is moving.
NOTE 2 When the function of spindle orientation by a position coder with the stop position set externally
is used, the parameter for specifying the stop position in orientation by a position coder,
parameter 3031 or 3171, is invalidated.
(1) DI/DO signals

(a) Spindle orientation signals: ORCMA, ORCMB (for the second spindle)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Execute the spindle orientation function.
[Operation] When the signal is high, the spindle orientation function is executed. When the signal is low,
the spindle orientation function is not executed.
(b) Signals for changing the stop position in spindle orientation: INDXA, INDXB (for the second spindle)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Change the stop position in spindle orientation to a desired position in a single rotation of the
spindle.
[Operation] When the signal goes from high to low, the data of a new stop position is read and the spindle
is stopped at the new position.
(c) Signals for specifying the direction of rotation when the stop position in spindle orientation is changed:
ROTAA, ROTAB (for the second spindle)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Specify the direction of rotation when the stop position in spindle orientation is changed to a
desired position in a single rotation of the spindle.
[Operation] When the signal is high, the spindle rotates clockwise (CW) and stops at the specified posi-
tion. When the signal is low, the spindle rotates counterclockwise (CCW) and stops at the
specified position. This input signal is valid only when the signal for executing a shortcut rota-
tion when the stop position in spindle orientation is changed, NRROA or NRROB, is set low.
– 211 –
(d) Signals for executing a shortcut rotation when the stop position in spindle orientation is changed:
NRROA, NRROB (for the second spindle of 15–TT)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Specify the direction of rotation or execute a shortcut rotation when the stop position in
spindle orientation is changed to a desired position in a single rotation of the spindle.
[Operation] When the signal is high, the spindle is rotated in the direction of a shortcut (within +180 de-
grees) and stopped at the specified position. When the signal is low, the spindle rotates in
the direction specified by ROTAA or ROTAB, and stops at the specified position.
(e) Signals for specifying the stop position in orientation of the serial interface spindle: SHA00 to SHA11,
SHB00 to SHB11 (for the second spindle)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Specify a stop position in orientation using the orientation of the serial interface spindle with
the stop position set externally function.
(2 P
11
Stop position [degree] = 360 i
i )
4096
i0
where
Pi = 0 when the SHAi signal is low
Pi = 1 when the SHAi signal is high
Example Specifying the stop position in orientation to 90 degrees
Data to be specified: 4096 90 1024

360
SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
NOTE This input signal is valid when the function of spindle orientation by a position coder with the
stop position set externally is used. When the input signal is used, the parameter for specifying
the stop position in orientation by a position coder, parameter 3031 or 3171, is invalidated.
(f) Spindle orientation completion signals: ORARA, ORARB (for the second spindle)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] This signal is output when the spindle stops near the predetermined position after the spindle
orientation signal is entered. The range in which this signal is output is specified in the param-
eter determining the detection level of the spindle orientation completion signal, parameter
3075 or 3215.
[Operation] This signal goes high when:
⋅ The spindle stops near the predetermined position after the spindle orientation signal is en-
tered.
⋅ The spindle does not stop near the predetermined position after the spindle orientation sig-
nal is entered.
⋅ The spindle orientation signal is not entered.
– 212 –
(2) Sample sequence when the spindle orientation with the stop position set externally function is executed
Spindle orientation command
ORCMA *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1
Spindle
stop
Position command
SHA00-1
*1 *1
Stop position change command (Note 1)

INDXA
Rotational command at (Note 2)

stop position changing A ROTA
Short path command at

stop position changing of (Note 2)
setting stop position exterĆ NRRO
nally. A
Clockwise Stop 1 Stop 2 Stop 3

Motor speed
Counter-clockwise
Spindle orientation completion signal

ORARA
*1 = Should be at least 50 msec
Stop (1)
⋅ A normal orientation command stops the spindle at the predetermined position.
⋅ The direction of rotation of the spindle motor is determined by the parameter.
⋅ When the function is executed for the first time after the power is turned on, the spindle rotates
at the orientation speed. The spindle stops at the predetermined position after the single rotation
signal is detected. When the function is executed for the second time or later, the spindle stops
at the predetermined position before it is rotated once.
⋅ If the data of the signal for specifying a stop position in spindle orientation, SHA00 to SHA11, has
already been set when the spindle orientation with the stop position set externally function is used
for the second time or later, the spindle is shifted by the angular displacement specified by the data
of the stop position detected at the rising edge of ORCMA. Then the spindle stops at the predeter-
mined position.
Stop (2), (3)
⋅ The spindle orientation with the stop position set externally function stops the spindle at the pre
determined position.
⋅ The direction of rotation of the spindle motor depends on ROTAA and NRROA.
NOTE 1 INDXA is valid only when ORCMA is set high.

NOTE 2 The machine tool builder can specify the signal as required.
Other notes:
1. If the spindle orientation function is started by ORCMA while the spindle is rotating, the forward spindle rotation
signal, SFRA, and the reverse spindle rotation signal, SRVA, must be set to zero for the sake of safety.
2. ORCMA must be set to zero by the tool change completion signal or the workpiece load/unload completion
signal that is provided by the machine tool builder.
3. Before the power is turned on ORCMA must be set to zero.
4. If the emergency stop function is executed while the spindle orientation is in progress, ORCMA must be
reset to zero.
– 213 –
2.3.35 Spindle synchronization signals for the serial interface spindle

In a machine having two spindles such as a lathe, the two spindles must rotate at an identical spindle speed
on the following occasions: When a workpiece held by the first spindle is passed to the second spindle while
the spindles are rotating, and when the first and second spindles are holding an identical workpiece and they
are accelerated or decelerated.
When a workpiece with an irregular shape is passed from one spindle to the other, the spindles must also be
in the same phase of rotation (angular displacement).
Spindle synchronization signals are used to synchronize the two spindles as described above.
(1) Method of spindle synchronization
(a) When the spindle synchronization command is specified while the two spindles are rotating at different
speeds (either of them may stop), the spindles are immediately accelerated or decelerated and syn-
chronized at the specified spindle speed.
(b) If the spindle speed to be detected in synchronization is changed after the two spindles are synchro-
nized, the two spindles are synchronously accelerated or decelerated with the time constant specified
in the parameter and achieve the new spindle speed.
When the spindle speed to be detected in synchronization is set to 0 rpm, the two spindles synchro-
nously stop.
(c) When the spindle synchronization command is specified with the spindle speed to be detected in syn-
chronization set to 0 rpm, the two spindles are immediately stopped and synchronized (stop state).
If the spindle speed to be detected in synchronization is changed after that, the two spindles are accel-
erated while they synchronously rotate with the time constant specified in the parameter and achieve
the new spindle speed.
(d) If a workpiece with an irregular shape is passed from one spindle to the other, the spindles must also
be in the same phase of rotation (angular displacement).
If the spindle phase synchronization command is entered while the spindles are synchronously rotat-
ing, the spindles are rotated to be in the same spindle phase as specified in the parameter (the speed
changes momentarily). Then the two spindles are synchronized again.
If a parameter is specified so that the reference positions of the two spindles agree with each other,
the spindles can be in the same phase of rotation.
(e) If the spindle phase synchronization command is entered after the spindles are synchronized at a
spindle speed of 0 rpm, the spindles stop after rotating to be in the same phase as specified in the
parameter.
It looks as if the spindles are positioned (spindle orientation) while they are stopped.
As a result of the synchronization, the reference positions of the spindles agree with each other.
(Phase synchronization)
If the spindle speed to be detected in synchronization is changed after the two spindles hold an identi-
cal workpiece with an irregular shape, the spindles are accelerated while they synchronously rotate
with the time constant specified in the parameter and achieve the new spindle speed.
(f) Even when the two spindles synchronously hold an identical workpiece, constant surface speed con-
trol can be executed.
The spindle speed is changed by the time constant within the range specified in the parameter even
if a change in speed exceeding the range is specified.
(2) Operation overview
This function can be executed only when the BMI interface is used. (It cannot be executed with the FS3/6
interface.)
When the spindle synchronization signal is entered from the PMC, the system enters the spindle synchro-
nization mode.
The spindle speed synchronization completion signal, MSPSYC, indicates that the spindles are synchro-
nized. While the signal is on, the spindles are synchronized. The spindle speed command specified during
this period is handled as the command specifying the spindle speed to be detected in synchronization.
The identical spindle speed is specified for both spindles. When the spindle speed is changed during this
period, the spindles are synchronously accelerated or decelerated.
– 214 –
The spindle phase synchronization function is executed when the spindle phase synchronization signal,
SPPHS, is entered in the spindle synchronization mode (after the spindle speed difference between the
error pulses of the two spindles becomes smaller than or equal to the permitted number of pulses specified
in parameter 5810 of the NC unit, the spindles are synchronized in the same phase. Then the signal indi-
cating that the spindle phase synchronization MSPPHS, is completed is output.
The position of spindle phase synchronization can be separately specified for the two spindles. The posi-
tion of the first spindle can be specified in parameter 3034, and that of the second spindle in parameter
3174.
When the operation for spindle phase synchronization is in progress (until the spindle phase synchroniza-
tion completion signal, MSPPHS, goes high), the two spindles are not synchronized.
While the two spindles are holding an identical workpiece, the spindle phase synchronization command
must not be specified. If it is specified, the operation for spindle phase synchronization is automatically
started.
A PMC signal, SPSYAL, is provided so that the synchronization error between the two spindles can be
monitored when they are in the state of spindle synchronization or spindle phase synchronization. The
synchronization error between the two spindles is always monitored. If the error is greater than or equal
to the limit (absolute number of error pulses) specified in parameter 5811 of the first spindle, SPSYAL goes
high and the signal status is maintained.
The spindle speed command specified during spindle synchronization or spindle phase synchronization
is handled as the command specifying the spindle speed to be detected in synchronization. The command
can be specified as the conventional command specifying the voltage of the spindle motor. The RISGN
and RI0 to RI12 are also valid as usual. However, the maximum spindle speed that can be actually speci-
fied may be restricted by the fact described in Note (f) of Item (3)
(3) Notes
(a) The spindle phase synchronization command is valid only in the spindle synchronization mode.
(b) The spindle speed synchronization completion signal, MSPSYC, or the spindle phase synchroniza-
tion completion signal, MSPPHS, always checks whether the actual speed or phase in synchroniza-
tion is within the permitted range determined by the spindle synchronization command or the spindle
phase synchronization command.
(c) If the load varies during cutting or threading while the spindles are synchronized, the spindle speeds
may vary accordingly, setting the spindle speed synchronization completion signal, MSPSYC, off mo-
mentarily.
If the threading command is specified while the two spindles are synchronized, MSPSYC may be set
off momentarily.
(d) When the spindles are synchronized, normally, SFR must be set on. (SFV must be set off.) If SFV
is set on (and SFR is set off), the motor rotates in the opposite direction.
The table below shows the relationship between #0 (first spindle) and #1 (second spindle) of parame-
ter parameter 5820.
When SFR = ON When SRV = ON
Parameter PRM 5820 #0 or #1 = “0” CCW CW
Parameter PRM 5820 #0 or #1 = “1” CW CCW
SFR and SVR are provided for the first and second spindles.
RISGN can also change the direction of rotation.
The direction of rotation must be carefully considered when a Ladder program is created.
(e) The gear ratio of the spindle to the position coder must be 1:1. The identical gear ratio must be speci-
fied for the first and second spindles. (parameter 5610 and 5660)
(f) The maximum spindle speed in synchronization depends on the maximum speed of the spindle motor
of the first spindle (parameter 3020).
Example Maximum speed of the spindle motor of the first spindle: 6000 rpm
Maximum speed of the spindle motor of the second spindle: 4500 rpm
In the example above, the maximum speed that can be specified for the first spindle is 6000 rpm, while
the speed that can be specified by the speed command is limited to 212, or 4096. If 6000 rpm is speci-
fied when the two spindles are synchronized, the overspeed alarm occurs in the second spindle. In
this example, a speed of up to 4500 rpm can be specified while the two spindles are synchronized.
– 215 –
(4) Relationship between this function and Cs contour control

When the Cs contour control function is provided, the Cs–axis contour control mode must be released be-
fore the spindle synchronization function is executed. If the spindle synchronization command is entered
in the Cs contour control mode, the system does not enter the spindle synchronization mode. (The syn-
chronization command is ignored and the system continues to be in the Cs contour control mode. The
system can enter the spindle synchronization mode only after the spindle mode is specified by SCNTRx.)
When the Cs contour control mode is specified in the spindle synchronization mode, the system enters
the Cs contour control mode.
(5) Configuration of the spindle synchronization system
(a) System in which the spindle and the spindle motor are connected by a belt or gear
Position Coder Position Coder
No.1 No.2
spindle spindle
Velocity Feedback
Spindle Signal Spindle
motor 1 motor 2
Position Power Line Power Line Position

Feedback Feedback
Signal Signal
4096p 4096p
Spindle Amp. Spindle Amp.
#1 #2
Jumper *(Note) Jumper
S1 = B side S1 = A side
CN11A CN11B CN11A
Optical Cable
Optical Cable
COP5
CNC
Series 15-TT
NOTE The S1 pin of the first axis of the serial interface spindle amplifier must be set to B.
– 216 –
(b) System with built–in spindle motor
No.1 spindle No.2 spindle
Built-in Built-in
Sensor 1 Sensor 2
Built-in Built-in
Motor 1 Motor 2
4096p Signal Signal 4096p

Conversion Conversion
Circuit 1 Circuit 2
Velocity Velocity
Position Feedback Signal Feedback Signal Position
Feedback Feedback
Signal Power Line Power Line Signal
Spindle Amp. Spindle Amp.

#1 #2
Jumper *(note) Jumper
S1 = B side S1 = A side
CN11A CN11B CN11A
Optical Cable
Optical Cable
COP5
CNC
Series 15-TT
NOTE The S1 pin of the first axis of the serial interface spindle amplifier must be set to B.
– 217 –
(6) DI/DO signals

(a) Spindle synchronization signal: SPSYC
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects the spindle synchronization mode for the serial interface spindle.
[Operation] When the signal is high, the system enters the spindle synchronization mode. When the sig-
nal is low, the system exits the spindle synchronization mode.
(b) Spindle phase synchronization signal: SPPHS
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects the spindle phase synchronization mode for the serial interface spindle. This signal
is valid when SPSYC is high. SPPHS must be specified after the spindle speed synchroniza-
tion completion signal, MSPSYC is set high. SPPHS is valid only once in the spindle synchro-
nization mode. In the spindle synchronization mode, SPPHS can be validly set on or off only
once. If the system exits the spindle synchronization mode and returns to the mode again,
the signal can be set on or off again.
[Operation] When the signal is high, the system enters the spindle phase synchronization mode. When
the signal is low, the system exits the spindle phase synchronization mode.
(c) Signals for specifying the voltage of the spindle motor: RISGN [#1], RI0 to RI12 [#1]
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] (1) The signal is used as a conventional signal specifying the voltage of the spindle motor.
(2) The signal is used as the signal specifying the spindle speed for the serial interface
spindle in the spindle synchronization mode. The correspondence between each signal
and the data output to the spindle motor is the same as that when the signal is used as
the conventional signal specifying the voltage of the spindle motor.
(d) Spindle speed synchronization completion signal: MSPSYC
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that spindle synchronization (speed) is completed in the serial interface spindle.
[Output Condition]
⋅ The system is in the spindle synchronization mode, the spindles achieve the spindle
speed corresponding to the signal specifying the spindle speed to be detected in syn-
chronization, and the difference between the speeds of the two spindles is less than or
equal to the value specified in parameter 3033.
⋅ The system is in the spindle synchronization mode, but the two spindles do not achieve
the spindle speed corresponding to the signal specifying the spindle speed to be de-
tected in synchronization.
⋅ The system is in the spindle synchronization mode, but the difference between the
speeds of the two spindles is larger than the value specified in parameter 3033.
⋅ The system is not in the spindle synchronization mode.
NOTE The signal is switched from high to low if the value specified in parameter 3033 is exceeded
due to a change in cutting load or other reasons.
– 218 –
(e) Spindle phase synchronization completion signal: MSPPHS

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that spindle phase synchronization (phase difference control) is completed in the se-
rial interface spindle.
[Output Condition]
⋅ The system is in the spindle synchronization mode, the two spindles achieve the spindle
speed corresponding to the signal specifying the spindle speed to be detected in syn-
chronization, and SPPHS causes the spindles to be in the same phase (the difference
between the error pulses of the two spindles is less than or equal to the value specified
in parameter 5810).
⋅ The system is in the spindle synchronization mode, but the two spindles are not in the
same phase.
⋅ The system is in the spindle synchronization mode, and the difference between the error
pulses of the two spindles is larger than the value specified in parameter 5810.
⋅ The system is not in the spindle phase synchronization mode.
NOTE The signal is switched from high to low if the value specified in parameter 5810 is exceeded
due to a change in cutting load or other reasons.
(f) Spindle synchronization alarm signal: SPSYAL

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that the difference between the error pulses of the two spindles of the serial interface
spindle is larger than the value specified in the parameter in the spindle synchronization
mode. This signal is used for handling the spindle synchronization error. After the signal goes
high, the signal level is maintained. The signal goes low after the spindle synchronization
mode is released.
[Output Condition]
pulses of the two spindles after spindle synchronization is completed exceeds the value
specified in the parameter.
⋅ The system is not in the spindle synchronization mode.
pulses of the two spindles is less than or equal to the value specified in parameter 5811.
(g) Velocity integrating control signals: INTGA, INTGB
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Validate or invalidate the velocity integrating control function for the serial interface spindle.
[Operation] When the signal is high, the velocity integrating control function is invalidated. (This has the
same effect as when the velocity loop integrating gain is zero.) When the signal is low, the
velocity integrating control function is validated. When the two spindles which are mechani-
cally connected to each other by holding an identical workpiece in the spindle synchroniza-
tion mode are slightly out of synchronization, the velocity integrating control function gener-
ates the torque required to synchronize the spindles. This may increase the load meter
output. INTGA or INTGB invalidates the velocity integrating control function, causing the
speed to be controlled only by the proportional speed control function.
The two spindles are mechanically connected to each other when:
(1) The two spindles hold an identical cylindrical workpiece after spindle speed synchroniza-
tion is completed.
(2) The two spindles hold an identical workpiece with an irregular shape after spindle phase
synchronization is completed.
To synchronize the two spindles without generating an unnecessarily large torque for each
spindle, the velocity integrating control signal must be specified for the two spindle amplifiers
– 219 –
(the velocity integrating control function must be invalidated) after the two spindles are me-
chanically connected to each other as described above.
(7) Sample sequences
(a) While spindle 1 is rotating, spindle 2 is accelerated to be synchronized with spindle 1. Then the
spindles are controlled to be in the same phase. The spindle speed to be detected in synchronization
is changed, and the spindles synchronously are accelerated or decelerated.
RPM
Phasing
Spindle 1
Acceleration/Deceleration
for Synchronization
Synchronization
speed rpm A
Synchronization
speed rpm B
Spindle 2
Time
Spindle Synchronization
(1)
Control Signal
Spindle Synchronization Speed RPM A

RPM B
Command Signal (1)
Spindle Phase Synchronization Control Signal (3)
Spindle Synchronization Speed Control Complete signal (2)
Spindle Phase Synchronization Control Complete signal (4)
(1) The signal specifying the spindle speed to be detected in synchronization is specified, and the
spindle synchronization signal, SPSYC, is set high.
(2) The system waits until the spindle speed synchronization completion signal, MSPSYC, goes
high.
(3) The spindle phase synchronization signal,SPPHS, is set high.
(4) The system waits until the spindle phase synchronization completion signal, MSPPHS, goes
high.
NOTE After SPPHS is entered, MSPSYC is set low. MSPSYC goes high again when spindle phase
– 220 –
(b) Spindles 1 and 2 are controlled to be in the same phase while they are stopped. Then the two spindles
synchronously are accelerated.
RPM
Spindle 1, Spindle 2
Synchronization
speed rpm Acceleration/Deceleration
for Synchronization
Phasing
Time
Spindle Synchronization (1)

Control Signal
(5)
Spindle Synchronization Speed (1)
Command Signal
(3)
Spindle Phase Synchronization
Control Signal
Spindle Synchronization Speed

Control Complete signal (2)
Spindle Phase Synchronization

Control Complete signal (4)
(1) The signal specifying the spindle speed to be detected in synchronization is set to zero, and the
spindle synchronization signal, SPSYC, is set high.
(2) The system waits until the spindle speed synchronization completion signal, MSPSYC, goes
high.
(3) The spindle phase synchronization signal, SPPHS, is set high.
(4) The system waits until the spindle phase synchronization completion signal, MSPPHS goes high.
(5) The signal specifying the spindle speed to be detected in synchronization is entered.
NOTE After SPPHS is entered, MSPSYC is set low. MSPSYC goes high again when spindle phase
– 221 –
(c) The velocity integrating control signal, INTGA or INTGB is used.
RPM
Spindle 1
Phasing
Synchronization
speed rpm
Spindle 2
Spimdle Synchronization
Control Signal
Spindle Synchronization
Speed Command Signal
Synchronization Speed Control Complete Signal
Check CLOSE Signal
Check CLOSED Complete Signal
Velocity Integrating Control Signal

Phase Control Synchronous signal
Phase Control Synchronous signal
NOTE INTGA or INTGB must be set high while the two spindles are holding an identical workpiece.
– 222 –
(8) Diagnosis
See (4) in Subsec⋅2.3.31
(a) Procedure for starting the spindle synchronization function
[Outline] The following describes the procedure for starting the spindle synchronization function in the
serial interface spindle amplifier when the system has already started a normal operation.
[Procedure]
CONTENTS
Check to make sure that normal operationis possible.
Prepare/check ladder for spindle synchronization control function
Check the connection/feedback waveform for the position coder
⋅ Set/check parameters related to the position coder

⋅ Set/check gear ratio parameters
⋅ Position gain during synchronization control (standard setting: 1000)

⋅ Set the time constant for acceleration and deceleration during
synchronization control to 200.
(Check to make sure that this value is the same for both spindles)
Check to make sure that speed synchronizaĆ

tion is performed
NG ⋅ Check the parameter for the level of attainment of
OK
spindle synchronization speed
⋅ Check the SFR/SRV signals
Check the direction of spindle rotation
⋅ Check the SSGN signal
NG ⋅ Check the parameter for the direction of rotation with
OK
respect to the +" rotational command
NG
Check to make sure that there is no overshooting or
hunting up to the maximum speed of spindle rotation
OK ⋅ Position gain during synchronization control

⋅ Adjust the time constant for acceleration and
decelerationduring synchronization control
(the value should be the same for both spindles)
The difference in error pulses between the two spindles NG

should be within 5 pulses in spindle speed synchronization
status
OK
⋅ Velocity loop proportional gain during synchronization control
⋅ Velocity loop integrating gain during synchronization control
⋅ VAdjustment of motor voltage during synchronization control
(2) (1)
– 223 –
(2) (1)
⋅ Check the parameter for the difference in error pulses
between the two spindles that outputs the spindle phase
synchronization control complete signal ą
Check to make sure that phase synchronization Check the parameter for the allowable number of error
NG is performed pulses between the two spindles during spindle
When speed fluctuations are great.

Check the speed fluctuations during spindle phase
synchronization
⋅ Confirm the spindle phase
synchronization compensation data.
OK
⋅ Check the parameter for the shift amount during

Set the shift amount during phase synchronization spindle phase synchronization control
Operational check of spindle synchronization control

completed
Check to make sure that the value on the load meter NG

during actual transfer of workpieces (from on spindle
to the other) is not abnormally large
Check the velocity integrating control function

OK
Check to make sure there are no probrems in actual

cutting
End
(9) Determining a shift (parameter) in spindle phase synchronization

In spindle phase synchronization, the shift from the reference position (single rotation signal) is determined
as described below:
(a) The spindle phase synchronization is executed under the following conditions:
1 SFR is set on (SRV is set off) for both the first and second spindles: M03
2 The command specifying the spindle speed to be detected in synchronization is set to 0 rpm: S0
3 The parameter determining the shift in spindle phase synchronization is set to 0 for both the first
and second spindles: Parameter 3034 for the first spindle is set to 0. Parameter 3174 for the se-
cond spindle is set to 0.
(b) After spindle phase synchronization is completed, set SFR of the second spindle to off (motor activa-
tion off). (M05)
As the power of the motor is turned off, the second spindle must be rotated manually.
(c) Manually rotate the second spindle up to a desired position of spindle phase synchronization.
The diagnosis screen shows the difference in the number of pulses between the current position and
a desired position in spindle phase synchronization.
The difference is specified in the shift parameter.
Diagnosis No. 1510 (Difference between the error pulses of the two spindles)
– 224 –
(d) Specify the difference of error pulses in parameter 3174 of the second spindle as the shift in spindle
phase synchronization.
Generally, the shift of the first spindle must be set to zero.
(e) After canceling the spindle synchronization command, re–execute spindle phase synchronization un-
der the following conditions. Check that the spindles are synchronized in the same phase as desired.
1 SFR is set on (SRV is set off) for both the first and second spindles: M03
2 The command specifying the spindle speed to be detected in synchronization is set to 0 rpm: S0
2.3.36 Signals for switching the spindle output of serial interface spindle
(1) DI/DO signals
(a) Switching request signals: RSLA, RSLB
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Switch the output characteristics.
[Operation] When the signal is low, high–speed output (high) is executed.
When the signal is high, low–speed output (low) is executed.
(b) Power line status check signals: RCHA, RCHB
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Check the selection status of the magnetic contactor that switches the output characteristics
of the spindle motor.
[Operation] When the signal is low, high–speed output (high) is executed. When the signal is high, low–
speed output (low) is executed.
(c) Power line switching signals: RCHPA, RCHPB
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] The request signal for switching the output characteristics, RSLA or RSLB, turns off the power
supply to the motor. When the power supply is turned off, the status of RCHPA or RCHPB
is changed. The magnetic contactor for switching the power line must then be switched with
this signal as shown in (iii), (iv), and (v) of (2), “Sequence.”
(d) Switching completion signals: RCFNA, RCFNB
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] The request signal for switching the output characteristics, RSLA or RSLB, and the power line
status check signal, RCHA or RCHB, are entered in that order. After checking that the desired
status is selected, the initial setting of the spindle control circuit is completed and the system
becomes ready for the next operation. On that occasion, RCFNA or RCFNB is output.
– 225 –
(2) Sequences
(a) Switching from low–speed output (low) to high–speed output (high)
1 Conversion demand ON(LOW) OFF(HIGH)

signal (RSLA,)
Refer to 1) a).
2 Power cable conversion

ON(LOW) OFF(HIGH)
signal (RCHPA)
Refer to 1) c).
3 Electromagnetic
ON(LOW) OFF(HIGH)
contactor 1 (MCC1)
Output conversion
speed or less.
4 Electromagnetig
contactor 2 (MCC2) OFF(LOW) ON(HIGH)
Output conversion
speed or more.
5 Power cable status ON(LOW) OFF(HIGH)

confirmation signal
(RCHA)
Refer to 1) b).
ON(LOW) OFF(HIGH)
6 Conversion completion
signal (RCFNA)
Refer to 1) d).
ON OFF ON
7 Drive enable signal
– 226 –
(b) Switching from high–speed output (high) to low–speed output (low)
1 Conversion demand OFF(HIGH) ON(LOW)

signal (RSLA)
Refer to 1) a).
2 Power cable conversion OFF(HIGH) ON(LOW)

signal (RCHPA)
Refer to 1) c).
3 Electromagnetic
contactor 1 (MCC1) OFF(HIGH) ON(LOW)
Output conversion
speed or less.
4 Electromagnetig
contactor 2 (MCC2) ON(HIGH) OFF(LOW)
Output conversion
speed or more.
5 Power cable status OFF(HIGH) ON(LOW)

confirmation signal
(RCHA)
Refer to 1) b).
6 Conversion completion
OFF(HIGH) ON(LOW)
signal (RCFNA)
Refer to 1) d).
7 Drive enable signal ON OFF ON
NOTE High–speed output cannot be switched to low–speed output if the switching request signal,
RSLA or RSLB, is entered with a speed exceeding the specified limit.
2.3.37 Signals for switching spindle control

[Name] Spindle control check signals: ( SPN0 [#1, #2] , SPN1 [#1, #2] )
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Informs the number of the spindle controlled by a tool post. Two binary–code signals are pro-
vided for each tool post. The spindle number corresponds to the signal as shown below:
(2
1
Spindle number i
x V i)
i0
where
Vi = 0 when SPNi is low
Vi = 1 when SPNi is high
[Output Condition]
The signal is always output. The value is changed when spindle control is switched by
G10.7_; specified in a program.
Example When tool post 1 controls the first spindle and tool post 2 controls the second spindle in TT
series, the signals are output as follows:
– 227 –
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F13 – – – – – – 0 1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F61 – – – – – – 1 0
[Name] Spindle control switch signal (PCSPN0) (T series only)

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal is used to select the spindle to be controlled. The first spindle is selected when
this signal is low, while and the second spindle is selected when this signal is high. (This sig-
nal is valid only when parameter No. 5821 (SPCHG) is set to 1.) The state of this signal is
output to the spindle control check signals (F155.4/F155.5).
This signal can be input at any time. To switch this signal during automatic operation, do so using an M
code command (M code for which no buffering is performed).
2.3.38 Program status output signals

(a) Rapid traverse signal (RPD [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal informs that a move command is executed using rapid traverse.
[Output Condition]
⋅ Rapid traverse is selected and movement is started in automatic or manual operation
⋅ A mode of feed other than rapid traverse is selected and movement is started in automatic
or manual operation
NOTE 1 Rapid traverse in automatic operation includes all rapid traverse operations, such as canned
cycle positioning and automatic reference position return, as well as move commands (G00).
Manual rapid traverse includes rapid traverse for reference position return.
NOTE 2 It is not true that this signal goes high only during movement. Once rapid traverse is triggered,
this signal remains high until a feed operation other than rapid traverse is started, even if the
rapid traverse has finished.
NOTE 3 In simultaneous automatic/manual operation, this signal is dependent on whether the mode
of feed in automatic operation is rapid traverse; this signal is not affected by manual feed.
(b) Tapping signal (TAP [#1, #2])

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal informs that tapping mode is set.
[Output Condition]
This signal goes high:
⋅ During a tapping canned cycle
⋅ In the tapping mode
⋅ Not during a tapping canned cycle or in the tapping mode
(c) Threading signal (THRD [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal informs that threading is in progress.
[Output Condition]
⋅ In the threading mode
– 228 –
⋅ During a threading cycle for turning

⋅ Not in the threading mode or during a threading cycle
(d) Constant surface seed signal (CSS [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal informs that constant surface speed control is being exercised.
[Output Condition]
⋅ The constant surface speed control mode (G96) is set
⋅ The constant surface speed control mode (G96) is not set
(e) Inch input signal (INCH)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal informs that the inch input mode is set.
[Output Condition]
⋅ In the inch input mode (G20)
This signal goes low:
⋅ In the metric input mode (G21)
NOTE When the input mode is changed by setting data on the MDI panel, the state of this signal
changes accordingly.
2.3.39 Axis movement status output signals

(a) Position signals (INP1, INP2, INP3, ...)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] A position signal informs that the corresponding controlled axis is in the effective area.
A position signal is provided for each controlled axis; a number appended to a signal name
represents a controlled axis number.
INP 1
1 ……The tool is in the effective area for the first axis.
2 ……The tool is in the effective area for the second axis.
3 ……The tool is in the effective area for the third axis.

: :
: :
[Output Condition]
A position signal goes high when:
⋅ The corresponding controlled axis has no acceleration/deceleration delay and has a ser-
vo error within a certain range
A position signal goes low when:
⋅ The corresponding controlled axis has a nonzero acceleration/deceleration delay
⋅ The corresponding controlled axis has a servo error exceeding a certain range
NOTE 1 In a very slow feed operation, these signals may go high during movement.
NOTE 2 A parameter can remove from the conditions for driving these signals high the requirement that
the servo error must be within a certain range. In this case, these signals are turned on and
off, only depending on whether the acceleration/deceleration delay is zero.
– 229 –
(b) Signals indicating movement (MV1, MV2, MV3, ...)

[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] A signal indicating movement (moving signal) informs that the tool is moving along the corre-
sponding controlled axis.
A moving signal is provided for each controlled axis; a number appended to a signal name
represents a controlled axis number.
MV 1
1 …… The tool is moving along the first axis.
2 …… The tool is moving along the second axis.
3 …… The tool is moving along the third axis.

: :
: :
[Output Condition]
A moving signal goes high when:
⋅ The tool starts moving along the corresponding axis.
⋅ Handle feed axis selection is performed for the corresponding axis in manual handle feed
mode
A moving signal goes low when:
⋅ The tool stops moving along the corresponding axis, and is placed in the effective area
NOTE These signals are output, regardless of whether automatic operation or manual operation is
performed.
(c) Signals indicating direction of movement (MD1, MD2, MD3, ...)

[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] A signal indicating direction of movement (moving direction signal) informs the moving direc-
tion along the corresponding controlled axis.
A moving direction signal is provided for each controlled axis; a number appended to a signal
name represents a controlled axis number.
MD 1
1 ……The tool is moving along the first axis in the negative direction.
2 ……The tool is moving along the second axis in the negative direction.
3 ……The tool is moving along the third axis in negative direction.

: :
: :
[Output Condition]
A moving direction signal goes high when:
⋅ The tool starts moving along corresponding axis in the negative direction
A moving direction signal goes low when:
⋅ The tool starts moving along the corresponding axis in the positive direction
NOTE 1 These signals are output, regardless of whether automatic operation or manual operation is
performed.
NOTE 2 When the tool stops moving along an axis, the corresponding signal holds the previous state.
When the tool stops moving along an axis after moving in the negative direction, the
corresponding signal does not go low.
NOTE 3 In simultaneous automatic/manual operation, the direction is determined from the sum of the
move command values of both operations.
– 230 –
2.3.40 Mirror image

(a) Mirror image signals (MI1, MI2, MI3, ...)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Apply the mirror image function for a move command.
These signals are provided for the controlled axes on a one–to–one basis. A number ap-
pended to a signal represents a controlled axis number.
MI 1
1 …… The mirror image function is applied to the first axis.
2 …… The mirror image function is applied to the second axis.
3 …… The mirror image function is applied to the third axis.

: :
: :
[Operation] When a mirror image signal goes high, the mirror image function is applied to the correspond-
ing axis. For details, refer to the ”Operator’s Manual.”
(b) Mirror image check signals (MMI1, MMI2, MMI3, ...)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Report the mirror image function state for each axis.
The application of the mirror image function can be set with the MDI panel of the control unit
as well as with an input signal from the machine. Whether to apply the mirror image function
is determined by ORing the input signal from the machine with the MDI panel setting. The
control unit then reports the mirror image function state resulting from the ORing to the ma-
chine.
The mirror image check signals are provided for the controlled axes on a one–to–one basis.
A number appended to a signal represents a controlled axis number.
MMI 1
1 …… The mirror image function is being applied to the first axis.
2 …… The mirror image function is being applied to the second axis.

3 …… The mirror image function is being applied to the third axis.
: :
: :
[Output Condition]
A mirror image check signal goes high when:
⋅ Mirror image signal MIn for the corresponding axis is high.
⋅ The application of the mirror image function to the corresponding axis is enabled by set-
ting data on the MDI panel.
A mirror image check signal goes low when:
⋅ The MIn signal for the corresponding axis is low, and the mirror image function is set off
in the control unit.
NOTE Programmed mirror images do not affect these signals. Some commands, such as a
command for automatic reference position return, are not subject to the mirror image function
even when a mirror image signal is high. When such a command is executed, it does not affect
the mirror image check signals.
– 231 –
2.3.41 Overrun
(a) Overrun signals (+L1, –L1, +L2, –L2, +L3, –L3, ...)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Report that a stroke limit on a controlled axis has been reached.
These signals are provided for the controlled axes. For each controlled axis, two signals, one
for the positive direction and one for the negative direction, are provided. The + or – sign of
a signal indicates the direction, and a number appended to a signal represents the controlled
axis number.
+L 1
1 …… First–axis overrun
2 …… Second–axis overrun
3 …… Third–axis overrun
: :
: :
+ …… Stroke limit in the positive direction has been reached.
– …… Stroke limit in the negative direction has been reached.

[Operation] When an overrun signal goes low, the control unit functions as described below.
1 In automatic operation, when any one of the signals goes low, the control unit decelerates
and stops movement along all axes, issues an alarm, then stops automatic operation.
2 In manual operation, the control unit decelerates and stops only the movement along the
corresponding axis in the corresponding direction for the signal which went low. Move-
ment along the other axes and in the opposite direction on the same axis can continue,
and can also be newly started.
3 The axis and direction of the signal which went low are recorded. Even the signal goes
high again, movement along that axis in that direction is disabled until the alarm is can-
celed.
2.3.42 Tail stock barrier

Tail stock barrier selection signal (TSB)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Notifies the control unit of whether to make the tail stock barrier valid or invalid.
[Operation] The control unit determines whether to make the tail stock barrier valid or invalid, depending
on whether the program command G22 (stored stroke limit ON) or G23 (stored stroke limit
OFF) is specified, according to the table below.
G code TSB Tail stock barrier Chuck barrier (reference)

G22 LOW Valid Valid
G22 HIGH Invalid Valid
G23 LOW Invalid Invalid
G23 HIGH Invalid Invalid
When G23 (stored stroke limit OFF) is specified, the tail stock barrier is invalid, regardless of
whether TSB is high or low. The tail stock barrier is made invalid by driving TSB high when
G22 (stored stroke limit ON) is specified.
This signal is used, for example, to make the tail stock barrier valid or invalid when the tail
stock is to be pushed against a workpiece or the tail stock is to be placed away from a work-
piece by using an M function.
NOTE A tool intrusion prohibition area for the tail stock barrier and chuck barrier is to be separately
set by MDI operation.
– 232 –
2.3.43 Externally–requested deceleration

(a) External deceleration signals (+ED1, –ED1, +ED2, –ED2, +ED3, –ED3, ...)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Apply externally–requested deceleration to the controlled axes. They are used to decelerate
a feedrate forcibly to a feedrate specified by parameter setting.
The external deceleration signals are provided for the controlled axes. For each controlled
axis, two signals are provided for both directions. The + or – sign in a signal indicates a direc-
tion, and a number appended to a signal represents a controlled axis number.
+ED 1
1 …… Deceleration on the first axis
2 …… Deceleration on the second axis
3 …… Deceleration on the third axis

: :
: :
+ …… Feed in the positive direction is decelerated.
– …… Feed in the negative direction is decelerated.

[Operation] When an external deceleration signal goes low, the control unit functions as described below.
1 In positioning in automatic operation or in manual operation (except manual arbitrary
angle feed), the control unit decelerates the feedrate along the corresponding axis in the
corresponding direction to an externally–requested deceleration feedrate set by a pa-
rameter. If a specified feedrate is lower than the externally–requested deceleration fee-
drate, feed operation is performed at the specified feedrate.
The feedrates along the axes whose external deceleration signals are not low are not
affected.
2 In automatic operation (except positioning) or manual arbitrary angle feed, if any one of
the direction signals for the axes along which the tool is moving is low, the tangential fee-
drate is decelerated to the externally–requested deceleration feedrate. Accordingly, the
feedrates on all the axes along which the tool is moving are decelerated. If the specified
tangential feedrate is lower than the externally–requested deceleration feedrate, that
tangential feedrate is used for feed.
When the signal goes high again, the originally specified feedrate is recovered. If the
external deceleration option is not provided, the external deceleration signals are invalid.
When the option is provided, the validity range of these signals can be selected by pa-
rameter setting as follows:
(1) These signals can be made valid for rapid traverse only or for all feed operations.
(2) Externally–requested deceleration in the positive direction can be made valid or invalid
(for each axis).
(3) Externally–requested deceleration in the negative direction can be made valid or invalid
(for each axis).
– 233 –
2.3.44 Interlock
(a) All–axis interlock signal (IT)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Stops feed along all controlled axes in automatic or manual operation.
[Operation] While this signal is low, feed along the controlled axes is stopped with the specified feedrates
on all axes set to 0 in both automatic and manual operation. Feed being performed along an
axis is decelerated and stopped.
Since the move command remains valid while the signal is low, the command is resumed as
soon as the signal goes high again.
Commands other than move commands are not affected.
(b) Automatic operation all–axis interlock signal (AIT [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Stops feed along all controlled axes in automatic operation.
[Operation] While this signal is low, feed along the controlled axes is stopped with the specified feedrates
on all axes set to 0 in automatic operation. Feed being performed along an axis is decelerated
and stopped.
Since the move command remains valid while the signal is low, the command is resumed as
soon as the signal goes high again.
Manual operation is not affected.
(c) Axis interlock signals (IT1, IT2, IT3, ...)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Stop feed along a corresponding axis in automatic and manual operation.
pended to a signal name represents a controlled axis number.
IT 1
1 …… First–axis interlock
2 …… Second–axis interlock
3 …… Third–axis interlock
: :
: :
[Operation] When an axis interlock signal goes low, the control unit functions as described below.
1 In manual operation (except manual arbitrary angle feed), the control unit sets the fee-
drate for the corresponding axis to 0 to stop feed. When the tool is moving, the control
unit decelerates the tool, then stops it. The axes other than the axis corresponding to
the signal which is low are not affected.
2 In automatic operation or manual arbitrary angle feed, if any one of the signals for the
axes along which the tool is moving goes low, the control unit sets the feedrates on all
axes to 0 to stop feed. When the tool is moving, the control unit decelerates the tool, then
stops it.
Since the move command remains valid while these signals are low, the command is re-
sumed as soon as they go high again.
– 234 –
(d) Block start interlock signal (*BSL [#1, #2])

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Suppresses the start of the next block in automatic operation.
[Operation] When this signal is low, the execution of the next block is not started in automatic operation.
The block already started is not affected and continues until it iscompleted. This signal does
not stop automatic operation.
The commands in the next block remain valid and are ready for execution. So as soon as
the signal goes high, the execution of the commands starts.
NOTE For cycle blocks generated internally in a canned cycle, generally only the first block is
interlocked by the signal. Intermediate blocks are continuously executed even after the signal
goes low. This signal, however, can be made valid for all blocks in a cycle, including
intermediate blocks, by parameter setting.
(e) Cutting block start interlock signal (*CSL [#1, #2])

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Suppresses the start of a block of move commands other than commands for positioning in
[Operation] When this signal is low, the execution of a block of move commands other than commands
for positioning is suppressed in automatic operation. A block already started is not affected;
it is executed until it is completed. This signal does not stop automatic operation. The com-
mands in the next block remain valid and are ready for execution. So as soon as the signal
goes high, the execution of the commands starts.
[Use] When the spindle is started, or when the spindle speed is changed, this signal can be held
low until the spindle speed reaches the target speed. This allows cutting at the right spindle
speed.
NOTE This signal is valid for all blocks including cycle blocks internally generated in a canned cycle.
As with the 3/6 interface SAR signal, the cutting block start interlock signal can be checked
when a time specified by parameter setting has elapsed after a transition from the rapid
traverse mode to the cutting mode or after an S code is specified.
The procedure is explained below.
1. Set bit 7 of parameter 5602 (SAR) to 1.
2. In parameter 5620, set a time from one of the following points until checking of the cutting
block start interlock signal starts:
⋅ When a shift from the rapid traverse mode to a block of the cutting mode is made
⋅ When an S code is specified
Then, the cutting block start interlock signal is checked, and pulse distribution starts with the
timing shown below.
(1) Cutting block start interlock signal
(2) S function command
(3) Timer set in parameter 5620
(4) Pulse distribution
– 235 –
2.3.45 Servo off

(a) Servo off signals (SVF1, SVF2, SVF3, ...)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Place the controlled axes in the servo off state; that is, they stop the current to the servo motor,
which disables position control. However, the position detection feature functions continu-
ously, so the current position is not lost.
SVF 1
1 …… Servo off for the first axis
2 …… Servo off for the second axis
3 …… Servo off for the third axis

: :
: :
[Operation] While a servo off signal is low, the corresponding axis is in the servo off state. In the servo
off state, position control is disabled. If the machine is moved by external force, it is left de-
viated. The deviation is handled in one of the following two methods, which can be selected
by parameter setting:
(1) The deviation is treated as a servo error and recorded in the error counter.
When the servo off signal goes high again, the machine moves to compensate for the
error.
(2) Follow–up
The position of the control unit is moved so that the error counter is set to 0, assuming
that moving the tool the distance equivalent to the deviation has been specified.
In this method, the machine is still in a deviated position after the servo off signal goes
high again. The position of the control unit, however, moves in correspondence with the
machine position. Therefore, executing an absolute command can move the machine
to the correct position.
[Use] Method (1) above is generally used to allow mechanical clamp while the controlled axis is in
stopped state. The purpose of this method is to protect the servo motor against excessive
current when the clamping force is larger than the force of the servo motor.
While a servo off signal is low, the interlock signal for the corresponding axis should generally
be set low.
NOTE Method (2) is generally used for the mechanical handle feature. This feature drives the motor
to move the tool.
– 236 –
2.3.46 Detachment of controlled axes (noncontrolled axes)

(a) Cancel controlled axis signals (DTCH1, DTCH2, DTCH3, ...)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Specify an axis as a noncontrolled axis.
DTCH 1
1. Specify the first axis as a noncontrolled axis.
2. Specify the second axis as a noncontrolled axis.
3. Specify the third axis as a noncontrolled axis.

[Operation] When a cancel controlled axis signal goes high, the corresponding axis is regarded as a non-
controlled axis.
1 No position control is performed.
2 Servo alarms related to the axis are ignored.
3 The interlock signal for the axis is automatically assumed to be set low.
4 Although commands for the axis are valid in the automatic and manual operation modes,
they must not be specified.
Such a command can be accepted, but its operation is suppressed because the interlock
signal is low. Automatic operation is stopped at the block specified by the command, and
it cannot proceed to further execution.
5 The axis is also included in the position display on the CRT screen.
The signals can be switched from high to low, or low to high at any time, irrespective of
whether the power has been turned on. But be sure not to switch the signals while the
tool is moving.
[Use] When a detachable rotary table is used, these signals are set according to whether the table
is mounted.
NOTE 1 Before these signals can be used, the corresponding axes must be specified as axes that can
be noncontrolled by parameter setting. For axes without this parameter specification, these
signals are invalid.
NOTE 2 The same switching as with these signals is enabled by MDI panel setting.
NOTE 3 When a multiaxis amplifier, such as a 2–axis or 3–axis amplifier, is being used, specifying
detachment for any of the axes controlled by the amplifier causes the SV013 IMPROPER
V–READY OFF alarm to be issued for the other axes, even if detachment has not been
specified for those axes. This alarm can be suppressed by keeping the MCC signal turned on
during controlled axis detachment. For details, refer to the description of bit 5 of parameter No.
1009 in the parameter manual.
(b) Controlled axis canceled signals (MDTCH1, MDTCH2, MDTCH3, ...)

[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Report that a corresponding axis is a noncontrolled axis to the PMC.
[Operation] A controlled axis canceled signal goes high when:
i. The corresponding axis is a noncontrolled axis.
A controlled axis canceled signal goes low when:
i. The corresponding axis is a controlled axis.
– 237 –
2.3.47 Axis interchange signals

Axis interchange signals: AXC4 AXC2, AXC1
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Informs the control unit of the axis interchange number.
[Operation] Specifies an axis interchange number according to the table below.
Axis interchange number

Signal
0 1 2 3 4 5
AXC1 0 1 0 1 0 1
AXC2 0 0 1 1 0 0
AXC3 0 0 0 0 1 1
NOTE If either parameter 1049 or the signals received from the machine specify axis interchange
number 0, the axes are interchanged according to the other axis interchange number, which
is not zero. If neither axis interchange number is zero, the axes are interchanged according
to the axis interchange number specified by the signals sent from the machine. When the axes
need not be interchanged, the two axis interchange numbers must be set to zero.
2.3.48 Memory protection keys

(a) Memory protection keys (KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, KEY4)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Only when high, permit memory contents to be modified by MDI panel operations. Four sig-
nals are provided according to the memory contents to be modified.
(1) KEY1: Enables the input of tool compensations and workpiece reference point com
pensations.
(2) KEY2: Enables the input of setting data and macro variables and the presetting of ab
solute coordinates.
(3) KEY3: Enables the input and editing of part programs.
(4) KEY4: (Reserved)
[Operation] When a memory protection key signal is low, the corresponding operation is disabled.
– 238 –
2.3.49 External input/output signals

(a) External read start signal (EXRD)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Starts program registration from tape to part program memory.
1 The control unit reads programs from the input device selected for foreground or back-
ground editing and registers the programs in memory. If the selected mode is the part
program storage and edit mode, this operation is performed as foreground editing. If the
mode is other than the part program storage and edit mode, this operation is performed
as background editing.
2 In both foreground and background editing, the control unit can register a single program
or all programs on tape at a time. Whether a single programs or all programs are regis-
tered is selected by parameter setting.
All unprotected programs can be deleted before registration starts. This is enabled by
parameter setting.
3 In background editing, if external read/punch stop signal EXSTP goes high during regis-
tration, the control unit stops registration. A reset is invalid.
4 While registration is being performed, read/punch busy signal RPSBY is high.
NOTE 1 Input devices (tape reader, RS–232–C, etc.) to be used for registration in foreground editing
and background editing can be selected separately from the MDI panel (setting data).
NOTE 2 There are conditions on the execution of registration. When the registration is performed as
foreground editing, for example, automatic operation must be reset. When it is performed as
background editing, a program having the same number must not be executed in the memory
mode simultaneously. For details of the conditions, refer to the “Operator’s Manual.”
(b) External punch start signal (EXPUN)

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Starts outputting programs from part program memory to tape.
[Operation] When the external punch start signal goes high, the control unit functions as described below.
1 The control unit outputs programs to the output device selected for foreground or back-
ground editing. If the selected mode is the part program storage and edit mode, this op-
eration is performed as foreground editing. If the mode is other than the part program
storage and edit mode, this operation is performed as background editing.
2 In foreground editing, the control unit can output a selected program or all programs in
memory at a time. Whether a selected program or all programs in memory are output is
selected by parameter setting.
In background editing, the control unit always outputs all programs.
3 If the system is reset while memory is being output in foreground editing, the control unit
stops output.
In background editing, if external read/punch stop signal EXSTP goes high during out-
put, the control unit stops output. A reset is invalid.
4 While memory is being output, read/punch busy signal RPBSY is high.
NOTE 1 Output devices (tape punch, RS–232–C, etc.) to be used for output in foreground editing and
background editing can be selected separately from the MDI panel (setting data).
NOTE 2 There are conditions on the execution of output. A program being edited in the foreground, for
example, cannot be output in the background and vice versa. For details of the conditions,
refer to the “Operator’s Manual.”
– 239 –
(c) External read/punch stop signal EXSTP

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Forcibly terminates program registration, collation, and output being performed in back-
ground editing.
1 When program registration, collation, or output is performed in background editing, the
control unit terminates this operation immediately.
2 In other cases, including program registration, collation, and output in the foreground,
this signal is invalid.
[Use] Background editing can be performed in parallel with foreground program execution. The
program execution may result in a reset (reset due to M02, M30, etc.). Generally, it is not de-
sirable that background editing be affected by such a reset. So reset is made invalid for back-
ground editing.
When the operator performs program registration, collation, or output with the MDI panel, the
operator can forcibly terminate the operation by pressing a key (soft key) on the MDI panel,
regardless of whether the operation is being performed in foreground or background editing.
When registration or output is performed in background editing, using an external signal
(EXRD, EXPUN), however, there is no other means to forcibly terminates these operations.
So the EXSTP signal must be used.
When planning to perform background registration and output using the external read/punch
signal, provide a button or switch to turn on and off the signal in order to reset the system is
the event a problem occurs.
NOTE In addition to registration and output started by the external read start signal and external punch
start signal, the signal can stop any background registration, collation, and output, even when
the operator started background registration, collation, and output using the MDI panel.
(d) Read/punch busy signal (RPBSY)

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Reports that program registration or output started with the external read start signal or exter-
nal punch start signal is being performed.
[Output Condition]
⋅ In response to the external read signal or external punch signal, corresponding operation
(registration or output) starts.
The operation started in response to the external read signal or external punch signal (reg-
istration or output) terminates.
⋅ The signal goes low in any of the following cases: When operation has terminated nor-
mally, when operation has been terminated forcibly by a reset, and when operation has
been stopped forcibly by the external read/punch stop signal.
– 240 –
2.3.50 External workpiece number search

(a) External workpiece number search signals (WN1 to WN16 [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Select the number of a workpiece to be machined in the memory mode.
Five code signals are provided. These signals are set as binary code to designate a work-
piece number as follows:
WN WN WN WN WN Work WN WN WN WN WN Work
16 8 4 2 1 Number 16 8 4 2 1 Number
0 0 0 0 0 00 1 0 0 0 0 16
0 0 0 0 1 01 1 0 0 0 1 17
0 0 0 1 0 02 1 0 0 1 0 18
0 0 0 1 1 03 1 0 0 1 1 19
0 0 1 0 0 04 1 0 1 0 0 20
0 0 1 0 1 05 1 0 1 0 1 21
0 0 1 1 0 06 1 0 1 1 0 22
0 0 1 1 1 07 1 0 1 1 1 23
0 1 0 0 0 08 1 1 0 0 0 24
0 1 0 0 1 09 1 1 0 0 1 25
0 1 0 1 0 10 1 1 0 1 0 26
0 1 0 1 1 11 1 1 0 1 1 27
0 1 1 0 0 12 1 1 1 0 0 28
0 1 1 0 1 13 1 1 1 0 1 29
0 1 1 1 0 14 1 1 1 1 0 30
0 1 1 1 1 15 1 1 1 1 1 31
( 0 : Signal low 1 : Signal high)
Workpiece number 00 is used for special designation “no search.” Thus, a workpiece number
ranges from 01 to 31. A workpiece number is associated with a program number (Oxxxx) by
one of the following methods. The method used is specified by parameter setting.
1 A workpiece number is used as a program number. For example, specifying workpiece
number 21 causes a search for O0021.
2 A workpiece number is set in the first 2 digits of a program number, and any number is
set in the last 2 digits.
If workpiece number 21 is specified, for example, memory is searched for O0021, O0121,
O0221, O0321, ..., or O9921.
The number searched for is determined by the order of registration in the program num-
ber directory in memory. As a result, the number cannot be specified. When this method
is used, therefore, care must be taken not to register programs with program numbers
whose first 2 digits are the same in memory.
3 A workpiece number is set in the first 2 digits of a program number, and a number specified
by parameter setting is set in the last 2 digits. If workpiece number 21 is specified when the
parameter–set value in the last 2 digits is 15, for example, 01521 is searched for.
[Operation] A program number associated with a workpiece number specified by these signals is
searched for when:
⋅ The system is reset in the memory mode.
⋅ After automatic operation is reset (automatic operation in–progress signal OP is low), it is
started in the memory mode (automatic operation start signal goes high).
When the workpiece number is 00, no search is performed.
The searched program is used for the following:
⋅ Automatic operation in the memory mode
⋅ Foreground editing in the part program storage and edit mode
– 241 –
2.3.51 External data input/output

External data are input and output using the following signals:
External data input External data output

Input signal Output signal Input signal Output signal
Address signal EIA0 – EIA7 EOA0 – EOA7
Data signal EID0 – EID47 EOD0 – EOD47
Data output
ERDRQ
request signal
Strobe signal EISTB EOSTB
Read end signal EIREND EOREND
ESEND
Search end signal
(#1, #2)
Tool post specifica-
EIHEAD EOHEAD
tion signal
The external data input function performs an operation similar to that of the external data output function, but
in the reverse direction. The external data input function sends data from the PMC to the NC. The external
data output function on the other hand, sends data from the NC to the PMC. In external data output operation,
however, a request for data must be sent from the PMC to the NC with the external data input function.
Basic procedure for external data input
External data are input using the basic procedure below.
(1) The PMC sets the data signals EID0 to EID47 and the address signals EIA0 to EIA7 for identifying the type
of data. With the Series 15–TT, some data types require the specification of whether the data is for the
first tool post or the second tool post. For this specification, the tool post specification signal EIHEAD is
to be set. The data output request signal ERDRQ must always be low.
(2) The PMC then drives the strobe signal EISTB high.
(3) When EISTB goes high, the control unit reads the address signals, data signals, tool post specification
signal (15–TT), and data output request signal.
(4) After all the signals are read, the control unit drives the read end signal EIREND high.
(5) When EIREND goes high, the PMC drives the strobe signal EISTB low.
(6) When the strobe signal EISTB goes low, the control unit drives the read end signal EIREND low. This com-
pletes the data input procedure, allowing another data input procedure to be performed.
The timing chart for the procedure above is shown below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Address signal EIA0 A 7

Data signal EID0 A47
Tool post specification
signal (15-TT) EIHEAD
Data output
ERDRQ (LOW)
request signal
Strobe signal EISTB
Data read (NC)
Read end signal EIREND
– 242 –
Basic procedure for external data output

External data is output using the basic procedure below.
(1) The PMC sets the address signals EIA0 to EIA7 for identifying the type of data. Depending on the type
of data, the PMC sets the tool post specification signal EIHEAD to specify whether the data is for the first
tool post or the second tool post. The data output request signal ERDRQ must always be high. Some of
the data signals EID0 to EID47 must be set, depending on the data.
(2) The PMC then drives the strobe signal EISTB high.
(3) When EISTB goes high, the control unit reads the address signals, data signals, tool post specification
signal, and data output request signal.
(4) After all the signals are read, the control unit drives the read end signal EIREND high.
(5) When EIREND goes high, the PMC drives the strobe signal EISTB low.
(6) When the strobe signal EISTB goes low, the control unit drives the read end signal EIREND low. (Steps
(1) through (6) are basically the same as for external data input, except that ERDRQ is high for external
data output.)
(7) The control unit sets the address signals EOA0 to EOA7 for the requested data, the data signals EOD0
to EOD47, and the tool post specification signal EOHEAD when a request for external data output is con-
firmed (that is, when the data output request signal is determined to be high) in step (3). For data common
to the two tool posts, the control unit drives EOHEAD low.
(8) The control unit then drives the output data strobe signal EOSTB high.
(9) When the strobe signal EOSTB goes high, the PMC must read the address signals and data signals.
(10)After all the signals are read, the PMC drives the read end signal EOREND high.
(11)When EOREND goes high, the control unit drives the strobe signal EOSTB low to report the reception of
the EOREND signal.
(12)When the strobe signal EOSTB goes low, the PMC drives the read end signal EOREND low.
(13)The read end signal EOREND goes low, completing the external data output procedure.
– 243 –
The timing chart for the procedure above is shown below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Address signal EIA0 to 7
Data signal EID0 to 47

signal (15-TT) EIHEAD
DATA output
request signal ERDRQ
Strobe signal EISTB
Data read (NC)
Read end signal EIREND
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
Data set (NC)
Address signal EOA0 to 7
Data signal EOD0 to 47

signal (15-TT) EOHEAD
Strobe signal EOSTB
Data read (PMC)
Read end signal EOREND
External data output does not necessarily occur immediately after external data input for making an external
data output request. If it takes a long time for the control unit to prepare output data, external data output may
be delayed. In such a case, before the external data output is completed, no additional external data input op-
erations are accepted; they are forced to wait. Even if EISTB goes high, the control unit does not read data
until the current external data output operation is completed; in this case, the alarm O0T124 is raised.
External data that can be input/output
(i) Program number
[Input] A program to be executed in the memory command mode is searched for when its program
number is specified.
A program number from 1 to 9999 can be specified in binary.
[Output] The program number of the main program currently executed is output.
(ii) Sequence number
[Input] A block to be executed in the memory command mode is searched for when its sequence
number is specified.
A sequence number from 1 to 9999 can be specified in binary.
[Output] The program number of the block currently executed is output.
– 244 –
(iii) Tool offset value

[Input] A tool offset value is changed by specifying an offset number.
Part of the address data can be used for the following specifications:
1 Milling system: Whether the tool offset value is a cutter compensation value or tool length
compensation value
Lathe system: Whether the tool offset value is an X–axis position compensation value,
Z–axis position compensation value, tool–tip radius compensation value, or Y–axis posi-
tion compensation value in lathe systems.
2 Whether geometry or wear
3 Whether to use an absolute value or incremental value. In the case of an absolute value,
a value specified in the data section is directly used as a new tool offset value. In the case
of an incremental value, a specified value is added to the current offset value to produce
a new tool offset value.
An offset number from 0 to 999 is to be specified in binary. An alarm is raised if a number
not available in compensation value memory is specified; such a number varies from one
option to another. When the offset number 0 is specified, the tool offset value currently
selected for execution is selected.
An offset value in the range 0 to +999,999 is to be specified in binary, using the least input
increment as the unit.
[Output] By specifying an offset number, the current tool offset value is output.
An offset number must be specified for an output request in the same way as it is specified
for an input request.
Output data includes the specified offset number. When the output number 0 is specified, 0
is not output; the offset number currently selected for execution is output.
The specification of whether to use an absolute value or incremental value in the address
data has no effect.
(iv) Workpiece reference point offset value
[Input] By specifying a controlled axis number and coordinate system number, the workpiece refer-
ence point offset value is changed.
Whether to specify an absolute value or incremental value can be specified. In the case of
an absolute value, a value specified in the data section is directly used as a new workpiece
reference point offset value. In the case of an incremental value, a specified value is added
to the current offset value to produce a new workpiece reference point offset value.
A controlled axis number from 0 to 5 is to be specified in binary using four bits. The table below
indicates the correspondence between the controlled axis numbers and controlled axes.
Control axis Control axis

number
0 1st axis
1 2nd axis
2 3rd axis
3 4th axis
4 5th axis
5 6th axis
– 245 –
A coordinate system number is to be specified in binary using eight bits. The table below indi-
cates the correspondence between the coordinate system numbers and workpiece coordi-
nate system offset values.
Coordinate Work coordinate system offset value

system number
0 –––
1 Work coordinate system #1 (G54) offset value
255 External work zero point offset amount
Common offset value
When the coordinate system number 0 is specified, the workpiece coordinate system current-
ly selected for execution is selected. The offset value corresponding to coordinate system
number 255 is applicable, as a common offset value, to all coordinate systems.
An offset value in the range 0 to +99,999,999 is to be specified in binary, using the least input
increment as the unit.
[Output] By specifying a controlled axis number and coordinate system number, the current workpiece
reference point offset value is output. A controlled axis number and coordinate system num-
ber must be specified for an output request, in the same way as they are specified for an input
request. Output data includes the specified controlled axis number and coordinate system
number. When the coordinate system number 0 is specified, 0 is not output; the coordinate
system number currently selected for execution is output.
The specification of whether to use an absolute value or incremental value has no effect.
(v) Machine zero point shift value
[Input] By specifying a controlled axis number, a machine zero point shift value is entered. Upon
input, compensation is immediately applied to the corresponding axis, and the tool moves.
A controlled axis number is to be specified in the same way as for a workpiece reference point
offset value.
An offset value in the range 0 to +9,999 is to be specified in binary, using the least input incre-
ment as the unit. The offset value is always an absolute value, so the tool moves by the differ-
ence between a newly specified offset value and the previous value. If a large compensation
is applied at a time, an excessive error can occur when the tool is stopped, thus raising an
alarm. So, to apply a large compensation, the operation must be divided into several input
steps.
[Output] By specifying a controlled axis number, the current machine zero point shift value is output.
A controlled axis number must be specified for an output request in the same way as it is spe-
cified for an input request.
(vi) Alarm messages
[Input] The control unit is placed in the alarm state by inputting an alarm number. A message character
string can then be sent to display the alarm message on the alarm screen (alarm setting).
A previously entered alarm can be cancelled by specifying its alarm number (alarm clearing).
The address section is used to set and clear an alarm.
An alarm number from 0 to 999 is to be specified in binary. The control unit prefixes the char-
acter string EX to an alarm number, and displays EX and a specified alarm number before
an alarm message character string.
A message character string is to be entered immediately after a specified alarm number ac-
cording to item (viii) below. Up to 30 characters can be entered for one alarm item.
The control unit can accept up to four external alarm messages at a time. Set alarms are not
cleared by resetting the control unit. To clear an alarm, the external alarm message must be
input, with its number and clear operation specified.
[Output] There is no corresponding output. So ERDRQ must always be 0.
(vii) Operator messages
[Input] An external operator message is registered with a message number in the control unit. A
message character string can then be sent for display on the operator message screen (oper-
– 246 –
ator message setting). A previously entered operator message can be cancelled by specify-
ing its message number (operator message clearing).
The address section is used to set and clear an operator message.
An operator message number from 0 to 999 is to be specified in binary. For identification, the
control unit prefixes the character string EX to an operator message number from 0 to 99, and
displays EX and a specified operator message number before an operator message charac-
ter string. For an operator message number of 100 or greater, no message number is dis-
played; only a message character string is displayed.
A message character string is to be entered according to item (viii) below immediately after
a specified operator message number.
Up to 128 characters are accepted for each message in the PMC–MODEL NA and up to 256
characters in the PMC–MODEL NB.
The control unit can accept up to four external operator messages at a time. (up to two at a
time when a 9” CRT system is used with the PMC–MODEL NB) Set messages are not cleared
by resetting the control unit. To clear a set message, the external operator message must
be input with its number and clear operation specified.
(viii)Message character strings
[Input] A desired character string can be entered after the setting of an external alarm message or
external operator message. If the immediately preceding external data input is not for such
a setting, an entered message character string is ignored. The data section can contain up
to six characters. Eight bits are used to represent one character. See the character code
table (conforming to the JIS code table.) Higher characters (on the EID47 side) are displayed
earlier.
When the specified character code is 00, the character is ignored. Consequently, an arbitrary
number of characters not exceeding six characters can be sent at a time.
When the character LF (code: 0000 1010) is sent, line feed occurs on the screen display; LF
itself cannot be not displayed.
At the end of a message, the character ETX (code: 0000 0011) is sent. All preceding mes-
sage character strings that have been input are assumed to be continuous. However, the
following restrictions are imposed on the length of a character string:
Alarm message character string ………up to 30 characters
Operator message character string……up to 128 characters
(ix) Custom macro variable values
[Input] By specifying a custom macro variable number, the value of the variable is changed. A vari-
able number from 100 to 999 is to be specified in binary. A common variable must be speci-
fied. If a variable number exceeding a specifiable range (varying from one option to another)
is specified, an alarm is raised.
A variable value in the range 0 to +99,999,999 is to be specified in binary.
[Output] [Output] Specifying a custom macro variable number outputs the value of the variable.
A variable number must be specified for an output request in the same way as it is specified
for an input request.
Signal configuration in external data input/output
The configuration of the address and data sections for external data input/output depends on the type of data
to be transmitted. The table below indicates the configurations.
– 247 –
NOTE 1 0: Low signal 1: High signal

NOTE 2 The notations used in the table have the following meanings:
a/i : Absolute (1) or incremental (0)
Specifies whether an offset value is to be entered using an absolute variable or
incremental value.
g/w : Geometry (1) or wear (0)
Specifies whether a tool offset value is associated with geometry or wear.
r/l : Radius (1) or length (0)
Specifies whether the tool offset value (in milling systems) is a cutter compensation
value (radius) or tool length compensation value (length).
xzry : x (00), z (01), r (10), or y (11)
Specifies whether the tool offset value (in lathe systems) is an X–axis position
compensation value (x), Z–axis position compensation value (z), tool–tip radius
compensation value (r) or Y–axis position compensation value (y).
c/s : Clear (1) or set (0)
Specifies whether to perform message clearing or message setting.
t–type : – Tool number input
00 : Tool number specification using EID0 to EID31
01 : Specification of tool numbers to which compensation is currently applicable
(after an M06 command)
10 : Specification of selected tool numbers (before an M06 command)
– Tool number output
00 : Tool number output for tool data subject to input/output
01 : Output of tool numbers to which compensation is currently applicable (after an
M06 command)
10 : Output of selected tool numbers (before an M06 command)
emp : – Input
Always set this to 0
– Output
In the following cases, 1 is output:
1 Tool number output
⋅ When no tool number has been input since power–up
⋅ When there is no tool number to which compensation is currently applicable, or
there is no selected tool number
2 Pot number output and offset value output
When no pot number and offset value are set for tool data subject to output
NOTE 3 The ERDRQ column indicates the states specifiable for ERDRQ.
When 0 is indicated, only external data input is allowed.
When 1 is indicated, only external data output is allowed.
When 0/1 is indicated, both external data input and external data output are allowed.
NOTE 4 The dashed line (– – – –) in the EID/EOD column indicates an unused area. Be sure to set it
to 0 (low) for future expansion. This is output as 0.
NOTE 5 The EIHEAD/EOHEAD column specifies whether the data is for the first tool post or second
tool post. It also indicates whether the data is input data or output data. That is,
0/1: Data that is identified as applicable to the first tool post (0) or the second tool post (1)
x: Data that is identified as applicable to neither the first tool post nor the second tool post, and
is ignored
(This is always output as 0.)
– 248 –
Table 2.3.51 Signal Configuration for External Data Input/Output
E EIA/EOA EID/EOD
EIHEAD
RD
N
No. D t
Data NA 47 32 31 16 15 0 R
Remarks
k
EOHEAD RQ
(11TT) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NB 32 47 0 15 16 31
1 Program number 0/1 0/1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 –––––––––––––– Program number 1–9,999
2 Sequence number 0/1 0/1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 –––––––––––––– Sequence number 1–99,999
Milling system tool offset value – 0/1 0 0 0 1 a/i g/w 0 r/l Offset number Tool offset value 0–"999,999
3
Turning system tool offset value 0/1 0/1 0 0 0 1 a/i g/w xz ry Offset number Tool offset value 0–"999,999
Axis Coordinate
4 Work zero point offset value x 0/1 0 0 1 0
number
a/i –––– system
Work zero point offset value 0–"99,999,999
Axis
5 Machine zero point shift value x 0/1 0 0 1 1
number –––––––––––––– Zero point shift value 0–"9,999
6 Alarm message x 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 c/s –––––––––––––– Alarm number 0–999
7 Operator message x 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 c/s –––––––––––––– Message number 0–999
8 Message character string x 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 CharacĆ Charac- Charac- Charac- Charac- Charac-

ter 1 ter 2 ter 3 ter 4 ter 5 ter 6
9 Custom macro variable value x 0/1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 Variable number Variable value 0–"99,999,999
10 Tool number(Note 1) x 0/1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 ––––––––– (Note 2) Tool number 0–99,999,999
11 Pot number(Note 1) x 0/1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 ––––––––– (Note 2) Pot number 0–9,999
12 Offset value(Note 1) x 0/1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 ––––––––– (Note 2) Offset value 0–"999,999
13 Required parts count 0/1 0/1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 –––––––––––––– Required parts count
Value of the cumulative parts

14
counter
0/1 0/1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 –––––––––––––– Value of the cumulative parts counter
15
1 Tool offset data based on tool numbers

2 See the table below.
EID/EOD (bit)
No.
39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
10 emp 0 0 0 0 0 t–type
11 emp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
12 emp 0 0 0 0 0 0 r/1
NOTE NA and NB indicate the PMC–MODEL NA and PMC–MODEL NB, respectively.
(a) Address signals for external data input (EIA0 to EIA7)

[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals indicate the type of data sent with the external data input function. These sig-
nals consist of eight code signals. For the correspondence between the codes and data
types, see Table 2.3.51.
(b) Data signals for external data input (EID0 to EID47)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals represent data sent with the external data input function. These signals consist
of 47 code signals, and the method of using these signals depends on the type of data. These
signals are generally used as binary code signals as follows:
ȍ(2
b
i
Data value = Vi)
i+0
where Vi = 0 when EIDi is low
Vi = 1 when EIDi is high
a, b: Depend on the type of data (0 x a < b x 47).
For detailed information, see Table 2.3.51.
– 249 –
(c) Tool post specification signal for external data input (EIHEAD (15–TT))
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal indicates whether data sent with the external data input function is for the first tool
post or the second tool post.
When this signal is low, the data is for the first tool post. When this signal is high, the data
is for the second tool post. When external input data is common to both tool posts, this signal
has no effect.
(d) Strobe signal for external data input (EISTB)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal reports that an address and data have been prepared for external data input.
When this signal goes high, the control unit reads the address and data signals sent with the
external data input function.
For the operation and procedure of the control unit when this signal goes high, see “Basic
procedure” described earlier in this section.
(e) Read end signal for external data input (EIREND)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal reports that the control unit has read data sent with the external data input function.
For the output conditions and procedure, see “Basic procedure” described earlier in this sec-
tion.
(f) External data output request signal (ERDRQ)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal indicates whether external data input is for data input or for an external data output
request.
(g) Address signals for external data output (EOA0 to EOA7)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] These signals indicate the type of data sent with the external data output function. These sig-
nals consist of eight code signals. For the correspondence between the codes and data
types, see Table 2.3.51.
(h) Data signals for external data output (EOD0 to EOD47)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] These signals represent data sent with the external data output function. These signals con-
sist of 47 code signals, and the method of using these signals depends on the type of data.
These signals are generally used as binary code signals as follows:
ȍ(2
b
i
Data value = Vi)
i+0
where Vi = 0 when EODi is low
Vi = 1 when EODi is high
a, b: Depend on the type of data (0 x a < b x 47).
For detailed information, see Table 2.3.51.
(i) Tool post specification signal for external data output (EOHEAD (15–TT))
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal indicates whether data sent with the external data output function is for the first
tool post or the second tool post.
When this signal is low, the data is for the first tool post. When this signal is high, the data
is for the second tool post. When external input data is common to both tool posts, this signal
has no effect, but is low when output.
– 250 –
(j) Strobe signal for external data output (EOSTB)

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal reports that an address and data have been prepared for external data output.
When this signal goes high, the PMC reads the address and data signals sent with the exter-
nal data output function.
For the output conditions and procedure, see “Basic procedure” described earlier in this sec-
tion.
(k) Read end signal for external data output (EOREND)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal reports that the PMC has read data sent with the external data output function.
(l) External search end signal (ESEND)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal reports that a program number search or sequence number search specified with
the external data input function is completed.
[Output Condition]
⋅ A program number search or sequence number search specified with the external data in-
put function is completed
⋅ Automatic operation is started
⋅ The system is reset.
2.3.52 Skip function

(a) Skip signals (SKIP1 [#1, #2], SKIP2, SKIP3, SKIP4); SKIP2, SKIP3, and to SKIP4 are not used with the
15–TT.
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals terminate skip cutting. That is, the position where a skip signal goes high in
a command program block containing G31.1 (or G31), G31.2, G31.3, or G31.4 is stored in
a custom macro variable, and the move command of the block is terminated at the same time.
Furthermore, in a block containing G04, the dwell command of the block is terminated by pa-
rameter setting. In either case, until all other commands (such as miscellaneous functions)
of the block are completed, machining never proceeds to the next block.
Which of the four skip signals is applicable to blocks containing the G codes can be deter-
mined by parameter setting. The four skip signals can correspond to the G codes on a one–
to–one basis. One skip signal can also be made applicable to multiple G codes. Conversely,
multiple skip signals can be made applicable to one G code.
[Operation] When a skip signal goes high, the control unit functions as described below.
1 When a block contains a G code from G31.3 to G31.4 for skip cutting, and the skip signal
is made applicable by parameter setting to the G code, the control unit reads and stores
the current position of the specified axis at that time. The control unit decelerates and
stops the axis, then cancels the remaining distance that the block was supposed to be
moved.
2 When a block contains a G04 code for dwell, and the skip signal is made applicable by
parameter setting to the G code, the control unit stops dwell operation, and cancels any
remaining dwell time.
3 In other cases, the control unit does not perform any particular operation. Note, however,
that a skip signal is monitored not for a rising edge, but for the high or low state. So, if
a skip signal continues to be high, a skip condition is assumed to be satisfied immediately
when the next skip cutting or skip dwell operation is specified.
– 251 –
[Use] These signals can be used for the applications described below.
(1) To measure the dimensions of a workpiece, for example, a skip signal is set high by ap-
plying the sensor to the workpiece with a G31 command, and the position is read using
a custom macro.
(2) In cutting, for example, the termination position of cutting is not programmed, but a skip
signal is set high by a cutting condition signal from the machine in order to proceed to the
next block.
(3) As described in the example below, multiple cutting conditions can correspond to multi-
ple skip signals, particularly in an application such as 2.
Example Suppose that the procedure below is used for machining.
1 A feedrate of 10 is used until cutting condition 1 is satisfied.
2 A feedrate of 3 is used until cutting condition 2 is satisfied.
3 A dwell operation is performed until cutting condition 3 is satisfied.
The cutting conditions correspond to the skip signals and the G codes as follows:
Cutting condition 1 Skip signal 1 G31.1
Cutting condition 2 Skip signal 2 G31.1, G31.2
Cutting condition 3 Skip signal 3 G31.1, G31.2, G04
The machining is programmed as follows:
N1 G31.1 X1000.0 F10 ; Feed
N2 G31.2 X100.0 F3 ; Feed
N3 G04 X100.0 ; Dwell
If cutting condition 2 is already present at the beginning, execution starts with N3 (dwell).
NOTE 1 G31.1, G31.2, G31.3, and G31.4 for skip cutting are identical to each other, except for their
correspondence to skip signals. The tool moves along the specified axis until its corresponding
skip signal goes high in linear interpolation or until it completes the movement. Parameter
setting can select whether to use a programmed feedrate or skip cutting speed specified in a
parameter. G31 is equivalent to G31.1.
NOTE 2 A skip signal monitoring delay or variation of 0 to 2 msec is present on the control unit only; this
delay does not include a delay on the PMC. When a skip signal is used for position
measurement, the control unit automatically compensates for an acceleration/deceleration
delay and servo delay(1), provided that a certain speed has been reached. Accordingly, a
measurement error is obtained by adding this 2 msec delay to a skip signal delay or variation
(including a receiver delay or variation) on the PMC, and multiplying the sum by the feedrate
at that time.
By using a high–speed skip signal (Item (b)), a receiver delay and control unit delay or variation
can be reduced to 0.1 msec or less.
1 Parameter setting can disable automatic compensation for an acceleration/deceleration
delay and servo delay.
NOTE 3 The delay or variation produced after skip signal monitoring until the feed is stopped is 0 to 8
msec. To calculate an overshoot, an acceleration/deceleration delay, servo delay, and delay
on the PMC must be considered.
(b) High–speed skip signals (HSKP1 [#1, #2], HSKP2, HSKP3, HSKP4); HSKP2, HSKP3, and HSKP4 are
not used with the 15–TT.
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] HSKP1, HSKP2, HSKP3, and HSKP4 are equivalent to the skip signals SKIP1, SKIP2,
SKIP3, and SKIP4, respectively. For the functions and operations of these high–speed skip
signals, see Item (a). These signals must be connected directly to the control unit, not via the
PMC. With these signals, the control unit can read the current position within 0.1 msec (in-
– 252 –
cluding a receiver delay and control unit delay or variation) after a signal state transition.
Note, however, that the delay or variation produced until the feed is stopped is 0 to 8 msec,
which is the same as that of the skip signals.
Parameter setting can select whether to use a skip signal or high–speed skip signal.
2.3.53 Signal for outputting the states of the high–speed skip signal and the high–speed mea-
suring position reach signal
The input states of the high–speed skip signal and the high–speed measuring position reach signal can be
output to the PMC.
(1) Signal
Signals for outputting the states of the high–speed skip signal and the high–speed measuring position
reach signal: HDO0 to HDO6
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Informs the PMC of the input states of the high–speed skip signal and the high–speed mea-
suring position reach signal. The bits of the high–speed skip signal correspond to the bits of
the output signal as shown below:
1. High–speed skip signal 2. Output signal
HDI0 HDO0
HDI1 HDO1
HDI2 HDO2
(HDI3 HDO3)
HDI4 HDO4
HDI5 HDO5
HDI6 HDO6
NOTE HDO3 is not provided for the Series 15–TT.
[Output Condition]
The bit is set high when:
⋅ The corresponding bits of the high–speed skip signal and the high–speed measuring posi-
tion reach signal are high.
The bit is set low when:
⋅ The corresponding bits of the high–speed skip signal and the high–speed measuring posi-
tion reach signal are low.
2.3.54 Torque limit reached signal (TRQLn)

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal reports that the torque limit has been reached.
[Output Condition]
⋅ The torque limit is reached.
⋅ The torque falls below the torque limit.
– 253 –
2.3.55 Custom macro

(a) Custom macro input signals (UI000 to UI331 [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read by a custom macro
as a type of system variable, and are used for interface signals between custom macros and
the PMC.
These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below.
Signals Q’ty Variables Correspondence of values

UI000 1 #1000
UI001 1 #1001
UI001 1 #1002
UI003 1 #1003 0 at low and 1 at high
: :
: :
UI030 1 #1030
UI031 1 #1031
UI000 – UI031 32 #1032
UI100 – UI131 32 #1033 32–bit binary code 1
UI200 – UI231 32 #1034
UI300 – UI331 32 #1035
1 Variable value
ȍ(2
30
#1032+n = i
Vi ) * 2 31 V 31
i+0
where Vi = 0 when UIni is low and Vi = 1 when UIni is high

n: 0 to 3
Note, however, that these system variables cannot be used on the left side of an assignment
statement.
(b) Custom macro output signals (UO000 to UO331 [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read or written by a custom
macro as a type of system variable, and are used for interface signals between custom mac-
ros and the PMC.
These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below.
Signals Q’ty Variables Correspondence of values
UO000 1 #1100
UO001 1 #1101
UO001 1 #1102
UO003 1 #1103 0 at low and 1 at high
: :
: :
UO030 1 #1130
UO031 1 #1131
UO000 – UO031 32 #1132
UO100 – UO131 32 #1133 32–bit binary code 1
UO200 – UO231 32 #1134
UO300 – UO331 32 #1135
ȍ(2
30
1 Variable value #1132+n = i
Vi ) * 2 31 V 31
i+0
where Vi = 0 when UOni is low and Vi = 1 when UOni is high

n: 0 to 3
These system variables can used on the left side of an assignment statement as well as on
the right side.
If a system variable is used on the left side, a value assigned to the system variable remains
until the system variable is used on the right side.
– 254 –
(c) Interrupt signal for custom macros (UINT [#1, #2])

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal calls and executes a program in memory. During execution, a program in auto-
matic operation is suspended.
To enable this signal to be accepted, a particular miscellaneous function must be specified
by parameter setting in a command program for automatic operation. In addition, automatic
operation must already be started.
For detailed information, refer to the Operator’s Manual.
2.3.56 Tool measurements

(a) Measuring position reached signals (AE1 (#1, #2), AE2 (#1, #2), AE3 (#1, #2))
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] If the measuring position specified by a program command differs from the measuring posi-
tion which a tool has reached in practice, that is, the position at the moment the measuring
position reached signal has just been turned on, the difference in the coordinate value is add-
ed to the current tool compensation value to update the compensation value. The tool is first
fed to the specified measuring position by rapid traverse in a block where one of the following
commands has been specified:
G37.1 (or G37), G37.2, G37.3
The tool decelerates and temporarily stops at the distance O before the measuring position.
The tool then moves to the measuring position at the speed preset by a parameter. If the mea-
suring position reached signal corresponding to the G code is turned on after the tool has ap-
proached within distance ε of the measuring position and before the tool overshoots the mea-
suring position by distance ε, the control unit updates the compensation value and terminates
the move command for the block. If the measuring position reached signal is not turned on
even after the tool has overshot the measuring position by distance ε, the control unit enters
an alarm state and terminates the move command for the block without updating the com-
pensation value.
Feedrate
Presumed measuring
position
Rapid traverse
Start point ε ε
Measuring position read signal
[Operation] When the signal is turned on, the control unit operates as follows:
1 Reads the position of the tool along the axis currently specified and updates the current
compensation value based on the difference between the specified measuring position
and the read measuring position in the following case: When the measuring position
reached signal corresponding to the G code is turned on in a block where one of G37.1,
G37.2, and G37.3 is specified after the tool is within distance ε of the measuring position
specified by a program and before the tool overshoots the measuring position by dis-
tance ε. The control unit then decelerates, stops the tool, and terminates the move com-
mand for the block.
– 255 –
2 Enters an alarm state and terminates the move command for the block without updating
the compensation value in the following case: When the measuring position reached sig-
nal corresponding to the G code is turned on in a block where one of G37.1, G37.2, and
G37.3 is specified after the tool is within distance γ of the measuring position but before
the tool is within distance ε of the measuring position.
3 In other cases, no particular operation is done. The control unit does not monitor the
measuring position reached signal for its rising edge but monitors the state of the signal.
If the signal remains on when the next corresponding automatic tool measurement (auto-
matic tool compensation) is specified, the control unit enters an alarm state when the tool
is within distance γ of the measuring position.
NOTE 1 All functions of automatic tool compensation codes G37.1, G37.2, and G37.3 are equal to one
another, except the following:
⋅ The corresponding measuring position reached signals are different.
⋅ The parameters for the measuring speed and distances γ and ε are independently set.
NOTE 2 Only one axis can be specified in G37.1, G37.2, or G37.3. Each code, however, does not
correspond to a certain axis but corresponds to a certain measuring position reached signal.
If signal AE1 is set to be turned on when the tool reaches the measuring position along either
the X or Z axis, both axes can be specified in G37.1 codes.
NOTE 3 The compensation value is updated by the following formula:
New compensation value = (Current compensation value) + [(Current position of the tool
along the specified axis when the measuring position reached
signal is turned on) – (Specified measuring position)]
The following compensation values are updated:
(1) In a milling system, the compensation value corresponding to the tool compensation
number selected by an H code
(2) In a lathe system, the compensation value corresponding to the tool compensation
number selected by a T code and to the specified axis (X, Y, or Z) in G37.1, G37.2, or G37.3
NOTE 4 The delay or dispersion in monitoring a measuring position reached signal is 0 to 2 ms in the
control unit (the value in the PMC is not included). The maximum measuring error is obtained
by adding 2 ms to the delay or dispersion in transmitting a measuring position reached signal
in the PMC (including the delay or dispersion in the receiver) and multiplying the result by the
measuring speed preset in a parameter.
The delay or dispersion in the receiver and control unit can be suppressed to 0.1 ms or less
using a high–speed measuring position reached signal (see item (b) below).
NOTE 5 A delay or dispersion of 0 to 8 ms occurs until the feed is stopped after the measuring position
reached signal is monitored. The acceleration/deceleration delay, servo delay, and PMC delay
must also be taken into account to calculate the overshoot distance.
(b) High–speed measuring position reached signals (HAE1 (#1, #2), HAE2 (#1, #2), HAE3 (#1, #2))
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These three signals, HAE1, HAE2, and HAE3, are equivalent to measuring position reached
signals AE1, AE2, and AE3, respectively.
– See item (a) for the functions and operations of the above signals.
The high–speed measuring position reached signals must be connected directly to the con-
trol unit without passing the PMC. By using these signals, the control unit can read the current
position within 0.1 ms (including the delay and dispersion in the receiver and control unit) after
the signals have changed.
A delay or dispersion of 0 to 8 ms occurs until the feed is stopped after the signal is monitored
in the same way as for the measuring position reached signals.
A parameter setting determines whether the measuring position reached signals or the high–
speed measuring position reached signals are used.
– 256 –
(c) Position record signal (PRC)

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal is prepared for the tool compensation measuring value input function in the lathe
system. It is used to store in the control unit the data on the positions of the tool as it moves
around for tentative cutting. After measuring a dimension of the workpiece, input the mea-
sured value by the specified manual operation. The difference is then stored as the specified
tool compensation value. Refer to the Operator’s Manual for details.
[Operation] The control unit stores the current position along all control axes when it detects the rising
edge of the signal.
2.3.57 Method B for directly inputting tool compensation (for the Series 15–T and 15–TT)
Section 2.3.37 describes the methods of measuring tool compensation according to a program command and
by measuring the dimensions of a workpiece after trial cutting. Besides those methods, a lathe system permits
the methods stated below to be used for measuring tool compensation. Moreover, the workpiece reference
point along the Z–axis can be set by simple operation.
The signals in the table below are for the functions for measuring tool compensation and for setting the work-
piece reference point along the Z–axis.
Signal Division Function

GOQSM Input Selects tool offset value write mode
+MIT1 1st axis (+) –direction (+X) manual feed interlock
-MIT1 1st axis (–) –direction (–X) manual feed interlock
+MIT2 2nd axis (+) –direction (+Z) manual feed interlock
I
Input
-MIT2 2nd axis (–) –direction (–Z) manual feed interlock
+MIT3 3rd axis (+) direction (+Y) manual feed interlock
-MIT3 3rd axis (–) direction (–Y) manual feed interlock
OFN0-OFN5 Input Tool offset number input.
WOQSM Input Work coordinate system shift amount write mode select.
WOSET Input Shift amount write in work coordinate system.
Basic procedure for measuring tool compensation

A touch sensor as shown below should generally be prepared on the machine. It can detect the contact of a
tool when it is moved in the +X, –X, +Z, and –Z directions.
-X feed direction
+X contact face
+Z
+Z feed direcĆ -Z feed direction

tion contact face
contact face
+X feed direction
contact face
– 257 –
Specify the measurement reference point on the machine and set the distance between the reference point
and measuring point (the sensing surface of the touch sensor) in the parameter for each sensing point.
1 Select the manual handle feed or continuous manual feed mode.
2 Turn on the switch on the machine operator’s panel for notifying the control unit that tool compensation is
to be measured. The PMC then turns on signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool compensa-
tion. Next, the control unit automatically switches the screen currently displayed on the CRT to the tool
geometry compensation screen and blinks the OFST status display at the bottom of the screen to notify
that preparation has been completed for measuring tool compensation.
3 Select the tool for which tool compensation is to be measured. This selection should be made prior to step
(1) if there is no other selection method than manual data input and memory program command. After a
tool has been selected, the PMC notifies the control unit of the compensation number of the selected tool
by means of tool compensation number input signals OFN0 to OFN5.
The tool compensation number should generally be the same as the tool number. Instead of using signals
OFN0 to OFN5, a parameter can be set so that the operator can select the tool compensation number on
the tool compensation setting screen.
4 Bring the tool into contact with the touch sensor by manual handle feed or continuous manual feed. The
PMC then turns on the manual feed interlock signal for the axis that corresponds to the sensing point of
the touch sensor that was contacted. When the tool comes into contact with the sensing surface in the
–X direction, the PMC turns on manual feed interlock signal –MIT1 for the negative direction of the first axis
(–X).
5 When the manual feed interlock signal for an axis, for example, manual feed interlock signal –MIT1 for the
negative direction of the first axis (–X), is turned on, the control unit stops manual feed for that direction.
At the same time, the control unit sets, in tool compensation memory, a tool geometry compensation that
is the difference between the machine coordinates and measurement reference distance (parameter set-
ting value) and sets the tool wear compensation value to 0.
Tool geometry compensation = (Machine coordinates obtained when the manual feed interlock signal is
turned on) – (Measurement reference distance corresponding to the manual feed interlock signal)
– 258 –
Example 1 The position of the tip of the reference tool when the tool is at the machine zero point is used
as the measurement reference position. The distance between the position of the tip of the
tool to be measured and the reference position can be set as the tool geometry compensa-
tion.
( 0,0 )
Measuremenr reference
point (the position of
the blade tip of the tool
GOFSx to be measured at the
zero point in machine
coordinate system)
Xm
Xt The position of the blade

Xp -X feed direction contact face GOFSz tip of the tool to be meaĆ
sured at the zero point of
machin coordinate sysĆ
tem
-Z feed direction
contact face
Zt
+X
Zm
Zp
+Z
Xp : Measurement reference distance to the sensing surface in the +X feed direction (parameter
setting)
Xm : Measurement reference distance to the sensing surface in the –X feed direction (parameter
setting)
Zp: Measurement reference distance to the sensing surface in the +Z feed direction (parameter
setting)
Zm : Measurement reference distance to the sensing surface in the –Z feed direction (parameter
setting)
Xt : Machine coordinates along the X–axis when the tool to be measured contacts the sensing
surface in the –X feed direction
Zt: Machine coordinates along the Z–axis when the tool to be measured contacts the sensing
surface in the –Z feed direction
GOFSx : Tool geometry compensation along the X–axis (GOFSx = Xt – Xm)
GOFSz : Tool geometry compensation along the Z–axis (GOFSz = Zt – Zm)
– 259 –
Example 2 An arbitrary point on the machine is used as the measurement reference position.
Set the distance between the reference position and each sensing point of the touch sensor
in a parameter. The distance between the measurement reference position and the tip of the
tool to be measured when the tool is at the machine zero point can be set as the tool geometry
compensation. In this case, the measurement reference position along the X–axis should
generally be the center of the spindle (X = 0 in the workpiece coordinate system). The mea-
surement reference position along the Z–axis can be set as desired. However, the distance
from the reference position to the end of the workpiece should be measured in the following
way and set as the shift distance for the workpiece coordinate system. The distance between
the workpiece reference position and the tip of each tool when the tool is at the machine zero
point can thereby be set as the tool geometry compensation (for the Z–axis, also add the shift
distance for the workpiece coordinate system to obtain the actual distance from the work-
piece reference position).
Zero point in machine

coordinate system
Zt
GOFSz
Xt Position of the blade

tip of the tool to be
+X
measured in machine
coordinate system
+Z
GOFSx
Zm
Zp Xm
Xp
Workpiece
– 260 –
Basic procedure for measuring the shift distance for the workpiece coordinate system along the Z–axis
The workpiece reference position along the Z–axis can be easily set because the shift distance for the work-
piece coordinate system along the Z–axis can be easily measured as follows:
Set the distance between the measurement reference position and the workpiece reference position as the
shift distance as described in the basic procedure for measuring tool compensation. Namely, the distance be-
tween the machine zero point and workpiece reference position in Example 1 or the distance between the spe-
cified reference position and the workpiece reference position in Example 2 is set as the shift distance for the
workpiece coordinate system.
1 Select the manual handle feed or continuous manual feed mode.
2 Turn on the switch on the machine operator’s panel for notifying the control unit that the shift distance for
the workpiece coordinate system along the Z–axis is to be measured. The PMC then turns on signal
WOQSM to select the mode for writing the shift distance for the workpiece coordinate system. Next the
control unit automatically switches the screen currently displayed on the CRT to the screen for the shift
distance for the workpiece coordinate system and blinks the OFST status display in the bottom of the
screen to notify that preparation has been completed for measuring the shift distance for the workpiece
coordinate system.
3 Select the tool for which the shift distance is to be measured. The tool geometry compensation value must
already be set for the selected tool. This selection should be made prior to step 1 if there is no other selec-
tion method than manual data input and memory program command. After a tool has been selected, the
PMC notifies the control unit of the compensation number of the selected tool by means of tool compensa-
tion number input signals OFN0 to OFN5. The tool compensation number should generally be the same
as the tool number. Instead of using signals OFN0 to OFN5, a parameter can be set so that the operator
can select the tool compensation number on the tool compensation setting screen.
4 Bring the tool into contact with the end of the workpiece by manual handle feed or continuous manual feed.
The PMC does not know that the tool has contacted the end of the workpiece because a touch sensor
generally cannot be mounted on the end of a workpiece. There is therefore no way to automatically stop
the tool when the tool contacts the end of the workpiece. Instead the operator should stop manual feed.
If a touch sensor can be mounted on the tool, however, the tool can be automatically stopped when it con-
tacts the end of the workpiece using a manual feed interlock signal.
5 Turn on the switch on the machine operator’s panel for notifying the control unit that the shift distance for
the workpiece coordinate system along the Z–axis has been measured. The PMC then turns on signal
WOQSM to select the mode for writing the shift distance for the workpiece coordinate system. The value
obtained by subtracting the tool geometry compensation from the machine coordinate value is then set
as the shift distance for the workpiece coordinate system.
The shift distance for the workpiece coordinate system along the Z–axis = (Tool geometry compensation along
the Z–axis) – (Machine coordinates along the Z–axis when signal WOSET for writing the shift distance for the
workpiece coordinate system is turned on)
– 261 –
Zero point in machine

coordinate system
Zt
+X GOFSz
+Z Position of the blade

EXOFSz
tip of the tool to be
measured in machine
coordinate system
GOFSx
6 To shift the workpiece reference position from the end of the workpiece toward the spindle by the cutting
allowance for example, input the shift value in incremental input by MDI operation.
(a) Signal for selecting the mode for writing tool compensation (GOQSM (#1, #2))
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects the mode for writing tool compensation.
[Operation] When this signal is turned on in a manual operation mode, the mode for writing tool com-
pensation is selected. The control unit then automatically switches the screen displayed on
the CRT to the tool geometry compensation screen and blinks the OFST status display in the
bottom of the screen to notify that the mode has been changed to the mode for writing tool
compensation.
(b) Manual feed interlock signal for each axis (+MIT1, –MIT1, +MIT2, –MIT2, +MIT3, –MIT3)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Each of these signals inhibits tools from being fed along the corresponding axis during manu-
al operation. When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool compensation is
turned on, the manual feed interlock signal also automatically calculates the tool geometry
compensation along the axis and sets the result in tool compensation memory.
[Operation] When these signals are turned on, the control unit operates as follows:
i. Inhibits tools from being fed along the corresponding axis during manual operation.
+MIT1 : Inhibits tools from being manually fed in the positive direction along the X–axis.
–MIT1 : Inhibits tools from being manually fed in the negative direction along the X–axis.
+MIT2 : Inhibits tools from being manually fed in the positive direction along the Z–axis.
–MIT2 : Inhibits tools from being manually fed in the negative direction along the Z–axis.
+MIT3 : Inhibits tools from being manually fed in the positive direction along the Y–axis.
–MIT3 : Inhibits tools from being manually fed in the negative direction along the Y–axis.
ii. When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool compensation is turned on,
the manual feed interlock signal also automatically calculates the tool geometry com-
pensation for the tool compensation number pointed to by the cursor and sets the result
in tool compensation memory.
– 262 –
(c) Tool compensation number input signals (OFN0, OFN1, OFN2, OFN3, OFN4, OFN5 (#1, #2))
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Selects the tool compensation number.
[Operation] When the mode for writing tool compensation is selected, the cursor is automatically posi-
tioned on the tool geometry compensation number selected by these signals. Instead of us-
ing these signals, a parameter can be set so that the operator can select the tool geometry
compensation number on the CRT.
NOTE When the optional function that provides compensation for 160 groups of tools is provided,
the maximum selectable tool compensation number is between 1 to 63 for the Series 15–T,
and between 1 to 31 for the Series 15–TT.
(d) Signal for selecting the mode for writing the shift distance for the workpiece coordinate system
(WOQSM (#1, #2))
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects the mode for writing the shift distance for the workpiece coordinate system.
[Operation] When this signal is turned on in a manual operation mode, the mode for writing the shift dis-
tance for the workpiece coordinate system is selected. The control unit then automatically
switches the screen displayed on the CRT to the screen for writing the shift distance for the
workpiece coordinate system and blinks the OFST status display in the bottom of the screen
to notify that the mode has been changed to the mode for writing the shift distance for the
workpiece coordinate system. However, this is not performed when the mode for writing tool
compensation values is selected.
(e) Signal for writing the shift distance for the workpiece coordinate system (WOSET (#1, #2))
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Automatically calculates and sets the shift distance for the workpiece coordinate system.
[Operation] When this signal goes high the mode for writing the shift distance for the workpiece coordinate
system, it triggers automatic calculation and setting of the shift distance for the workpiece
coordinate system.
– 263 –
2.3.58 Tool life management

Classify tools into groups in advance. Preset the tool life (time or count) for each group and the tool numbers
which belong to each group in the memory of the control unit as the tool life management table. When selecting
a tool, do not specify the tool number, specify the group number in Txxxx in a program. If the specified life of
a tool in a group is exceeded during machining, the next tool whose life is not exceeded in the same group is
selected when the group is specified again by a subsequent command program. This function automates tool
life management and further promotes advancement toward factory automation (FA).
(a) Tool change signal (TLCHA (#1, #2))
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal notifies that there is a group in which all tools have exceeded their specified life.
Generally, the PMC receives this signal and lights a lamp on the machine operator’s panel
to inform the operator that the tools should be changed. The number of the group whose spe-
cified life is exceeded is displayed only on the CRT of the control unit. However, there is no
output signal to inform the PMC of this fact.
[Output Condition]
The signal is turned on in the following case:
i. When there is at least one group in which all tools have exceeded their specified life
If a parameter is set so that the life is specified in time, this signal is turned on immediately
after the specified life of the last tool in a group is exceeded. If a parameter is set so that the
life is specified in number of times a tool is used, this signal is turned on when the control unit
is reset by a command such as M02 and M30 after the specified life of the last tool in a group
is exceeded.
The signal is turned off in the following case:
i. When there is no group in which all tools have exceeded their specified life
When the control unit is notified that tool change is completed for all groups whose specified
life is exceeded by tool change reset signal TLRST from the PMC or by MDI operation, the
tool change signal is turned off.
(b) New tool selection signal (TLCHB (#1, #2))
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal informs the PMC that a new tool in a group has been selected.
[Output Condition]
The signal is turned on in the following case:
i. When a tool group number is specified by program command Txxxx and the next tool in
the group is selected because the specified life of the current tool is exceeded. After the
code of the new tool is sent, the signal is turned on and, at the same time, tool function
strobe signal TF is sent.
The signal is turned off in the following case:
i. When completion signal FIN of strobe signal TF is turned on
The following time chart shows the above condition:
[Use] This signal is used to automatically measure the compensation value of a newly selected tool.
T command Txxxx
Code signal T0 to T31
Strobe signal TF
New tool selection signal TLCHB
Completion signal FIN
– 264 –
(c) Tool change reset signal (TLRST (#1, #2))

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal informs the control unit that all tools are changed for a group in which all tools have
exceeded their specified life. After inputting tool group signals TL1 to TL256, which inform
the control unit of the group in which tools are changed, input this signal. A parameter is avail-
able that can be set so that the signal informs that tools are changed in all groups without in-
putting tool group signals.
i. If the specified lives of all tools are exceeded in a group specified by tool group signals
TL1 to TL256, the signal clears that information. That is, when the group number is speci-
fied in a subsequent program command, the first tool is selected again.
If there is a tool whose life is not exceeded in the group specified by tool group signals TL1
to TL256, no particular operation is performed.
NOTE Set the tool change reset signal, TLRST, from low to high in the following cases:
i. When TRST of parameter 7401 is 0

When resetting the CNC has been completed (the OP signal and RST signal are low)
ii. When TRST of parameter 7401 is 1
When resetting the CNC has been completed (the OP signal and RST signal are low) or when
automatic operation is halted (the STL signal is low and the SPL signal is high) or stopped
(the STL signal and SPL signal are low and the OP signal is high). (Setting TLRST is not effec-
tive when automatic operation is enabled (the STL signal is high) or automatic operation is
halted or stopped while a data setting command is executed (G10 L3 to G11).)
(d) Tool skip signal (TLSKP (#1, #2))
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal instructs the control unit to skip a tool whose specified life is not exceeded and
forcibly select the next tool. Either of the following two methods can be selected by a parame-
ter:
(i) Method in which no group number is specified by a tool group signal
It is assumed that the group containing the tool which is selected when tool skip signal TLSKP
is turned on is specified.
When the group is specified again in a subsequent Txxxx command, the next tool in the group
is selected.
(ii) Method in which a group number is specified by a tool group signal
After specifying the number of the group containing the tool to be skipped with tool group sig-
nals TL1 to TL256, turn on tool skip signal TLSKP.
When the group is specified again in a subsequent Txxxx command, the next tool in the group
is selected.
i. Puts a # on the smallest tool number in the tool life management table among the tools
whose specified life is not exceeded in the group to be skipped and informs that when
the group is specified again in a subsequent Txxxx command the tool is skipped and the
next tool in the group is selected. If a tool whose life is not exceeded in the group to be
skipped is the last tool in the tool life management table, tool change signal TLCHA is
immediately turned on.
NOTE Turn on tool skip signal TLSKP when the control unit is in the reset state or in the automatic
operation stop state. In other words, turn on the signal when both automatic operation starting
signal STL and automatic operation stopping signal SPL are off.
– 265 –
(e) Tool group signals (TL1 to TL512 (#1, #2))

[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals specify a tool group number. Specify the group for which tool change reset or
tool skip is performed with these signals before inputting tool change reset signal TLRST or
tool skip signal TLSKP. Examples of the correspondence between a tool group number and
tool group signals is shown below. The tool number is obtained by adding 1 to the binary val-
ue indicated by the signals.
Signals TL128, TL256 and T512 are available only in a milling system.
TL512 TL256 TL128 TL64 TL32 TL16 TL8 TL4 TL2 TL1 Tool group no.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 4
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 5
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 10
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 15
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 20
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 30
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 40
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 50
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 100
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 127
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 128
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 250
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 256
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 257
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 512
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1024
( 0 : Signal “LOW”, 1 : Signal “HIGH”)

(f) Tool life count override signals (TLV0 to TLV9 (15–M))
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals apply override to the life count (time).
The signals make a ten–point binary code which corresponds to the override value as follows:
( 2 V
9
i
Override value = i ) times
i0
where
When TLVi is on, Vi = 0.
When TLVi is off, Vi = 1.
That is, each signal corresponds to the following value:
TLV0: x 0.1 TLV5 : x 3.2
TLV1: x 0.2 TLV6 : x 6.4
TLV2: x 0.4 TLV7 : x 12.8
TLV3: x 0.8 TLV8 : x 25.6
TLV4: x 1.6 TLV9 : x 51.2
When all signals are on, the override value becomes 0.
The override value can be set from 0 to 99.9 in steps of 0.1.
The parameter (No. 7401, LFV) determines whether these signals are used.
[Operation] The life count for tool life management is obtained by multiplying the actual cutting time by
the override value selected by the signals.
– 266 –
2.3.59 Tool retraction and recovery (15–M/T)

The tool retraction and recovery function retracts a broken tool from a workpiece so that the tool can be replaced
or the machining checked. The function also returns the replaced tool to the correct location to restart machin-
ing.
If the clearance is specified in the program in advance, a tool is retracted by the specified clearance when a
signal is accepted from the machine. The function can therefore be used for retracting a tool when the tool is
found to be broken.
Basic procedure for tool retraction and recovery
1 When tool retraction signal TRESC input from the PMC goes high while automatic operation is started,
stopped, or held, the tool is retracted by the distance specified in the program. The position to which the
tool retracts is called the retraction position. When TRESC goes high while automatic operation is started,
if a block is being executed, the tool is retracted after the block is suspended. When retraction ends, the
machine enters the automatic operation hold state. The clearance and direction can be specified by the
program. If these values are not specified by the program, the tool is not retracted.
When TRESC goes high, the machine enters the tool retraction mode, and tool retraction mode signal
TRACT goes high to notify the PMC that the machine has entered the tool retraction mode.
2 In the manual mode, when it is necessary to replace the tool or measure workpieces, the tool can be moved
manually, such as by continuous manual feed, incremental feed, or manual handle feed. This operation
is called manual retraction. The path along which the tool retracts is automatically stored in the control unit.
The number of paths which can be stored, however, is limited (refer to the operator’s manual for details).
3 When the control unit has reentered the automatic mode and tool retraction signal TRRTN goes high, the
control unit returns the tool automatically to the retraction position along the same path that the tool was
moved by manual operation. This operation is called recovery. When the tool has been returned to the
retraction position, tool retraction completion signal TRSPS goes high.
4 When the cycle is started at the retraction position, the tool is first returned to the position where TRESC
went high. This operation is called repositioning. When repositioning is complete, TRACT goes low to
notify the PMC of the end of the tool retraction mode. The operations performed differ according to the
status of automatic operation when the machine entered the tool retraction mode.
i) When the machine enters the tool retraction mode while automatic operation is started, the automatic
operation that has been held is resumed after the tool is repositioned.
ii) When the machine enters the tool retraction mode while automatic operation is stopped or held, the
machine returns to the same mode after the tool is repositioned. If the cycle is restarted, automatic
operation is resumed.
:ăPosition in which the tool escape signal goes to HIGH"

:ăProgrammed escape position
:ăTool retract position in manual operation
:ăRetract path
Z
:ăManual operation
ă(retract path)
:ăReturn path
:ăRe-positioning X
– 267 –
(a) Tool retraction signal TRESC

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects the tool retraction mode.
[Operation] When TRESC goes high, the control unit operates as described in the basic procedure for
tool retraction and recovery.
(b) Tool retraction mode signal TRACT
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Notifies that the tool retraction mode is selected. The output conditions and procedures are
described in the basic procedure for tool retraction and recovery. If the control unit is reset
when TRACT is on, TRACT is set low and the tool retraction mode is canceled.
(c) Tool recovery signal TRRTN
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Returns a tool to the retraction position along the same axis that the tool was manually re-
tracted during the tool retraction mode.
[Operation] When TRRTN goes high, the control unit operates as described in the basic procedure for
tool retraction and recovery.
(d) Tool moving signal TRMTN
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Notifies that the tool is moving along an axis in the tool retraction mode.
[Output Condition]
TRMTN goes high when:
i. The tool is moving along any one of the axes in the tool retraction mode
TRMTN goes low when:
i. When the tool is stopped along all axes in the tool retraction mode
(e) Tool recovery completion signal TRSPS
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Notifies that a tool is at the retraction position in the tool retraction mode. When TRSRS is
off, the tool cannot be repositioned even when the cycle is started (except when the block is
restarted).
[Output Condition]
TRSPS goes high when:
i. Retraction is completed
ii. The tool is returned to the retraction position by recovery operation
TRSPS goes low when:
i. The tool is not at the retraction position in the tool retraction mode.
Timing chart for tool retraction and recovery
i) Retraction
Automatic operation mode
(Memory, MDI, TAPE)
Tool retraction signal
(TRESC)
Tool retraction mode signal
(TRACT)
Tool retraction completion signal
(TRSPS)
– 268 –
NOTE Set TRESC high in the automatic operation mode. TRACT then goes high.
When TRACT goes high, the machine enters the tool retraction mode (refer to Item 5.6.3 in part
I, “Operation” in the Series 15/150–B Operator’s Manual (Operation) for details).
When TRACT goes high, set TRESC low.
TRACT goes high immediately after TRESC goes high if retraction does not occur. If retraction
occurs, TRACT goes high after retraction is completed.
ii) Manual retraction

Switch to the manual mode and retract the tool manually to store the path along which the tool retracts as
described in the Series 15–MB Operator’s Manual.
TRACT remains on while the path is stored.
TRSPS goes low when the tool is moved manually from the retraction position.
iii) Recovery
Return the tool, which was moved manually to store the path in ii), to the retraction position.
Automatic operation mode
(Memory, MDI, TAPE)
Tool recovery signal
(TRRTN)
Returning
Tool moving signal

(TRMTN)
NOTE Set the tool recovery signal high, then set it low.
The signal is described in the item on tool recovery in the Series 15/150–B Operator’s Manual
(Operation).
When the tool has been returned to the retraction position, TRSPS goes high.
iv) Repositioning (if applied)

Remains on from
Automatic operation mode the chart in iii).
(Memory, MDI, TAPE)
Tool retraction mode
(TRACT)
Tool return completion signal
(TRSPS)
Start signal
(DT, ST)
Repositioning
(along an axis)
Tool moving signal
(TRMTN)
NOTE Refer to the Series 15/150–B Operator’s Manual (Operation) for detailed operation.
– 269 –
2.3.60 Tool retraction and recovery (for Series 15–TT)

(a) First tool post retraction/recovery mode selection signal (TRHD1)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal determines whether the first tool post is to be set to retraction and recovery mode.
[Operation] When tool retraction signal TRESC goes high while signal TRHD1 is high, the first tool post
is set to retraction mode. Keep signal TRHD1 high while the first tool post is in retraction
mode. If the signal state changes, the tool cannot be repositioned correctly. Enter the same
data as required for the memory command tool post selection signal IHEAD1.
(b) Second tool post retraction/recovery mode selection signal (TRHD2)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal determines whether the second tool post is to be set to retraction and recovery
mode.
[Operation] When tool retraction signal TRESC goes high while signal TRHD2 is high, the second tool
post is set to retraction mode. Keep signal TRHD2 high while the second tool post is in retrac-
tion mode. If the signal state changes, the tool cannot be repositioned correctly. Enter the
same data as required for the memory command tool post selection signal IHEAD1.
(c) Tool retraction signal (TRESC)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal selects the tool retraction mode.
[Operation] When this signal goes high, the operating tool post is set to retraction mode.
(d) Tool retraction mode signal (TRACT)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal indicates that the tool post is in retraction mode.
[Operation] This signal goes high when either the first or second tool post has been set to retraction mode.
(e) Tool recovery signal (TRRTN)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal instructs the control unit to return the tool to its previous position, following the
same axis as when manually retracted in retraction mode.
[Operation] When this signal goes high while the tool post is in retraction and recovery mode, the tool is
returned to its previous position. When both the first and second tool posts are in retraction
and recovery mode, tool recovery for both posts is performed simultaneously.
(f) Tool retraction axis being–moving signal (TRMTN)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal indicates that the axis is moving in retraction mode.
(g) Tool retraction completion signal (TRSPS)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal indicates that the tool is at the retraction position in retraction mode. When both
tool posts enter tool retraction mode, this signal goes high if both tools are at the retraction
positions.
– 270 –
2.3.61 Software operator’s panel

The software operator’s panel function replaces part of the control switches on the machine operator’s panel
with soft switches which can be turned on or off using the CRT/MDI of the control unit.
The control switches for the functions listed in the following table can be replaced with soft switches. Also avail-
able are eight general–purpose soft switches which can be used optionally by the machine tool builder. These
eight general–purpose soft switches can be optionally named by the machine tool builder. For control switches
in groups 1 to 7, parameters can be used to select whether the control switches on the machine operator’s pan-
el or soft switches on the CRT/MDI of the control unit are used for each group.
The states of all soft switches are informed to the PMC by output signals. Based on these output signals, the
PMC should turn on or off input signals related to soft switch functions. In other words, turning on the soft switch
assigned to single block operation, for example, does not cause the control unit to select single block operation
internally. Single block operation is selected when the PMC turns on the input signal for single block operation,
instead.
Group Function Output Signal Related Input Signal

1 Mode selection EDTO , MEMO , TO , EDT , MEM , T , D , J , H ,
MDIO , JO , HO , SO , S , ZRN
ZRNO
2 Manual continuous +J1O , –J1O , +J2O , +J1 , –J1 , +J2 , –J2 ,
feed/manual step –J2O , +J3O , –J3O , +J3 , –J3 , +J4 , –J4 ,
feed selection in +J4O , –J4O , +J5O , +J5 , –J5 , +J6 , –J6
axial direction –J5O , +J6O , –J6O ,
Manual rapid RTO RT
traverse selection
3 Manual handle feed HS1AO , HS1BO , HS1A , HS1B , HS1C ,
axis selection HS1CO , HS1DO HS1D
Manual handle feed MP1O , MP2O , MP4O MP1 , MP2 , MP4
movement amount
selection
4 Rapid traverse ROV1O , ROV2O ROV1 , ROV2
override
Manual feed rate JV0O – JV15O JV0 – JV15
override
Feed rate override FV0O – FV7O FV0 – FV7
5 Optional block BDT1O BDT1
skip
Single block SBKO SBK
Machine lock MLKO MLK
Dry run DRNO DRN
6 Memory protection KEYO KEY1 , KEY2 , KEY3 ,
KEY4
7 Automatic SPO SP
operation stop
8 General–purpose OPU0 , OPU1 , OPU2 ,
OPU3 , OPU4 , OPU5 ,
OPU6 , OPU7
– 271 –
NOTE 1 Only the modes shown below can be selected by soft switches. When the mode for manual
feed in an arbitrary direction is present, for example, all control switches for mode selection
should be on the machine operator’s panel or a general–purpose soft switch should be used
to select the mode for manual feed in an arbitrary direction.
Soft switches available for mode selection
(i) Part program storage/edit
(ii) Memory command
(iii) Tape command
(iv) Manual data input
(v) Continuous manual feed
(vi) Manual reference position return
(vii) Manual handle feed
(viii)Incremental feed
NOTE 2 Use numeric keys 1 to 9 on the CRT/MDI for soft switches in group 2, i.e., soft switches for axis
direction selection for continuous manual feed or incremental feed and manual rapid traverse
selection. These soft switches can be used only for a 9” CRT/MDI.
NOTE 3 Only one soft switch is available for memory protection. However, four input signals are
available for memory protection (KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, and KEY4). Generally, four input signals
are simultaneously turned on or off according to the state of the soft switch for memory
protection.
NOTE 4 When the soft switch for automatic operation stop is on, output signal SPO is turned on. At this
time, the PMC turns off automatic operation stop signal SP.
In contrast to the above, when the soft switch for automatic operation stop is turned off, output
signal SPO is turned off and the PMC turns on automatic operation stop signal SP. For soft
switches other than automatic operation stop and general soft switches, when an output signal
informing the state of a soft switch is turned on, the corresponding input signal is turned on.
– 272 –
NOTE 5 The following table lists the override values which can be selected by soft switches for manual
feedrate override.
JV0O – JV15O (JV0 – JV15)

Override
O id value
l
(%)
15 12 1118 1114 0 bi
bit
0 1111 1111 1111 1111 0
1 1111 1111 1111 0101 0.1
2 1111 1111 1111 0001 0.14
3 1111 1111 1110 1011 0.2
4 1111 1111 1110 0100 0.27
5 1111 1111 1101 1010 0.37
6 1111 1111 1100 1011 0.52
7 1111 1111 1011 0111 0.72
8 1111 1111 1001 1011 1.0
9 1111 1111 0111 0011 1.4
10 1111 1111 0011 0111 2.0
11 1111 1110 1111 0001 2.7
12 1111 1110 1000 1101 3.7
13 1111 1101 1111 0111 5.2
14 1111 1101 0010 1111 7.2
15 1111 1100 0001 0111 10.0
16 1111 1010 1000 0111 14.0
17 1111 1000 0010 1111 20.0
18 1111 0101 0111 0011 27.0
19 1111 0001 1000 1011 37.0
20 1110 1011 1010 1111 52.0
21 1110 0011 1101 1111 72.0
22 1101 1000 1110 1111 100.0
23 1100 1001 0100 1111 140.0
24 1011 0001 1101 1111 200.0
(0 : Signal LOW , 1 : Signal HIGH)
– 273 –
NOTE 6 The following table lists the override values which can be selected by soft switches for feedrate
override.
JF00 – JF70 (JF0 – JF7)

Override
O id value
l
(%)
7114 1110
0 1111 1111 0
1 1111 0101 10
2 1110 1011 20
3 1110 0001 30
4 1101 0111 40
5 1100 1011 50
6 1100 0011 60
7 1011 1001 70
8 1010 1111 80
9 1010 0101 90
10 1001 1011 100
11 1001 0001 110
12 1000 0111 120
13 0111 1101 130
14 0111 0011 140
15 0110 1001 150
16 0101 1111 160
17 0101 0101 170
18 0100 1011 180
19 0100 0001 190
20 0011 0111 200
(0 : Signal LOW , 1 , Signal HIGH)
2.3.62 Run hour display

Besides the integrator for the time during automatic operation start and the integrator for the cutting time, an
integrator which starts with an input signal from the PMC is prepared in the control unit. The integrated value
can be displayed on the CRT and preset by MDI operation.
(a) General–purpose integrator start signal (TMRON)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] This signal starts the general–purpose integrator in the control unit. The integrator can be
optionally used for the machine.
[Operation] While this signal is on, the integrator operates and integrates the time.
[Use] This signal is used for displaying an integrated value, for example, the total time for which
coolant has been used.
– 274 –
2.3.63 Parts count indication

(a) Required parts count arrival signal (PRTSF [#1, #2])
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Reports that the parts count has reached the required number of parts. The control unit con-
tains two counters for counting the number of machined parts. One counter is referred to as
the total cumulative parts counter. The operator cannot change the value of this counter; the
value of this counter can be changed only by parameter alteration. The value of other counter
(referred to as the cumulative parts counter unless otherwise noted) can be preset freely by
the operator with MDI operation. In general, before a new type of workpiece is machined, this
counter is preset to 0 to count the cumulative number of machined parts.
Each time M02, M30, or an M code with a parameter set is executed, the counters of both
counters are incremented by one. This means that the number of machined parts can be au-
tomatically counted using a program that executes M02, M30, or an M code with a set param-
eter each time a part is machined.
The control unit also contains a required parts count setting meter, which allows the operator
to preset the number of required parts for a particular type of workpiece with MDI operation.
The meter notifies the PMC whether the value of the cumulative parts counter has exceeded
a value preset in the meter.
[Output Condition]
i. The value of the cumulative parts counter has reached or exceeded a value preset in the
required parts count setting meter
i. The value of the cumulative parts counter has not reached a value preset in the required
parts count setting meter.
NOTE The PMC can read from or write to the required parts count setting meter and cumulative parts
counter by using the external data input/output function.
ERDRQ EIA/EOA EID/EOD

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 47 – 32 31 16 15 0
0/1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0/1 .......... Number of parts
EIA/EOA bit 0
0 : Required parts count
1 : Value of the cumulative parts counter
– 275 –
2.3.64 Key input

Instead of pressing keys on the MDI/CRT panel to turn on or off input signals from the PMC to the NC keys on
the machine operator’s panel may be used. This is known as key input. For example, the following application
is possible: After the tool is moved to an arbitrary machining position, the position can be stored as a program
command using the playback function (option). Generally in such case, you must enter X, Y, Z, INSERT, etc.
However, pressing only one key on the machine operator’s panel can substitute for entering the keys on the
MDI/CRT panel. That is, when the switch is pressed, the PMC turns on or off key input signals for X, Y, Z, and
INSERT, giving the same result as when the keys are pressed.
The signal address tables for key inputs are shown in subsequent pages. The addresses for signals for key
inputs depend on the type of MDI/CRT panel used. The names of signals are the same as the names of keys.
The keys which are effective when the shift key is pressed are also shown. The signals corresponding to the
soft keys are as follows:
(i) 9” MDI/CRT
CRT
FUNM SK 1 SK 2 SK 3 SK 4 SK 5 OPEN
(ii) 14” MDI/CRT
CRT
FUNM SK 1 SK 2 SK 3 SK 4 SK 5 SK 6 SK 7 SK 8 SK 9 SK 10 OPEN
– 276 –
(1) For a 9” small M system

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G128
G129 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#
G130
G131 0 / = EOB ⋅ – 9 8
A & ) , +
G132
G133 H D F Z Y X G N
@ L E W V U C B
G134
G135 M S T R Q P START RESET

[ ] ( K J I
G136
G137 → ← CAN NC/PC INPUT SHIFT
G138
G139 OPEM SK5 SK4 SK3 SK2 SK1 FUNM
– 277 –
(2) For a 9” small T system

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G128
G129 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#
G130
G131 0 / = EOB ⋅ – 9 8
P & ) , +
G132
G133 H W U F Z X G N
@ B A E D L R Q
G134
G135 I K T S Y C START RESET

[ ] ( J V H
G136
G137 → ← CAN NC/PC INPUT SHIFT
G138
– 278 –
(3) For a 9” standard M system

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G128 CAN ⋅ = – + 9 8 7
G129 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G130 C R K J I B Q Z
SP W
G131 Y X A P G N O
V U
→ ← / # EOB
G132
, )
G133 T S M L H D F
( ] [ & @ ? E
G134 ↓ ↑
G135 SHIFT AUX NC/PC INPUT CALC RESET
G136
G138
G139
– 279 –
(4) For a 9” standard T system

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G128 CAN ⋅ = – + 9 8 7
G129 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G130 R V H W U F Y C
L B @ E A SP
G131 Z X Q P G N O
→ ← / # EOB
G132
, )
G133 T S M J D K I
( ] [ & ?
G134 ↓ ↑
G135 SHIFT HD1/ NC/PC INPUT CALC RESET

HD2
G136
G138
G139
– 280 –
(5) For a 14” M system

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G128 CAN ⋅ = – + 9 8 7
G129 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G130 C R K J I B Q Z
SP W
G131 Y X A P G N O
V U
G132 → ← / # EOB
, )
G133 T S M L H D F
( ] [ & @ ? E
G134 ↓ ↑
G135 SHIFT AUX NC/PC INPUT CALC RESET
G136 OPEM SK10 SK9 SK8 SK7
G137 SK6 SK5 SK4 SK3 SK2 SK1 FUNM
G138
G139
– 281 –
(6) For a 14” T system (excluding 15–TF)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G128 CAN ⋅ = – + 9 8 7
G129 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G130 R V H W U F Y C
L B @ E A SP
G131 Z X Q P G N O
G132 → ← / # EOB
, )
G133 T S M J D K I
( ] [ & ?
G134 ↓ ↑
G135 SHIFT HD1/ NC/PC INPUT CALC RESET

HD2
G138
G139
– 282 –
(7) For 14” system 15–TF

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G128 CAN ⋅ = – + 9 8 7
/
G129 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G130 R ) ( W U F SP C
V L E
G131 Z X @ P G N O
Y A Q H
G132 → ← , # EOB
G133 T S M B D K I
] [ & ? J
G134 ↓ ↑
G135 FAPT SHIFT NC/PC INPUT CALC START RESET
G138
G139
– 283 –
NOTE 1 It is possible to perform soft key operations from the PMC by turning on or off signals for soft
keys; however, pay attention to the following: The function of a soft key depends on its
assignment. There are so many functions assigned to a soft key that the state of the soft key
is not informed to the PMC. Therefore, when the signal for a soft key is turned on or off, it is
possible that an unexpected operation is performed. To avoid this, before the signal for a soft
key is turned on or off, the operator shall select the screen displaying the soft key.
NOTE 2 The rising edge of a signal is regarded as a key input. Turn on only one signal at a time.
NOTE 3 A key input signal must be on or off for 32 seconds or more.
Key input signal
X" ON
Y" ON
More than More than More than

32 ms. 32 ms. 32 ms.
2.3.65 Indexing signals

The index table is indispensable to multi–plane machining. The index table can be indexed by means of a con-
trol unit axis.
Basic procedure for positioning the index table
The axes that can be used for indexing are generally called the A, B, and C axes. In the following part of this
section, axis B is used for indexing. If another axis is used in an actual machine, read the B–axis as the corre-
sponding axis name. In the program command for indexing (indexing command), the angle of positioning is
specified by a numerical value appended to B. The command must be specified in a single block. Either an
absolute or incremental value can be specified in the indexing command. However, the numerical value ap-
pended to B must be a multiple of a numerical value specified in a parameter.
Example G00G90B10000; Absolute command (positioning angle of 10 degrees)
G00G91B20.0; Incremental command
The index table is positioned in procedures A and B described below. Procedures A and B are basically identi-
cal. The only difference between them is the timing of servo on/off for positioning control of the B–axis.
(1) Bbbbb is specified in a command program.
(2) After Bbbbb is specified, the control unit sets the B–axis unclamp signal, BUCLP, high. In procedure B,
the control unit places the B–axis positioning control in the servo–on state when it sets the BUCLP signal
high.
(3) When the BUCLP signal goes high, the B–axis must be unclamped by the PMC. When the B–axis is un-
clamped, the B–axis unclamp completion signal, *BEUCL, is set low.
(4) When the *BEUCL signal is set low, the control unit sets the B–axis unclamp signal, BUCLP, low, and in-
forms that the *BEUCL signal is received.
(5) When the B–axis unclamp signal, BUCLP, is set low, the B–axis unclamp completion signal, *BEUCL, must
be set high by the PMC.
In procedure B, the control unit sets the B–axis unclamp signal, BUCLP, low while placing the B–axis posi-
tioning control in the servo–on state. The control unit then rotates and stops the B–axis at a specified posi-
tion. It always moves the B–xis at a rapid traverse feedrate.
(6) In procedure A, the control unit stops the B–axis at the specified position, then places the B–axis position-
ing control in the servo–off state and sets the B–axis clamp signal, BCLP, high.
– 284 –
(7) When the B–axis clamp signal, BCLP, is set high, the B–axis must be mechanically clamped with a clutch
or shot pin by the PMC. After the B–axis is mechanically clamped, the PMC sets the B–axis clamp comple-
tion signal, *BECLP, low.
(8) When the B–axis clamp completion signal, *BECLP, goes low, the control unit sets the B–axis clamp signal,
BCLP, low to inform that the *BECLP signal is received. In procedure B, the B–axis positioning control is
placed in the servo–off state when the B–axis clamp signal, BCLP, is set low.
(9) When the B–axis clamp signal, BCLP, is set low, the PMC sets the B–axis clamp completion signal,
*BECLP, high.
(10)The entire sequence for positioning the index table terminates.
The following timing charts illustrate the procedures.
Timing chart of procedure A for positioning the index table
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
B command ( independent ) Bbbbb
Servo ON of position control of B axis
Unclamp signal of B axis BUCLP
Unclamp completion signal of B axis *BEUCL
B axis rotation
Clamp signal of B axis BCLP
Clamp complection signal of B axis *BECLP
Timing chart of procedure B for positioning the index table
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
B command ( independent ) Bbbbb
Servo ON of position control of B axis
Unclamp signal of B axis BUCLP
Unclamp completion signal of B axis *BEUCL
B axis rotation
Clamp signal of B axis BCLP
Clamp complection signal of B axis *BECLP
NOTE 1 While an axis is being moved for indexing, input signals that reset the control unit are valid.
For example, the emergency stop signal, *ESP, external reset signal, ERS, and reset and
rewind signal, RRW, are valid. When the control unit is reset, indexing stops. The automatic
operation halt signal, *SP, is also valid. When the *SP signal goes low, the axis movement is
stopped and the system enters the automatic operation halt state.
NOTE 2 When the B–axis is positioned, the dry run signal, DRN, is invalid.
NOTE 3 When the B–axis is positioned, the machine lock signal, MLK, is valid. If the machine lock
signal, MLK, goes high while the B–axis is moving, the signal continues to be invalid until the
axis movement terminates.
NOTE 4 For the B–axis, manual operations such as manual continuous feed, incremental feed, and
manual handle feed are not allowed. Only manual reference position return is allowed. If a
reset occurs while the B–axis is being moved, manual reference position return must be
executed. The following timing chart illustrates manual reference position return of the B–axis
in procedure A.
Timing chart of procedure A for manual reference position return of the B–axis
B axis manual feed selection signal +JB *1
B axis position control servo ON
B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCL
B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCL
B axis rotation
B axis deceleration signal *DECb *1
B axis return completion signal ZPb *1
B axis clamp signal BCLP
B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP
*1: “b” expresses the control axis number of B axis
– 285 –
(a) B–axis clamp signal: BCLP

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Directs the PMC to mechanically clamp the B–axis with a clutch or shot pin. For the output
conditions and procedure, see the basic procedure for positioning the index table described
above.
(b) B–axis clamp completion signal: BECLP
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Tells the control unit that the B–axis is mechanically clamped by a clutch or shot pin. For the
input conditions and procedure, see the basic procedure for positioning the index table de-
scribed above.
(c) B–axis unclamp signal: BUCLP
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Directs the PMC to release the B–axis from the mechanical clamp (clutch or shot pin). For
the output conditions and procedure, see the basic procedure for positioning the index table
described above.
(d) B–axis unclamp completion signal: BEUCL
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Informs the control unit that the B–axis is released from the mechanical clamp (clutch or shot
pin). For the input conditions and procedure, see the basic procedure for positioning the in-
dex table described above.
2.3.66 Turret axis control

Turret indexing is controlled by the servo motor, using an NC controlled axis. An axis used for turret indexing
control is referred to as a turret axis (or T–axis). Which axis to use for a turret axis can be freely determined
by parameter setting.
In machining using tools on a turret, a large load is applied to the turret. Therefore, the turret needs to be me-
chanically clamped by using a shot pin or the like. When the turret is mechanically clamped, excessive current
can flow in the servo motor. To prevent this, the turret axis needs to be placed in the servo–off state. Input/out-
put signals are made available between the machine and control unit so that clamping the turret after turret
indexing and unclamping it before turret indexing can be easily performed by the machine.
Turret indexing can be performed at the same time as movement along another axis. That is, turret indexing
can be performed simultaneously with positioning (G00), linear interpolation (G01), and circular interpolation
(G02/G03) for another axis.
The basic operation of turret indexing is basically common to automatic operation and manual operation; how-
ever, there are some slight differences in the four cases described below.
– 286 –
(1) Procedure for turret axis reference position return

In general, reference position return is performed for the turret axis immediately after the power is turned
on.
The procedure below is for manual reference position return.
1 Select the manual reference position return mode.
2 Drive the turret axis feed axis/direction selection signal (+Jt or –Jt, where t represents a turret axis con-
trolled axis number) high.
3 The control unit drives the turret axis unclamp signal TUCLP signal high, and places the turret axis
in the servo–on state at the same time.
4 When TUCLP goes high, the PMC unclamps the turret axis. When the turret is unclamped, the PMC
drives the turret unclamp completion signal *TEUCL low.
5 When *TEUCL goes low, the control unit drives TUCLP low to report the reception of *TEUCL.
6 When TUCLP goes low, the PMC must drive *TEUCL high. This operation of the PMC allows the con-
trol unit to move the turret by rapid traverse.
7 When the reference position is approached, a limit switch is stepped on, and the deceleration signal
*DECt goes low. The speed of the turret is reduced to zero, then the turret is fed at the reference posi-
tion return FL speed specified by a parameter. When *DECt goes high, the turret is moved until the
first grid point then it is stopped. When the first grid point is in the effective area, the reference position
return completion signal ZPt goes high. This procedure is exactly the same as for other controlled
axes.
8 The control unit drives ZPt and the turret clamp signal TCLP high at the same time.
9 When TCLP goes high, the PMC mechanically clamps the turret with a shot pin or the like. After the
turret is mechanically clamped, the turret clamp completion signal *TECLP goes low.
10 When *TECLP goes low, the control unit drives TCLP low to report the reception of *TECLP. At the
same time, the control unit places the turret axis in the servo–off state.
11 When TCLP goes low, the PMC drives *TECLP high.
12 When *TECLP goes high, the control unit stores tool numbers (specifiable by parameter setting) in its
internal memory to be selected upon completion of reference position return. This completes a se-
quence of manual reference position return for the turret axis.
ZRN
+Jt
Unclamp signal
TUCLP
Unclamp operation
Unclamp completion
signal *TEUCL
Servo-on
Turret axis move
*DECt
Grid point
In-position
Zpt
Clamp signal
TCLP
Clamp operation
Clamp completion
signal *TECLP
– 287 –
(2) Procedure for continuous manual feed of the turret

1 Select the continuous manual feed mode (J).
2 Drive the turret axis feed axis/direction selection signal (+Jt or –Jt, where t represents a turret con-
trolled axis number) high.
3 When +Jt or –Jt goes high, the control unit interacts with the PMC to unclamp the turret. To unclamp
the turret, the PMC handles TUCLP and *TEUCL using the same procedure as for manual reference
position return.
4 After TUCLP and *TEUCL are exchanged to unclamp the turret, the control unit feeds the turret at the
continuous manual feedrate.
5 The turret is moved until +J or –Jt goes low. Note, however, that turret deceleration and stoppage do
not take place immediately when +Jt or –Jt goes low; the control unit controls the movement of the
turret so that the turret is stopped at the nearest possible tool position when +Jt or –Jt goes low. The
position of each tool on the turret is to be specified beforehand by parameter setting.
6 After the turret stops moving, the control unit interacts with the PMC to clamp the turret. To clamp the
turret, the PMC handles TCLP and *TECLP using the same procedure as for manual reference posi-
tion return. See steps 8 through 11 of Item (1) above.
This completes a sequence of continuous manual feed for the turret.
(3) Procedure for incremental feed of the turret
1 Select the incremental feed mode (S).
2 Drive the turret feed axis/direction selection signal (+Jt or –Jt, where t represents a turret controlled
axis number) high.
3 When +Jt or –Jt goes high, the control unit interacts with the PMC to unclamp the turret. After the turret
is unclamped, the control unit moves the turret at the continuous manual feedrate. The distance the
turret is moved is not determined by the manual incremental feed distance selection signals (DIST0
to DIST26) used for other axes; the distance is determined so that the next tool in the direction the turret
is moved is selected. So, each time +Jt or –Jt goes high from low, the next tool in the turret can be
selected.
4 After the selecting the next tool in the turret and stopping the turret, the control unit interacts with the
PMC to clamp the turret.
(4) Procedure for selecting a tool on the turret in automatic operation
The procedure below describes how a desired tool on the turret can be selected by moving the turret in
1 Suppose that a Txxyy command is specified in a program. In automatic operation, a turret moves ac-
cording to the Txxyy command; xx represents a tool number, and yy represents a tool offset number.
2 The control unit drives the turret unclamp signal TUCLP high, and places the turret axis in the servo–on
state at the same time.
3 When TUCLP goes high, the PMC unclamps the turret. When the turret is unclamped, the PMC drives
the turret unclamp completion signal *TEUCL low.
4 When *TEUCL goes low, the control unit drives TUCLP low to report the reception of *TEUCL.
5 When TUCLP goes low, the PMC drives *TEUCL high. Thus, the procedure above (steps 2 through
5 to unclamp the turret is exactly the same as in the case of manual operation.
When *TEUCL goes high, the control unit moves the turret by rapid traverse in order to select the tool
number xx. The direction of rotation of the turret is determined by the turret rotation direction selection
signals TDIR2 and TDIR1.
When both TDIR2 and TDIR1 are low, the turret rotates to the position of a specified tool clockwise
or counterclockwise whichever the angle it rotates through is smaller. When TDIR2 is high and TDIR1
is low, the turret rotates clockwise. When TDIR2 is low and TDIR1 is high, the turret rotates counter-
clockwise. (Note that when the turret moves in the positive direction, the turret itself is assumed to
rotate counterclockwise.)
– 288 –
6 When a specified tool is selected, and turret stops moving, and the control unit drives the turret clamp
signal TCLP high.
7 When TCLP goes high, the PMC mechanically clamps the turret with a shot pin or the like. After me-
chanically clamping the turret, the PMC drives the turret clamp completion signal *TECLP low.
8 When *TECLP goes low, the control unit drives TCLP low to report the reception of *TECLP. At the
same time, the control unit places the turret axis in the servo–off state.
9 When TCLP goes low, the PMC drives *TECLP high.
10 When *TECLP goes high, the control unit completes a series of operations for the Txxyy command.
The procedure above (steps 6 through 10) to clamp the turret is exactly the same as in the case of
manual operation.
NOTE 1 When the auxiliary function lock is on (when the AFL signal is high), turret indexing in automatic
operation is not performed.
NOTE 2 A rapid traverse override is applicable to turret movement at rapid traverse feedrate. For
acceleration/deceleration, linear acceleration/deceleration is used.
NOTE 3 Specify G28T0yy; or G28T99yy; for automatic reference position return of the turret. This
means that when 0 (or 99, depending on the parameter) is specified as the tool number in a
G28 block, automatic reference position return is performed. Note, however, that this operation
is always performed at low–speed reference position return (using a deceleration signal). This
operation can be performed simultaneously with reference position return for other axes. The
intermediate point is always the current turret position.
NOTE 4 Once reference position return is performed, the position of the turret on the machine
corresponds to the position of the turret stored in the control unit on a one–to–one basis. After
that, each time turret indexing is performed, the position stored in the control unit is updated,
so that no reference position return is required when the power is turned on and off. This means
that the position of the turret is stored in nonvolatile memory within the NC system even when
the power is turned off. It is assumed, however, that when the power is turned off, the turret
is mechanically clamped, and turret movement is disabled. If this assumption is not satisfied,
be sure to perform reference position return after the power is turned on. If reference position
return is interrupted by a reset, emergency stop, alarm, mode switching, and so forth, be sure
to perform reference position return again. If turret indexing in automatic operation is
interrupted by a reset and so forth, and the power is turned off again without performing turret
indexing, or if the power is turned off during turret indexing, be sure to perform reference
position return. An alarm is issued when an attempt to move the turret is made in a situation
where reference position return is required.
NOTE 5 The turret cannot be moved by manual handle feed.
NOTE 6 The all–axis machine lock capability cannot be applied to the turret axis. Disable the
axis–by–axis machine lock capability for the turret axis by parameter setting.
NOTE 7 Executing reset or mode switch during turret indexing stops turret indexing; turret movement
is immediately stopped, and the clamp signal is not output. The servo–on state continues.
NOTE 8 Feed hold is not applicable to the turret axis. However, feed hold is applicable to other axes
specified in the same block.
NOTE 9 The tool number currently selected is displayed at the T–axis position (turret axis) in the
absolute coordinate (ABSOLUTE) data and relative coordinate (RELATIVE) data on the
position display screen. However, no data is displayed until the first reference position return
is performed.
NOTE 10 If a tool number specified is already indexed in automatic operation, the clamp signal and
unclamp signal are not output. However, the unclamp signal is output when the turret moves
out of the unclamped state.
NOTE 11 On the turret axis, up to 16 tool positions and the corresponding tool numbers can be specified
by parameter setting. A different value can be used for the distance between adjacent tools.
A tool number to be selected upon completion of reference position return can be specified by
parameter setting. In this case, all other tool numbers are incremented by one.
NOTE 12 Handle interrupt cannot be performed during turret indexing.
– 289 –
(a) Turret clamp signal (TCLP)

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Directs the PMC to mechanically clamp the turret with a shot pin or the like. For the output
conditions and procedure, see the descriptions of the four procedures above.
(b) Turret clamp completion signal (TECLP)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Notifies the control unit that the turret has been mechanically clamped with a shot pin or the
like. For the output conditions and procedure, see the descriptions of the four procedures
above.
(c) Turret unclamp signal (TUCLP)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Directs the PMC to mechanically unclamp the turret with a shot pin or the like. For the output
(d) Turret unclamp completion signal (TEUCL)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Notifies the control unit that the turret has been mechanically unclamped. For the output
(e) Turret rotation direction selection signals (TDIR1, TDIR2)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Notify the control unit which direction to turn the turret when the turret is to be rotated in auto-
matic operation to select a specified tool number.
TDIR2 TDIR1 Turret axis moving direction.

LOW LOW Short cut
LOW HIGH Forward direction (Turret turns counterclockwise)
HIGH LOW Reverse direction (Turret turns clockwise)
HIGH HIGH Short cut
– 290 –
2.3.67 Switching between synchronous and independent control

A tool can be moved along an axis according to a normal movement command for the axis or moved in synchro-
nization with tool movement along another axis. The type of movement can be selected with an input signal
from the machine. A machine which requires synchronous movement along the Y–axis and X–axis is de-
scribed below as an example. The description, however, applies also to arbitrary axes that are actually used.
The tool movement along the Y–axis can be selected from the following two methods using an input signal from
the machine:
(i) As usual, a tool is moved along the Y–axis according to program command Yyyyy. (Hereafter called inde-
pendent control)
(ii) When a tool is moved along the X–axis with program command Xxxxx, the tool is also moved along the
Y–axis in synchronization with the tool movement along the X–axis. (Hereinafter called synchronous con-
trol)
In the synchronous control, an X–axis movement command is simultaneously given to the servo motor for the
X–axis and the servo motor for the Y–axis. No correction is made, however, for synchronization errors, such
as detecting the deviation between two servo motors and correcting one servo motor to reduce the deviation.
The following is the block diagram of synchronous control for the Y–axis and X–axis.
Calculation of
movement command X-axis
movement
command
X-axis related Position
Positioning I/O signal CMR
deviation X-axis
processing motor
Linear
interpolation
Position
detector
Circular DMR
interpolation
Y-axis related
Position
Thread I/O signal CMR
deviation Y-axis
cutting processing motor
Position
detector
DMR
Synchronous control for the Y–axis and X–axis is possible only during automatic operation by tape command,
manual data input, and memory command. Synchronous control for the X–axis and Y–axis is not performed
during manual operation by continuous manual feed, manual handle feed, or incremental feed.
– 291 –
Procedure for switching between synchronous and independent control

The procedures for switching from independent control for the Y–axis to synchronous control for Y–axis and
X–axis, and from synchronous control for the Y–axis and X–axis to independent control for the Y–axis are de-
scribed below.
(i) Procedure for switching from independent control for the Y–axis to synchronous control for Y–axis and
X–axis
1 Specify the switching with program command Mmm in a single block. Set a parameter so that Mmm
is an M code which is not buffered to prevent the next block from being read in advance during the
execution of the M function.
2 M function strobe signal MF is sent from the control unit. When the PMC reads the M code signal and
checks that it is Mmm, the PMC turns on Y–axis synchronous control selection signal SYNCj (j is the
control axis number for the Y–axis).
3 When M function completion signal FIN is turned on, strobe signal MF is turned off. Then signal FIN
is turned off. This procedure is the same as that for an ordinary M function.
This completes switching from independent control for the Y–axis to synchronous control for the Y–
axis and X–axis. In subsequent blocks, when a tool moves along the X–axis, the tool also moves
along with the Y–axis in synchronization with the tool movement along the X–axis.
(ii) Procedure for switching from synchronous control for Y–axis and X–axis to independent control for the
Y–axis
1 Specify the switching with program command Mnn in a single block. Set a parameter so that Mnn is
an M code which is not buffered to prevent the next block from being read in advance during the execu-
tion of the M function.
2 M function strobe signal MF is sent from the control unit. When the PMC reads the M code signal and
checks that it is Mnn, the PMC turns off Y–axis synchronous control selection signal SYNCj (j is the
control–axis number for the Y–axis).
3 When M function completion signal FIN is turned on, strobe signal MF is turned off. Then signal FIN
is turned off. This procedure is the same as that for an ordinary M function.
This completes switching from synchronous control for the Y–axis and X–axis to independent control
for the Y–axis. In subsequent blocks, a tool is moved along the Y–axis only according to program com-
mand Yyy.
(Program example)
⋅
⋅ Y-axis independent
⋅ control
⋅
M mm ;
⋅
⋅
⋅ Y-axis/X-axis
⋅ synchronous control
M nn ;
⋅
⋅
⋅ Y-axis independent
⋅ control
NOTE 1 During synchronous control for the Y–axis and X–axis (in a block between Mmm; and Mnn;),
do not specify commands which affect the position in the machine coordinate system, such as
automatic reference position return (G28), second reference position return (G30), and
machine coordinate system selection (G53). Also, do not specify commands which do not
move the tool along the X–axis, such as workpiece coordinate system setting (G50).
NOTE 2 When tool offset is applied with a Ttttt command during synchronous control for the Y–axis and
X–axis, specify the same tool offset as that specified by the tool offset number for the X–axis
and Y–axis.
In the above explanation, a machine which synchronizes tool movement along the Y–axis and X–axis is de-
scribed. However, any axis can be selected for synchronous control using a parameter.
– 292 –
(a) Synchronous control selection signals (SYNC1, SYNC2, SYNC3, SYNC4, ...)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals enable synchronous control of axes.
[Operation] When these signals are turned on, the control unit operates as follows:
i. Performs synchronous control for the axis specified by a signal which is turned on during
automatic operation. The axis with which tool movement is synchronized is specified by
a parameter. In other words, when there is a movement command for the axis specified
by a parameter, the control unit performs synchronous control for the movement com-
mand.
When these signals are turned off, the control unit operates as follows:
i. Moves a tool along an axis only in accordance with a movement command for the axis
during automatic operation.
NOTE Be sure to turn on or off these signals with an independent M code as mentioned above. Do
not change the signals while a tool is moving.
2.3.68 Parallel axis control signals

Parallel axes are two or more axes having an identical word address with which a program command for the
axes can be specified. The parallel axes operate in the same manner under an identical program command.
The control axes to be handled as parallel axes and the word address of them can be specified by parameters.
The parallel axes usually move as specified by the program command (normal). A specific input signal sent
from the PMC directs movement along an axis in the direction opposite to that specified by the program com-
mand (mirror) or suppresses the movement along an axis by ignoring program commands concerning it (park-
ing).
The table below shows how the three operation modes can be selected by the input signals.
Mirror image signal Parking signal

Actions
MI1, MI2, MI3, ... PK1, RK2, PK3, ...
Normal 0 0
Mirror 1 0
Parking 0/1 1
( 0: Signal LOW; 1: Signal HIGH; 0/1: Signal LOW or HIGH )

(a) Parking signals: PK1, PK2, PK3, ...
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Suppress the movement along a parallel axis by ignoring the program commands concerning
the axis.
[Operation] When the parking signal is high in automatic operation, program commands specified for the
corresponding parallel axis are ignored and the movement along the axis is suppressed. In
manual operation, this signal is invalid. It is valid only for the manual numeric command. The
parking signals of all parallel axes cannot be set high. At least one of them must be low. The
signal must be switched from low to high or high to low only when the control unit is in the reset
state. If it needs to be switched from low to high or high to low by the M command, for example
in automatic operation, the commands of cutter compensation, tool length compensation,
and coordinates system rotation must be canceled beforehand. The M command which is
not buffered must be used and the next block must not be buffered in advance.
– 293 –
2.3.69 Twin table control/simplified synchronous control

The twin table control function can switch the mode of operation specified for two or more axes between syn-
chronous operation, independent operation, and normal operation by using input signals from the machine.
These three modes of operation can be performed using a machine with two tables, each of which can be inde-
pendently driven on a separate controlled axis. The description below uses an example of a machine where
one table can be independently driven on the Y–axis and the other table can be independently driven on the
V–axis. When an actual machine uses different axis names, replace the words Y–axis and V–axis used below
with the actual axis names when reading the description below.
(1) Synchronous operation
This mode of operation is used when a large workpiece extending over the two tables is to be machined.
Move commands specified for the axis of one table can also be applied to the axis of the other table for
synchronous operation.
An axis for which move commands can be specified in synchronous operation is referred to as a master
axis. When one axis is a master axis, the other axis operating in phase (synchronization) with the master
axis is referred to as a slave axis. Suppose that the Y–axis is a master axis, and the V–axis is a slave axis.
In this case, the program command Yyyyy specified for the master axis places table movement along the
Y–axis (master axis) in phase with that along the V–axis (slave axis). Note, however, that in this synchro-
nous operation, a move command for the master axis is directed to the two servo motors for the master
axis and slave axis at the same time. No step–out correction is made for the servo motor of the slave axis
to minimize any deviation detected between the two servo motors. No step–out alarm is detected either.
Synchronous control can be exercised over automatic operation, continuous manual feed, manual handle
feed, and incremental feed. However, it cannot be applied to manual reference position return.
(2) Independent operation
This mode of operation is used when a small workpiece is to be machined on one table. A move command
specified for the master axis can be used to move the table only along the master axis or the slave axis.
(i) The program command Yyyyy specified for the master axis is used to move the table along the Y–axis
only.
(ii) The program command Vvvvv specified for the master axis is used to move the table along the V–axis
only.
In independent operation where the table is moved along only the slave axis, a program command for the
master axis can be used. This means that the same command programs can be used for a workpiece
regardless of which table the workpiece is placed on.
Independent operation can be applied to automatic operation. Independent operation applied to manual
operation is the same as that of the normal operation mode described below.
(3) Normal operation
This mode of operation is used when one workpiece is machined on one table, and another workpiece is
machined on the other table. This mode of operation is the same as normal CNC–controlled operation;
table movement along the master axis and table movement along the slave axis are specified using sepa-
rate axis addresses (Y and V). Commands for table movement along the master axis and table movement
along the slave axis can be specified in the same block.
(i) The program command Yyyyy for the master axis moves the table along the Y–axis in the ordinary
manner.
(ii) The program command Vvvvv for the slave axis moves the table along the V–axis.
(iii) The program command YyyyyVvvvv simultaneously moves the table along the Y–axis and V–axis.
Normal CNC control is exercised in both automatic operation and manual operation.
– 294 –
Y V
The simplified synchronous control function is very similar to the twin table control function, but differs from
the twin table control function as described below.
(1) The simplified synchronous control function does not have the independent operation mode; it only has
the synchronous operation and normal operation modes. This means that no move commands for the
master axis can move the table along the slave axis.
(2) The simplified synchronous control function allows synchronous operation in manual reference position
return. Note, however, that table movement along the master axis and table movement along the slave
axis are in phase with each other only until the table is decelerated; the two movements are independent
of each other in the grid detection that follows.
The synchronous control selection signals sent from the PMC to the control unit choose from synchronous
operation, independent operation, and normal operation under twin table control, and also choose from
synchronous operation and normal operation under simplified synchronous control.
(a) Synchronous control selection signals (SYNC1, SYNC2, SYNC3, ...)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Notify the control unit of which mode is to be chosen from synchronous operation, indepen-
dent operation, and normal operation.
[Operation] The functions of these signals differ between automatic operation and manual operation as
described below.
i. Automatic operation
A combination of SYNCm and SYNCs determines how control is exercised, where m rep-
resents the axis number of the master axis, and s represents the axis number of the slave
axis.
SYNCm SYNCs Remarks

Synchronous operation HIGH HIGH Refer to *1
independent Slave axis LOW HIGH Refer to
operation independent ope. *3
Master axis LOW LOW Refer to
independent ope. *2
Normal operation LOW LOW
* 1 SYNCm may be either high or low when simplified synchronous control is used, or when
manual operation is performed under twin table control.
* 2 Master axis independent operation is performed in the same way as it is in normal operation.
* 3 Independent operation is not applicable to simplified synchronous control and manual opera-
tion under twin table control.
– 295 –
NOTE 1 During synchronous operation, the reference position return command (G28), or the 2nd, 3rd,
or 4th reference position return command (G30) moves the table along the V–axis in the same
way as Y–axis reference position return. After the table is moved, if it is at the V–axis reference
position, the V–axis reference position return completion signal is turned on, just as it is turned
on for the Y–axis. In general, the G28 and G30 commands should be used in normal operation.
NOTE 2 During synchronous operation, the automatic reference position return check command (G27)
synchronously moves the table along the V–axis and Y–axis. When reference position return
is completed for the V–axis and Y–axis after the table has been moved synchronously along
the axes, the respective reference position return completion signals are turned on. If the
reference position is not reached, an alarm is issued. In general, the G27 command is to be
used in normal operation.
NOTE 3 Before G28, G30, and G27 can be used, manual reference position return must be completed
after the power is turned on.
NOTE 4 When a command involving no table movement, such as the workpiece coordinate system
setting command (G92) and local coordinate system setting command (G52) is specified, the
Y–axis is used for setting in synchronous operation, and the V–axis is used for setting in slave
independent operation according to the program command Yyyyy for the master axis.
NOTE 5 Manual reference position return under twin table control is to be performed in normal
operation.
NOTE 6 Signals such as the external deceleration signal, interlock signal, and machine lock signal are
valid only for the slave axis in slave axis independent operation, and are valid only for the
master axis in synchronous operation; the signals for the other axis are ignored.
NOTE 7 Which axis to choose as the master axis or slave axis is determined by parameter setting
(Parameter 7702).
NOTE 8 The pitch error and backlash error for the master axis and slave axis are corrected separately.
NOTE 9 By using M functions in a program, the PMC can turn on and off the synchronous control
selection signals SYNC1, SYNC2, SYNC3, and so forth. Note, however, that all M codes used
must be specified as non–buffering M codes beforehand by parameter setting.
( Sample Program )
Mmm
⋅
⋅
Normal
operation
⋅
⋅
Mss
⋅
⋅
Slave axis
independent operation
⋅
⋅
Mpp
⋅
⋅
Synchronous
operation
⋅
⋅
Mmm
⋅
⋅
Normal
operation
– 296 –
2.3.70 Simple synchronization control

Positional deviation check function
During simple synchronization, an OT alarm is issued when the difference between the positional deviations
for the synchronized axes (error counter value) is greater than the value set in a parameter. If this occurs in auto
matic operation, the movement is decelerated and stopped along all the axes. If this occurs in manual opera-
tion, the movement is decelerated and stopped only along the axes subject to simple synchronization. A signal
is al so issued in this case.
(1) During simple synchronization, alarm OT 513 is issued and output signal SYNER goes high when the dif-
ference between the positional deviations for synchronized axes (error counter value) is greater than the
value set in parameter No. 7799. If this occurs in automatic operation, the movement is decelerated and
stopped along all the axes. If this occurs in manual operation, the movement is decelerated and stopped
only along the axes subject to simple synchronization.
(2) Resetting the system under either of the following conditions cancels the alarm and sets output signal
SYNER to low:
1 When the axes are not synchronized
2 When the axes are synchronized and the difference between the positional deviations for synchro-
nized axes (error counter value) is less than the value set in parameter No. 7799.
– Excessive error alarm signal for simple synchronization: SYNER
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal goes high when the difference between the positional deviations for synchronized
axes (error counter value) is greater than the limit set in parameter No. 7799.
Resetting the system under either of the following conditions sets this signal to low:
1 When the axes are not synchronized
2 When the axes are synchronized and the difference between the positional deviations
for synchronized axes (error counter value) is less than the value set in parameter No.
7799
– 297 –
2.3.71 Tool post selection and signals

The method of selecting a tool post depends on the operation mode. The table below lists the methods of se-
lecting a tool post in different operation modes.
Operation mode Selective means of tool post to be operated

Manual data input No particular signal is provided for selecting the
tool posts. Select a tool post to be operand by ten
keys on MDI panel, and input a command program.
Memory command A tool post is selected by memory comand tool post
select signals IHEAD1, IHEAD2.
Part program
( No tool post is operatable. )
storage & edit
Manual handle feed No particular signal is provided for selecting tool
posts. The control axis of the tool post to be
operated is selected by manual handle feed select
signal.
Manual step feed
Manual continuous No particular
N i l signal
i l iis provided
id d ffor selecting
l i thetool
h l
feed posts. The control axis of the tool post to be operated
signal
is selected by the feed axis directionselect signal.
Manual reference
point return
Manual numeric No particular signal is provided for selecting the
command tool posts. The tool post to be operated is selected
by the ten keys of MDI panel, and the manual numeric
command is entered.
NOTE 1 Strictly speaking, the manual reference position return and manual numeric command are not
operation modes. In the table above, they are handled as operation modes for the sake of
convenience.
NOTE 2 A parameter is provided so that the tool post to be operated in the manual data input mode or
by a manual numeric command can be selected by the IHEAD1 and IHEAD2 signals.
When the operation of each tool post is specified on the MDI panel, the corresponding tool post is selected by
pressing numeric keys on the MDI panel. A command program of manual data input mode and a manual nu-
meric command can be entered for each tool post. A command program in memory can also be edited for each
tool post. The target tool post of the operation is specified by pressing numeric keys on the MDI panel.
(a) Signals for selecting a tool post in the memory mode: IHEAD1, IHEAD2
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Select the tool post to be subjected to automatic operation in the memory mode.
[Operation] When it is in the reset or automatic operation halt state in the memory mode, the control unit
reads this signal and selects the tool post to be subjected to automatic operation in the
memory mode.
IHEAD 1 IHEAD 2 Tool post to be automaticaly operated

LOW LOW None
LOW HIGH 1st tool post
HIGH LOW 2nd tool post
HIGH HIGH 1st tool post and 2nd tool post
NOTE 1 For the reset and automatic operation halt states, see Item (e) in subsec. 2.3.17, “Automatic
Operation State Output Signals OP, STL, SPL.”
NOTE 2 A parameter is provided so that this signal can select the tool post to be operated in the mode
of manual data input or manual numeric command.
– 298 –
2.3.72 Signal for checking tool post interference

When two tool posts are used to machine a single workpiece, the tools mounted on the tool posts or the tool
posts themselves often come very close to each other. If an error in program or setting causes them to be in
contact with each other, the tool or machine may break. The function of check for tool post interference checks
whether the tool posts interfere with each other. When commands causing interference are found, the function
decelerates and finally stops both tool posts before they come into contact. The function prevents dangerous
interference.
(a) Signal for checking tool post interference: TICHK
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs whether the tool post interference is being checked.
[Output Condition]
(i) All requirements for the tool post interference check are satisfied.
(i) One or more of the requirements for the tool post interference check is not satisfied.
NOTE 1 For the requirements for the tool post interference check, refer to the operator’s manual.
NOTE 2 If a command causing interference is specified while the tool post interference check is in
progress, the two tool posts are decelerated and finally stopped. The control unit then enters
the alarm state. The tool post interference alarm signal, TIALM, goes high, informing that the
tool post interference alarm has been issued.
2.3.73 Override playback signals (Series 15–MFB)

(1) Outline
A feedrate override and spindle speed override during program execution can be stored and reproduced
according to the D or H code of a program command. As the D or H code is used to determine the specific
use of a tool in a program, the override stored and reproduced according to the D or H code indicates the
override of the tool for the specific application.
When this function is used, the actual cutting feedrate (F) and spindle speed (S) in the program can be
changed without changing the corresponding command. The program operation can be adjusted to ma-
chining conditions.
(2) Specifications
(a) Requirements
Signals input from the machine to the NC unit determine whether the override playback function is
used and whether the override is stored or reproduced. The function is validated only in the memory
mode. If it is selected in another operation mode, the previous status is maintained.
(i) Memory mode operation
Override Override
Feedrate Spindle speed
playback memory
override override
signal (OMEP) signal (OME)
Functions according Functions according
OFF –
to override signals. to override signals.
to override signals to override signals
and repeated values. and repeated values.
ON Note 1) Note 1)
ON Override signals are Override signals are

stored. Note 2) stored. Note 2)
OFF
Note 1) Note 1)
– 299 –
(ii) Operation in other modes (tape, MDI, jog, etc.)
Override Override
Feedrate Spindle speed
playback memory
override override
signal (OMEP) signal (OME)
OFF –
to override signals. to override signals.
ON Note 1) Note 1)
Override signals are not Override signals are

ON stored. Note 2) not stored Note 2)
OFF
Note 1) Note 1)
Past repeated values Past repeated values
are held. are held.
1 The value specified by the override signal (reproduced value) is used as the override.
2 The override signal (reproduced value) is stored.
3 The reproduced value is assumed as 100% if it is not stored.
(iii) Second feedrate override
The second feedrate override is neither stored nor reproduced. Only the input signal is validated.
(iv) Spindle speed override

The PMC must inform the NC unit of the spindle speed override signal. It also has to control the
spindle as specified by the spindle speed override signal sent from the NC unit.
(v) Interface converter
This function cannot be added to a system using the interface converter. The PMC–N must be
used.
(vi) Override playback signal (OMEP)
The override playback signal cannot be switched during operation. It must be set on or off before
the operation is started.
(vii) Override storage signal (OME)
The override storage signal can be switched during operation. Set it on or off as required.
When the signal is on, the statuses of the override switch are stored from moment to moment.
When the memory protect signal is set off, the data is not stored even if the override storage signal
is set on.
(viii)Override cancel signal
When the override cancel signal is set on during storage, the feedrate override is stored as 100%.
When the override cancel signal is set on during reproduction, only the stored override becomes
valid. The feedrate override signal is invalid.
(b) Override playback function
The override playback function stores and reproduces the override according to the main program.
If the main programs are different, overrides corresponding to an identical D or H code are stored and
reproduced as different data. The data of an identical subprogram is stored and reproduced as differ-
ent data if the main programs are different.
– 300 –
[Operation methed]
1 Select the memory mode and the program to be executed.
2 Set on the override playback signal (switch).
3 To reproduce a stored override, set off the override storage signal (switch). (Reproduction mode)
To reproduce a stored override and store it again at the same time, set on the override storage
signal (switch) and turn on the memory protect switch. (Store mode)
4 Press the cycle start switch on the operator’s panel and start the automatic operation.
5 Checking the cutting status, adjust the override switch.
To store the cutting status in the reproduction mode, turn on the override storage switch. (The
memory protect switch must be turned on beforehand.)
(c) Storing data in holding memory
The override data is stored in holding memory according to the main program.
The data is written into holding memory only when the memory operation is terminated (reset state).
The data is not stored at the time of single–block stop, feed hold, or mode change.
In holding memory, only the override data corresponding to the D and H codes used in the main pro-
gram is written after the program.
In the reproduction mode, the data is read and used.
O1234 ;
N001 G92 X100. Y200. ;
N002 G00 M03 S250 ;
⋅
⋅
Machining program
⋅
⋅
⋅
N309 G28 G91 X0 Y0 ;
N310 M30 ;
G10.5 ;
D001 F080 S100 ;
H016 F130 S110 ;
⋅
⋅ Override memory data
⋅
D035 F100 S080 ;
G11.5 ;
After the override data is stored, the storage area of the program on the tape is slightly lengthened.
(0.7 m of tape is required for 20 offsets.)
When the program is punched, the override data is also output. When the punched program is read,
the override data is also read.
When the stored override data is not required, the unnecessary part of the data can be deleted in edit-
ing.
(d) D and H codes
The override playback function is valid for D00 to D200 and H00 to H200. The function is invalid for
D codes D201 and above H codes H201 and above.
When an identical D or H code is specified twice or more, the corresponding data is stored and repro-
duced as the same override data.
If the override data corresponding to a specified D or H code is not found during reproduction, 100%
is assumed.
If identical values are specified for the D and H codes, the values are stored and reproduced as differ-
ent data.
– 301 –
(e) Signals
1 Override playback signal (input): OMEP
This signal selects whether the override playback function is used. When this signal is high (on),
the OME signal following it one selects whether the data is stored or reproduced. When this signal
is low (off), the override playback function is not executed. This signal is invalid if it is switched
during automatic operation.
2 Override storage signal (output): OME
This signal is valid only when the OMEP signal is high. It selects whether the data is stored or
reproduced. When this signal is high (on), the data is stored and reproduced. When this signal
is low (off), the data is reproduced only. This signal can be switched during automatic operation.
3 Spindle override signals (input): SPA, SPB, SPC
These signals inform the NC unit of the state of the spindle override switch. Enter the signals as
shown below.
Spindle Override
SPC SPB SPA
50% 1 1 1
60% 1 1 0
70% 0 1 0
80% 0 1 1
90% 0 0 1
100% 0 0 0
110% 1 0 0
120% 1 0 1
4 Spindle override reproduction signals (output): SPAO, SPBO, SPCO
These signals inform the PMC of the spindle override signal (SPA, SPB, SPC) or the stored or
reproduced signal.
These signals do not keep the override at 100% in threading. This must be arranged by the PMC.
Spindle Override
SPCO SPBO SPAO
50% 1 1 1
60% 1 1 0
70% 0 1 0
80% 0 1 1
90% 0 0 1
100% 0 0 0
110% 1 0 0
120% 1 0 1
– 302 –
2.3.74 Cutting depth override for the canned turning cycle

(a) Cutting depth override signals (CDV0 to CDV7)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals apply override to the cutting depth specified by a program in the outer/inner
surface roughing cycle (G71) and end face roughing cycle (G72) among the canned turning
cycle. A parameter determines whether these signals are used.
The signals make a eight–point binary code which corresponds to the override value as fol-
lows :
(2
7
Override value = i
Vi ) %
i0
where
When CDVi is off, Vi = 0.
When CDVi is on, Vi = 1.
That is, each signal corresponds to the following value:
CDV0: 1% CDV4: 16%
CDV1: 2% CDV5: 32%
CDV2: 4% CDV6: 64%
CDV3: 8% CDV7: 128%
When all signals are off, the override value becomes 100%.
The override value can be set from 1% to 255% in steps of 1%.
[Operation] In the outer/inner surface roughing cycle (G71) and end face roughing cycle (G72), the cutting
depth is obtained by multiplying the cutting depth specified by a program by the override value
selected by the signals.
2.3.75 Rigid tapping signals
In tapping, the distance which the tool moves along the Z–axis per spindle rotation must equal the pitch of the
tap. Ideal tapping always satisfies the following equation:
F = F/S where P:Pitch of the tap (mm)
F:Z–axis feedrate (mm/min.)
S:Spindle speed (rpm)
In tapping (G84) and reverse tapping (G74), the rotation of the spindle and the movement along the Z–axis are
controlled independently of each other. Consequently, the equation described above is not always satisfied
in tapping and reverse tapping. Namely, at the bottom of a hole, in particular, the rotation of the spindle and
the movement along the Z–axis are decelerated and finally stopped, then resumed and accelerated in the op-
posite direction. As the rotation of the spindle and the movement along the Z–axis are accelerated and deceler-
ated independently of each other, the equation described above cannot be satisfied.
Normally, a spring is mounted in the holder of the tap so tapping precision can be improved by adjusting the
distance the tap is moved.
In rigid tapping, the rotation of the spindle and the movement along the Z–axis are synchronously controlled.
In normal operation, only the speed at which the spindle rotates is controlled. In rigid tapping, however, the
speed at which the spindle rotates and the position of the spindle are controlled. Linear interpolation is applied
to the spindle and the Z–axis in order to control the spindle rotation and the movement along the Z–axis. This
enables P = F/S to be satisfied even during acceleration and deceleration at the bottom of a hole, enabling
high–precision tapping.
G84.2 specifies rigid tapping. G84.3 specifies rigid reverse tapping.
G84.2
X–– Y–– Z–– R–– P–– F–– S–– L–– ;
G84.3 Repetition number
Spindle speed rpm
Cutting feedrate
Dwell time at Z–points and R–point return
(when P is made valid in parameter selection)
R–point coordinate value
Z–point coodinate value
Hole drilling position
When G84.2 or G84.3 is specified in the feed per rotation (G95) mode, the cutting feedrate following F can be
specified in units of mm/rev or inch/rev. The pitch of the tap can be directly specified.
– 303 –
Procedure for rigid tapping

1 The operation when G84.2 is specified is described below. The spindle speed must be specified by the
S command in the block G84.2 or a previous block.
2 The control unit moves the X– and Y–axes to the hole to be tapped. While it is moving the X– and Y–axes
it sets the rigid tapping signal, RTAP, high.
3 When G84.2 is specified, the spindle may be stopped by the M05 command specified before G84.2 or ro-
tated by the M03 or M04 command at a speed specified by the S command. Irrespective of the spindle
state, the following must be executed in the machine (PMC) when the RTAP signal goes high.
(i) The PMC must set all signals specifying the voltage of the spindle motor, RI0 to RI12, low so the control
unit specifies 0 V as the voltage corresponding to the spindle speed for the spindle amplifier. It is rec-
ommended that the following output signals to the spindle amplifier be set low at the same time: clock-
wise spindle rotation signal, SFR, and reverse spindle rotation signal, SRV. When RI0 to RI12 are set
low, the control unit specifies 0 V as the voltage corresponding to the spindle speed for the spindle
amplifier. The voltage of the spindle motor becomes 0 V, and the spindle motor stops. If SFR and SRV
are also set low, the spindle motor normally stops sooner.
(ii) The PMC must check that the spindle stops when the zero speed signal, SST, of the spindle amplifier
goes high, and set the torque limit signal, TLML, high. (TLML is an output signal to the spindle amplifi-
er.) The PMC must also set SFR, high, and SRV, low. This causes the spindle to rotate forward when
the voltage corresponding to the spindle speed is positive and reverse direction when the voltage is
negative. After 400 milliseconds or more have passed, the PMC must set the spindle stop check sig-
nal, SPSTP, high.
4 After the RTAP signal is set high, the control unit moves the X– and Y–axes to the hole to be tapped, then
moves the Z–axis to point R, irrespective of the actions of the PMC described in 3 above.
5 After moving along the Z–axis to point R, the control unit checks whether the SPSTP signal is high. If it
is low, the control unit waits for the signal to go high. When the signal goes high, the control system of the
spindle is switched from spindle control to positioning control.
In positioning control, the distance the tag was moved is entered into the error counter and converted to
the voltage specifying the speed of the motor as shown below. The conversion coefficient (servo loop gain
multiplier) depends on the gear ratio of the spindle motor to the spindle. According to the spindle gear
selection signal, GS1, GS2 or GS4, which is input from the PMC when the spindle control is switched to
positioning control, the servo loop gain multiplier of the current gear is specified in the positioning control
circuit of the spindle. The servo loop gain multiplier of each gear must be specified as a parameter before-
hand.
Spindle control
(calculation of speed
voltage of spindle
speed rpm)
CMR
Spindle Spindle
x1 + Error counter D/A converter motor
- amplifier
Gear ratio
n:m
DMR 1024pulse/rev
x4 Gear ratio Spindle

Position coder
l:p
Gear ratio of spindle Minimum movement unit

to position coder ( l : p ) (detection unit) deg
1:1 0.088 (1×360 / 4096)
1:2 0.176 (2×360 / 4096)
1:4 0.352 (4×360 / 4096)
1:8 0.703 (8×360 / 4096)
– 304 –
6 After the control system is switched to positioning control, the control unit starts applying linear interpolation
to the Z–axis and the spindle. Prior to linear interpolation, the control unit specifies an identical time
constant in the acceleration/deceleration circuits of the Z–axis and the spindle. It also sets an identical
servo loop gain in the positioning control circuits of the Z–axis and the spindle. If it does not specify them,
correct linear interpolation cannot be applied. Time constants of acceleration/deceleration circuits and ser-
vo loop gains of the positioning control circuits of the Z–axis and the spindle to be used in rigid tapping must
be specified as parameters beforehand.
7 Linear interpolation is applied to the Z–axis and the spindle. The distance moved and the feedrate of the
Z–axis and the spindle are calculated as follows.
Move distance Feedrate

Z = Distance between R and Z point Fz = F command value
Z–axis
( mm, inch ) ( mm/min, inch/min )
S = Z × ( S command value/F command value )
Spindle × 360 Fs = S comand value
( deg )
8 The dwell command can be executed at the bottom of the hole. After the dwell command is executed, linear
interpolation is applied to the Z–axis and the spindle so that the tap is returned from point Z to point R on
the Z–axis while the spindle is rotated in the reverse direction. Both the tap movement along the Z–axis
and the spindle rotation are in opposite directions to those described in 7 above.
9 If the return to the initial position command (G98) is executed, the tap is returned to the initial position on
the Z–axis.
This is the entire sequence of rigid tapping. If another G84.2 is specified after that, the same procedure
is repeated. In the second or later sequence of G84.2, however, steps 5 and 6 are not executed because
the control system of the spindle has already been switched to positioning control.
If either i) or ii) below occurs in the rigid tapping (G84.2), the control system of the spindle is switched from
positioning control to spindle control and the time constant of the acceleration/deceleration circuit and the
servo loop gain of the positioning control circuit of the Z–axis are returned to normal values. Then the RTAP
signal is set low. After this, the next operation is started. When the RTAP signal goes low, the torque limit
signal, TLML, must be set low in the PMC.
(i) A canned cycle of drilling other than G84.3 is specified. For example, G81 is specified.
(ii) A canned cycle of drilling is canceled. That is, G80 or a G code of the 01 group such as G00, G01,
G02, or G03 is specified.
– 305 –
G84.2 comand G80S..M04 command
Signal RTAP
Movement along
the X-and Y-axis,
and return to point
R on the Z axis
RI0 to RI12
SFR
SRV
SST
(TLML)
Signal SPSTP
Spindle position control 400 ms

or more
Move from point R to point Z and

forward rotation of the spindle
Move from point R to point Z, and

reverse rotation of the spindle
RSPP
RSPM
RSPC
Rated speed Rated speed
M code output
( M04 )
NOTE 1 The operation procedure for rigid reverse tapping (G84.3) is the same as that for rigid tapping
(G84.2), except that the spindle rotates in the opposite direction.
NOTE 2 In the description above, the drilling axis is the Z–axis. Another axis such as the X–axis or
Y–axis can be used as the drilling axis instead.
Example G18G84.2 X––Z––Y––R––F––; The Y–axis is used as the drilling axis.
NOTE 3 In rigid tapping (G84.2) and rigid reverse tapping (G84.3), the feedrate override function is
invalid and the override is always 100%.
– 306 –
NOTE 4 The table below shows the relationships between the number of the selected gear and the
spindle gear selection signals that inform the control unit of the state of the gear between the
spindle motor and the spindle.
GS4 GS2 GS1 Gear selection
0 0 0 1st step
0 0 1 2nd step
0 1 0 3rd step
0 1 1 4th step
1 0 0 5th step
1 0 1 6th step
1 1 0 7th step
1 1 1 8th step
NOTE 5 A spindle motor containing a position coder, or built–in sensor, can be used in rigid tapping.
When the gear ratio of the spindle to the position coder, or the spindle motor is expressed as
n:m, rigid tapping can be executed after n and m are specified in parameters. When the spindle
motor with a built–in sensor is used, rigid tapping can be executed with only one gear position.
If three gear positions, high, medium, and low, are provided, rigid tapping can be executed only
with high gear.
(a) Rigid tapping signal: RTAP

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that rigid tapping is in progress.
[Output Condition]
See the procedure for rigid tapping described above.
(b) Spindle rotation direction signals: RSPP, RSPM
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Outputs the direction of spindle rotation during tap cutting.
[Operation] During tap cutting, RSPP is high when the spindle rotates in the normal direction and RSPM
is high when the spindle rotates in the reverse direction. The signals are output only during
tap cutting (from point R to the botto m of the hole and from the bottom of the hole to point R).
The signals are not output during dwelling at point R, feed hold, interlock, or single–block
stop, on when the drill is positioned at the bottom of the hole.
(c) Spindle rotation reversing signal: RSPR [#7, #2]
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Reverses the direction of spindle rotation when the rigid tapping cycle (G84.2) or reverse rigid
tapping cycle (G84.3) is specified.
[Operation] In canned cycle cancel mode (G80), specifying the G84.2 or G84.3 command while this sig-
nal is high causes the spindle to rotate in the direction opposite to that specified.
NOTE This signal cannot be switched in rigid tapping mode. The current state of this signal when
G84.2 or G84.3 is specified in canned cycle cancel mode becomes effective in rigid tapping
mode.
(d) Spindle constant speed signal: RSPC

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Notifies that the rotation speed of the spindle has become constant during tap cutting.
[Operation] During tap cutting, RSPC becomes high when the rotation speed of the spindle becomes
constant. The signal remains high while the rotation speed is constant. The signal is output
only during tap cutting (from point R to the bottom of the hole and from the bottom of the hole
to point R).
– 307 –
2.3.76 Retrace
A tool can retrace the tool path along which the tool has moved. This operation is referred to as retrace. In
addition, a tool can move forward again along the path that the tool has retraced. This operation is referred
to as re–forward. The tool can then resume machining according to the program when it returns to the position
where it started retrace.
Retrace signal
Retrace end, re–forwarding start HIGH
Retrace start
Retrace signal
LOW
By using the retrace signal RVS, which is an input signal from the PMC to the control unit, retrace and re–for-
ward can be performed. Retrace is performed when the retrace signal RVS goes high. Re–forward operation
is performed when the retrace signal goes low. In retrace, a tool can retrace blocks that have been executed
in the automatic operation mode (memory command, tape command, manual data input), but a limit is imposed
on the number of blocks that can be retraced. For detailed information, refer to the operator’s manual.
Whether to use the same feedrate as specified for normal operation or use a feedrate dedicated to retrace can
be determined by parameter setting.
(a) Retrace signal (RVS)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Directs the control unit to retrace the tool along the path which the tool was moved in automat-
ic operation (memory command, tape command, manual data input).
[Operation] When RVS goes high while the tool is being moved forward (hereafter referred to as forward),
the tool retraces the machining path along which it was moved. Note, however, that the tool
does not start retrace immediately after this signal goes high; the tool starts retrace after the
block performing the current forward operation is executed. When RVS goes low while re-
trace is in progress, the tool switches from retrace operation to re–forward. In this case also,
the tool does not start re–forward (to resume machining) immediately after this signal goes
low; the tool starts re–forward after retracing all commands of the block currently subject to
retrace.
The movement of a tool can be immediately switched from forward to retrace or from retrace
to re–forward. For this purpose, first drive the automatic operation stop signal *SP low to stop
automatic operation. Then, change the state of RVS after the automatic operation stop state
is set with the automatic operation start in–progress signal STL low and the automatic opera-
tion suspend in–progress signal SPL high. Next, drive the automatic operation start signal
ST low from high to start automatic operation. Then, the tool can switch its movement to re-
trace or re–forward during execution of a block.
– 308 –
(b) Retrace–in–progress signal (RVSL)

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC that retrace is in progress.
[Output Condition]
i. The tool is in retrace with the retrace signal RVS high
i. The tool is in forward or re–forward with the retrace signal RVS low
When the tool is in retrace, the M functions, S functions, T functions, and second auxiliary
functions are executed in the same way as when the tool is moving forward. During retrace,
this signal can be used on the PMC, if required, to prevent these functions from being
executed in the same way as when the tool is moving forward.
Particularly when an M function, S function, T function, or second auxiliary function is speci-
fied in a block containing a move command, the positions where the code signals and strobe
signal are output differ, depending on whether the tool is in forward (or re–forward) or retrace.
So, take action on the PMC by using this signal and distribution end signals DEN and IPEN
as required.
Position to which auxiliary function

is output during retracing
Retrace start
( Retrace signal
HIGH )
Block in which the move command
and auxiliary function are included
Position to which auxiliary function

Retrace end is output during forwarding
re-forwarding start
( Retrace signal LOW )
NOTE While a tool is in retrace, the retrace–in–progress signal RVSL is sent, and the character string
RVRS blinks on the CRT screen to signal that the tool is currently in retrace. When a tool is
in re–forward, the character string RTRY blinks to signal that the tool is currently in re–forward.
The indication of RTRY continues until the tool returns to the block where retrace was started,
that is, until forward movement is resumed. When there are no more retraceable blocks, the
character string RVED blinks to signal that no further retrace can take place.
– 309 –
2.3.77 Teach–in (recorded) mode and signals

When the tool is moved to a desired position by manual continuous feed, incremental feed, or manual handle
feed, the absolute coordinates of the position can be placed in memory as a program command. After all ma-
chining positions are sequentially stored as program commands, the playback function machines a workpiece
according to them.
The teach–in mode is the operation mode in which the absolute coordinates of the current tool position can
be placed (recorded) in memory as a program command. In the teach–in mode, the tool can be moved by
manual feed as well. The teach–in mode can be classified into five operation modes according to the type of
manual feed permitted:
(1) Teach–in manual continuous feed
(2) Teach–in incremental feed
(3) Teach–in manual handle feed
(4) Simultaneous operation of teach–in manual continuous feed and teach–in manual handle feed
(5) Simultaneous operation of teach–in incremental feed and teach–in manual handle feed
The table below shows how the five operation modes can be selected by input signals for selecting the
operation mode.

T D MEM EDT MOVL TCHIN H S J AGJ
Teach–in
manual
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0
continuous
feed
Teach–in
incremental 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
feed
Teach–in
manual 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0
handle feed
Simultaneous
operation of
teach–in
manual con–
0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
tinuous feed
and teach–in
manual
handle feed
Simultaneous
operation of
teach–in
incremental
0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0
feed and
teach–in
manual
handle feed
(a) Teach–in selection signal: TCHIN

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects a teach–in operation mode. It allows one of the following: teach–in manual continu-
ous feed, teach–in incremental feed, teach–in manual handle feed, simultaneous operation
of teach–in manual continuous feed and teach–in manual handle feed, and simultaneous op-
eration of teach–in incremental feed and teach–in manual handle feed. See the mode selec-
tion table.
(b) Teach–in selection check signal: MTCHIN
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that a teach–in operation mode is selected.
– 310 –
2.3.78 Chopping function

The contour of a workpiece can be ground by executing the contour program for axes other than the grind axis
(where the grindstone is attached) while keeping the grindstone moving vertically (chopping) along the grind
axis. The G81.1 command directs chopping.
G81.1Z____ Q____ R____ F____ ;
Z : Top dead point position
Q : Distance between the top dead point and bottom dead point
R : Distance between the top dead point and point R
F : Feedrate during chopping
The procedure for chopping is described below.
1 Move to point R by rapid traverse.
2 Then move to the bottom dead point at the feedrate specified by F.
3 Return to the top dead point at the feedrate specified by F.
4 Then, repeat this vertical movement (chopping) between the top dead point and bottom dead point at the
feedrate specified by F. A reset or G80 command stops chopping, and returns the grindstone to point R.
(a) Chopping hold signal (CHLD)
[Classification]
Input address
[Function] Suspends chopping.
[Operation] When this signal goes low, the control unit functions as described below.
1 When G81.1 is not specified, no action takes place.
2 When G81.1 is specified, chopping is suspended.
How chopping is suspended depends on which part of the chopping operation is in prog-
ress when this signal goes low, as described below.
i) When this signal goes low while the grindstone is moving from the top dead point to the
bottom dead point
The grindstone moves to the top dead point, then it moves to point R, and finally chopping
is stopped.
ii) When this signal goes low while the grindstone is moving from the bottom dead point to
the top dead point
The grindstone moves to the top dead point, then it moves back to the bottom dead point:
Then the grindstone is moved to point R, and finally chopping is stopped.
When this signal goes high, the control unit functions as described below.
1 When chopping is suspended, the control unit resumes chopping.
2 When chopping is not suspended, the control unit performs no operation.
– 311 –
(b) Chopping speed override signals (CHP0, CHP2, CHP4, CHP8)

[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Apply an override to the chopping speed specified by a program.
[Operation] During chopping, a specified feedrate can be multiplied by an override specified by these sig-
nals; the resultant feedrate is the actual feedrate. The table below indicates the correspon-
dence between the states of the signals and the overrides.
CHP8 CHP4 CHP2 CHP0 Override value(%)

0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 140
0 0 1 0 130
0 0 1 1 120
0 1 0 0 110
0 1 0 1 100
0 1 1 0 90
0 1 1 1 80
1 0 0 0 70
1 0 0 1 60
1 0 1 0 50
1 0 1 1 40
1 1 0 0 30
1 1 0 1 20
1 1 1 0 10
1 1 1 1 0
2.3.79 Override playback

It is possible to store the cutting feedrate override and spindle speed override set at program execution. When
that program is executed again, the stored overrides can be used.
Storing overrides is called override teaching. Using the taught overrides is called override playback.
Teaching is possible only when the memory is operating. When override teaching is performed during memory
operation, an override having the following format is inserted immediately after the current block in memory.
The override is then stored.
(Current block)
N100………………………………………………,L1F–––– R–––– S–––– ;
where
, L1 : Indicates that the following F, R, and S are commands of overrides.
F–––– : Cutting feedrate override (0 to 254, unit: 1%)
R–––– : For linear machining, the distance along the axis to the end point. For circular machining, the cen-
ter angle formed with the line passing the end point.
In playback, if the remaining distance of the axis is the value specified by R or less, or if the remain-
ing center angle of an arc is the value specified by R or less, the specified feedrate override be-
comes valid.
S–––– : Spindle speed override (50 to 120, unit: 1%)
In playback, the specified spindle speed override becomes valid from the start of the target block.
In general override playback, set the feedrate and spindle override switches on the machine operator’s panel
to 100%. If an override switch on the machine operator’s panel is set to other than 100%, the programmed
override is multiplied by the override set by that switch.
– 312 –
(a) Override teaching mode signal TCHOVR

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects the override teaching mode.
[Operation] When TCHOVR goes high in the memory command mode, override teaching is enabled.
NOTE Teaching can be performed by using the keys on the MDI panel or by using the switches and
buttons on the machine operator’s panel.
Whether to use the keys on the MDI panel or the switches and buttons on the machine operator’s
panel is specified by a parameter. When keys on the MDI panel are used, there is a key for
selecting the override teaching mode on the MDI panel and the signal is not necessary.
(b) Feedrate override teaching signal STFOVR

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Teaches the feedrate override value.
[Operation] When STFOVR goes high during automatic operation start by memory commands, the fee-
drate override at this point is inserted after the current block. At the same time, the following
value is also inserted after the current block when STFOVR goes high: For linear machining,
the remaining distance along the axis to the end point. For circular machining, the remaining
center angle up to the end point.
If STFOVR goes high and low several times during the execution of a block, the feedrate over-
ride at the last time STFOVR goes high is inserted in the command program.
NOTE When the parameter specifies that teaching is performed using keys on the MDI panel, there
is a key for teaching feedrate overrides on the MDI panel and the signal is not necessary.
(c) Spindle speed override teaching signal STSOVR

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Teaches the override for the spindle speed.
[Operation] When STSOVR is set high by memory commands during automatic operation start, the over-
ride for the spindle speed at this point is inserted after the current block.
If STSOVR goes high and low several times during the execution of a block, the override at
the last time STSOVR goes high is inserted in the command program.
NOTE When the parameter specifies that teaching is performed using keys on the MDI panel, there is a
key for teaching overrides for the spindle speed on the MDI panel and the signal is not necessary.
(d) Spindle override signals SPA, SPB, SPC

[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Notify the control unit of the override for the spindle speed.
[Operation] When STSOVR is set high by memory commands during automatic operation start, the over-
ride specified by the spindle override signals are taught as the override for the spindle speed.
Override(%)
Signal
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
SPA 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
SPB 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 : LOW
1 : HIGH
SPC 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
The table below lists the correspondence between SPA, SPB, and SPC and overrides.
NOTE The control unit does not specify the command voltage to the spindle motor by multiplying the
spindle speed by the override specified by these signals. These signals only notify the control
unit of the spindle speed override selected with switches on the machine operator’s panel. The
above multiplication is performed by the PMC.
– 313 –
(e) Spindle speed override checking signals SPA0, SPB0, SPC0

[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] Notify the PMC of the result of multiplying the taught override for the spindle speed by the
override input by SPA, SPB, and SPC.
For example, during playback, if the taught override is 90% when the switch on the machine
operator’s panel selects 80%, that is, the override input by SPA, SPB, and SPC is 80%, 70%
override is notified by SPA0, SPB0, and SPC0 (80% x 90% = 72%, which is rounded off to
70%). When the result is 50% or less, the result is clamped and 50% is notified; when it is
120% or more, the result is clamped and 120% is notified.
The table below lists the correspondence between the signals and overrides.
Override(%)
Signal
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
SPA0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
SPB0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 : LOW
1 : HIGH
SPC0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
When the override playback function is used, the spindle override must be calculated in the
PMC not based on the switches on the machine operator’s panel but based on these signals.
In other words, the PMC reads the specified spindle speed with spindle speed signals RO0
to RO15, multiplies the speed by the spindle speed override input by SPA, SPB, and SPC,
and returns the result to the control unit using spindle motor voltage signals RI0 to RI12. The
control unit inputs voltage to the spindle amplifier based on RI0 to RI12 sent from the PMC.
Spindle
amplifier
D/A converter
RI0 to RI12
Command voltage
calculation
RO0 to RO15
S Command
Command spindle
speed
SPA0, SPB0, SPC0
Override value
calculation Override
L1S command L1S command

register
SPA, SPB, SPC Operation
Machine side panel
override override SW.
NOTE 1 The method in which SPA0, SPB0, and SPC0 are not used in the PMC can be specified by a
parameter. In this case, the control unit multiplies the value specified in an S command by the
taught override for the spindle speed, and outputs the result with RO0 to RO15.
The PMC calculates the voltage by multiplying the spindle speed notified with RO0 to RO15
by the value specified by the override switches on the machine operator’s panel, that is, the
override notified to the control unit by SPA, SPB, and SPC.
NOTE 2 The ,L1S command register in the above figure stores the taught spindle speed override, which
is specified by a ,L1S command. This register is preset to 100% by resetting or program
number search.
– 314 –
2.3.80 Axis Control by the PMC

Any axis can be isolated from control of the CNC and controlled directly by the PMC. The PMC can issue com-
mands specifying the distance to be moved, feedrate, and so forth to move the tool along this axis independent-
ly of the other axes operating under the CNC. Therefore, peripheral equipment such as a turret, pallet, or index
table can be controlled by using an axis of the CNC. Whether to place an axis under control of the CNC or PMC
can be selected with a relevant input signal.
The following operations can be controlled by the PMC directly:
(i) Rapid traverse with the distance to be moved specified
(ii) Cutting feed with the distance to be moved specified
⋅Specifying the feedrate and override.
⋅Starting cutting feed simultaneously with another PMC–controlled axis.
(iii) Reference position return
(iv) Positioning at the machine coordinates
(v) Dwell
(vi) Miscellaneous functions
PMC
BMI
1st axis Pulse dis- Servo
management trribution control Motor
1st axis
PMC axis
control data
2nd axis Pulse dis- Servo
2nd axis
PMC axis
Command control data
3rd axis Pulse dis- Servo
3 rd axis
PMC axis
control data
A lower–case x is found in input/output signal names related to axis control by the PMC, for example, PMCAx.
A signal whose name is PMCAx does not exist. x in PMCAx represents numbers 1, 2, 3, ... in signals PMCA1,
PMCA2, PMCA3, ... , which correspond to the first axis, second axis, third axis, ..., respectively.
– 315 –
Basic procedure for axis control by the PMC

1 Set on PMC axis control signal PCAXx high to isolate an axis from control of the CNC and control the axis
directly from the PMC.
2 Specify the type of axis operation.
Specify the type of operation with axis control command code signals CDxX7 to CDxX0, the feedrate with
feedrate specification signals FDxX15 to FDxX0, and the distance to be moved with axis control data sig-
nals DTxX31 to DTxX0.
One operation is specified by the axis control command code signals, feedrate specification signals, axis
control data signals, and block stop inhibit signal MSBKx (described later). These signals correspond to
one command block when automatic operation is performed under the control of the CNC. As a whole,
these signals are called the axis control block data signals.
General signal Signal

Signal name Data format
name abbreviation
Block stop disable signal MSBKx Bit type
Axis
A i controll Axis control command code signal CDxX7 to CDxX0 Byte type
block data
signal
g Feed rate specification signal FDxX15 to FDxX0 Word type
Axis control data signal DTxx31 to DTxX0 2–word type
3 When the specification of one operation equivalent to one block completes, the logical level of control axis
command read strobe signal PMCAx is inverted: When PMCAx is off, it goes high, and vice versa.
This operation, however, cannot be performed until it is confirmed that control axis command read comple-
tion signal CNCAx, which is an output signal from the CNC, is at the same logical level as that of PMCAx.
In axis control by the PMC, command blocks are buffered in the CNC so that several operations are con-
secutively carried out by the PMC. Even when a command is being executed, the next command block
is read into the CNC if there is an empty buffer.
PMC command Axis control block data CNC side register

Signal set
Block [1] command [1] [3] Input register

[2]
(execution wait buffer)
Block [2] command [2]
~ ~
Block [N] [1] Executing register
The above figure shows that command [1] is being executed, command [2] has been read into a CNC buff-
er, and that command [3] has already been sent to the CNC.
When command [1] has been executed, commands [2] and [3] are transferred as follows:
Command [2] : Input register → Execution register
Command [3] : Command block (axis control block data signals) → Input register
Command [4] can be sent to the CNC when command [3] has been transferred to the input buffer.
– 316 –
[1] [2] [3] [4]

Command block
(Input)
PMCAx (Input)
Command disable
CNCAx (output)
Execution
waiting
buffer
Executing [1] [2]

register
Start End Start
The buffer state of the CNC can be known by exclusive ORing PMCAx axis control command read strobe
signal input from the PMC with CNCAx (axis control command read completion signal) output from the
CNC.
PMCA
/ Exclusive OR(XOR) Status of CNC side
CNCA
01
Since the reading of the previous command block has ended,
/ / 0
the next block can be commanded
01
The buffer is full and it is not possible to read the command
01
from the PMC side. Do not inverse the signal PMCAx. When it
/ / 1
is inversed in this status, the blocks which have been comman-
10
ded become invalid.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each command block.

When the transfer and execution of commands for the last block completes, set PMC axis control signal
PCAXx low.
PCAXx must be set low after the block being executed and the block pending in the buffer are completed.
If PCAXx goes low when there is a block being executed or pending in the buffer, the remaining commands
in the block being executed and the pending–command buffer are all cleared and the CNC immediately
regains control.
When the buffer is empty, buffer full signal BUFx is off. When there are no blocks being executed, distribu-
tion completion signal DENx is on.
For axes which control a turret, pallet, or ATC, axis control is always carried out by the PMC without switch-
ing the control between the CNC and PMC. In this case, PCAXx must always go high; it is not necessary
to set it low even when all commands have been transferred.
After all specified blocks have been executed and there are no blocks to be executed, operation automati-
cally completes.
5 When PCAXx goes low, the CNC regains control.
– 317 –
(a) PMC axis control signal PCAXx

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] While this signal is on, axis control by the PMC is enabled and commands from the CNC are
ignored. While this signal is off, axis control by the PMC is disabled.
(1) Switching axis control from the CNC to the PMC (signal set high)
When a move command for automatic operation is input for the axis, the command is dis-
abled if bit 5 of parameter 2405 is set to 1. When this parameter is set to 0, alarm “PS450
IN PMC AXIS MODE” is issued. Command pulses are disabled during automatic opera-
tion or manual operation where a tool is already moving.
(2) Switching axis control from the PMC to the CNC (signal set low) and executing subse-
quent CNC commands
Automatic operation : Enabled from the first buffering block.
Manual operation : The mode must be reselected after switching.
(b) Axis control command code signals CDxX7 to CDxX0
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] The following operations can be specified for each axis:
Axis control command Operation

(Hexadecimal code)
00H Rapid traverse(linear accelerator/decelerator)
01H Cutting feed (exponential function acceleration/deceleration or linear accel-
eration/deceleration after interpolation)mm/min.
02H Cutting feed (exponential function acceleration/deceleration or linear accel-
eration/deceleration after interpolation)sec/block
05H Reference point return
06H Machine coordinate system positioning(rapid traverse)
07H Dwell
08H Auxiliary function
0AH Simultaneous start mode ON
0BH Simultaneous start mode OFF
0CH Override modification
NOTE For the reference position return command (05H), the same operation as manual reference
position return is performed in the specified direction set by a parameter.
The correspondence between each axis control command and command data is shown below.
Command block
Axis control command code signal Command data
CDxX7 to CDxX0
00H , 06H Total move distance(DTxX31 to DTxX0)
01H , 02H Total move distance (DTxX31 to DTxX0)
Cutting feed rate (FDxX15 to FDxX0)
05H , 0BH None
07H Dwell time(DTxX31 to DTxX0)
08H Auxiliary function selection + code
(DTxX15 to DTxX0)
0AH Simultaneous start axis specification
(FDxX15 to FDxX0)
0CH Override value(DTxX7 to DTxX0)
– 318 –
(c) Feedrate specification signals FDxX15 to FDxX0

[Classification]
Input signals
[Function]
(1) When a cutting feed command (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 01H or 02H) is sent from the PMC, the feedrate
along an axis is specified by a binary code.
(i) Specifying the cutting feedrate in mm/min. (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 01H)
Data range : 1 to 32767
Data unit :
Setting unit IS–A IS–B Unit

mm unit input 10.0 1.0 mm/min., deg/min.
inch unit input 1.0 0.1 inch/min.
NOTE 1 Cutting feedrate clamp is disabled.

NOTE 2 A feedrate in a command exceeding the rapid traverse rate is clamped at the rapid traverse
rate.
NOTE 3 When 0 is specified, a tool is not moved along the axis.
(ii) Specifying the cutting feedrate in s/block (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 02H)

Data unit : 0.1 s
NOTE 1 Specify the time it takes to complete the block.

NOTE 2 Linear interpolation can be performed by setting the same value for each axis during
simultaneous start mode.
NOTE 3 When 0 is specified, the cutting feedrate is the rapid traverse rate. Override is disabled but the
operation stops when an override of 0 is specified.
(2) Simultaneous start axis specification signals (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 0AH)

These signals are used to start moving a tool simultaneously along several axes controlled by the
PMC.
For these signals, when a block which enables the simultaneous start mode (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 0AH)
is specified, set 1 in the bits corresponding to the controlled axis numbers of the axes along which mov-
ing a tool is simultaneously started
FDxX9 : Controlled axis 10 , FDxX4 : Controlled axis 5
When a block which enables the simultaneous start mode is executed, execution starts after all subse-
quent command blocks for the axes along which moving a tool is simultaneously started are set in the
buffers for pending commands. The simultaneous start mode is effective until a block which disables
the simultaneous start mode (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 0BH) is executed.
The simultaneous start mode can be enabled or disabled in a control command for any axis. If a block
which enables the simultaneous start mode is specified in the simultaneous start mode, the block be-
comes invalid.
– 319 –
Example In the case of a simultaneous start command for the first, third, and fourth axes
CDxX7 to CDxX0 = 00001010 (=0AH)
FDxX15 to FDxX0 = 0000000000001101 (=000DH)
PMC commands Buffers for pending Execution registers
commands (for each axis) (for each axis)
[AX1_BLK] [AX1] [AX1_act]
[AX2_BLK]
[AX5_BLK]
(1) Transfer to the buffers : The axis control block data signals are transferred immediately after the buffers
become empty.
(2) Transfer to the execution registers : The signals are transferred immediately after register [AXn_act]
becomes empty. Buffer [AXn], however, does not become empty.
When the signals have been transferred to registers [AX1_act], [AX3_act], and [AX4_act], buffers
[AX1], [AX3], and [AX4] become empty and the commands in the execution registers are started simul-
taneously. Other axes can be specified normally.
NOTE 1 The RSTx and STPx signals are effective independently for each axis even in the simultaneous
start mode.
NOTE 2 The starting of all the axes along which moving a tool is simultaneously started is stopped when
the SBKx signal goes high for one of them.
(3) Addition of feedrate related to the function of axis control by PMC:

(i) When the cutting feed command (feed per minute) for axis control by PMC is executed, the units
of the feedrate data can be made ten times larger than the specified units by setting the parameter
accordingly (data No. 1409 #1).
The specified cutting feedrate (feed per minute) can be overridden by axis control by PMC.
Example Assume the following:
Specified feedrate = 1000
Parameter No. 1409 #2 = 1
In this case, the PMC axis control feedrate will be 10000 mm/min.
(ii) In axis control by PMC, when rapid traverse, reference position return, and positioning in the ma-
chine coordinate system are performed, the feedrate set in parameter No. 1420 or that specified
as the feedrate data in the axis control command can be selected by setting the parameter accord-
ingly (data No. 1409 #2).
The feedrate data specified in the axis control command can be overridden by axis control by
PMC.
NOTE When rapid traverse, reference position return, and positioning in the machine coordinate
system are performed in axis control by PMC by using conversational macros, parameter No.
1409 #2 becomes ineffective. This means that only the feedrate set in parameter No. 1420 can
be used for execution.
(iii) By setting the parameter accordingly (data No. 1001 #6), external deceleration in axis control by
PMC can be applied to the axial movement being performed by one of the following axis control
commands:
– Rapid traverse
– Cutting feed mm/min
– Cutting feed sec/block
– Reference position return
– Positioning in the machine coordinate system
– 320 –
In both cases, the value set in parameter No. 1427 (external deceleration feedrate in rapid tra-
verse for each axis) is used as the external deceleration feedrate.
– External deceleration is not applied to axial movement performed by execution of the PMC
axis control feedrate command.
– Even in simultaneous start mode, external deceleration can be applied for each axis.
For details of how to specify axis control, refer to the description of axis control by PMC.
For details of how to apply external deceleration, refer to the description of external deceleration.
(d) External deceleration signals +ED1, –ED1, +ED2, –ED2, +ED3, –ED3, ...
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals apply deceleration to the controlled axis externally. Using these signals, the
feedrate can be decelerated to a parameter–set constant feedrate.
An external deceleration signal is provided for each direction of each controlled axis. The +
or – sign in each signal name indicates the direction, and the number at the end of the signal
name indicates the axis number. Consecutive numbers are assigned as the axis numbers
of the CNC and PMC axes.
+ ED1
1 Decelerates the axial movement of the 1st axis.
2 Decelerates the axial movement of the 2nd axis.
3 Decelerates the axial movement of the 3rd axis.
:
:
+ Decelerates feed in the + direction.

– Decelerates feed in the – direction.
[Operation] While an external deceleration signal is low, the control unit operates as follows:
– For a CNC axis
1 When positioning is performed during automatic operation, or when manual operation,
other than manual feed in an arbitrary direction, is performed, the control unit decelerates
the feedrate in the corresponding direction along the corresponding axis to attain the pa-
rameter–set external deceleration feedrate. If the specified feedrate is lower than the ex-
ternal deceleration feedrate, the specified feedrate is used for the feed operation.
The feedrates for the other axes whose external deceleration signals are not low are not
affected.
2 When automatic operation other than positioning is performed, or when manual feed in
an arbitrary direction is performed, if any of the external deceleration signals that corre-
spond to the axes and directions involved in the current movement is low, the tangential
feedrate is decelerated to the external deceleration feedrate. Consequently, the fee-
drates for all the axes along which movement is being performed are decelerated. If the
specified tangential feedrate is lower than the external deceleration feedrate, the speci-
fied feedrate is used for the feed operation. The PMC axis feedrate is not affected.
When the signal next goes high again, the originally specified feedrate is used. If the external
deceleration option is not provided, these signals are ineffective. Even when the option is
provided, the valid range of the signals can be selected by parameter setting as follows:
(1) The signals are made valid only for rapid traverse, or for all feed operations.
(2) Only external deceleration in the + direction is enabled or disabled (specified separately
for each axis).
(3) External deceleration feedrate in the – direction is enabled or disabled (specified sepa-
rately for each axis).
– For PMC axes
When a PMC axis control command is being executed, the feedrate along the corresponding
axis in the corresponding direction is decelerated to the value set in parameter No. 1427. If
the specified feedrate is lower than the external deceleration feedrate, the specified feedrate
is used for feed operation.
– 321 –
The feedrates for those axes whose signals are not low are not affected. This means that the
feedrates for the CNC axes along which automatic operation is being performed and other
PMC axes are not affected.
When the option for axis control by PMC is not provided, these signals are effective only for
the CNC axes.
These signals are shared between the CNC and PMC axes.
For FS15M and FS15T
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G45 ROV2E ROV1E
For FS15TT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G125 ROV2E ROV1E
(e) PMC axis control rapid traverse override signals ROV1E and ROV2E
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] In axis control by PMC, the feedrate for rapid traverse, reference position return, and position-
ing in the machine coordinate system is overridden.
These two signals are combined to indicate a code. Each code corresponds to an override-
value as shown below.
PMC rapid traverse override Override

ROV1E ROV2E value
l
0 0 100%
0 1 50%
1 0 Fm% 1
1 1 Fo% 2
(0: Low signal, 1: High signal)

1 Fm indicates that a percentage ranging from 0% to 100% is set in the parameter (data
No. 1412). (Common to all axes)
2 Fo indicates that the absolute value of the feedrate ranging from 0 to the rapid traverse
rate is set in the parameter (data No. 1421). (For each axis)
[Operation] When rapid traverse, reference position return, or positioning in the machine coordinate sys-
tem is performed in axis control by PMC, the actual feedrate is obtained by multiplying the
feedrate set in the parameter (data No. 1420) by the override value determined by these sig-
nals.
(i) The override signals dedicated to axis control by PMC or those used for the CNC axes can be selected
by parameter setting (data No. 1404 #2).
Furthermore, as the signals for the CNC axes, those used for conventional rapid traverse override
mode (F0, Fn, 50%, 100%) or those for rapid traverse override 1%–step mode (0 to 100%) can be se-
lected by setting the parameter accordingly (data No. 1402 #0).
NOTE The feedrate for rapid traverse, reference position return, and positioning in the machine coordinate
system, all of which are performed in axis control by PMC by using conversational macros can be
overridden using the override signals.
The following table shows the relationship between the feedrate and override for rapid traverse, refer-
ence position return, and positioning in the machine coordinate system:
– 322 –
1409#2 1404#1 1404#2 1402#0 Feedrate Override

Feedrate set in parameter Not applied
0 / /
No. 1420
Feedrate set in parameter ROV1, ROV2
0
No. 1420
0 0
Feedrate set in parameter RV0B to RV6B
1 1
No. 1420
Feedrate set in parameter ROV1E, ROV2E
1 /
No. 1420
1 / / / PMC data feedrate PMC axis control override
(f) Axis control data signals DTxX31 to DTxX0

[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Specify the total distance moved, dwell time, miscellaneous function selection number and
code, and override.
(1) For rapid traverse (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 00H)
(2) For cutting feed (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 01H or 02H)
Specify the incremental distance to move along an axis in the specified unit with a binary code.
(3) For positioning in the machine coordinate system (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 06H)
Specify the distance to move along an axis in the specified unit with an absolute machine coordinate.
Data range : –99999999 to +99999999
Data unit : The least increment which is set for the axis
(4) For dwelling (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 07H)
Specify the dwell time with a binary code.
Data unit : ms
(5) For miscellaneous functions (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 08H)
Specify the selection number of the miscellaneous function signal to be used with a 2–digit binary
code. Specify the miscellaneous function code to be sent to the PMC with a 2–digit binary code.
DTxX15 to DTxX08 : Selection number
DTxX07 to DTxX00 : Miscellaneous function code
(6) For changing the override (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 0CH)
Specify the override applied in cutting feed for an axis controlled by the PMC with a 2–digit binary code.
DTxX07 to DTxX00 : Override
Data unit : %
NOTE 1 The override is maintained until a change command (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 0CH) is executed.
The override is set to 100% when the power goes high.
NOTE 2 The override change command can be specified for any axis controlled by the PMC. However,
when the override is changed during linear interpolation in the simultaneous start mode while
synchronizing the movements along the axes, specify the change command for an axis
controlled by the PMC which is not involved in simultaneous start and has the minimum or
maximum controlled axis number.
(g) Axis control command read strobe signal PMCAx

[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Requests the CNC to read command data of one block for axis control by the PMC. The con-
trol unit operation when the signal goes high or low is as described in the basic procedure for
axis control by the PMC.
– 323 –
(h) Axis control command read completion signal CNCAx

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Notifies that the CNC has read command data of one block for axis control by the PMC and
stored it in the buffer for a pending command. The output conditions and control unit opera-
tion are as described in the basic procedure for axis control by the PMC.
(i) Reset signal RSTx
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Resets an axis controlled by the PMC.
When RSTX goes high, all pending commands are canceled and the following results:
(1) During movement along an axis : The tool is decelerated and stopped along the axis.
(2) During dwelling : Dwelling stops.
(3) During the execution of a miscellaneous function : Execution stops.
All control commands are ignored while this signal is on.
(j) Axis control temporary stop signal STPx
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] When this signal goes high, the following results:
(1) During movement along an axis : The tool is decelerated and stopped along the axis.
(2) During dwelling : Dwelling stops.
(3) During the execution of a miscellaneous function : Execution stops.
The operation which has stopped can be restarted by setting this signal low.
(k) Block stop signal SBKx
Block stop inhibit signal MSBKx
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] When block stop signal SBKx goes high during the execution of a command from the PMC,
the axis control stops after the execution of the current block. When SBKx goes low, the pend-
ing command is executed. However, when block stop inhibit signal MSBKx for the command
block is on, SBKx has no effect.
8 msec or more
SBKx (Input)
[1] [2] [3]
Command block
(Input)
PMCAx (Input)
CNCAx (Output)
Execution
waiting
buffer
Executing [1]
register
Start
(l) Miscellaneous function BCD code signals (output signal)
AFnX7 to AFnX0
Miscellaneous function read signal (output signal) MFnX
Miscellaneous function completion signal (input signal) FINnX
(n = 1, 2, or, 3)
– 324 –
When a miscellaneous function command (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 08H) is sent from the PMC, the CNC sends
the miscellaneous function code (DTnX7 to DTnX0) with miscellaneous function BCD code signals
(AFnX7 to AFnX0) and waits for miscellaneous function completion signal FINnX.
When FINnX is returned, the CNC proceeds to the next command block.
The timings of sending the miscellaneous function code signals and miscellaneous function read signal
and receiving the miscellaneous function completion signal, are the same as miscellaneous functions (M
functions) controlled by the CNC control.
The miscellaneous function selection code (DTxX15 to DTxX8) specifies which number (n) of a miscella-
neous function signal is used. When n is a number other than 1, 2, and 3, the block becomes invalid.
Auxiliary function command Next command

Command block
(Input)
AFnX7 - AFnX0
(Output)
MFnX (Output)
FINnX (Input)
(m) Distribution completion signal DENx

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal goes low when a tool is moving along an axis with one of the following commands
from the PMC: Rapid traverse (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 00H), cutting feed (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 01H
or 02H), reference position return (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 05H), and positioning in the machine
coordinate system (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 06H). The signal is on while the tool is stopped; but
it is off when the tool is stopped by STPx during the execution of a movement command.
(n) Buffer full signal BUFx
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] This signal goes high when a command block exists within an input register (buffer for a pend-
ing command).
Precautions on axis control by the PMC
NOTE 1 The axis control is not affected by the state of the CNC, such as which mode is selected and
whether the CNC is reset.
NOTE 2 Rapid traverse override, cutting feed override, and dry run cannot be controlled; but cutting
override specific to the control by the PMC can be applied.
NOTE 3 Feed hold, single block stop, reset, and interlock which are controlled by the CNC do not affect
the axis control by the PMC; but similar control is possible with a window specific to control by
the PMC.
NOTE 4 Emergency stop, machine lock, and machine lock for each axis are valid.
NOTE 5 Mirror images (settings, parameters, and input signals) are invalid.
NOTE 6 In a continuous cutting block, the machine proceeds to the next block without waiting until there
is no remaining pulse for servo acceleration/deceleration.
In a block other than a continuous cutting block, the machine proceeds to the next block after
waiting until there is no remaining pulse for servo acceleration/deceleration.
NOTE 7 All–axis interlock and each–axis interlock can be enabled or disabled using a parameter (DITL
of parameter No. 2005).
– 325 –
2.3.81 Signals for specifying a speed in PMC axis control

The velocity command can be used with the PMC axis control function. The velocity command can be specified
only for a rotation axis. The velocity command can be used when the rotation axis simply needs to continue
rotating. The rotation axis for which the command is specified rotates at a constant speed. Unlike the spindle,
the pulse distribution of the rotation axis is continued without interruption.
The rotation axis for which the velocity command is specified stops when the velocity command skip signal
(input signal) corresponding to the axis is set on. After receiving the signal, the CNC unit terminates the block
of the velocity command and executes the next block of the PMC axis control command, if any.
PMC BMI CNC
Axis control
(Rotary axis)
Axis Axis control block
control data signal
Speed control Servo Motor

Speed Speed command control
command Rotation speed data
Axis control data
Signal monitor
Stop Speed command

command Skip signal
When this signal turns on, the
constant speed rotation stops.
Override PMC axis control

Override signal
Fig. 2.3.81 (a) Block diagram for velocity command
(1) Velocity command

The velocity command can be used with the PMC axis control function as well as conventional functions.
The velocity command can be specified only for a rotation axis. The velocity command can be used when
the rotation axis simply needs to continue rotating. The rotation axis for which the command is specified
rotates at a constant speed. Unlike the spindle, the pulse distribution of the rotation axis is continued with-
out interruption.
The rotation axis for which the velocity command is specified stops when the velocity command skip signal
(input signal) corresponding to the axis is set on. After receiving the signal, the CNC unit terminates the
block of the velocity command and executes the next block of the PMC axis control command, if any.
When the velocity command is used with the PMC axis control function and the value shown in Table 2.3.81
is specified in the axis control block data signal, the rotation axis continues rotating at the specified speed.
The rotation specified by this signal can be stopped (the command block can be terminated) by setting on
the velocity command skip signal (input signal: VCSKPx) corresponding to the rotation axis.
– 326 –
Table 2.3.81 Axis control block data signals for use of speed command
Axis control block data Command value Data
Description
signal or data range unit
Axis control command 0DH Specify the axis control for the velocity command.
code signal
CDxX7 to CDxX0
Feed rate specify +32767 to rpm Specify the rotation speed at speed command by a binary
signal –32767 code.
FDxX15 to FDxX0 (excluding 0) Specify a positive value when the rotation direction is forward
and a negative value (a complement of 2) when reverse.
Axis control data 0 Specify 0 for the velocity command.
signal
DTxX31 to DTxX0
CAUTION Even after the velocity command is executed, the position of the tool is not lost.
The position may, however, be lost if the feedrate obtained as a result of conversion exceeds
the maximum rapid traverse rate corresponding to the set increment system.
NOTE 1 For the general description of the PMC axis control function, see Section 2.3.80.
NOTE 2 If the velocity command skip signal is set high before the block of velocity command is started,
the system ignores the signal. It must be set low while the block is being executed.
NOTE 3 If a gear is mounted between the motor and the actual axis, FDxX15 to FDxX0 determine the
speed of the servo motor instead of the speed of the axis.
NOTE 4 The feedrate may erroneous due to the following reasons:
Velocity command
Gear
AMP Motor
2 Axis
Detector
1
Fig. 2.3.81 (b)
1 The velocity command used with the PMC axis control function specifies the speed of the servo motor
that determines the feedrate. If a gear is mounted between the axis and the servo motor, the feedrate
of an axis must be specified after converting it into the speed of the servo motor. As the feedrate must
be specified by an integer, the speed of the motor obtained by rounding the feedrate may be erro-
neous.
2 The feedrate must be specified by an integer and the minimum unit in which it can be specified is calcu-
lated from the following expression. The command cannot be specified in smaller units.
Fmin : Minimum unit in which the feedrate command can be
specified
F min P 2 10 –3 P : Number of pulses per rotation of the velocity feedback
15
detector
The specified speed is calculated by the following expression:
F : Specified speed (integer)
F N P 2 10 –3 N : Speed of the motor (rpm)
15
P : Number of pulses per rotation of the velocity feedback
detector
NOTE 5 In the velocity command mode, the velocity command is provided for the servo control unit.
The servo motor is started with the velocity loop gain of the servo unit. At that time, the
acceleration/deceleration loop gain and position loop gain are invalidated.
– 327 –
(2) Specifying successive velocity commands

When the blocks of velocity command are successively specified, the system can execute them without
stopping at the end of each block. This can be executed only when the following conditions are satisfied:
1 While a block is being executed, the block of the next velocity command is buffered.
2 The velocity command skip signal is set high to terminate the current block.
Feed rate Set the skip signal high.

The feed rate varies without halt.
Time
N1 N2
Fig. 2.3.81 (c)
Example When the following commands are specified, the PMC sequence becomes as illustrated be-
low:
M80 ; Executes the miscellaneous function that selects the velocity command.
S200 ; Specifies a rotation speed of 200 rpm.
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
M81 ; Cancels the velocity command.
PMC sequence
Velocity co0mmand S200 S300 S100
SF
Command block
PMCAx
CNCAx
BUFx (Buffer)
Velocity command skip signal
S300
Actual feed rate S200
Time
Fig. 2.3.81 (d) Sequence of changing feed rate without halt
– 328 –
(3) Override
While an axis is moving as specified by the velocity command, the feedrate can be overridden by the over-
ride signal.
The override signal is provided for each axis (OVnX7 to OVnX0).
Feed rate
Time
Override
160%
100%
80%
Time
100% 160% 160% 80%
Fig. 2.3.81 (e) Override
NOTE The feedrate can be overridden by the PMC axis control command as well as the override
signal. These two override functions cannot be used at the same time. A parameter is provided
to select the override function to be used.
(4) Acceleration/deceleration
The speed specified by the PMC axis control function can be increased or decreased.
When a movement starts and ends, this function linearly increases and decreases a specified feedrate.
This allows the tool to be started and stopped smoothly. Moreover, when a different feedrate is specified,
the function automatically increases or decreases the speed smoothly.
If a command to rotate the tool about the rotation axis in the opposite direction is specified, the acceleration/
deceleration function for the speed specified by the PMC axis control function first linearly decrease s the
feedrate to zero. Then, the function linearly increases the feedrate to the specified speed. If a different fee-
drate in the same direction is specified, the current feedrate is linearly increased or decreased to the speci-
fied feedrate without being decreased to zero.
Feedrate
V2
V1
V3
Fr
Time
Tr
V4
Fr Fr : Acceleration/deceleration rate (parameter 1644)
Tr : Acceleration/deceleration time (parameter 1645)
Tr
– 329 –
If the acceleration/deceleration time for each axis (parameter 1645) is set to zero, this function is disabled.
Override signal can be applied during acceleration/deceleration. In this case, the overridden feedrate is
increased or decreased.
If the reset signal, axis control pause signal, or block stop signal is on, the speed is decreased gradually.
(5) Signals
(a) Velocity command skip signal: VCSKPx
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] VCSKPx is set high to stop the rotation executed by setting the velocity command, CDxX7
to CDxX0, to 0DH, and to terminate the corresponding block.
[Operation] When the signal goes high, the velocity command is terminated. The system ignores the sig-
nal if it is set high before the block in which the velocity command is specified is executed.
The signal must be set low while the block is being executed.
(b) Override signal for each axis in PMC axis control: OVnX7 to OVnX0
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Override the feedrate of each axis specified by the PMC axis control function. The signal con-
sists of eight binary codes. It specifies an override obtained by the following expression:

7
Override = ( 2 i Vi ) %
i0
where
Vi = 0 when the OVnXi signal is low
Vi = 1 when the OVnXi signal is high
Each bit has the following weight:
OVnX0 : 1% OVnX4 : 16%
OVnX1 : 2% OVnX5 : 32%
OVnX2 : 4% OVnX6 : 64%
OVnX3 : 8% OVnX7 : 128%
The override is assumed as 0% when all bits are set high or low.
The override can be specified in units of 1% in the range of 0% to 254%.
[Operation] The actual feedrate is determined by multiplying the feedrate specified by the PMC axis con-
trol function and the override selected by this signal.
(c) Override signals for PMC axis control in the simultaneous start mode: OVA7 to OVA0
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Override the feedrate specified by the PMC axis control function in the simultaneous start
mode. The signal consists of eight binary codes. It specifies an override obtained by the fol-
lowing expression:

7
Override = ( 2 i Vi ) %
i0
where
Vi = 0 when the OVAi signal is low
Vi = 1 when the OVAi signal is high
Each bit has the following weight:
OVA0 : 1% OVA4 : 16%
OVA1 : 2% OVA5 : 32%
OVA2 : 4% OVA6 : 64%
OVA3 : 8% OVA7 : 128%
The override is assumed as 0% when all bits are set high or low.
The override can be specified in units of 1% in the range of 0% to 254%.
[Operation] The actual feedrate is determined by multiplying the feedrate specified by the PMC axis con-
trol function and the override selected by this signal.
– 330 –
2.3.82 Torque control based on PMC axis control

Usually, position control is applied to the CNC–controlled axes. This function can apply torque control to CNC–
controlled axes, so that the servo motors generate the torque specified by the NC.
PMC axis control is used to switch from position control to torque control. The CNC also controls the position
while torque control is applied. Reference position return is not, therefore, required when torque control is sub-
sequently switched to position control.
(1) Switching from position control to torque control
The following table lists the block data signals and torque control mode signal, which are used for torque
control:
Axis control block data Specified value or

Data units Description
signal data range
Axis control command 0EH Specifies torque control.
code signals
CDxX7 ~ CDxX0
Feedrate specification 1 to 32767 rpm Specifies the maximum feedrate to be allowed while
signals torque control is applied, in rpm. A servo alarm is issued
FDxX15 ~ FDxX0 if there is no object for which a torque is to be generated,
or if the feedrate exceeds the specified maximum while
torque control is applied.
(cm/min) The units are cm/min when a linear motor is being used.
Axis control data sig- +99999999 0.00001 Nm Specifies the torque data. Specify a positive value when
nals to torque is to be applied in the positive direction, or a nega-
DTxX31 ~ DTxX0 –99999999 tive value when torque is to be applied in the negative
direction.
(0.001N) The units are 0.001 N when a linear motor is being used.
Torque control mode Indicates that torque control mode is currently selected.
signal
TRQMx
1 Specifying torque–controlled axes

Specify the axes to which torque control is to be applied, using parameter No. 1951 (TRQX). Specify
the torque constant parameter (No. 1998) for each torque–controlled axis. This parameter can be au-
tomatically set to the standard value specific to the motor, by turning on the power with parameter No.
1804 (DGPRM) set to 0.
2 Controlling the position in torque control mode
Parameter No. 1409 (TRQFU) can be used to specify whether follow–up is to be performed in torque
control mode. When follow–up is not performed, a servo alarm (SV126) is issued if the accumulated
travel (error counter) exceeds the value set in parameter No. 7767. Follow–up is performed upon the
return to position control even if the parameter specifies that follow–up is not to be performed.
3 Direction and speed of movement in torque control mode
In torque control mode, the servo motor attempts to generate the torque specified with the axis control
data signals. The tool is, however, moved in the same direction as in position control, according to
the sign of the torque data, while there is no object for which torque is to be generated or when the
output torque is less than the specified torque. If the feedrate exceeds the value specified with the
feedrate specification signal, a servo alarm (SV125) is issued.
4 Timing for switching to torque control
Switch from another mode to torque control mode once the position deviation has entered the in–posi-
tion range.
5 Changing the torque data
To change the specified torque data in torque control mode, set the new axis control block data (torque
data) in the execution wait buffer, then skip the current block by using the feedrate command skip sig-
nal (VCSKPx).
– 331 –
6 Alarm issue in torque control mode

In torque control mode, if a servo alarm is issued for any axis, or if an OT alarm is issued for a torque–
controlled axis, torque control mode is canceled. Other alarms or resets do not cancel torque control
mode.
7 Outputting the torque control mode signal
The torque control mode signal (TRQMx) goes high once torque control mode has been established.
Signal address
M and T: F66.1, F70.1, F74.1, ...
TT: F130.1, F134.1, F138.1, ...
(2) Switching from torque control to position control (canceling torque control mode)
Torque control is canceled in the following cases:
1) The feedrate command skip signal (VCSKPx) is set to high when the execution wait buffer is
empty or contains a command block other than the torque control command.
2) The PMC axis control signal (PCAXx) is set to low to switch from PMC axis control to CNC axis
control.
3) A servo alarm is issued.
4) An OT alarm is issued for a torque–controlled axis.
5) The system enters the emergency stop state.
6) Controlled axis detachment is performed using the controlled axis detachment signal (DTCHx)
or parameter.
7) The servo off state is established using the servo off signal (SVFx).
1 Timing for canceling torque control

The processing for canceling torque control is based on PMC axis control and varies depending on
whether follow–up is to be performed (specified with parameter No. 1409, TRQFU). When follow–up
is to be performed, the torque control mode signal (TRQMx) is set to low and position control is re-
sumed immediately once any of the conditions for canceling torque control has been satisfied. Then,
execution is terminated as soon as the position deviation enters the effective range. When follow–up
is not to be performed, once any of the conditions for canceling torque control has been satisfied, the
torque control mode signal (TRQMx) is set to low, after which follow–up is started. Position control is
resumed once the position deviation falls below the value set with the cancel limit parameter (No.
7768). Then, execution is terminated as soon as the position deviation enters the effective range.
2 Command after torque control is canceled
After torque control mode is canceled, normal position control is applied. The position of the tool is,
however, not shifted because the position has also been controlled in torque control mode. The work-
piece coordinates are, however, shifted from the machine coordinates. So, this shift must be canceled
using, for example, the workpiece coordinate system preset function.
CAUTION When torque control is canceled while the tool is moving along a torque–controlled axis, the
machine is subjected to a jolt upon the return to position control. The faster the tool is
moving, the greater the jolt. Therefore, the tool should be decelerated or stopped before
canceling torque control.
NOTE 1 Torque control cannot be applied using PMC axis control based on the macro executor.
NOTE 2 If the tool is moved along a torque–controlled axis in torque control mode, specify follow–up
by setting parameter No. 1409 (TRQFU) to 1.
– 332 –
2.3.83 Ignore disconnect detector alarm in continuous velocity command of axis control by
PMC
When a servo motor is being controlled using a speed command, if the motor speed is too high, it becomes
impossible to receive position feedback pulses by hardware, and an alarm may be raised falsely to indicate
that a separate detector has been disconnected.
This function is used to ignore a signal indicating that a separate detector has been disconnected during the
speed command mode, thereby suppressing an alarm.
a) Hardware disconnection alarm clear signal NDCAL1, NDCAL2, NDCAL3, NDCAL4
[Classification]
Input signal
[Operation] When a signal changes from ”1” to ”0”, an internally detected hardware disconnection alarm
condition is cleared (not output to the outside).
NOTE These signals must be changed from ”1” to ”0” before the servo control mode is switched from
speed command to position command.
PRM No.1954#7 1
0
Signal NDCALx 1
0
Servo Speed command

mode Position command
During this period, the servo
control software ignores a
hardware disconnected condition.
Motor speed command 0
CAUTION Once the servo control mode is switched from speed command to position command, a
manual return to the reference position must be made before the axis is driven.
NOTE This function cannot be used for a servo motor with an absolute–position detector.
2.3.84 Virtual axis control signal

(1) Signal for selecting the virtual axis control mode: IMGY
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects the virtual axis control mode.
[Operation] When the signal is set high, the system enters the virtual axis control mode.
– 333 –
2.3.85 Axis selection signals in actual speed display: ACTF1, ACTF2, ACTF3, ..., ACTF15
In the conventional system, the actual speed displayed on the CRT screen is a composite speed of all axes.
The axes to be included in the calculation of the actual speed can be selected by the signals entered from the
PMC.
For example, when two or more heads are simultaneously operated in the parallel axis control mode, the actual
speed of one of the heads can be displayed by selecting the axis corresponding to the head by entering signals
from the PMC.
Calculating the actual speed
The conventional system calculates and displays the actual speed periodically by considering the total dis-
tances the tool moves along all the axes. For example, when the machine has five axes, X, Y1, Z1, Y2, Z2,
the actual speed is calculated as follows. (Y1 and Y2, and Z1 and Z2 are different sets of parallel axes.)
Ǹ 2
F + X ) Y1 ) Z1 ) Y2 ) Z2
2 2 2 2
T
The signals entered from the PMC can select the axes to be included in the calculation of the actual speed.
If the signals are entered from the PMC so that the Y2 and Z2 axes are excluded from the calculation of the
actual speed, the speed is calculated as follows:
Ǹ 2
F + X ) Y1 ) Z1
2 2
T
Parameters 1020 to 1022 determine the correspondence between the axis names and the signals.
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Excludes the corresponding axis from the calculation of the actual speed. The signal is pro-
vided for each control signal. The number at the end of the signal name indicates the number
of the control axis.
ACTFi 1⋅⋅ The first axis is excluded from the calculation of the actual speed.
2⋅⋅ The second axis is excluded from the calculation of the actual
speed.
3⋅⋅ The third axis is excluded from the calculation of the actual speed.
⋅
⋅
15⋅The fifteenth axis is excluded from the calculation of the actual speed.
[Operation] When the signal is high, the corresponding axis is excluded from the calculation of the actual
speed. When the signal is low, the corresponding signal is included in the calculation of the
actual speed.
2.3.86 NC window signals

(1) Signal for selecting a tool post for NC window input/output: WHEAD (Series 15–TT)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Selects tool post 1 or 2 when the window function command is executed.
[Operation] When the signal is low, the window function command inputs or outputs the data of tool post
1. When the signal is high, the window function command inputs or outputs the data of tool
post 2.
It takes at least 8 milliseconds for the NC unit to receive WHEAD after it is switched.
(2) Background editing state output signal: BGEDT (Series 15–M/T/TT)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs the PMC that the CNC unit is in the background editing state.
[Output Condition]
The signal goes high when the CNC is in the background editing state. The signal goes low
when the CNC exits the background editing state.
– 334 –
2.3.87 Remote buffer

(a) Remote buffer input signals (RMTI0, RMTI1, RMTI2, RMTI3, RMTI4, RMTI5, RMTI6, RMTI7)
[Classification]
Input signals
(b) Remote buffer output signals (RMTO0, RMTO1, RMTO2, RMTO3, RMTO4, RMTO5, RMTO6, RMTO7)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function]
PMC CNC Remote buffer DI Host computer

DI (8 points) DI
DO (8 points) DO
The host and PMC can communicate with each other using a remote buffer.
The PMC communicates with the remote buffer at intervals of 16 ms. The host on the other hand, does not
communicate with the remote buffer regularly. Communication between the two is triggered by sending a com-
mand.
The host can communicate with the remote buffer only through protocol A. This protocol provides eight input
and output signals. The machine tool can use them for its own purposes.
2.3.88 Load display signals

Spindle override signals: SPA, SPB, SPC
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] Informs the control unit of the spindle override value.
[Operation] When the load display function is executed, the override value specified by the signal is used
as the spindle speed override.
The table below lists the correspondence between the signals and override values.
Override
Signal
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
SPA 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
SPB 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 : LOW
1 : HIGH
SPC 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
NOTE The control unit does not specify the voltage of the spindle motor by multiplying the specified
spindle speed and the override value selected by the signal. The signal informs the control unit
of the spindle speed override value selected by the switch on the machine operator’s panel.
The PMC multiplies the specified spindle speed by the override value.
– 335 –
2.3.89 Switching the spindle load display of the serial interface spindles
Signal for selecting the spindle load display: SPLDS
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] When two serial interface spindles are controlled, this signal selects whether the load of the
first or second spindle is indicated by the load display function.
[Operation] When the signal is low, the first spindle is selected. When the signal is high, the second
spindle is selected.
2.3.90 Position switching function

This function outputs a signal when machine coordinates along a control axis are in the range specified by a
parameter.
Specify in parameters a control axis and the range for machine coordinates in which the position switching sig-
nal is output.
The position switching signal can be output on up to ten lines.
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Indicates that the machine coordinates for a specified control axis are in the range specified
in a parameter.
[Output Condition]
This signal goes high when :
– The machine coordinates for the specified control axis are in the range specified by a
parameter
This signal goes low when :
– The machine coordinates for the specified control axis are out of the range specified by
a parameter
2.3.91 Two–axis electronic gear box

The NC–PMC input/output signals that are specific to the electronic gear box (EGB) function are described be-
low.
Input/Output Signals
The addresses of the signals are listed below.
Signal name Classification Signal position

RTRCT Retract signal Input signal G042.4
RTRCTF Retract completion signal Output signal F041.4
EGBMx EGB mode confirm signal Output signal F066.3
SYNMOD Syncronous mode signal Output signal F153.5
EGBM1, EGBM2, and so forth are the EGB mode confirm signals for respective axes. Their
addresses are listed below. EGBM1 First axis F066.3 EGBM2 Second axis F070.3 EGBM3
Third axis F074.3
...
...
EGBMx is output only to slave axes; EGBMx is not output to dummy axes.
Explanation of Signals
(1) Retract signal (RTRCT)
[Classification]
Input signal
[Function] Performs retract operation along the axis specified in a parameter.
[Operation] When RTRCT goes high, retract operation can be performed along the axis for which the RTR
bit of parameter 1006 is set to 1; a rising edge of RTRCT is detected. The retract amount and
retract feedrate specified in parameter s 7796 and 7795 are used. Upon completion of retract
operation, the retract completion signal, RTRCTF, is output.
– 336 –
The retract signal is valid either in the automatic operation mode (MEM, MDI, etc.) or in the
manual operation mode (H, JOG, etc.). When the retract signal goes high during automatic
operation, retract operation is performe d, and automatic operation is stopped.
(2) (Retract completion signal (RTRCTF)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that retract operation is completed.
[Operation] RTRCTF goes high upon completion of retract operation (upon completion of movement).
This signal goes low when a movement along an axis is made with a command such as a
move command.
(3) EGB mode confirm signals (EGBM1, EGBM2, ...)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Informs that the synchronization mode based on the EGB is set.
[Operation] EGBMx goes high when:
– The synchronization mode based on the EGB is set.
EGBMx goes low when:
– The synchronization mode based on the EGB is canceled.
(4) Synchronous mode signal (SYNMOD)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Indicates that synchronous operation is in progress for that axis for which synchronization is
established by G81. While EGBMx is provided for each axis, this signal is not provided be-
cause it indicates only the state of the axis for which synchronization is started by G81.
[Operation] This signal is high when:
– Synchronous operation based on the EGB is in progress for that axis for which synchro-
nization is established by G81.
– Synchronous operation based on the EGB is canceled for that axis for which synchro-
nization is established by G81.
NOTE If two EGBs are used, the axis for which synchronization is established by G81 is selected with
parameter No. 5995.
– 337 –
Notes on the use of EGB automatic phase alignment

The timings at which EGB automatic phase alignment is used are shown below.
Acceleration/deceleration type
Spindle
speed
Synchronization start command Synchronization cancel command
Workpiece
axis feedrate
Acceleration Synchronous state Deceleration
G81R1 command execution
Acceleration
Synchronous mode signal
Deceleration
1 Specify G81R1 to start synchronization. The G81R1 command accelerates the tool along the workpiece
axis. Once the synchronization feedrate has been reached, the synchronous mode signal (F153.5) is
turned on and the G81R1 block ends.
2 To cancel synchronization, ensure that the tool has been retracted from the workpiece, then specify
G80R1.
3 The G80R1 command turns off the synchronous mode signal, after which deceleration is started immedi-
ately. Once the feedrate has fallen to 0, the G80R1 block ends.
NOTE The EGB mode confirm signals (F066.3, F070.3, ...) are turned on and off in the same way as
the synchronous mode signal.
– 338 –
Acceleration/deceleration and automatic phase alignment type
Spindle
speed
Synchronization start command Synchronization cancel command
Workpiece
axis feedrate
Acceleration Automatic Synchronous state Deceleration

phase alignment
Acceleration
Automatic phase alignment
Synchronous mode signal
Deceleration
1 Orient the workpiece axis to that position which corresponds to the spindle one–revolution signal.
2 Specify G81R2 to start synchronization. The G81R2 command accelerates the tool along the workpiece
axis. Once the synchronization feedrate has been reached, the phase is automatically aligned. Upon the
completion of automatic phase alignment, the synchronous mode signal (F153.5) is turned on and the
G81R2 block ends.
3 To cancel synchronization, ensure that the tool has been retracted from the workpiece, then specify
G80R2.
4 The G80R2 command turns off the synchronous mode signal, after which deceleration is started immedi-
ately.
5 Once the feedrate has fallen to 0, the G80R2 block ends.
NOTE The EGB mode confirm signals (F066.3, F070.3, ...) are turned on and off in the same way as
the synchronous mode signal.
– 339 –
2.3.92 Function for separating UI/UO used in user programs and P–code programs
(a) P–code macro input signals, EUI00 to EUI15 (These 16 signals are collectively referred to as EUI32.)
[Classification]
Input signals
[Function] These signals have no specific functions. They can be read by P–code macros as system
variables and used as an interface between P–code macros and the PMC.
The table below describes the corresponding system variables.
Signals Q’ty Variables State correspondence

EUI00 1 #1000 When the signal levels are low,
EUI01 1 #1001 the corresponding variables
EUI02 1 #1002 are 0. When the signal levels
EUI03 1 #1003 are high, the corresponding
: : variables are 1.
: :
EUI14 1 #1014
EUI15 1 #1015
EUI32 16 #1032 16–bit binary code
NOTE These system variables cannot be used in the left–hand side of an equation.
(b) P–code macro output signals, EUO00 to EUO15 (These 16 signals are collectively referred to as EUI32.)
[Classification]
Output signals
[Function] These signals have no specific functions. They can be read or written by P–code macros as
system variables and used as the interface between P–code macros and the PMC.
The table below describes the corresponding system variables.
Signals Q’ty Variables State correspondence

EUO00 1 #1100 When the signal levels are low,
EUO01 1 #1101 the corresponding variables
EUO02 1 #1102 are 0. When the signal levels
EUO03 1 #1103 are high, the corresponding
: : variables are 1.
: :
EUO14 1 #1114
EUO15 1 #1115
EUI32 16 #1132 16–bit binary code
NOTE These system variables can be used in both the left–hand and right–hand sides of an equation.
When a system variable is used in the right–hand side of an equation, the variable used (sent)
last in the left–hand side of the equation remains in the buffer.
– 340 –
2.3.93 High–precision contour control with 64–bit RISC processor

HPCC mode signal (MHPCC)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Indicates that HPCC mode (high–precision contour control with 64–bit RISC processor) is
currently selected.
[Operation] This signal goes high when the program specifies G05 P10000 (HPCC mode on).
This signal goes low when G05 P0 is specified or HPCC mode is canceled by a reset.
HPCC operation signal (EXHPCC)
[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Indicates that operation in HPCC mode (high–precision contour control with 64–bit RISC pro-
cessor) is in progress (high–speed, high–precision interpolation is being applied).
[Operation] This signal is high while a command other than G00, M, S, T, and B is executed when G05
P10000 (HPCC mode on) has been specified.
This signal goes low in the following cases:
1 The automatic operation halt state is established.
2 The automatic operation stop state is established.
3 When a G00, M, S, T, or B command is executed.
4 When HPCC mode is canceled.
2.3.94 Interface with a linear scale having reference marks

A linear scale having reference marks is used to obtain the absolute position of the tool based on the intervals
between reference marks (one–revolution signals). Each interval varies from the adjacent interval by a
constant amount. This CNC calculates the absolute position by moving the tool along an axis slightly and mea-
suring the interval between one–revolution signals. The reference position can thus be established without
having to move the tool to the reference position.
8.0 42.0 8.2 41.8 8.4 41.6 8.6 41.4

SĄSĄSĄS
Reference mark
Reference mark 1 50.0 SĄSĄSĄS
Reference mark 2 50.2 SĄSĄSĄS
Fig. 2.3.94 (a) Example of linear scale having reference marks
NOTE This function is optional.
(1) Procedure for establishing the reference position

1 Select JOG mode, then set the manual reference position return selection signal (ZRN) to 1.
2 Set the feed axis direction selection signal (+J1, –J1, +J2, –J2, ...) corresponding to the axis for which
the reference position is to be established to 1, then feed the tool.
3 The tool is fed at the reference position return FL speed (parameter No. 1425).
4 Once a linear scale reference mark has been detected, the tool is stopped briefly, after which feed re-
starts at the reference position return FL speed.
5 Step 4 is repeated until three or four linear scale reference marks have been detected. Subsequently,
the absolute position is calculated, then the reference position established signal (ZRF1, ZRF2, ZRF3,
...) is set to 1.
The timings for the above procedure are shown below.
– 341 –
JOG
ZRN
+J1
Reference mark
ZRF1
Feedrate
FL speed FL speed FL speed
(2) Interrupting the establishment of the reference position

The establishment of the reference position is interrupted when any of the following operations is per-
formed at any point between steps 2 and 5:
1 Reset
2 Setting the feed axis direction selection signal (+J1, –J1, +J2, –J2, ...) to 0
3 Feed hold during movement from the intermediate position to the reference position
4 Setting the interlock signal (*IT1, *IT2, ..., *AIT, *IT) to 0
5 Setting the controlled axis detachment signal (DTCH1, DTCH2, ...) to 1
6 Setting the servo off signal (*SVF1, SVF2, ...) to 0
If the establishment of the reference position is interrupted by any of operations 3 to 6, above, during auto-
matic reference position return (G28) when the reference position has not yet been established, restart the
establishment of the reference position return after resetting the CNC.
(3) Notes
1 In the following cases, the tool is moved to the reference position but the establishment of the refer-
ence position as described in (1) is not performed:
– The tool is moved in REF mode once the reference position has been established.
– Automatic reference position return (G28) is specified once the reference position has been es-
tablished.
2 If automatic reference position return (G28) is specified while the reference position has not yet been
established, the reference position is established as described in (1), after which the tool is positioned
to the reference position.
3 Alarm OT450 is issued in the following case:
– The actual interval between reference marks differs from that specified with a parameter.
4 Because the tool is moved until three or four reference marks have been detected, the tool is not
stopped until overtravel has occurred, if the establishment of the reference position is started at a point
near the scale end. Start the establishment of the reference position at a point sufficiently distant from
the scale end.
Scale end
Reference mark
SĄSĄSĄS
Start point (not recommended)
Start point (recommended)
– 342 –
5 This function cannot be applied to an axis for which any of the following functions is used.
– PMC axis control
– Simple synchronous control
– Straightness compensation
6 This function is invalid when any of the following conditions is satisfied:
– Either parameter No. 1896 (mark 1 interval) or No. 5226 (mark 2 interval) is set to 0.
– Parameters No. 1896 and No. 5226 are set to the same value.
– Parameter No. 1896 is set to a value two or more times greater than the value set with parameter
No. 5226, or vice versa.
– A rotary axis is specified.
Reference position established signals

[Classification]
Output signal
[Function] Indicates that the CNC has established the reference position by means of reference position
return.
NOTE 1 Some machines use an absolute pulse coder to establish the reference position upon
power–on. In the case of such a machine, this signal is output upon power–on.
NOTE 2 When a linear scale having reference marks is used, this signal is output once three or four
reference marks have been detected during the establishment of the reference position.
[Operation] This signal is set to 1 once the CNC has established the reference position by means of refer-
ence position return. The state of 1 is maintained until the CNC loses the reference position.
– 343 –
INDEX
A Function for separating UI/UO used in user pro-

grams and P–code programs, 340
Active block cancel, 157 Function for specifying a desired spindle gear ratio,
Address list for 15–TT(for PMC–MODEL NA), 26 194
Address table for 15–T and 15–M(for PMC–MODEL Function to compensate for manual intervention
NB), 50 during automatic operation, 140
Address table for 15–T and 15–M(for PMC–NA), 3

Address table for 15–TT(for PMC–MODEL NB), 72
H
High–precision contour control with 64–bit RISC
Alarm signals, 124 processor, 341
Automatic operation test, 162 High–speed M/S/T/B interface , 171
Axis Control by the PMC, 315
Axis interchange signals, 238 I
Axis movement status output signals, 229 Ignore disconnect detector alarm in continuous ve-
locity command of axis control by PMC, 333
Axis selection signals in actual speed display: *the
ACTF1, *ACTF2, *ACTF3, ..., *ACTF15, 334 Indexing signals, 284
INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC–NA OR
NB, 3
B
Interface with a linear scale having reference marks,
Battery alarm, 126 341
BMI Interface for the Series 15, 3 Interlock, 234
C K
Canned cycle spindle–speed function, 176 Key input, 276
Chopping function , 311
Corner control, 166 L
Custom macro, 254 Load display signals, 335
Cutting depth override for the canned turning cycle,
303 M
Manual arbitrary angle feed, 133
D Manual continuous feed and incremental feed sig-
Detachment of controlled axes (noncontrolled axes), nals, 127
237 Manual handle feed signals, 130
Detecting fluctuation of the spindle speed, 190 Manual interruption function for three–dimensional
coodinate conversation, 133
Digital adjustment of origin deceleration limit, 150
Memory protection keys, 238
Dog–less reference position setting function, 148
Method B for directly inputting tool compensation
(for the Series 15–T and 15–TT), 257
E Mirror image, 231
External data input/output , 242 Miscellaneous functions, spindle–speed functions,
External input/output signals, 239 tool functions, and secondary auxiliary functions,
167
External operation function, 175
Multiple M commands for one block, 173
External workpiece number search, 241
Externally–requested deceleration, 233 N
NC window signals, 334
F
F1 digit selection, 161 O
Feedrate override, 159 Operation mode selection signals, 118
Floating reference position return, 149 Optional block skip , 165
i–1
OUTLINE, 1 Simple synchronization control, 297
Override playback, 312 Simultaneous automatic and manual operation, 135
Override playback signals (Series 15–MFB), 299 Skip function , 251
Overrun, 232 Software operator’s panel, 271
Spindle analog output , 180
P Spindle positioning function, 185
Parallel axis control signals, 293 Spindle serial output and Cs contour control func-
Parts count indication, 275 tions, 197
Position switching function, 336 Spindle synchronization signals for the serial inter-
face spindle, 214
Program status output signals, 228
Start, stop, and restart of automatic operation, 153
R Switching between synchronous and independent

control , 291
Ready signals, 117 Switching the spindle load display of the serial inter-
Reference position return, 141 face spindles, 336
Remote buffer, 335
Reset and emergency stop signals, 122 T
Retrace, 308 Tail stock barrier, 232
Rigid tapping signals, 303 Teach–in (recorded) mode and signals, 310
Run hour display, 274 Three–dimensional handle feed signals , 131
Tool life management, 264
S Tool measurements, 255
Servo off, 236 Tool post selection and signals, 298
Signal for checking tool post interference, 299 Tool retraction and recovery, 267
Signal for outputting the states of the high–speed Tool retraction and recovery (for Series 15–TT), 270
skip signal and the high–speed measuring posi-
tion reach signal, 253 Torque control based on PMC axis control, 331
Signal Tables, 102 Torque limit reached signal (TRQLn), 253
Signals, 117 Turret axis control, 286
Signals for specifying a speed in PMC axis control , Twin table control/simplified synchronous control,
326 294
Signals for spindle orientation of the serial interface Two–axis electronic gear box, 336
spindle by a position coder, 211
Signals for switching spindle control, 227
V
Signals for switching the spindle output of serial in-
terface spindle, 225 Virtual axis control signal, 333
i–2
Revision Record
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (BMI Interface) (B–62073E–1)
DThe following models were added.

15–TFB, 150–TB, 15–TTFB, 15–MFB, 150–MB, 15TED–B–4,
15TEE–B–4, 15TEF–B–4, 15MEK–B–4, 15MEL–B–4,
DThe signals of the following functions were added.
Servo ready signal, Spindle control switch signal, Torque limit
reached signal, Spindle rotation reversing signal, Synchro-
nous mode signal
DThe following items were added.
04 Feb.,’97
- Addition of feedrate related to the function of axis control by
PMC
- Torque control based on PMC axis control
- Ignore disconnect detector alarm in continuous velocity
command of axis control by PMC
- High–precision contour control with 64–bit RISC processor
- Interface with a linear scale having reference marks
DCorrection of errors
The signals of the following functions were added.
Function to compensate for manual intervention during auto-
matic operation, Tool retract & recover(15–TT), Function for
03 Dec.,’94 separating UI/UO used in user programs and P–code pro-
grams.
Correction of errors
The signals of the following functions were added.
Simple synchronization control Positional deviation check
function, Active block cancel, Dog–less reference position
setting function, Position switching function,Second feedrate
override B, Automatic reference position setting function,
Function for overriding the rapid traverse feedrate in 1% units,
02 Oct.,’93
Retrace program editing function, Manual Interpolation func-
tion for three–dimensional coordinate conversion, Electronics
gearbox, Acceleration/deceleration function for the constant
speed specified by the PMC control function
Correction of errors
01 Dec., ’92
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

· No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.
· All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.

e 1

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

e 1

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 15 / 150 – Model B

Connection Manual (BMI Interface)

GFZ-62073E-1/04 February 1997

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

©Copyright 1997 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

Product Name Abbreviations

FANUC Series 15–TB 15–TB

FANUC Series 15–MB 15–MB

Manuals related to FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B are as follows.

List of Manuals Related to Series 15/150–MODEL B

FANUC Series 15–TB/TFB/TTB/TTFB DESCRIPTIONS B–62072E

2. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC–NA OR NB

2.1 BMI Interface for the Series 15

2.1.1 Address table for 15–T and 15–M(for PMC–NA)

Address list for 15–T/15–M(PMC–NA)

G000 ERS RRW SP * ESP SKIP1 UINT CSL IT

G001 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 AE3 AE2 AE1 BSL AIT

G002 ZRN BRN SRN MOVL TCHIN TEST

G003 AGJ EDT MEM T D J H S

G004 MLK DLK ABS OVC SBK BDT1 DRN AFL

G005 KEY4 KEY3 KEY1 KEY1 F1D FFIN FIN ST

G006 RT ROV2 ROV1 MP4 MP2 MP1

G007 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2

G008 TMRON CRT2 PRC HBTRN LCL CSMZ CHF

G009 TLSKP TL64 TL32 TL16 TL08 TL04 TL02 TL01

G010 TLRST OMEP OME HS3D HS3C HS3B HS3A

G011 HS2D HS2C HS2B HS2A HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A

G012 FV7 FV6 FV5 FV4 FV3 FV2 FV1 FV0

G013 AFV7 AFV6 AFV5 AFV4 AFV3 AFV2 AFV1 AFV0

G014 JV15 JV14 JV13 JV12 JV11 JV10 JV9 JV8

G015 JV7 JV6 JV5 JV4 JV3 JV2 JV1 JV0

Address list for 15–T/15–M(PMC–NA)

G016 AJSTB –AJ +AJ AJA12 AJA11 AJA10 AJA9 AJA8

G017 AJA7 AJA6 AJA5 AJA4 AJA3 AJA2 AJA1 AJA0

G018 AJP2D AJP2C AJP2B AJP2A AJP1D AJP1C AJP1B AJP1A

G019 BECLP BEUCL WN16 WN8 WN4 WN2 WN1

G020 DIST26 DIST25 DIST24

G021 DIST23 DIST22 DIST21 DIST20 DIST19 DIST18 DIST17 DIST16

G022 DIST15 DIST14 DIST13 DIST12 DIST11 DIST10 DIST9 DIST8

G023 DIST7 DIST6 DIST5 DIST4 DIST3 DIST2 DIST1 DIST0

G024 RISGN RI12 RI11 RI10 RI9 RI8

G025 RI7 RI6 RI5 RI4 RI3 RI2 RI1 RI0

G026 WOSET GS4 GS2 GS1 SECLP SEUCL DVAL SPSTP

G027 CDV7 CDV6 CDV5 CDV4 CDV3 CDV2 CDV1 CDV0

G028 GOQSM WOQSM OFN5 OFN4 OFN3 OFN2 OFN1 OFN0

G029 SLCTB BECST TSE RVS DSKP SPC SPB SPA

G030 TSB TECLP TEUCL TDIR2 TDIR1

G031 TCHOVR STFOVR STSOVR HMMD TRRTN TRESC

Address list for 15–T/15–M(PMC–NA)

G032 EISTB ERDRQ EOREND EXSTP EXRD EXPUN

G033 EIA7 EIA6 EIA5 EIA4 EIA3 EIA2 EIA1 EIA0

G034 EID47 EID46 EID45 EID44 EID43 EID42 EID41 EID40

G035 EID39 EID38 EID37 EID36 EID35 EID34 EID33 EID32

G036 EID31 EID30 EID29 EID28 EID27 EID26 EID25 EID24

G037 EID23 EID22 EID21 EID20 EID19 EID18 EID17 EID16

G038 EID15 EID14 EID13 EID12 EID11 EID10 EID9 EID8

G039 EID7 EID6 EID5 EID4 EID3 EID2 EID1 EID0

G040 1 RV6B RV5B RV4B RV3B RV2B RV1B RV0B

G041 ESPE TRNSV ZROFS TLAXH AXC4 AXC2 AXC1